W$A*\w'\'1  \ 


1H 


I/O 

nf1- 


a 


j 


Or*\ 


Vr^^ 


• 


J3        3^       i)R       JRf 


tf-LIBRARYQ^ 


mYO/. 


m  m 


<$* 


'   ^JN  2 


^         T     V  '" 


=o 


. 


^C* 


N-.** 


( 


i  ***ar 


m 


%  ~J* 


4 


Aj 


aJ^ 


GRAMMAR 


OF 


THE  HEBREW  LANGUAGE. 


BY 

MOSES  STUART 

Associate  Piofessor  of  Sacred  Literature  in  the  Theological  Institution 
at  Andover. 


THIRD  EDITION. 


ANDOVER : 

KLAOG  it  GOULD,  PUBLISHERS  AND  PRINTER*. 


Codman  Press. 

1848. 


DISTRICT  OF  MASSACHUSETTS,  to  wit  : 

District  Clerk's  Office. 
lie  it  romembercd,  that  on  the  ninth  day  of  September,  A.  D.  1828,  in  the  fifty  third  year  of 
the  Independence  of  the  United  States  of  America,  Moses  Stuart,  of  the  said  district,  has  depos- 
ited  in  uil  offloe  the  title  of  a  book,  the  right  whereof  he  claims  as  Author,  in  the  words  fol- 
lowing l"  wit  i — "  A  Grammar  of  the  Hebrew  Language.  By  Moses  Stuart,  Associate  Professor 
of  Sacreil  Literature  in  the  Theological  Institution  at  Andover." — In  conformity  with  the  Act  of 
the  Congress  of  the  United  States,  entitled,  "  An  Act  for  the  encouragement  of  Learning  .  by  secur- 
ing the  copiea  of  maps,  charts  and  books,  to  the  authors  and  proprietors  of  such  copies,  during  the 
t  imea  I  herein  mentioned  :"  and  also  to  an  Act  entitled,  "  An  act  supplementary  to  an  Act,  entitled. 
An  Act  f»r  the  encouragement  of  learning,  by  securing  the  copies  of  maps,  charts  and  books,  to  the 
authors  and  proprietors  of  such  copies  during  the  times  therein  mentioned  ;  and  extending  the  ben 
•  fits  thereof  to  the  arts  of  designing,  engraving  and  etching  historical  and  other  print-;." 

iohm  w.  davis.  I  c<;:';  <£**«  DifrUf 

v  oj  .Massachusetts. 


PREFACE. 


The  present  edition  of  my  Hebrew  Grammar  has  undergone 
alterations,  both  in  respect  to  matter  and  manner,  too  numerous 
to  be  specified.  The  great  features  of  the  work  remain,  of 
course,  substantially  the  same  as  before.  But  in  the  arrange- 
ment, and  in  the  minute  specifications,  many  variations  from  the 
preceding  editions  may  be  found. 

Several  teachers  in  the  department  of  Hebrew,  for  whose 
opinion  I  cherish  great  respect,  have  frequently  expressed  a  wish 
to  have  a  Hebrew  Grammar  compressed  within  narrower  bounds 
than  the  former  editions  of  this  work.  In  compliance  with  their 
wishes,  and  in  accordance  with  my  own  views,  I  undertook  the 
task  of  compressing  the  body  of  the  work.  In  order  to  execute 
this,  nearly  the  whole  of  it  has  been  written  entirely  over ;  and 
some  of  it  three,  four,  and  a  small  part  even  seven  and  eight 
times  over.  It  would  be  of  no  use  to  state  the  reasons  for  such 
a  labour,  any  farther  than  to  say,  that  want  of  due  arrangement, 
or  of  explicitness,  or  of  completeness  in  representation,  whenev- 
er I  discovered  it,  was  deemed  a  sufficient  reason  for  repeating 
my  labour,  until  I  became  better  satisfied.  But  after  all,  I  have 
not  accomplished  all  I  could  desire.  The  ideal  of  a  more  com- 
plete grammar  seems  to  be  before  my  mind  ;  but  years  of  labour 
would  be  necessary  to  accomplish  a  plan,  such  as  I  have  men- 
tally sketched  out. 

The  Syntax  has  been  changed,  as  to  its  arrangement ;  in 
particular,  the  first  part  of  it  has  been  arranged  in  a  manner  much 
more  convenient,  as  well  as  appropriate.  Bui  abridgment  of  this 
part  of  the  Grammar  1  found  to  be  impossible,  unless  perspicuity 
and  illustration  should  be  so  neglected,  that  it  would  be  matter  of 
just  complaint  and  offence  to  the  reader. 

The  urgent  duties  of  my  station,  and  the  pressing  call  for  a 
new  edition  of  this  Grammar,  have  not  left  me   leisure  enough  to 


208833'!. 


U  Pill. I    L<   I 

accomplish  ;ill  I  could  wish  BJ  to  this  compressed  edition.  A 
few  additions  and  corrections  I  have  inserted  at  the  end  of  the 
book,  choosing  ratlin  to  i  .;>  I  B  my  own  lapsus,  than  to  keep 
back  any  thing  which  might  be  of  service  to  the  student.  Some 
smaller  faults  in  the  work,  which  every  intelligent  reader  will 
spontaneously  correct,  I  have  not  deemed  it  of  any  importance  to 
OOte.  1  can  truly  aver,  that  no  time  and  pains  which  I  could  be- 
stow have  been  spared,  to  make  the  printing  as  accurate  as  pos- 
sible. The  labour  of  correcting  the  press,  has  been  nearly  equal 
to  that  of  preparing  for  it.  Those  who  have  printed  Hebrew,  and 
perhaps  those  only,  will  give  credit  to  such  a  declaration. 

In  regard  to  the  Sections,  I  have  departed  entirely  from  the 
preceding  editions  ;  and  this,  in  order  to  make  the  references  to 
the  Grammar  less  complex.  Of  course,  1  was  obliged  to  give 
up  the  plan  of  regulating  myself  by  the  Sections  in  former  edi- 
tions. Especially  did  the  transpositions  which  I  have  made,  in 
regard  to  the  order  of  subjects,  render  this  necessary.  I  regret 
it,  that  references  to  the  Grammar  in  some  of  the  Hebrew  helps 
already  printed,  should  thus  be  rendered  useless  in  respect  to 
the  present  edition.  But  in  the  future  editions  of  such  works, 
this  evil  can  be  easily  remedied. 

For  making  so  many  changes  in  my  work,  I  have  no  other 
apology,  than  that  I  felt  under  obligation  to  improve  it.  Those 
who  choose  to  have  a  more  imperfect  grammar  reprinted,  in 
preference  to  changing  for  a  new  and  better  one,  may  not  be  sat- 
isfied with  this  apology  ;  but  I  trust  the  number  of  such  is  not 
great. 

In  regard  to  the  copiousness  of  the  present  grammar,  it  does 
not  exceed  the  number  of  pages  in  the  abridged  edition  of  Ge- 
senius'  Hebrew  Grammar,  which  has  now  gone  through  nine  edi- 
tions. That  it  contains  much  more  than  these  abridged  editions 
is  true  ;  for  these  continually  refer  to  the  large  Thesaurus  by  the 
same  author.  Experienced  teachers,  who  have  a  thorough 
knowledge  of  the  Hebrew,  and  who  wish  to  communicate  a  radi- 
cal knowledge  of  it  to  their  pupils,  will  never  employ  a  skeleton 
grammar.  The  testimony  of  such  scholars  as  J.  D.  Michaelis, 
\  ater,  Geseoius,  Hoffmann,  and  many  others,  against  this  prac- 
tice, is  sufficient  to  render  it  very  doubtful ;  and  the  nature  of  the 


TREFACB.  VII 


case  decides  altogether  against  it.  Whoever  uses  a  skeleton 
grammar  merely,  must  either  remain  ignorant  of  more  than  one 
half  of  the  grammatical  phenomena  of  a  language,  or  he  must 
consume  his  time  in  filling  up,  by  means  of  his  teacher  or  of  oth- 
er Grammars,  the  skeleton  which  he  uses.  How  much  loss  of 
time,  and  how  much  perplexity  and  discouragement,  this  would 
occasion,  it  is  not  difficult  to  foresee. 

To  avoid  the  evil,  however,  of  obliging  the  learner  to  occupy 
himself  too  much,  and  for  too  long  a  time,  with  the  dry  details  of 
grammar,  before  he  comes  to  know  any  thing  particular  of  the 
use  of  them,  I  have  marked  a  great  part  of  the  passages  in  the 
present  Grammar  with  brackets,  which  should  be  omitted  as  mat- 
ters of  study,  during  the  first  time  that  the  contents  are  passed 
over.  These  I  have  continued  only  as  far  as  the  declensions  of 
nouns  ;  for  I  would  advise  the  student,  when  he  gets  thus  far,  to 
begin  the  practice  of  reading  and  parsing  in  the  Chrestomathy. 
Nor  should  1  deem  it  best,  on  the  first  going  over,  to  make  him 
commit  any  thing  more  of  the  Paradigms,  than  the  first  one  of 
the  regular  verb.  Let  all  the  rest  be  learned  in  the  way  of 
practice,  gradually,  and  not  by  burdening  the  mind  at  once  with 
abstract  paradigms  and  all  the  minutiae  of  the  language.  I 
would  refer  teacher  and  learner  to  my  Hebrew  Chrestomathy, 
where,  in  the  introductory  remarks  to  the  notes  on  Part  I.  and 
Part  II.,  will  be  found  a  full  explanation  in  regard  to  the  method 
of  learning,  which  I  should  think  it  adviseable  for  the  student  to 
pursue. 

To  avoid  all  loss  of  time  in  searching  for  Paradigms,  I  have 
thrown  them  into  a  body  at  the  end  of  the  work  ;  which  will 
greatly  facilitate  the  labour  of  the  student.  The  index  at  the  close 
of  the  volume,  I  have  made  more  full  than  before,  in  order  to 
render  easy  the  finding  of  any  thing  which  the  work  contains. 

In  regard  to  the  Hebrew  vowels  and  their  changes,  (the  great 
stumbling  block  of  teachers  and  learners),  I  have  done  my  best 
to  render  the  subject  intelligible.  To  make  it  less  complex  is 
not  practicable,  unless  the  nature  of  the  vowels  themselves  be 
changed.  If  the  grammarian  follows  the  nature  of  the  language 
itself  which  he  labours  to  explain,  and  builds  on  facts,  he  is  not 
answerable  for  it,  that  there  is  complexness  in   his   work.     But 


\  111  phi:i\i  i 

ifti  i  ill]  n  i-  true,  that  1 1  •« -  English  vowel-system  is  fax  more  an- 
omalous mid  difficult  of  acquisition,  than  die  Hebrew.  That  I 
have  made  b  new  division  of  the  vowels  in  respect  to  quantity 
will  111  >i  be  matter  of  offence  to  those,  who  can  find  the  grounds 
of  ii  in  the  language  itself,  and  who  deem  this  to  he  higher  authority 
than  die  customai  v  modes  of  grammarians.  Less  complex  the 
whole  division  could  not  he  made,  without  neglecting  to  distin- 
guish things  that  differ. 

I  have  omitted,  in  the  present  edition,  the  Historical  Sketch 
of  the  Hebrew  Language,  which  is  prefixed  to  the  former  edi- 
tions, and  also  die  Praxis  at  the  end.  1  have  done  this  for  two 
reasons  :  first,  in  order  to  reduce  the  book  itself  to  a  more  com- 
pri  ->ed  form,  to  accomplish  which,  the  omission  of  all  matter  not 
strictly  appropriate  was  necessary  ;  and  secondly,  because  the 
Hebrew  Chrestomathy  (selection  of  easy  Lessons),  which  is  to 
be  published  without  delay,  will  contain  not  only  all  that  is  valua- 
ble in  the  Praxis,  but  much  more  of  a  similar  nature,  and  more 
complete  in  its  kind  ;  and  1  hope,  at  some  future  day  not  far 
distant,  to  publish  a  history  of  the  Hebrew  language,  in  a  form 
more  enlarged,  and  better  adapted  to  the  present  state  of  oriental 
knowledge,  and  to  the  wants  of  students,  than  that  contained  in 
the  former  editions  of  this  Grammar. 

The  labour  which  I  have  bestowed  on  the  present  edition, 
(which  is  more  than  the  first  edition  cost  me),  may  at  least  be 
regarded  as  furnishing  some  evidence,  that  my  desire  is  strong 
to  improve  the  work  as  much  as  lies  in  my  power.  Every 
work  of  this  nature  is  of  course  merely  progressive,  even  when 
the  most  strenuous  efforts  and  the  best  intentions  are  directed  to- 
ward it.  That  teachers  and  learners  may  find  some  progress,  to- 
ward a  more  improved  mode  of  representing  the  grammatical 
phenomena  of  the  Hebrew  language,  and  more  convenience  for 
use,  in  this  edition,  is  sincerely  hoped  for  by 

THE  AUTHOR. 

tlldavei .  Theol.  Seminary. 
10  Sept.  1896. 


PART  I. 

ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  ORTHOEPY. 


I    Repre- 
Formj  tented  by 


tf     K 


i 
n 

T 

n 
ii 


bh,b 

dh,d 

h 

v 

z 

hh 

t 

y 

kh,k 

1 

m 


3  . 

& 

S 

P 

"1 


tt) 

n 


s 
? 

ph,p 

ts 

q 

r 

s,  sh 
th,  t 


NO.  I. 

Sounded 


ANCIENT  HEBREW  ALPHABET. 


v,b 

or 

& 

j  th  in    j 
(  that,  Q 

h 

v 
z 

hh 
t 

y 

kh,k 

1 

m 

n 

s 
u 

ts 

q 

r 

s,  sh 
th,  t 


Names  in 
Hebrew. 

Represent- 
ed by 

ciV« 

tfaleph 

rr»3 

Beth 

5>rp5 

Glmel 

nV~ 

Daleth 

NH 

He 

11 

Vav 

m 

ZayTn 

rpn 

Hheth 

o^q 

Tet 

i^ 

Yodh 

"ft 

Kaph 

tb5 

Lamed  h 

&rt 

Mem 

pa 

Nan 

^ 

Samekh 

TI? 

3?  ay  in 

«£> 

Pe 

^2 

Tsadhe 

^ip 

Qopli 

ran 

Resh 

Shin 

in 

Tav 

i 

Names 
sounded  as 


A  vv-lei" 

Baith 

Gee-mel 

Daw'-leth 

Hay 

Vawv 

Za-yin 

Hhaith 

TaJt 

Yoadh 

Kaf 

Law'-medh 

Maim 

Noon 

Saw  -mekh 

A-yin 

Pay 

Tsaw-dhey 

Qoaf 

Raish 

Sliccn 

Tawv 


Signification  of 

names. 


OX. 

house. 

camel. 

door. 

hollow. 

hook. 

armour. 

travelling-scrip, 

serpent. 

hand. 

hollow  hand. 

ox-goad. 

water. 

fish. 

prop. 

eye. 

mouth. 

screech-locust. 

ear. 

head. 

tooth. 

cross. 


ll.   LATEB  HEB.  ALPHABET.        III.  ORIENTAL  ALPHABETS. 


1 iili'll 

Forma. 


N 

a 
a 
a 
a 
1 

i 

T 

n 

u 

-: 

*! 

d,B 

D 

E 

f'2 


N 

I.I. 

I. 

gh 

g 
(II. 

(1 

h 

v 

z 

I.I. 
t 

y 

kh 

k 
1 

m 

i. 

s 

>' 

ph 

R 

ts 


a  s 


a 

r 

n 


t 


(l 
h 

V 

z 
hh 

t 


y 

kh,-h 

k 


in 

i. 

s 
u 

ph,f 

P 

ts 

fl 

r 

s 
sh 

-I, 

t 


Kal£ph 

Beth 

(  illllcl 

Dalcth 

II. 

Vav 

Zajin 

Illietll 
Tot 

Yodh 
Kaph 

Lamedh 
Mem 
Nun 
Samekh 

".IN  II. 

Pc 

Tsadhe 

Qopli 

Resh 

Sin 

Shin 

Tav 


Anitiir 
alphabet . 


O 

J 

J 

r 

5 
j 

i 

3 


S\  riac 
alphabet. 

'•fill     li   1  1  ir. 

1 

a 

2 

FV< 
^  i 

3" 

CI 

B  <Q> 

o 

1 

X-X  5 

J* 

J 


O  0 

p  p 

VV  cJb 
X 


A     N 

3 


or 
% 

2 

7 

NTT 

p 


3 

1 

r. 
1 
T 

n 
o 

: 

3 
3 
? 

Z 

? 
1 

m 

n 


NO.  IV.    TABLE  OF  THE  VOWELS. 

I.  Class  ;  A  sound,  corresponding  vowel-letter,  Altph. 


Names. 


*TO 


Q  a  mots 
Pattahh  long 
Pattahh  mcd. 
Pattahh  short 
Sf^hol  long 
Stgho!  medial 
Seghol  short 


Form.  Sound. 

8*2     12    ttfc  =  a  in  all 

12  =  a  in  father 

12  =  a  m  faring 

1212  j  =  a  in  man 

}3  =  «  in  /io/a/ 

DB 1=  a  in  climate 


Rep.  by 

a 
a 
a 
a 
e 
e 
e 


II.  Class;   E  arid  /  sound,  corresponding  vowel-letter,  Yodh. 


ITS  Tseri 

Sfghol  /o;?£ 

SeghoJ  medial 

Sfighol  s/ior/ 

pTn  Hhireq  long 

Hhireq  mcd. 

Hhireq  short 


IB 


B  DB 

nn    b 
a 

op. 

rq    B 

EB 


cz/  in  they 

ey  in  purvey 
cy  in  surveyor 
c  in  men 
2  in  machine 
i  in  chivalry 
i  in  win 


SVffl    Hholem 

*-»*a*t  ■•»>  Qameta  Hha- 
R?.n    RE  SphmediaJ 

s/io/7 

p")VC3   Shureq 

V"1!2P    Q'bbuts  vicarious 

Qibbuts  med. 

Qibbuts  short 


III.  Class;  0  and  17  Bound,  corresponding  vowel-letter,  Vav. 

\H     12    "Jbj=  o  in  go 

12  j  =  o  in  holiness 
1212  =  o  in  no/ 
1/3  131X3=  oo  in  moon 
12     u12  '=00  in  moon 
12  =  «c  in  rue 
uu  j=  u  \ufull 


IV.  [Half-vowels,]  Sheva,  simple  and  composite. 


nrd  Sheva  (simple) 
nrt  yl'jn  Hhateph  Pattahh 
5?i:o  qan  Hhateph  Seghol 
yBj?  CjulH  Hhateph  QamSte 


a 

n 

ri 


c  in  ftegin 


a  in  litany 
e  in  oegiYi 

o  in  ivortj 


12  i: i. m  itOU  OM  Tin:  w.imi  arf.t. 


li, mull i  mi  tin  . Ylphabet. 
§  1.     The  ancient  number  qf  letter*   was  only  22;  which  is  clear 
hom  the  alphabetic  Psalms,  \i/..  Ps.  17.  HI.  112.  119.146; 

also  From  alphabetic  compositions  in  I'rov.  31:  in  seq.  Lam.  i — 1\. 
Hut  in  I'-.  25.  .vi.  I  15.  one  letter  i-  omitted;  io  1'-.  37.  K  is  repeated, 
ami  9  omitted.  All  the  other  Shemitish  alphabets,  (and  the  ancient 
Greek  one  ;il-<>),  had  originally  the  same  number  of  letters. 

\         'I'll.'  praMnl  si/uurr  r< l'i  he  Hebrew  letters,  i*  nol  the  dmmI  ancient  one  ;  a*  is  evident 

rr.ini  tmeriptioni  .m  Hebrew  eoint,  itamped  in  tbe  time  of  tbe  Maccabees,  winch  have  character* 
■uofa  ..-  are  designated  in  alphabet  No.  III.  The  present  square  letter  i-.  eridently  derived  from  the 
Aramaean  forma  of  letters,  and  probably  originated  mnm  tun.'  after  the  birth  of  Christ.  This 
Kopp  has  recently  shewn,  in  ■  satisfactory  manner,  in  bis  Bildir  and  SchrifUn  dcr  Var-.eii,  II. 
pp.  09  teq.,  particularly  pp.  I  ■ 

§  2.  The  usual  arrangement  of  (he  letters  is  fully  settled  by  the 
Same  alphabetic  compositions,  in  the  Hebrew  Scriptures.  Most  of  the 
arrangement  seems  to  have  been  originally  accidental  ;  yet  not  all. 
For  example,  the  Liquid*,  r  ,  73  ,  :  ,  are  ranged  together.  Za-yln  {") 
shield,  and  Hheth  (it)  probably  travelling-scrip,  are  associated.  So 
Jrfddh  ("*)  Aand,  and  Kaph  (a)  hollow-hand;  Mem  (a)  water,  and  Nun 
{l)fisk;  also,  i'a-yin  (i')  eye,  Pe  (z)  mouth,  t^Oph  (p)  ear,  Resh  (~\) 
head,  and  Shin  (\c)  tooth.  In  Lam.  i — iv.,  v  stands  ranged  after  E; 
which  shews  that  the  arrangement  was  not  uniform  in  all  cases,  at 
the  time  when  this  book  was  written. 

§  3.  The  age  of  the  names  of  the  letters,  seems  to  mount  higher 
than  that  of  the  Hebrew,  or  of  any  of  the  present  Shemitish  langua- 
ges. Some  of  the  forms  of  these  names  are  like  the  Aramaean,  e.  g. 
rP3 ,  ^"'7 _,  DX>;  two  seem  to  be  of  appropriate  Hebrew  stamp,  viz. 
V.  I  >  V.k  J  b,lt  R*&  >  $W\  j  n\\  ,  v:r  ,  yob  ,  with  it  .  and  )*&  (in 
stead  of  "p-!1),  are  manifestly  exotics,  derived  from  a  kindred  language 
which  is  now  no  more,  but  which,  (as  the  more  simple  forms  of  the 
words  shew),  was  probably  older  than  the  time  of  Moses. 

§  4.  The  significance  if  the  names  is,  in  most  cases,  (not  all),  suf- 
ficiently plain.  The  names  are  borrowed  from  natural  objects ;  but 
the  resemblance  of  the  letters  to  them,  is  not  to  be  traced  in  many  of 
the  present1  Hebrew  letters,  which  differ  much  from  the  form  of  the 
corresponding  ancient  ones.  The  alphabet,  No.  I.  col.  7,  shews  the 
most  probable  original  significations.  See  an  admirable  exhibition  of 
the  very  ancient  forms  of  Shemitish  letters,  in  Kopp's  Bildcr  und 
Schriften  der  forfeit,  II.  157. 

§  5.  The  pronunciation  of  the  names  of  the  letters  is  given  in  No. 
I.  col.  U,  as  exactly  a-  the  English  alphabet  will  permit.  The  vowels 
in  col.  5  of  the  same,  are  sounded  as  directed  in  the  table  of  the  vow- 
els, No.  iv. 


REMARKS  ON  THE   ALPHABET.  13 

§  6.  The  later  Hebrew  alphabet,  as  it  now  appears  in  all  our  point- 
ed Hebrew  books,  consists  of  twenty  nine  letters,  as  given  in  No.  II. 
Six  of  these,  (as  the  alphabet  shews),  have  two  sounds  each,  but  re- 
tain only  the  ancient  single  name  ;  one,  ("^  Sin,  pronounced  Seen),  is 
furnished  with  a  point  over  its  left  tooth,  {Skin  has  one  over  the  right 
tooth,  'ij),  and  also  with  a  different  name,  in  order  to  distinguish  it. 
The  modern  Arabians  have  twenty  eight  letters,  six  of  which  are 
distinguished  merely  by  a  diacritical  point ;  as  is  the  case  in  the  later 
Hebrew  alphabet.    Comp.  the  Arabic  alphabet,  in  No.  III. 

§  7.  The  final  forms  of  five  of  the  letters,  appear  in  the  short  left 
hand  column  of  them,  in  the  alphabet  No.  II.  They  are  doubtless  sub- 
sequent to  the  original  forms  ;  but  when  they  were  introduced  is  not 
known.  When  manuscripts  were  written  continuously,  (as  they  orig- 
inally were),  i.  e.  without  separating  the  words,  these  final  letters 
aided  very  much  in  making  the  proper  divisions.  Why  more  of  them 
were  not  invented  for  this  purpose,  it  is  difficult  to  say.  The  practice 
of  employing  the  final  forms  at  the  end  of  words,  is  universal,  so  far  as 
they  go.  Conceit  or  mistake  has  excepted  only  some  two  or  three 
cases  ;  e.  g.  :?;  (for  ]ft)  Job  38:  1.  "2-)0b  (for  nsnab).  Is.  9:  G.  Neh. 
2:  13. 

§  8.  The  sounds  nf  the  letters  are  given,  according  to  the  usage  of 
the  most  enlightened  Hebrew  scholars  of  the  present  time.  There  i9 
a  difference  of  opinion  among  the  learned,  about  some  of  the  niceties 
of  sound,  in  regard  to  several  of  them.  But  in  respect  to  a  language 
which  has  been  dead  for  2000  years,  such  questions  can  never  be  de- 
termined with  satisfactory  certainty.  I  add  a  few  remarks  on  parti- 
cular letters,  which  are  of  the  more  difficult  class. 

Aleph  (a),  all  agree,  was  of  a  very  light  sound.  It  easily  coales- 
ced with,  or  conformed  to,  other  proximate  sounds.  I  have  chosen  the 
Spiritus  lenis  of  the  Greeks  to  represent  it.  Practically,  we  do  not 
sound  it  at  all;  at  least,  not  perceptibly.  In  theory,  it  is  a  real  conso- 
sonant ;  and  the  Hebrews  doubtless  sounded  it,  so  as  to  make  it  per- 
ceptible, in  most  cases. 

Beth  (l),  bh=v.     So  the  modern  Greeks  found  their  ?. 

Gimel  (}),  gh,  is  given  by  g,  in  the  alphabets.  But  the  real  sound 
is  quite  uncertain.  The  Arabians  sound  the  same  letter  (3.)  like 
our  j ;  just  as  in  English,  we  sound  g  soft  before  c  and  i.  I  follow  the 
general  Visage,  and  sound  it  g  haul. 

Daleth  (l),  dh—th  in  that  ;  a  sound  which  much  perplexes  Euro- 
peans of  the  continent;  but  which  is  altogether  easy  and  familiar 
to  the  English,  and  to  the  modern  Greeks,  who  so  sound  their  d\ 


I   I  HI. MARKS   ON  Tin:    AT, I'M  \KI    I 


II.-  (— )  i- ;i  feeble  h.  V&v  (■;)  is  a  feeble  o.  The  Arab  soomk  it 
like  our  w ;  which  i-;  more  probably  like  the  Hebrew  usage.  I  con- 
form to  general  European  n-age. 

Hheth  (h),  /<//,  i. «'.  a  strong  aspirate.  Ye\  nol  always  to  in  prac- 
lirr.  among  the  Hebrews  ;  for  at  the  end  of  words,  it  appears  to  have 
been  veiy  much  Bofteaed.  E.g.  the  Seventy  represent  nnn,  by 
0uy(>a ;  and  Irb^ ,  by  —u.t.u.  Bat  thej  translate  z~  ,  by  Ka/i;  and 
7~p  ,  by  '  lhc/t]\.  The  Arabians  have  two  gradations  of  sound  for 
this  letter. 

Tet  (u),  is  a  hard,  guttural  kind  of  f,  for  which  we  have  no  due  re- 
presentative, in  English.     The  corresponding  Greek  letter,  is  >>. 

Kaph  (r>),  kh,  a  difficult  sound.  The  Greeks  have  it  in  their  /. 
The  usual  practice  sounds  it  like  l  A,  i.  e.  make^  a  kind  of  guttural  of 
it.  Kh  can  be  distinctly  sounded  by  special  effort  ;  but  what  is  gain- 
ed by  this,  is  not  worth  the  trouble  necessary  to  gain  it.  Common 
usage  sounds  ~2 ,  as  be-haw.  1  would  conform  to  this,  as  it  is  so 
much  easier  than  to  sound  kh  fully. 

Samekh  (c),  is  sounded  as  the  Greek  a,  of  which  it  is  the  undoubt- 
ed prototype.  It  does  not  differ  perceptibly  from  the  letter  to,  Sim  ; 
and  the  Hebrews  have,  in  their  orthography,  written  many  words 
indifferently  with  either  the  one  or  the  other,  as  C"^2  and  "in:,  to 
divide,  etc. 

The  sound  of  Ayin  (y),  is  represented  by  ("),  the  double  Spiritus 
asper  of  the  Greeks,  for  want  of  a  better  representative.  Grammarians 
have  represented  it  by  g,  gh,hgh,  sounded  gutturally  ;  also  by  hh,  hhh, 
and  by  the  nasal  gn,  ng,  ngn.  The  Arabians  have  two  sounds  for  it ; 
the  deeper  one  is  scarcely  attainable  by  any  European.  The  ancient 
Hebrews  appear  to  have  had  two  also;  e.g.  the  Sept.  render  rob? 
Jouooou,  TitS  Fu'^u  ;  but  "'by  '///./.  p^O?  '  .-/pidi,*.  That  it  some- 
times had  comparatively  a  feeble  sound,  is  evident  from  its  admitting 
of  coalescence  or  contraction,  as  ;2  for  ?yz  :  also  from  its  commuta- 
tion with  N;  see  in  Hebrew  Lexicon.  Europeans  generally  neglect 
to  sound  it.  Jerome  calls  it  a  vowel  ;  see  above,  in  . 7tu*/./,'x,  the 
ground  of  this.  The  vowel  accompanying  it,  should  have  a  strong 
impetus  or  effect  of  the  voice  in  pronouncing  it 

Tsadhe  (^),  ts  hard.  Qoph  (p),  a  deep  guttural  A',  pronounced 
with  impetus.  Resh  (~i),  the  rolling  r  of  the  French,  or  the  Greek 
().     Tav  (n),  t  soft. 

§  9.  Dilated  letters  are  a  mere  expedient  to  make  out  the  adjust- 
ment of  a  line  ;  for  the  Hebrews  do  not  separate  words  at  the  end  of 
lines.    The  usual  ones  are  t< ,  n  ,  ^ ,  a  .  n ,  i.  e.  N  ,  rr ,  r,  & ,  n  . 


REMARKS  ON  THE  ALPHABET.  15 


[§  10.  Unusual  letters  are,  (1.)  Literae  majusculae  ;  as  IniDl  j  Ps. 
80:16.     (2.)  Minusculae ;    as    CNIZrj-  >  Gen.  2:  4.     (3.)  Suspcnsae ; 

as  *>_*»,  Ps.  80:  14.  (4.)  Invcrsae ;  as^bcz,  Numb.  10:  35.  The 
Rabbins  find  mysteries  in  these  ;  the  considerate  critic  will  only  find 
mistakes  in  copying.] 

§  1 1.  Similar  letters.  These  are  numerous,  in  the  Hebrew  alpha- 
bet. The  student  should  carefully  note  them,  at  the  outset.  They 
are  as  follows ; 


1. 

Beth 

n 

S    Kaph 

8. 

Zayin 

T      1    Nun 

2. 

Giniel 

5 

3    Nun 

9. 

Iiheth 

n  n  He 

3. 

Daletli 

— 
* 

"J    Kaph 

10. 

Hhcth 

n   n  Tav 

4. 

Daleth 

_ 

1   Resh 

11. 

Mem 

12     "J    Tet 

5. 

Vav 

i 

i  Yodh 

12, 

Mem 

D     D   Samekh 

(i. 

Vav 

i 

"J    Nun 

13. 

Tsadhe 

ySJ  Ay  in 

7. 

Zayin 

T 

1   Vav 

Explanations. 

(l.)  3)  is  distinguished  from  r>,  by  the  right  angle  which  its  perpen- 
dicular side  make*  with  the  strokes  at  the  top  and  bottom  of  the  let- 
ter ;  3)  is  round  at  its  corners  instead  of  being  angular.  In  some  print- 
ed copies,  35  is  distinguished  from  2  only  by  the  roundness  of  its  cor- 
ner at  the  bottom.  (2.)  1  is  distinguished  from  3,  by  having  the 
stroke  at  the  bottom  united  to  the  perpendicular  only  by  a  small 
point ;  in  3,  the  bottom  stroke  is  united  without  any  variation  of  its 
magnitude.  (.3.)  *]  final  descends  below  the  line;  T  does  not.  (4.) 
T  is  distinguished  from  ~\,  by  having  a  right  angle  at  the  top,  at  which 
part  T  is  round  or  obtuse.  (5.)  1  descends  to  the  bottom  of  the  line ; 
■<  does  not.  (6.)  ]  final  falls  below  the  line;  1  does  not.  (7.)  The 
top  of  T  is  continued  a  little  to  the  right  of  the  perpendicular,  while 
that  of  1  is  not ;  the  upright  line  of  7  is  small  at  the  top,  where  it  in- 
clines to  the  right,  while  it  is  gibbous  below  ;  which  is  not  the  case 
with  1 .  (8.)  T  descends  only  to  the  line  ;  ]  final  falls  below  it.  (9.) 
ii  has  no  space  between  its  left  side  and  the  top ;  ti  exhibits  a  small 
chasm.  (10.)  n  has  a  small  dotted  circle  at  the  bottom  of  the  perpen- 
dicular stroke  on  the  left  hand  ;  h  has  not  this  mark,  (ll.)  13  is  open 
at  the  top;  72  at  the  bottom.  (12.)  0  is  almost  round;  D  final  is  a 
square  or  parallelogram.  (13.)  X  is  angular  on  the  right  side  of  it, 
and  the  bottom  is  parallel  with  the  line;  2-'  turns  to  the  left  only.  Fi- 
nal y,  in  its  falling  stroke,  either  turns  a  little  to  the  right,  or  de- 
scends perpendicularly. 


I<»  CLAMINOATIOJI  OP  THE  LETTERS 


(a)  Gutturals 

n    rt 

(6)  Labials 

a    i 

(c)  Dentals 

t      0 

((/)  Linguals 

1      U 

(e)   Palatals 

5       * 

N.  li.  Tin-  lumei  will  Bnd  il  altogether  the  aaaiest  method  of  making  himiwir  familiar  « iih 
tin-  dlitlnction  between  the  Hebrew  letters,  ud  with  the  respective  sounds  of  the  lettere,  [at  al»o 
of  the  rowels  I  to  practi  e  writing  them  down,  calling  each  aloud  by  its  bum,  and  uttering  ''"> 
round  hi  ii  u  often  ai  be  writes  h  Lei  I  bin  ptaot  iee  be  pi  i  ieted  in,  until  all  the  rowels  and  con- 
■pnanti  can  be  recognised  with  facility  and  pronounced  readily;  their  distinctions  definitely  de- 
tcrlbed  and  drawn  with  the  penal  pleasure  and  their  muni--  familiarly  recalled.  In  tlni  way  the 
stndenl  learns  tu  iwiti  Hebrew  letters  and  rowels,  (which  he  should  by  all  means,  do);  anil  hi;  fixes 
the  names,  forms,  and  sounds  of  all  the  written  signs  indelibly  npon  bis  memory. 

[§  12.     Classification  of  the  letters.     This  has  been  usually   made, 

agreeably  to  the  organs  principally  employed  in  pronouncing  them,  as 

follows ;   viz. 

h     2>  technically  called  s~~N 

a    b  Bjjwa 

2  1     t  (to)  ^T^PI 
b     3    n  n3*P:2 

3  P  PV* 

Of  these,  the  most  important  classes  are  the  Gutturals  and  the  La- 
bials. But  ft  is  oftentimes  not  a  Guttural ;  and  ^  is  not  unfrequently 
treated  like  one.] 

§  13.  A  much  more  important  division  than  this,  for  practical  pur- 
poses, is  one  which  selects  only  those  letters  that  are  the  subjects  of 
some  peculiarity.     This  is  as  follows  ;  viz. 

(a)  Aspirates ;  viz.  1,  3  , 1 ,  D,  £} ,  n,  technically  called 
Bsg&dh-kieph&th,  P£D  133. 

They  are  named  Aspirates,  because,  when  there  is  no  point  (Da- 
ghesh)  in  them,  they  are  aspirated,  i.  e.  associated  with  an  ft-sound ; 
see  alphabet  No.  II. 

When  t hoy  are  destitute  of  this  point  or  Paghesh,  these  letters  are  called,  by  the  older  gram- 
marians, mollcs,  and  raphatae  ;  with  it,  durac  and  dagessatae. 

(6)  Quiescents  ;  viz.  itf ,  T\ ,  1 ,  \  technically  named  Nehe- 
vl,  ^irW.  The  reason  of  this  is,  that  the  sound  of  these 
letters  being  in  itself  somewhat  feeble,  it  often  coalesces 
with  the  vowel  sound  which  precedes ;  so  that  these 
letters  are  said  to  quiesce,  i.  e.  to  lose  their  separate,  con- 
sonant sound,  by  falling  into  the  preceding  vowel. 

0)  Gutturals  ;  viz.  K,  il,  ft,  J>,  or  a-hahha? ,  JTfrta, 
as  stated  above. 

Resh  is  sometimes  to  be  added ;  and  Aleph  sometimes  excepted,  as  stated  in  §  12. 

(d)  Liquids  ;  viz.  ? ,  fi ,  3 ,  "} ,  of  which  1  is  to  be  re- 
garded only  as  a  kind  of  half-liquid.  Technically,  these 
may  be  called,  limnar,  "IjE1?  . 

The  student  should  impress  theso  classes,  particularly  the  three  Jirst,  deeply  on  his  memory. 


§§  14 17.     VOWELS.  1? 


VOWELS. 

§  14.  Originally,  the  Hebrew  alphabet  consisted  only  of  conso- 
nants. Some  learned  men  have  maintained  the  contrary,  and  averred 
that  fit ,  1 ,  \  were  originally  designed  to  be  vowels.  But  the  fact,  that 
these  letters  constitute  essential  parts  of  the  triliteral  roots  in  Hebrew, 
and  that  they  are  susceptible  of  forming  syllables  by  union  with  every 
sort  of  vowel  sound,  proves,  beyond  all  reasonable  doubt,  that  they 
are  essentially  consonants. 

§  15.  But  as  the  sound  of  fit ,  "J,  "^  was  feeble,  and  often,  in  prac- 
tice, was  made  coalescent  with  the  vowel  which  preceded  them,  it  was 
natural,  that  in  process  of  time  they  should  come  to  be  considered,  in 
many  cases,  as  representatives  of  the  vowels  with  which  they  were 
customarily  made  to  coalesce.  Hence,  in  later  Hebrew  writings,  we 
find  fit ,  1 ,  i ,  not  (infrequently  used  in  the  room  of  vowels ;  more 
rarely  in  the  early  writings.  But  the  still  later  Chaldeo-Rabbinic  He- 
brew employs  these  three  letters  very  often,  merely  for  the  purposes 
of  designating  vowels.  For  these  reasons,  these  three  letters  are  called, 
by  recent  grammarians,  vowel-letters,  when  they  are  spoken  cf  in  re- 
ference to  the  usage  now  in  question.  The  older  grammarians  called 
them,  with  like  reference,  Matres  lec.tionis,  i.  e.  authors  or  guides  of 
[right]  reading.  In  reference  to  another  ground  of  classification,  these 
same  letters,  (together  with  n),  are  called  Ehcvi  C'lnfit)  or  Quiescents, 
§  13.  b. 

[The  most  ancient  Hebrew  MSS.  consisted  of  only  t lie  lettors  in  the  alphabet  No.  I.,  but  iii  a 
very  different  shape  from  the  present  one;  see$  I.  Note.  When  the  diacritical  signs,  which  dis- 
tinguish Hi.:  later  alphabet  and  increase  the  number  of  letters,  together  with  all  the  vowel-points 
and  accents,  were  first  introduced,  no  historical  documents  satisfactorily  shew.  But  it  is  now 
generally  agreed,  that  the  introduction  was  a  gradual  one  ;  and  that,  however  early  some  few  par- 
ticular things  in  the  general  system  may  have  been  commenced  yet  the  whole  system  ofdiacritioa] 
si^'ns,  vowel-points,  and  accents,  was  not  completed,  so  as  to  exist  in  its  present  form,  until  several 
centuries  after  the  birth  of  Christ ;  pretty  certainly  not  until  after  the  fifth  century.  In  regard  to 
reading  MSS).  destitute  of  all  this  system  of  helps,  there  is  no  m  rious  difficulty  ;  at  least  none  to 
any  one  who  well  understands  the  language.  The  <.tun-  thing  is  habitually  done,  at  the  present, 
day,  by  the  A  ra  hi  a  us,  the  Persians,  and  the  Syrians,  i'i  their  respective  tongues ;  and  in  I  lei  new,  by 
the  Jewish  Rabbies,  and  all  the  learned  in  the  Shemitish  languages.] 

§  16.  From  what  has  just  been  said,  the  student  will  see  why,  in 
the  Table  No.  IV.  fit,!,  and  "> ,  are  represented  as  vowel-lettere  cor- 
responding to  their  respective  classes  of  vowels.  It  is  because  these 
letters  were  occasionally  employed,  (fit  more  rarely),  to  designate 
more  or  less  of  the  vowel-sounds,  which  are  there  associated  with 
them. 

§  17.  In  the  same  Table,  in  column  2d,  the  letters  x  :  rj  vj  , 
are  used  merely  to  exhibit   to  the  learner  the  manner  in  which  the 

;$ 


16  §§   18 34.     VOWMUi    Ql    H.ITV   AND  QI1AM  I  I  I  . 


Hebrew  rowels  are  written,  in  respect  to  the  alphabetic  letter!  with 
which  t hoy  are  associated,  i  e.  whether  abo\  <\  below,  or  in  them. 

§  18.  The  student  nmsi  riivesl  himself,  at  the  outset,  of  the  habit 
of  giving  Engliih  sounds,  to  the  English  representatives  of  the  Hebrew 

vowels,  and  be  very  careful  always  to  BOOnd   these  representatives  as 
directed  in  the  table. 

§  19.  The  ground  of  classification  in  the  Table  No.  IV.  is,  that 
the  vowels  in  these  respective  classes  not  only  have  a  natural  relation 
to  each  other,  in  respect  to  sound,  but  for  the  most  part  are  often  com- 
muted fur  each  other.  Selibmi  does  commutation  take  place,  without 
the  limits  of  the  respective  classes.    ____ 

Quality  and  Quantity  of  the  Vowels. 
[§  20.  The  division  in  respect  to  quantity,  among1  the  older  eram- 
marians,  was  as  follows;  viz.  Long,  Qamets,  Tseri,  Hhireq  magnum, 
Hholem,  Shureq  ;  Short,  Pattahh,  Seghol,  Hhireq  parvum,  Qamets 
Hhateph,  and  QJbbuts.  But  all  of  these  so  called  short  vowels,  are 
in  fact  often  long,  with  the  exception  of  Qamets  Hhateph.  Hence  the 
student  is  greatly  perplexed  and  misled,  by  such  a  division.  A  much 
better  one  is  that  proposed  by  the  ancient  Jewish  grammarians,  and 
lately  adopted  by  the  leading  Hebrew  grammarians  in  Germany;  the 
basis  of  which  is  exhibited  in  Table  IV.  In  like  manner,  the  Arabic 
has  only  three  classes  of  vowels. 

Ewald,  in  his  recent  Hebrew  grammar  (1827),  lias  attempted  to  reduce  the  vowels  to  tico  clash- 
es, with  much  ingenuity,  but  not  satisfactorily.] 

§  21.  The  vowels  may  be  distributed  into  different 
classes,  both  in  respect  to  quality  and  quantity. 

§  22.     In  regard  to  quality,   they  may  be  considered  as 

pure  or  impure. 

The  quality  of  vowels,  in  regard  to  the  kind  of  sound  which  they  represent,  and  the  relations  of 
those  sounds  to  each  other,  is  represented  in  the  Talde  No.  IV.  The  ijuality  of  purity  or  impurity, 
remains  to  be  considered  here. 

§  23.  A  pure  vowel  is  one,  with  which  no  con»onant 
sound  coalesces. 

§  24.  An  impure  vowel  is  one,  with  which  a  consonant 
sound  coalesces 

E.  g.  in  ~il~  dCt-bhar,  both  vowels  are  pure ;  the  first  (t),  because 
no  consonant  follows;  the  second  ("O  ),  because,  although  a  consonant 
follows,  it  preserve*  its  distinct  sound,  and  does  not  coalesce  with  the 
vowel.  On  the  contrary,  in  N2  ha,  the  N  has  no  distinct  sound,  be- 
cause it  coalesces  with  the  Qamets  ;    and  in  sfTfi,  (so  written  instead 


§§25 — 31.    vowels:  quality  and  quantity.  19 


of  *^3,  §  111.  §  112),  the  Qamets  contains  a  coalescent  Resh,  which 
is  suppressed  in  the  writing1,  by  omitting-  a  Daghesh  in  the  1 ;  in  both 
which  cases,  Qamets  is  impure.  And  thus  of  all  the  other  vowels,  which 
admit  a  consonant  to  coalesce  with  them. 

§  25.  In  regard  to  quantity,  vowels,  considered  merely 
in  reference  to  their  appearance,  might  be  divided  mXolong 
and  short,  but  in  reference  to  their  actual  quantity,  (which 
is  altogether  the  more  important  consideration),  the  gene- 
ral division  of  them  is  into  long,  short,  and  medial. 

This  latter  classification,  (to  which  our  principal  regard  will  be  had),  cannot  be  made  by  inspec- 
tion, or  according  to  the  appearance  merely  of  the  vowels  ;  for,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  sequel,  the  ap- 
pearance of  some  of  them  is  often  doubtful,  or  determines  nothing  in  regard  to  quantity. 

§  26.  The  long  vowels,  (long  in  respect  to  real  quanti- 
ty), may  be  divided  into  those  long  by  nature,  i.  e.  always 
long;  and  those  long  by  position,  i.e.  long  only  when  made 
so  by  being  placed  in  a  particular  position.  These  may 
be  named,  (in  regard  to  their  appearance  only),  doubtful. 

§  27.  Long  by  nature,  i.e.  always  long,  are  Qamets, 
Tseri,  long  Hhireq,  Hholem,  Shurcq. 

§  28.  Doubtful,  i.  e.  long  only  in  certain  positions,  (more 
commonly  short  elsewhere),  are  Pattahh,  Seghol,  and  Qib- 
buts.  In  this  respect,  these  vowels  correspond  with  the 
doubtful  Greek  vowels,  a,  i,  v. 

§  29.  The  vowels  long  by  nature,  are,  by  their  rcspec^ 
tive  qualities, divided  into  three  classes,  viz.  (l.)Pure.  (2.) 
Protracted  impure.      (3.)  Daghesh'd  impure. 

§  30.  The  pure  long  vowels  are  Qamets,  Tseri,  and 
Hholem. 

These  are  pure  only  when  they  have  no  consonant  coalescing  with 
them,  i.  e.  do  not  contain  either  a  Quiescent  or  a  Daghesh'd  letter,  § 
58.  §  23  ;  e.  g.  "D"  dd-bhdr,  ^  shen,  tt3»  skc-nd,  ©"jj?  qd-dhesh,  rt2j3* 
y\q-tol.     Long  Hhireq  and  Shureq  are  always  irnjnire. 

§31.  The  protracted  impure  vowels  comprise  all  the 
vowels  long  by  nature,  whenever  they  are  followed  by  a 
quiescent  letter,  expressed  or  Implied,  which  coalesces 
with  them,  §  53. 


20  ■'>-•    rowEu:  oualiti  lnd Qvjumrv, 


E  g   garnets,  ai  tartts  fed  ,•  T«eri,ai  in  pa  fefti,  tv  :  :'■/»  ,•  Hhireq 

Ion?.  :is  in  "Y»J  mr  ;  llholiiii.  ;.>•  in  ;:  /...  ;-~  qdt ;  and  Shureq,  Sll  in 
C?'|~  </"»/(•  In  all  inch  cases,  Ihe  Quieacenl  makei  an  addition  lo  the 
quantity  of  the  vowel,  (which  before  *\;i-  long)  ;  and  therefore  it  may 
justl]  !><•  denominated  a  protracted  vowel^  >  56. 

Note  1.  Appearance  merely  will  nol  determine  whether  a  rowel  h 
protracted^  or  simply  long;  inasmuch  as  the  quiescent  letter,  which 
protracts  it,  is  often  omitted  in  the  writing ;  e.  (z-  t3P  qam  (impure) 
stands  for  ^n  :  </<'/«,  -i:  mr  for  -P3,  Vp  qol  for  ':*,"  .  etc  Bee  §  »;:;. 
In  a  multitude  of  cases,  the  studenl  can  disti  iguisfa  vowels  of  this  kind, 
only  when  he  conies  to  obtain  a  knowledge  of  etymology,  ami  of  the 
analogies  of  the  Hebrew  language. 

Note  2.  Vice  versa,  (he  Quiescents  are  sometimes  inserted  after 
vowels  long  by  nature,  without  rendering  them  impure,  i.e.  \\\\}<- 
out  protracting  them  ;  in  which  case,  they  are  merely  a  kind  of 
fulcrum  for  the  vowel,  eg.  Ti^b?  yU-modh  with  Ilholem  pur<%  i.  q. 
"teb^  ;  *2*zb  so-bhebh  with  Tseri  pure,  i.  q.  r^b  .  See  §61,  and  comp. 
§§  14 — 16.  which  exhibit  the  grounds  of  introducing  such   anomalies. 

Note  3.  There  are  a  few  cases,  also,  in  which  Shureq  appear-  to 
be  short,  i.  e.  to  be  the  same  as  Qjbbuts  in  regard  to  quantity  ;  viz.  when 
it  stands  before  a  DagheshM  letter,  e.g.  rlpin  hhuq-qa,  -:'"  zOn-aa, 
"'ni'/O  md-Suz-zi,  etc.  In  Chaldee,  Syriac  and  Arabic,  this  is  very 
common.  But  there  are  so  few  cases  of  this  nature  in  Hebrew,  that 
it  seems  probable,  they  result  from  transcribers'  haviDg  used  a  vowel- 
letter  as  the  sign  of  a  vowel;  see  §^  14 — 16. 

Note  4.  Similar  cases  of  Hhireq  with  Yodh,  are  also  affirmed  by 
most  grammarians  to  exist.  But  the  examples  evidently  do  not  justify 
this  conclusion,  as  they  only  amount  to  different  modes  of  orthography 
and  pronunciation,  in  respect  to  the  same  word  ;  e.  g.  z':p~  z'nj-ldgh 
and  ^jV'  ziqldgk,  tf;i73j3  qttn-mosh  and  ©iXFIJ  qi-mosh,  ~:>'~5  jAl-le- 
ghesh  and  ■>2.'?.~*3  pi-le-gesli,  STa^iS  m5-rig-gim  and  O^-pH  mo-ri- 
ghiin  ;  see  §  64,  respecting  Yodh  fulcrum. 

§  32.  The  Daghcsli'd  impure  long  vowels  are  those 
that  are  made  from  short  ones,  and  contain  a  coalescing 
consonant,  which,  in  case  it  did  not  coalesce,  would  be  ex- 
pressed by  a  Daghesb  i'oi-te. 

E.  g.  *p2  bd-rlkh,  SO  written  instead  of  V^2  hdr-rlkh  :  r~:  m-lidl 
instead  of  r~:  nlh-hdl  ;  —  ~:  iu-hhdn,  instead  of  Z3n:  mhh-hhdm  ,  ~"]S 
bo-rdkh.  instead  of  ^2  bur-rdkh.  No  instance  of  Shureq  occurs. 
Comp.  §  58.  §111.  §  112. 

Note.  This  class  of  vowels  plainly  differs  from  the  protruded  ones, 


§§  33 — 35.  vowels  :  quality  and  quantity.  21 


§  31  ;  inasmuch  as  they  are  not  formed  by  the  coalescence  of  a  con- 
sonant with  a  long  vowel  ;  hut  are  formed  from  short  vowels,  and 
made  long  by  the  coalescence  of  the  Daghesh'd  consonant,  which  is 
omitted.  They  seem,  therefore,  to  be  shorter  than  the  protracted 
vowels;  but  they  are  evidently  impure,  according  to  §  21.  The  im- 
portance of  distinguishing  them,  will  be  seen  in  the  sequel. 

§  33.  The  vowels  long  by  position  (§  28),  retain  the 
same  form  as  when  short ;  and  therefore,  in  respect  to 
appearance,  may  he  rightly  named  doubtful  vowels. 

It  is  only  from  u  knowledge  of  etymology,  ami  ofthe  analogy  of  forms,  that  the  student  oan  !.'■ 
eiiaMcil,  ffor  the  most  part),  to  determine  when  these  vowels  are  loot;. 

Of  these  three  vowels,  Pattahh  and  Qibbuts  (not  vicarious),  are 
made  long  only  by  the  coalescence  of  an  implied  DagheshM  letter;  as 
V"3  bd-lul,  for  rrrs  bdh-lul;  j""n  ru-hhats,  for  'fP"^  ruhh-hhetts.  For 
cases  like  ntt"?pb  ,  rrnN;  ,  where  Pattahh  and  QJbbnts  apparently 
have  a  quiescent  N  ,  see  §  lift  with  the  notes,  and  also  the  Lexicon. 
Seghol  may  be  made  long,  either  by  a  Quiescent,  as  *a  ,  N22 ,  TfO  , 
ge,  tse,  me.  ;  or  by  the  coalescence  of  a  Daghesh'd  letter,  as  JZl^^nri 
hc-hri-rim,  n~D  pe-hhd,  TrlJJ  Hc-khav,  where  the  Gutturals  n ,  H  ex- 
clude the  Daghesh  forte  which  belongs  to  them.  See  §  58.  §  111. 
§  112.  §  54. 

§  34.  The  proper  short  vowels  are  Pattahh,  Seghol, 
short  Hhireq,  Qamets  Ilhateph,  and  Qihhuts  (not  vicari- 
ous), when  they  are  pure,   and  stand  in  a  mixed  syllable.* 

E.  g.  b"5  ddl,  12  ben,  !l3j?7a  miq-ne,  JVJDi-;  hhokh-ma,   "lt3J5?p  miiq-tar. 

Note.  Two  of  these  cases  may  be  rendered  dubious  by  appearan- 
ces ;  c.  g.  ""13  appears  short,  hut  is  in  fact  i.  q.  T'3  .  So  in  tCDB  ,  QJb- 
bnts appears  short,  but  is  i.  q.  tlttp  ,  Qibbuts  being  vicarious.  Hero, 
as  in  the  dubious  cases  above,  a  knowledge  of  etymology  and  of  anal- 
ogy is  necessary,  in  order  to  judge. 

§  35.  Pattahh,  Seghol,  Hhireq,  and  Qamets  Ilhateph 
are  medial,  as  to  quantity,  when  they  arc  pure,  and  stand 
in  a  simple  syllable.'!" 

Medial  1  choose  to  call  the  quantity  of  these  vowels,  insaebcasee 
and  the  Masorites  have  sanctioned  the  thing,  if  not  the  name.     These 
vowels,  under  such  circumstances,  are  not   long ;  for   a   pause   accent 
prolongs  them  (§144),  e.g.   n"3    ba-ydh,  rPX   ba-yUh;  *}'~'2   me-likh, 

*  A  mixed  ayllable  is  one  which  '-n<ls  in  a  vocal  consonant. 
t  A  simple  syllable  is  one  Which  ''nils  in  a  vowel  lotrad. 


22  §§  :{(» — 12.    vowri.s  :    QUALITY  ami  uj  wtitv 


^'-■j  »/(</-/« /.■//,  etc.  Nor  are  Ihej  strictly  tAori  ,•  for  in  general  they  are 
accented,  (either  with  ih«'  ionic  accent  or  with  a  Metbeg,  both  of 

which  imply  xfre^  nr  delay  of  the  voice.  {j  85),  throughout  ihe  He* 
brow  Scriptures.  Indeed  the  natural  mode  of  pronunciation,  nay,  the 
necessary  one,  is  a  delay  of  the  voice  upon  these  vowels  thus  situated. 

E.g.  -\y;  na-ar,  ~:~;  na-hh  la  :  ~.":  ini-li /.-//,  *cn:  ne-h'phdkk:  ~j~1 
vdg-yi-ghel,  bsnl  vdt-ti-ghel  (prolonged  tiP]  vdt-te-ghel),   i-~N  o  hlO. 

Note.  Here  also  appearances  may  he  dubious.  1"  g.  ~Z~.  j  w'th  a 
long  impure  Daghesh'd  vowel ;  and  ir?'T,  with  a  Hhireq  pure  and  me- 
dial. So  b~2  ,  with  impure  long  Paltahh ;  hut  n*2,  with  a  pure 
medial  one.  If  the  student  can  discover  whether  the  vowel  is  pure 
or  not,  he  of  course  can  determine  the  quantity.  Experience  only 
will  enable  him  to  do  this  ;  nor  is  it  usually  at  all  difficult,  after  a 
moderate  progress  in  the  language. 

§  36.  A  pure  long  vowel  may  stand  in  a  simple  syllable  ;  or  in  a 
mixed  one,  but  only  when  it  is  accented ;  e.  g.  "\b.i  dd-bhdr,  flj'i)  she- 
tzo,  "J123  ,  shen,  -"}p  qo-dhesh,  b 'Cp*   yiq-ud. 

§  37.  The  same  is  the  case  with  impure  protracted  vowels  ;  e.  g. 
M2  ba\  SNp  qom  ;  —\-j  gefe,  p3  bin;  ""b  li,  T:  nir  ;  ib  lo,  bij3  qol  ; 
^ffip  qfi-mu,  3lp  qfun. 

§  38.  Impure  DaghesWd  long  vowels  can  stand  only  in  a  simple 
syllable;  e.g.  im\~}~  bd-rikh,  b~?.  nr-hdl,  3~:  lu-hhdm,  "i:  bd-rdkh,  in 
all  which  cases,  the  first  syllable  contains  an  impure  Daghesh'd  long 
vowel ;  see  §  32. 

§  39.  The  proper  short  vowels  stand  only  in  a  mixed  syllable  ;  see 
§34. 

§  40.  The  four  medial  vowels  stand  only  in  a  simple  syllable  ;  see  §  35. 

§41.  Qibbuts  vicarious  is  nothing  more  than  a  mere  ex- 
pedient lor  representing  Shureq,  when  the  Vav  falls  out. 

It  may  be  in  a  simple,  or  in  a  mixed  syllable  ;  e.  g.  nap  qu-?nu,  i.  q. 
uJ2^p  ;  rt3Pr  qd-tul.  i.  q.  b^Bp.  In  a  mixed  syllable,  it  appears  like 
Qibbuts  short,  and  only  a  knowledge  of  the  nature  of  Hebrew  forms 
can  determine  the  quantity. 


§§  43 46.  SHEVA  VOCAL.  23 


SIIEVA. 

§  42.  The  Hebrews  never  amalgamated  two  or  more  consonant- 
sounds  together,  (as  we  do  in  plan,  stripe,  shrink,  etc.),  except  at  the 
end  of  a  word ;  and  even  then  very  rarely,  and  never  to  the  extent  of 
more  than  two  letters.  In  a  multitude  of  cases,  they  even  supplied  a 
furtive  vowel  in  the  final  syllable  of  words,  to  shun  the  amalgamation 
of  two  consonants;  e.  g.  for  "JED  svphr,  they  wrote  and  read  1SD  se- 
pher.     Still,  they  admit,  in  a  few  cases,  such  forms  as  PkOj?  qd-tdlt. 

§43.  When  two  consonants  begin  a  syllable,  they  are 
not  combined  in  one  sound,  but  a  very  short  half-vowel 
is  supplied,  after  the  first  letter,  in  order  to  smooth  the 
transition  to  the  second  letter.   This  is  called  Sheva,  PHID. 

Note.  Instead  of  saying,  bra,  bre,  by  one  impetus  of  voice,  (as  we 
do),  the  Hebrews  pronounced  berd,  bere,  i.  e.  with  a  very  short  vowel 
sound  between  the  two  consonants. 

§  44.  All  Shevas  mark  either  the  beginning  or  the  end  of  sylla- 
bles, i.  e.  whenever  they  occur,  they  are  division  marks  of  syllables. 

§  45.  All  syllables  beginning  with  two  consonants,  have 
a  Sheva  (either  simple  or  composite)  under  the  first  of 
them.  All  syllables,  ending  with  one  or  two  vocal  conso- 
nants, take  a  Sheva  simple,  either  expressed  or  implied, 
under  them. 

§  46.  All  Shevas  at  the  beginning  of  syllables  arc 
vocal, i.e.  sounded;  all  Shevas  at  the  end  are  silent-  Hence 
result  the  following  rules;   viz. 

Sheva  Vocal. 

(a)  All  the  composite  Shevas  ;  because  they  are  always  placed  at  the 
beginning  of  a  syllable.  (6)  Simple  Sheva,  after  a  simple  syllable;  as 
irnab  la-midha.  (c)  After  another  Sheva ;  as  llOb"]  yil-nudhu.  {d) 
Under  a  letter  at  the  beginning  of  a  word;  as  173b  It-mndh.  (e)  Under 
a  letter  with  Daghesh  forte  ;  as  llal)  I'un-medhu.  {/)  Under  a  letter 
in  which  Daghesh  forte  is  implied;  as  ibbn  hdt-Ulu  =  ibbrj,  (or 
perhaps,  hd-lflv),  not  lYil  hdl-lu. 

[Note.  The  common  maxim  of  grammarians,  in  regard  to  the  case 
f  is,  that  "  Sheva  is  vocal,  when  under  a  letter  which  is  immedi- 
ately repeated.1'  This  is  evidently  incorrect;  e.g.  *~£\T\  hdr-ri  (not 
har-rfre),  "03b  tibh-bhe  (not  lib-bfbhO),  and  so  "'b.btl  (plur.  const,  of 


24  $§  47 — 51.    siikva  sii.i  .  i 


Y-~)  is  Ithul-lr,  (not  hhal-lfle).  On  the  contrary,  n'rirH  read-  fml-l.-hi. 
because  it  belongs  to  a  Daghesh'd  form  of  the  verb  :'rn,  and  the  Da- 
gfaesfa  is  omitted  merely  from  the  frequent  usage  of  rejecting   it  from 

a  letter  which  has  a  Sheva  Simple  tinder  it  ;  sec  §  73.  Note  ;.  Some 
knowledge  of  Hebrew  forms  is  necessary,  in  order  to  distinguish  such 
cases.] 

Sheva  Silent. 

{g)  After  ;i  short  vowel,  in  a  mixed  syllable  ;  ns  "ffib^  yil-modh. 
(/;)  After  a  long  vowel,  in  a  mixed  tone  syllable  ;  as  —:"'::."  til-mndh-nd. 
(t)  Two  Shevas  at  the  end  of  a  word  are  both  silent;  B*1Ja!b  la-mddht. 

§  47.  The  form  of  the  Shevas  is  exhibited  fully  by  Table  IV.  No. 
IV.  The  composite  Shevas  are  so  called,  because  each  is  made  by  a 
union  of  Sheva  with  one  of  the  short  vowels;  as  is  evident  from  in- 
spection. 

§  48.  The  quantity  of  the  Shevas  is,  at  lenst  in  theory. 
the  same  ;  i.  e.  none  of  them  are  considered  as  a  proper 
vowel. 

E.  g.  "IpS  pfqodh,  XjT  z^habh,  \iX  K'/e,  ^h  hh"li,  are  all  consider- 
ed as  monosyllabic.  What  practical  difference  between  these  sounds 
existed  among  the  Hebrews,  cannot  now  be  determined. 

§  49.  The  composite  Shevas  belong  appropriately  to  the 
Gutturals,  and  are  used  under  them  instead  of  simple  She- 
va vocal,  (not  for  simple  Sheva  silent.) 

No  definite  rules  can  be  given  as  to  the  kind  of  Sheva  under  the 
respective  Gutturals ;  usage  varying  them,  in  different  words  having 
the  same  letters,  and  in  different  positions.  In  general,  n,  n,  ~,  at  the 
beginning  of  words  take  (     )  ;  but  N,  (     ). 

§  50.  Gutturals  (and  other  letters),  which  take  a  composite  Sheva, 
always  begin  a  syllable.  A  Guttural  which  ends  a  syllable,  must,  like 
the  other  consonants,  take  Sheva  simple  (  ),  as  there  is  no  other  si- 
lent Sheva.  E.  g.  TWg'JJ  Shd-md2-ti,  V~~!".  yihh-ddl,  n-~r~r  y£h-gt; 
*lCfiO  yeii-sor. 

[§51.  The  composite  Shevas  (,)  and  ()  occur,  not  unfrequently, 
under  most  of  the  other  consonants  besides  Gutturals  ;  e.g.  n~"  :"hdbh. 
dvJ"i£  (fdhd-shun,  etc.     But  (     )  is  limited  to  Gutturals. 

Note.  No  uniform  rules  can  be  given  for  the  former  cases. 
The  general  principle  seems  plainly  to  he,  a  design  to  mark  the  letter 
as  having  a  real  vocal  Sheva,  and  consequently  to  advertise  the  reader. 


§§  52.  53.  coalEstenCe  of  vowels  and  qi/jescents. 


that  the  preceding  vowel  is  not  to  attach  it  to  itself;  e.g.  3~r  u 
z"hdbh,  not  uz-habh  ;  !"D*toH  lid-bh"rd-khd,  not  hdbh-rd-fchd  ;  ?ftJ3fl  O- 
rwlukh,  not  tim-lokh.  There  can  scarcely  be  a  doubt,  that  all  BUfch 
Shevas  as  these,  are  designed  only  to  designate  some  peculiar  nice- 
ties practised  in  oral  enunciation.  They  cannot  be  considered  as  be- 
longing to  the  essential  forms  of  words ;  nor  can  they  be  reduced  to  rule.] 

§  52.  It  is  a  general  principle,  that  all  moveable  con- 
sonants,* not  immediately  followed  by  a  vowel,  must  have 
a  Sheva  of  some  kind,  cither  express  or  implied. 

At  the  end  of  words,  however,  Sheva  is  not  expressed,  but  only  im- 
plied ;  e.g.  Bj?  qam,  the  same  as  Cj3  .  The  exceptions  to  this  rule 
are,  (l)  In  a  final  Kaph ;  as  "jro  .  (2)  When  the  final  syllable  ends 
with  two  consonants  ;  as  P^^'r  la-mddhl  ;  but  in  case  the  penult  con- 
sonant is  a  Guttural,  it  takes  a  Pattahh  furtive,  §  233. 

Note  1.  The  Quiescents,  when  they  coalesce  with  the  preceding 
vowel,  have  no  Sheva.  Whenever  these  letters  have  a  Sheva,  they 
are  to  be  regarded  as  moveable  consonants. 

Note  2.  When  a  word  ends  with  two  consonants,  of  which  the  first 
is  a  Quiescent,  usage  is  various  as  to  Sheva  under  the  final  letter; 
e.  g.  we  find  nN3  and  ru\3  . 

t  :       t 

General  Remark.  There  can  lie  but  little  doubt,  that  the  composite  Shevas  were  more  dis- 
tinctly sounded  than  the  simple  ones.  Hence  their  application  to  the  (Gutturals,  which  peculiarly 
needed  more  vowel  aid  to  enounce  them  than  other  consonants.  Hence,  too,  their  use  in  regard  to 
other  letters,  for  the  sake  of  more  distinct  pronunciation  ;  $  51.  note.  But  all  the  niceties  of  living 
vernacular  pronunciation  are  now  lost,  no  more  to  bo  recalled.     Present  general  usage,  is   all  that 


U  aimed  at  in  this  "raininar. 


Coalescence  of  Vowels  and  Quicsccnts. 

To  such  a  coalescence,  the  preceding  explanations  have  rendered  it  necessary  to  advert.  It 
must  now  be  more  fully  explained. 

§  53.  The  sound  of  the  quiescent  letters,  X ,-  51 ,  1,  *, 
being  feeble,  (specially  at  the  end  of  a  syllabic),  they  al- 
ways coalesce  with  a  vowel  .sound  which  precedes  them, 
in  case  they  have  neither  a  vowel,  nor  a  Sheva  expressed 
or  implied,  of  their  own,  and  provided  that  such  vowel- 
sound  is  homogeneous. ,t 


*  A  moveable  consonant  is  one  which  is  sounded,  and  does  nut  qufoflGS  <>r  coalesce. 
t    Thru  vowel  sound  is  cm  I  led  homogeneous,  which  is  adapted   to  coalesce  with  the  Quiescent* 
respectively  ;  that  is  called  hfttr0g§tUOU8,  which  is  not  adapted  to  COOlfi 

4 


M 


I  —."))).    COALBICENCB  OF  YOWELf  AMD  QUIBBCKirri 


l.     The  following  table  exhibit!  the  coalescence  of  the  respec- 
tive Qaiescents,  with  their  homogeneous  vowels. 


Aleph  (N)  quiesces  in  Q,;uiiots 
-   Tscn 


Yodh    0) 


Vav  0) 
He  (H) 


-   Seghol       1 

'•••) 

-  Ilholem    ( 

-) 

-  Tscri         ( 

••) 

-   Seghol       ' 

:•••) 

-  Hhireq 

:-) 

-  Hholem 

H 

-   Shureq      1 

:i) 

-   Qamets     ( 

:*) 

-   Tseri         1 

:••) 

-    Seghol       ( 

:•••) 

-   Hholem     I 

:-) 

)  NI  ba. 

)  B&TI   resh. 

')    n]X2«n   tlm-tse-n:i. 
"l-N"'    vo-mer. 

■pa   ben. 

n^a  ge. 

]^   dm. 

^ip    qol. 
u^p    qum. 

Thy  ga-la. 
n^  gele. 

Lt  -   1  A 

1 1^3   go-Ie. 
n?3   ga-lo. 

Tn  Knglish,  wc  havo  a  multitude  of  cases  similar  to  these  ;  e.  g.  loic,show,  etc.  with  ?r  quiescent  : 
say,  day,  etc.  with  ;/  quiescent.  Almost  every  letter  in  our  alphabet  is,  in  some  situations,  quies- 
cent before  or  after  some  other  letter. 

Note  1.  There  are  some  other  cases,  besides  those  presented  in 
the  Table,  of  which  Quiescence  has  been  affirmed  by  most  grammari- 
ans ;  e.  g.  ]Vi"J<-i  ri-shon,  DNnpr  tiq-rath,  TT^NS  pu-ra,  §  63.  But  N  is 
otiant  here,  not  quiescent;    see  §  118,  with  the  Notes. 

Note  2.  Although  the  Hholem  is  written  over  the  T ,  as  in  i  ;  and 
the  Shureq  is  written  in  it,  as  1 ;  yet,  in  both  cases,  the  vowels  usual- 
ly belong  to  the  preceding  consonant;  e.  g.  in  fclp,  to  the  p;  in  C7p, 
to  the  p.  Cases  like  "py  2d-von  occur ;  but  they  are  easily  distin- 
guished, because  the  letter  preceding  the  *?  has  then  a  vowel  of  its 
own,  independently  of  that  connected  with  the  1. 

§  55.  The  sound  of  the  Quiescents,  in  case  of  coalcs- 
mur,  is  not  lost,  but  united  with  the  preceding  vowel  ;  so 
that  it  makes  Ions;  vowels  more  protracted,  and  short  ones 
it  renders  long,  §31. 

§  56.  The  Ektti  (a~^)  retain  their  proper  consonant  power,  i.  e. 
do  not  quiesce,  (l)  Always  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable:  as  1CN  Ha- 


§§  57,  58.    OTIUM  OF  THE  EHEVI,  ETC.  2? 


mar,  Dn  hem,  "ir''  yd-lddh,  1^1  ve-ledh.  (2)  Always  whea  they  end  a 
syllable,  in  case  they  have  a  simple  Sheva  under  them,  either  express- 
ed or  implied  ;  e.  g.  "CN*  ycH-sur,  *)?":  neh-pdkh,  'W233  shd-ldv-tl, 
sft  hhdy,  IP  qdv.  In  the  last  cases,  the  Sheva  is  implied,  i.  e.  ^~  =*"  , 
and  ")£  =  ■))":  ,  see  §  52..  (3)  Usually,  when  preceded  by  a  heteroge- 
neous vowel ;  e.  g.  in  <c«j,  "1P_  qdv,  ")bp  shd-lev,  IT  ziv,  ''h  May,  !"T3tV 
yeh-ge,  ^ijl  goy,  "^Vil  gd-lily,  D'P.  qdy-ylm,  2T£  qdv-vdm,  etc.  In  all 
cases  of  this  kind,  it  is  easy  to  judge  whether  the  Ehevi  quicsce,  or 
are  moveable,  by  the  nature  of  the  preceding  vowel.  See  further  on 
the  Quiescents,  §  115  seq. 

Note  1.  In  the  middle  of  a  word,  the  Ehevi  are  always  marked 
with  a  Sheva  (  : ),  in  case  they  are  moveable  ;  at  the  end  of  a  word, 
as  Sheva  is  not  written  (§  52),  one  must  judge  from  the  nature  of  the 
vowel  which  precedes,  whether  the  Ehevi  are  quiescent  or  not. 

Note  2.  All  the  Ehevi,  in  the  middle  of  words,  not  unfrequently 
resist  coalescence,  i.  e.  remain  moveable  ;  (~  always,  K  sometimes, 
even  when  the  vowel  is  adapted  to  coalescence).  At  the  end  of  words, 
they  resist  it  only  in  case  the  preceding  vowel  is  heterogeneous. 
Compare  however,  §  119.  6.  §  120.  6.  §121.6. 

Otium  of  the  Ehevi. 

§  57.  There  arc  some  cases,  in  which  the  Ehevi  are 
neither  moveable  consonants,  nor  coalesccnt  with  their  pre- 
ceding vowels.  They  are  then  said  to  be  otiant,  {in  otio, 
otiantur.) 

This  happens  in  the  following  cases,  viz.  (a)  When  preceded  by 
silent  Sheva;  as  NttfJ  hint,  \~N  Hat.  (6)  Preceded  by  a  Quiescent ; 
as  rififan  hi-bhe-thd,  with  N  otiant.  (c)  Followed  by  Daghesh  forte  ; 
as  W*na  mdz-ze  =  T,V2  .  (d)  Yodh,  preceded  by  (  )  and  followed 
hy  T  with  a  Sheva  implied,  is  otiant;  as  "P"0~  dtbhd-rdv,  where  She- 
va is  implied  under  the  final  1 ,  §  52. 

Note,  [n  mch  cages  the  otiant  lettei  is  mostly  rel  a  ined,  (it  is  sometimes  omitted),  out  of  regard 
to  orthography,  and  to  indicate  the  etymology  of  the  word.  Smj  in  a  multitude  of  cases,  in  English. 
we  have  utianl  vowels;  U  in  liunuur,  hear,  moan,  etc. 

Coalescence  of  Voice/.-;  with  Daghesh' d  letters  omitted. 

§  58.  The  Gutturals  and  Rcsh  scarcely  ever  admit 
Daghesh,  i.  e.  reduplication,  §  71.  §111.  In  cases  where 
by  analogy  they  ought  to  be  doubled,  but  arc  not,  the 
letter  omitted  bv  excluding  the  Daghesh,  coalesces  with  the 
preceding  vowel  and  lengthens  it,  §  W'l. 


§§  ;V.» — 61.   0HTH0GRAPH1   <>r  iiii:  \uwi.i.-. 


I". ;,'.  yiw^n  ta-M&rtff,  instead  ofyn-Jjn  hdX-Ha-rttr;  n1:^*  .y<-x»- 
tner,  instead  of  "IP'S*"!  yi*-Mflr*»8r ,*  rrtz  ixi-inl,  with  Pattahh  laag  tod 
impure  (^  33),  instead  of  rrr^  bdh-hel  ;  't~z  bi-hel  with  Hhireq  laag 
and  impure  (§32),  instead  ofVns  lnh-lnl  ;  Z~~x  Hdrhhua  with  I'attahh 
long  ami  impure  (§ 33), instead  <>f  cn~.\  t&dhJi-hhvn  ;  z~:  n&JUtatnwith 
Ilhircij  Ipog  and  impure  (§32),  instead  of  £n:  mhh-hhdm  ;  ~c;z  &d-Mi 
(§32),  instead  of  "\-i"2  bd'j-'jcr  ;  07  :.  nn-inn,  instead  of  0*8  mW-'Jlin  ; 
*\~}Z  b<-rtkh,  instead  of  "pa  bir-rikh,  "|"V2  ba-r<kh,  instead  of  *p2  irir- 
>./,/,.  etc.    Comp.  §  111.  §  112. 

Note.  In  regard  to  this  usage,  it  is  plain,  that  an  excluded  Da- 
ghesh'd  letter  lengthens  the  quantity  of  the  preceding  vowel;  for  in 
some  cases  this  is  expressed  hy  using  a  vowel  long  by  nature,  instead 
of  a  short  one,  as  *p3  for  !Tn§  .  When  in  other  cases,  theybrm  of  the 
short  vowel  remains,  the  quantity  of  it  is  changed,  §  33. 

§  59.  Some  other  letters  occasionally  omit  Daghesh, 
with  a  similar  eifect,  for  the  most  part,  on  the  preceding 
vowel. 

E.  g.  "TT^i  va-yfhi,  instead  of  Tr*  vay-yeM.  But  it  is  doubtful  how 
such  cases  as  "rip-;  (for  THj:*)  were  read;  i.  e.  whether  they  were 
pronounced  yi-qehku  or  ylq-hhu.  The  probability  is,  that  there  was  a 
variety  of  pronunciation  ;  for  some  of  them  are  marked  with  a  Me- 
theg  (§  85),  as  VPi  (for  Tri  );  some  with  composite  Sheva,  as  rthpb 
h)-q  hha  (for  nrjjsb)  ;  both  of  which  shew  that  the  first  syllable  is  to  be 
read  as  a  simple  one,  vd-y?hi,  lu-q  hha  ;  and  so  of  others  like  them. 
But  some  words  have  neither  of  these  marks,  e.  g.  ^Hj^  (for  1  t\*P  )  ;  and 
in  such  cases,  they  are  probably  to  be  read,  as  ^Hp-;  ylq-hhv,  etc.  The 
omission  of  Daghesh,  in  all  such  instances,  seems  to  have  respect  only 
to  the  niceties  of  pronunciation  in  regard  to  a  few  words,  which  the 
Punctators  strove  to  express.  It  does  not  belong  to  the  essential  form 
of  words. 

Orthography  nf  the  Vowels. 

§  60.  By  inspecting  the  Table  No.  IV.,  it  will  be  seen,  that  the 
two  first  classes  of  vowels  arc  all  written  under  the  consonants;  of  the 
third  class,  Qibhuts  also  is  written  under  them;  but  Hholem  is  written 
over,  and  Shureq  in  them.  Qamets,  however,  is  written  in  the  bosom 
of  ixjinal  Kaph;  e.  g.  ~  kha. 

§  61.  The  proper  place  of  a  vowel  is  under  the  middle,  or  (as  they 
are  now  printed)  on  the  right  side,  of  a  consonant.  Shureq  is  always 
written  after  the  consonant  to  which  it  belongs,  i.e.  in  the  bosom  of 
the  following  1,  Hholem  is  commonly  written  over  the  right  top  of 
the  letter  next  following  that  to  which  it  belongs,  as  £o  t<~d.  "rip  qol ; 


§§  62 — 64.    ORTHOGRAPHY  OF  THE  VOWELS.  29 


but  sometimes  necessity  prevents  this,  e.g.  in  UHp,  where  the  type 
will  not  admit  such  a  disposition  of  the  Hholem.  Hholem  following 
K,  is  commonly  written  over  its  left  side,  as  b~.i<;  unless  followed  by 
1,  as  br>>\\ 

§  62.  The  diacritical  point  over  i3  and  13,  often  coincides  with 
Hholem;  in  which  case  it  serves  the  double  purpose,  of  marking  the 
vowel  and  of  distinguishing  the  letter,  (l)  to,  beginning  a  syllable,  if 
followed  by  a  consonant  having  a  vowel  of  its  own,  reads,  su  ;  e.g. 
tttiB  so-ne.  (2)  T,  following  a  consonant  that  has  no  vowel,  contains  a 
Hholem  for  that  consonant,  and  also  marks  sh ;  e.g.  TIUjlS  mu-skc.  On 
the  other  hand,  (3)  ©  (with  two  points)  beginning  a  syllable,  is  read 
sho;  e.g.  ~l£ I)  sho-mir.  (4)  tfj  (with  two  points)  ending  a  syllable,  is 
read,  6s  ;  e.  g.  ttis'V  yir-pds. 

§  62.  Vav  0),  with  a  Hholem  over  it  and  a  vowel  under  it,  is  join- 
ed, as  a  moveable  consonant, with  the  vowel  under  it;  e.g.  rnb  lo-ve, 
JTIST1  ythu-va,  the  Hholem  belonging  to  the  preceding  letter. 

§  63.  Vowels  in  connexion  with  ilie  Quiescents,  exhibit 
various  modes  of  orthography  winch  require  explanation. 
As  the  Ehcvi  or  Quiescents  drop  their  distinct  consonant 
sound,  in  case  of  coalescence  (§53),  and  the  words  with 
vowel-points  are  sounded  in  the  same  manner,  whether  the 
Quiescents  are  omitted  or  inserted ;  so,  in  practice,  they 
arc  often  omitted. 

Words  in  which  the  Quiescents  are  inserted,  are  said  to  be  written 
fully  ;  those  in  which  they  are  omitted,  to  be  written  defectively.  In 
both  cases,  the  pronunciation  and  quantity  of  the  vowels  remain  the 
same ;  as  the  following  examples  will  shew. 

Written  fully.  Written  defectively.  Read. 

\-k\b73  T^E  md-le-thi. 

T3  "O  nlr. 

inp  Vp  qol. 

Cnaj^  C73J5  qd-mus. 

§  64.  There  are  some  cases,  in  which  Vav  and  Yodh  (particularly 
the  former)  are  inserted,  when  they  are  not  proper  Quiescents,  and 
have  no  influence  on  the  sound  or  nature  of  the  vowel.  In  all  these 
cases,  they  are  mere  orthographic  Fulcra.  E.  g.  Tinb^ ,  the  same  as 
"PJr"]  y'd-modh  ;  S'ob,  the  same  as  230  so-bhibh ;  "^n,  the  same  as 
■»Brl  hhuq-qe  ;  comp.  §  31.  Notes  2.  3.  In  all  probability,  such  forms 
have  sprung  from  the  practice  of  employing  Vav  and  Yodh  as  vowel- 
letters,  §  15.     How  to  distinguish  such  cases,  from  those  where  1  and  ' 


:{0  <j>§  ♦>">,  <»<i.    ORTBOOBAFHY  01    tllllffl  mi  \  i  i.i-ii. 


are  employed  as  true  Quiescent*,  etymology  only  can  teach  ;  and  with 
a  knowledge  of  this,  it  is  very  easy. 

§  65.  No  certain  rule  can  he  given  for  the  insertion  or  omission  of 
Quiescents,  when  there  is  a  real  coalescence.  More  generally,  when 
two  syllahles  are  immediately  connected,  in  both  of  which  there  is  a 
Quiescent,  the  first  syllable  omits  it;  e.g.  p"*"^  ,  Z\-T2. .  But  instan- 
ces of  a  contrary  usage  also  exist;  e.  g.  ri^ip  =n",r:,p  ;  and  some- 
times both  Quiescents  are  omitted,  as  W?!?1B  for  IPlB^stJ  ;  so  13  for 
*P3  ,  etc.  Even  the  same  word  is  variously  written  ;  e.  g.  "Vnin^prt. 
"'nTEpn  ,  "•nbpri ,  all  pronounced  h"qi-mo-tla. 

Orthography  of  Qamcts  II hate  ph. 

From  the  Table  No.  IV.,  it  appears  that  (Harriets  Hhateph  (short  o)  has  the  same   form  with 
Qamets,  viz.  ( T).     It  is  important  to  point  out  how  they  may  be  distinguished. 

I.    Qamets  Ilhatcph  in  a  mixed  syllable. 

§  66.  (a)  The  figure  (  T  ),  followed  by  simple  Shcva 
without  any  Metheg  between,  is  short  o,  if  in  a  syllable 
not  accented. 

E.g.  n^ptl  hhbkh-ma,  not  hhd-khtmd,  But  with  a  Metheg,  it  reads 
thus,  JiE^rt  hhd-khtmd.  With  an  accent,  it  reads  as  Qamets  ;  e.  g. 
~ma  mdv-td.  Niui  shdv.  nb",'£  ldy-ld. 

Note.  There  are  some  few  cases,  where  Metheg  does  not  distin- 
guish Qamets  from  short  o  ;  e.  g.  ni:^-^  dor-bhd~ndth,  not  dhd-ribho- 
nbth ;  so  "|21pT  qor-bdn,  not  qd-rzbhdn  ;  rVlHSJ  shbm-rd,  not  shd-mird. 
But  in  these,  and  the  like  cases,  manuscripts  and  editions  vary  as  to  the 
Metheg  ;  and  etymology  only  can  settle  the  true  pronunciation. 

(6)  When  followed  by  a  letter  with  Daghesh  forte,  in 
a  syllable  not  accented,  (  t  )  is  short  o. 

E.  g.  D^ra  bbt-tim,  "^iH  hhbn-ne-m.  If  the  syllable  is  accented,  it  is 
read  as  long  a ;  e.  g.  tT&*  ydm-md,  Tnsfe  Idm-md,  etc. 

Note  1.  An  euphonic  Daghesh  (§  75  seq.),  at  the  beginning  of  a 
word,  does  not  make  short  o  of  the  (  )  belonging  to  the  last  syllable 
of  the  preceding  word  ;  it  remains  long  a  still ;  e.  g.  12  n:f  -  ,  read 
shd-khdn-tdb-bo. 

Note  2.  A  Metheg  after  (  )  does  not  aim-ays  make  it  long  a  ;  e.  g. 
D^rs  bbt-te-khem,  not  bd-ti-khcm.     See  above  under  a,  Note. 

(c)  The  figure  (■••),  in  a  final  mixed  syl'able  unaccent- 
ed, is  short  o. 

E.  g.  unaccented,  as  0  j?  *1  vdy-yd-qbm.  With  accent,  as  D^N"  hd- 
Sd-d/teun,  long  a. 


§§  67 09.    QAMETS  HHATEPH. PATTAHIT  FURTIVE.  31 

Remark.  All  the  cases,  a,  b,  c,  are  virtually  one  and  the  same ;  i.  e. 
they  are  all  cases  of  (  )  in  a  mixed,  unaccented  syllable  ;  e.  g.  HHSft 
hhbkh~md,  DT2=2*lFir2  bbl-lim,  ftg»3=Dj3»2  vdy-yd-qum,  all  the  same 
virtually,  as  in  the  rule  a  above. 

IT.    (iamets  Hlmlopli  in  a  simple  syllable. 

§  67.  The  figure  (t)  is  o  medial  in  a  simple  syllable, 
(a)  When  a  short  o,  i.  e.  Qamets  Hhateph,  immediately 
follows. 

E.  g.  ^V^'S  po-bl-khd,  "^Uj?  qo-tbbb-khd.  But  here,  (the  reverse  of 
§  66.  a),  a  Metheg  always  stands  after  the  first  o,  i.  e.  o  medial. 

Note.  But  there  are  cases  here,  where  etymology  only  can  distin- 
guish;  e-  g.  "'SttjS  qd-tbn-nl,  (with  Metheg  according  to  §86.  a);  not 
qo-tbn-ni,  for  the  root  is  'jEp  qd-tbn. 

(b)  When  a  very  short  o,  i.  e.  the  composite  Sheva, 
Hhateph  Qamets  (T.),  immediately  follows. 

E.  g.  i^JfB  po-v"lb,  "HrlB  bo-hh°ri.  Metheg  always  stands  after  the 
(    )  here  also. 

Note.  Here,  also,  etymology  alone  can  determine  the  reading,  in 
some  cases.  E.  g.  rr:Nr  hd-H°riiy-yd,  because  n  is  the  article,  (§  162. 
§  152.  a.  2);  !t;N2  bd-Wniy-yd,  because  2  has  the  article  included  in 
it,  (§  152.  note)  ;  SV3N2  bo-H"jny-yd,  because  2  is  the  simple  preposi- 
tion 2,  §  139. 

§68.  The  nouns  tFttJIid  sho-ra-shim (from  SJ'yib'),  and  Cvi;"p  qo-dlw- 
shim  (from  U^'p),  are  altogether  anomalous  in  their  reading. 

Pattahh  furtive. 

§  69.  This  is  a  short  Pattahh,  employed  for  the  sake 
of  case  or  euphony,  when  a  word  has  cither  of  the  Gut- 
turals, n,  H,  2,  at  the  end  of  its  final  syllable,  preceded 
by  a  long  vowel  not  of  the  A  class. 

E.  g.  rr^nr.  gd-bho"h,  rjll  ru"hh,  5"2  r<~"3>.  In  order  to  pronounce 
these,  lay  the  stress  of  the  voice  on  the  proper  vowel,  and  just  touch 
the  Pattahh  ;  somewhat  as  in  the  English  words,  (rial,  vial,  etc.  The 
furtive  Pattahh  is  sounded  before  the  final  consonant.  As  it  is  merely 
a  euphonic  help,  and  belongs  not  to  the  essential  form  of  the  word  ;  so 
it  falls  away,  as  soon  as  the  syllable  in  which  it  stands  changes  its  po- 
sition ;  c.  g.  rp-i  ru"hh,  plur.  nini  ru-hhbth. 

Note.    Aleph  never  takes  Pattahh  furtive, 


3'2  §§  70 — 7M.    B10HS8I  HRTB. 


DAGHESH. 

§  70.  Daghesh  is  a  point  in  the  bosom  of  a  letter,  Mid 
serves  two  purposes;  (I)  To  double  a  letter;  (2)  To 
remove  its  aspiration. 

§  71.  When  Daghesh  serves  to  double  the  letter  in 
Which  it  is  written,  it  is  called  Daghesh  forte.  W  lien  it 
only  removes  the  aspiration,  it  is  culled  Daghesh  lene. 

Note.  There  is  a  third  kind  of  Daghesh,  whirl)  doubles  a  letter, 
bnt  is  designed  merely  to  regulate  some  peculiar  mode  of  pronouncing 
certain  words,  and  belongs  not  to  the  general  analogy  of  the  language. 
It  is  called  Daghesh  euphonic. 

I.     Daghesh  forte. 

§  72.  Distinction  of  Daghesh  forte  and  Daghesh  lene.  The  former 
is  never  written  in  the  final  letter  of  a  word,  unless  followed  by  a  vow- 
el ;  nor  in  the  first  letter,  (but  Daghesh  euphonic  usually  appears 
here)  ;  and  it  is  always  immediately  preceded  by  a  vowel-sound.  This 
last  circumstance  separates  it  entirely  from  Daghesh  lene  ;  which  is 
preceded  immediately  by  a  silent  Sheva,  or  by  a  vowel  in  the  preceding 
word,  with  a  disjunctive  accent  on  that  word  ;  see  §  92  seq. 

§  73.  Orthography  of  Daghesh  forte.  When  the  same  letter  is  to  be 
repeated,  and  the  first  one  takes  a  silent  Sheva,  it  is  the  usual  practice 
to  designate  it  by  the  point  Daghesh  forte  ;  e.g.  r^p  =b!JDP  qit-l<l. 

Note  1.  Still  there  are  many  cases  of  a  different  orthography, 
which  may  be  called  plenary.  E.  g.  I^VS  ts~d-lo,  instead  of  i*S  ;  D'TC'' 
for  DTIP  ysshod-dem,  etc.;  particularly  in  derived  forms  of  words,  as 
nbVp  (not  n  ?p  )  from  nbbj? ,  etc.,  in  which  cases  Daghesh  forte  is 
not  used. 

Note  2.  But  if  the  first  of  two  letters  must  have  a  Sheva  vocal, 
the  sign  Daghesh  is  excluded  ;  e.  g.  D^t's  So-lfhm,  not  D*V?  dl-tlm. 

Note  3.  Practice  not  unfrequently  omits  Daghesh  forte,  when  the 
second  letter  would  have  a  Sheva  vocal;  e.  g.  Ihp^  y'lq-hhu,  instead  of 
!Tr1j5'?  y'lq-qfhhu.  Particularly  is  Daghesh  omitted  in  such  cases,  if  an- 
other letter  of  the  same  kind  immediately  follows  ;  as  Trbn  ,  read  ha- 
lt te,  not  hdl-lu,  because  the  word  stands  for  irVn  ;  which  can  be 
known  only  by  etymology.    Comp.  §46./.  Note. 

Note  4.  Shureq  is  written  in  the  same  manner  as  Daghesh  forte, 
i.  e.  in  the  bosom  of  a  1;  as  1.  It  is,  however,  easily  distinguished. 
"When  the  preceding  letter  has  no  vowel,  the  point  stands  for  Shureq; 
when  it  has  one,  it  stands  for  Daghesh  forte ;  e.  g.  Dip  is  read  qvm. 
but  Dip  is  sounded  qlv-vam. 


§§  74 — 78.    DAOHESH  LENE.  33 

§  74.  Division  of  Daghesh  forte.  It  is,  (a)  Compensa- 
tive ;   i.  c.  merely  supplying  a  letter  omitted  in  the  writing. 

Eg-  T2n2  nd-thdn-nu  for  ^n:,  ttljP  y'ig-gdsh  for  ira:^  (§  107.  a). 
where  3  is  assimilated. 

(0)  Characteristic  ;  i.  e.  distinguishing  a  particular  form 
of  a  word. 

E.  g.  bl?.j5  ,  the  form  of  the  conjugation  Pie/,  in  distinction  from  the 
form  in  Kal,  viz.  b$3fg . 

Note.  In  DN  d^,  prohahly  for  PCN ;  C^ri'iJ  shtta-yim,  for  G^ni'IJ ; 
and  such  cases  as  m 3  kd-rdt.  for  nm3 ;  the  Daghesh  in  the  final 
letter  is  compensative,  although  in  a  peculiar  way. 

II.     Daghesh  Euphonic. 
So  I  would  name  all  those  kinds  of  Daghesh,  which  are  merely  occasional,  and  have  respect  only 
to  modes  of  reading  words,  in  particular  places,  in  a  way  that  is  peculiar. 

[§  7.1).  (a)  Daghesh  conjunctive.  So  the  first  species  of  eu- 
phonic Daghesh  may  be  named.  It  is  frequently  inserted 
in  the  initial  consonant  of  a  word,  when  it  is  preceded  by 
a  vowel  unaccented. 

E.  g.  *^  n"n£  qd-rl-thal-h,  ia-np.h^  ye-hheseb-bo,  iTJTTO  mdz-ze 
=trr'3  .  The  vowels  (  ),  (n  _)  and  ( _  )  are  almost  the  only  ones  em- 
ployed before  Daghesh  conjunctive.  Sometimes  examples  are  found, 
like  TNII  TttTp  qU'tauts-tstHu.  This  euphonic  Daghesh  is  frequent, 
especially  in  the  Psalms.  It  is  rarely  found  after  words  with  an  ac- 
cent on  the  ultimate  ;  and  where  it  is  so,  the  reading  is  doubtful. 

§  76.  {b)  Daghesh  affectuosum,  is  an  euphonic  Daghesh,  sometimes 
inserted  in  the  penult  letter  of  a  word,  when  the  tone  falls  on  the  pe- 
nult syllable  of  the  same  ;  e.  g.  iV^h  hhd-dhel-lu,  instead  of  ^bTft 
hhd-dhtlu;  nnfr  ye-hhdt-tu.  instead  of  TnfP  .  It  were  better  to  call  this 
Daghesh  accented. 

§  77.  (c)  Daghesh  acuting.  This  appears  in  some  cases  where  a 
letter  should  by  analogy  have  a  Sheva  siletit ;  and  it  both  doubles  the 
letter,  and  make9  Sheva  vocal.  E.  g.  n"\2Jj  Rek-lare-hd,  instead  of 
n-OJ$  Hekh-re-hd.] 

Remark.  In  all  cases  of  euphonic  Datrheah,  the  manner  of  reading  only  is  concerned  ;  not  the 
essential  forms  of  words.  The  Daghesh  of  this  kind  is  merely  an  attempt  to  prOMrva  sume  niceties 
of  enunciation. 

Daghesh  Lcnc. 

§  78.  Daghesh  lcnc  belongs  only  to  the  Aspirates,  (^.12 
DSD ,  Beghadh  kephath),  and  is  a  sign  that  they  are  to  be 
pronounced  without  any  aspiration. 


.51  §§  79.'80.    DA&HESH  LENE. 


I'.  -    :  i-  hh,  I'ut  -i  —  l>;  3  =  M,  3  =  A-,  etc.    See  alphabet  No.  II 

Note  I.  Dagheshybrte  also  appears  in  the  Aspirates,  ;t~  often  u 
in  other  letters  But  it  i-  « ;»-il >  distioguished from  Daghesh  /ene ;  for 
Daglx-li./'"N  i>  ;il w ;i v<  preceded  by  a  vowel  belonging  to  the  letter 
immediately  before  it;  while  such  preceding  letter  has  a  silent  She- 
va under  it,  in  case  the  Daghesh  is  lene  ;  or  if  such  preceding  letter 
have   a  proper  vowel,  this  vowel  has  a  disjunctive  accent  upon  it,  §  92. 

Note  2.  Daghesh  forte  in  an  Aspirate,  not  only  doubles  it,  but  also 
(by  usage  in  pronunciation)  removes  the  aspiration  ;  e.g.  "'CN  adp-pi, 
not  Hdph-pi,  although  when  written  out  in  full,  it  would  seem  to  be 
the  latter,  as  ""BBS  . 

§  79.  General  rules  for  the  insertion  of  Daghesh  lent. 
(l)  In  all  Aspirates  standing  at  the  commencement  of  a 
chapter  or  verse. 

E.g.  Gen.  1.1,  rPtiStf^S ,  the  Beth  takes  Daghesh  lene  ;  so  at  the 
beginning  of  a  verse,  Gen.  3:  5,  "'S  fa,  (not  "'a  khi),  etc. 

(2)  In  other  cases,  after  a  silent  Sheva,  either  express 
or  implied. 

E.  g.  in  rH^E,  Tav  has  a  Daghesh  lene,  after  a  silent  Sheva  ex- 
pressed ;  in  "l3B  !?5  ,  Pe  has  one  after  a  Sheva  implied  under  the  r  ,  §  52. 

(.3)  After  a  disjunctive  accent,  even  when  a  pure 
vowel,  or  one  with  a  quiescent  letter,  precedes,  an  Aspi- 
rate takes  a  Daghesh  lene. 

E.g.  Ps.  1:3,  y$3  ri^rrn ,  where  the  Kaph  must  be  aspirated, 
were  it  not  that  the  disjunctive  accent,  Rebhi"?,  is  on  the  preceding 
syllable  rT .  And  so  of  all  the  other  Disjunctives.  See  the  accents, 
§  92  seq. 

§  80.  On  the  contrary,  the  Aspirates  reject  Daghesh 
lene,  when  thev  stand  next  after  a  vocal  Sheva.  or  after  a 
simple  syllable,  whether  this  be  in  the  same  word,  or  at 
the  end  of  a  preceding  one  which  has  no  disjunctive  ac- 
cent upon  it. 

E.g.  Gen.  1:  2,  ^fin  rtrj*rn .  where  the  Tav  in  rTf^-'!  follows  a 
vocal  Sheva  (*  y?)  ;  and  in  "Tin  tho-hm  (not  lo-hu),  the  n  follows  a 
vowel  with  a  quiescent  letter,  but  that  vowel  is  associated  with  a  con- 
junctive accent  (  s  Merka),  and  therefore  n  remains  aspirated.  So 
after  a  composite  Sheva;  e.g.  "isr  Vbhudh  (not  9*bodh\  because  such 
Sheva  is  always  vocal,  §  46.  a. 

Note.  In  cases  where  a  mere  Pattahh  furtive  precedes  an  Aspirate, 


§§  81.  82.    DAGHESH  LENE.  3£> 


it  takes  Daghesh   lene  ;  e.  g.   firjo?   la-qu"hlit,  so  written  instead  of 
nt\p_\ ,  §  233.  Note. 

§81.  Exceptions.  Etymology  and  special  usage  have  made  many 
exceptions  to  these  general  rules. 

[(l)  An  Aspirate,  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  and  derived 
by  inflection  from  a  word  which  excluded  Daghesh  lene, 
does  not  admit  such  a  Daghesh. 

E.  g.  TE-n  ridh-phu  (not  ISTn)  because  the  ground-form  is  Spi  , 
where  the  Fe,  being  immediately  preceded  by  a  Hholem,  cannot  take 
a  Daghesh  lene,  §  80.  So  "ob'3  mal-khe,  ground  form  C*2b?2  ,  in 
which  3  is  preceded  by  a  vowel;  T  31^  ya-dz-bhii,  ground  form  3TJ£  , 
where  2,  having  a  vowel  before  it,  cannot  receive  Daghesh  lene  ;  In- 
finitive mode  *U2  btghddh,  and  with  suffix  i"^  bigh-dho,  because,  in 
the  ground-form,  1  has  a  vowel  before  it. 

(2)  Loose  prefixes,  (which  in  fact  are  separate  words), 
do  not  change  the  state  of  aspiration  in  regard  to  the  sec- 
ond letter  of  a  word. 

E.  g.  2n3 ,  with  the  preposition  2  prefixed,  2n33  Mkh-thabh  (not 
2n23)  ;  "P23,  with  3,  T233  kikh-pldr  (not  -PE33)  ;  rlSa  ,  with  *5, 
r-in.-ii  llgh-bhul  (not  rns^b ),  etc. 

Note  1.  The  Infinitive  mode,  with  such  a  loose  prefix,  varies  in 
its  usage.  E.  g.  from  120  ,  Infin.  ISO  ,  with  prefix  r  ,  "l*B&*?  Hs-podh  ; 
and  such  is  the  common  usage.  But  we  find  also,  b?:  ,  Infin.  b"B3  ,  with 
prefix  2  ,  Vs«2  bin-phol ;  with  3  ,  2*333  kln-phdl ;  but  with  ^  ,  Vcrr  /in- 

Note  2.  But  when  the  prefix  is  closely  united  to,  i.  e.  constitutes  an 
essential  part  of,  the  word  itself,  then  the  general  rule  (§  79.  2)  is 
followed  ;  e.  g.  1B0"]  yu-podh  (not  isp")i  Fut.  of  Kal,  from  the  root 
123  sd-phddh  ;  or,  if  you  please,  from  the  Infinitive  form,  1ED  sf- 
phbdh.  So  in  Hiphil,  l^Ston  his-pil  (not  r^E/an),  from  2ETIJ .  In  all 
such  cases,  the  prefix  is  an  essential  formative  part  of  the  word. 

§  82.  Particular  exceptions  to  the  general  rules. 

I.       licjci'l    ll:i»lii'-ili    lour-. 

(a)  The  suffix  pronouns,  Sr,  23,  "|3  .  (b)  Generally,  an  Aspirate 
preceding  the  final  syllable  HI  ;  as  m3*:^  ,  ITHS? ,  WIJ^  ,  etc. ;  but 
not  always,  as  rnann  tar-buth.  {c)  The  various  forms  of  152  ;  e.  g. 
T"n3,  ^las,  etc. 

If.    Admit  it  contrary  to  the  general  ruing, 
(d)  Some  words  beginning  with   two  Aspirates,  viz.   22,   23,   33  ; 
e.  g.  Jer.  3:  25,  Wfjaha  ttSawfa  ;    Ex.  II :  17,  liJiBS  ^na3«l  ;    Is. 
10:  9,  IB^SS'lM  «b;    but  in  all  such  cases,  manuscripts  and  edition-' 


36  §§#{,   H|.     KAI'llL. MM'I'IU 


differ;  some  extending  the  rule,  BO  ;i-  to  begin  with  Daghesh  lene,  in 
most  cases  where  a  word  commences  with  two  Aspirates;  others, 
scarcely  observing1  such  a  ride  at  all  ;  e.  g.  Michaelis1  Hebrew  Hible. 
(e)  A  few  words  which  usage  only  has  excepted  from  the  general 
rule;  e.g.  "*fV9  from  rr^,  *%&")  from  [pDtfp .  (/)  An  apparent 
exception  is  an  Aspirate  after  rnrs*  ,  which  takes  Daghesh  lene.  But 
the  Hebrews  read  this  word  Tflfil  ti"dd-ndy,  which  ends  with  a  conso- 
nant y  having  a  silent  Sheva.] 

Rrmark.  The  detail  of  Daghosh  lene,  as  to  some  few  words  and  forms,  is  not  regulated  by  any 
established  usage  ;  the  Masoni,  the  Rabbins,  manuscripts,  and  editions,  differing  in  respect  to  some 
particulars.  But  as  nothing  important  in  Grammar  depends  on  the  insertion  or  omission  of  Da- 
ghesh, in  such  cases,  the  student  need  not  be  perplexed,  if  ho  occasionally  meet  with  instances  not 
conformed  to  the  general  principles.  Mistakes  in  printing  and  transcribing  have  occasioned  some 
of  these  anomalies  ;  and  conceit  has  increased  the  number. 

RAPHE. 

§  83.   Raphe  (n£1 )  means  soft.     It  is  a  small  parallel 

stroke,  of  the  same  form  as  Pattahh,  put  over  Aspirates,  to 

show  that  they  retain  their  aspiration;    e.  g.  SlTUD    kha- 

bhedha;   and  so  it  is  directly  the  opposite  of  Daghesh  lene. 

The  printed  editions  of  the  Hebrew  Scriptures  have  long  ceased 
to  use  this  sign,  (which  indeed  is  quite  superfluous),  with  the  excep- 
tion of  a  very  few  solitary  cases;  e.  g.  Judg.  16  :  16,  28.  Num.  32: 
42,  in  Van  der  Hooght.  In  ancient  manuscripts,  it  was  very  common; 
and  it  was  sometimes  employed,  moreover,  to  shew  that  Daghesh  forte 
was  omitted ;  sometimes,  that  Mappiq  did  not  belong  to  n  ;  and  some- 
times, to  note  that  iV  and  n,  at  the  end  of  words,  were  quiescent. 

MAPPIQ. 

§  84.     Mappiq  (  fSE  )  is  a   point   in  the   bosom   of  a 

final  H,  (which  is  almost  always  quiescent),  denoting   that 

it  is  moveable. 

E-  K-  "*  yah,  (j"P  would  read  yd) ;  rins  ga-bhah,  (~na  would  read 
gd-bhd). 

Note.  Mappiq  is  now  used  only  in  final  n  ;  but  in  some  Hebrew- 
manuscripts,  it  is  found  in  the  other  Quiescents,  denoting  that  they 
are  moveable. 


§§  85—87.      AIETHEGII.  37 

METHEGH. 

§  85.  Methegh  (SHE)  is  a  small  perpendicular  mark  (i  ), 
preceding  the  tone-syllable  more  or  less,  according  to  the 
various  purposes  for  which  it  is  employed,  and  denoting  a 
secondary  or  half-accent,  analogous  to  that  on  the  first  syl- 
lable of  our  English  words  undertake,  nomination,  etc. 

The  word  Methegh,  (fraenum,  retinaculum),  denotes,  when  technically  employed,  a  holding;  in  or 
restraint  of  the  voice,  viz.  in  reading,  decora  simpcnsio  vocis) ;  which,  of  course,  gives  a  kind  of 
halftone  or  accent  to  the  syllable.  It  does  not,  like  the  other  accents,  relate  to  the  connexion  of 
words  with  each  other,  but  only  to  the  manner  of  reading  the  syllable  on  which  it  is  placed  ;  and 
is  therefore  of  comparatively  little  importance  to  us. 

Note.  The  mark  (  ),  on  the  last  or  penult  syllable  of  a  verse,  is 
always  the  accent  Silluq  (§  93),  not  Methegh. 

[§  86.  Manuscripts  and  editions  differ  widely  as  to  the  frequency  of 
using  Methegh;  the  Spanish  manuscripts  exhibiting  it  very  sparingly, 
the  German  ones  very  frequently.  The  Codex  Cassel.  scarcely  has 
it  at  all.  In  regard  to  many  cases,  the  Jewish  grammarians  themselves 
are  not  agreed  about  the  use  of  it.  Consequently  there  is  much  dis- 
crepancy, among  our  best  Hebrew  bibles,  respecting  it. 

§  87.  The  cases  in  which  grammarians  and  critical  ed- 
itors generally  agree  that  Methegh  ought  to  be  employed, 
and  in  which,  for  the  most  part,  it  usually  is  employed,  arc 
as  follows,  viz. 

(o)  Uniformly  employed,  before  all  the  composite  Shevas,  when  they 
are  preceded  by  a  vowel,  (and  technically  called  in  this  case,  -T^fitlQ 
mn-H"rikh)  ;  e.g.  "TO**,  (jbrTJ,  lOSjn,  tt$P.*,  "l"r-N,etc.  (6)  Almost  uni- 
formly the  Methegh  is  retained,  in  such  cases,  after  the  composite  Sheva 
has  fallen  away  by  inflection,  etc. ;  e.  g.  "fay,  by  inflection  ITajf,  pre- 
serving the  Methegh,  (or  this  case  may  be  ranked  with  e  below),  (c) 
After  a  long  vowel,  next  before  the  tone  syllable,  and  followed  by 
Sheva  vocal;  e.g.  nrrtt,  "n^n,  "W-pn,  rrnrin,  ^Ira*  with  Qibbuts 
vicarious,  (rf)  The  verbs  rrn  and  FPfJ  ,  when  they  take  formative 
or  other  prefixes  with  a  short  vowel,  employ  Metheg  after  such  vow- 
el; e.g.  rrirr,  rrVrib , n;yn  imp.  with  i,  Gen.  12:2,  n^trj,  etc.; 

nearly  without  exception,  in  good  editions.  In  principle,  tli is  may  be 
classed  with  h  below,  (e)  Very  generally,  on  the  second  syllable  be- 
fore the  tone,  where  it  is  a  simple  one  ;  as  DlfiJH,  jnav  •  if)  But  if 
this  be  a  mixed  syllable,  then  on  the  third  before  the  tone,  provided 
it  be  simple  ;  e.  g.  "VrtMl  ,  JTjaVrjJJI .  {g)  After  a  short  rowel  made 
long  by  position  (§  33),  before  a  letter  which  excludes  a  Daghesh 


;{,S  §  87.      METHEGH. 

forte  ;  as  OSJrin  ,  B^ha ,  rtsya^  ,  *)~}?,'}  5  nibina  ,  etc  ;  but  this 
is  sometimes  neglected  ,  as  *]£n~  ;  and  commonly  so,  in  regard  to 
Hhircq,  as  I'iel  D"  ,  r~: ,  etc.  without  Methegh. 

The  qualifying  terms,  ofaieet  uniformly,  eery  generally,  will  of  course  adrertise  the  siudcnt, 
thai  in'  li  nut  toezpeel  uniformity  in  the  cam  ranged  andei  them. 

On  the  other  hand,  there  is  great  diversity  of  opinion 
and  practice  about  the  following  cases,  in  which  Methegh 
is  sometimes  employed  ;   viz. 

(/i)  Occasionally,  but  not  uniformly,  after  a  short  vowel  in  a  mixed 
syllable,  (not  made  by  Daghesh  forte),  especially  after  Pattahh 
and  short  Hhireq,  Methegh  is  placed,  sometimes  on  the  first,  and  some- 
times on  the  second  syllable  before  the  tone;  e.  g.  on  the  first,  as 
K-inp,  rih-\'j>  ,  !»5^rr  ,  tafg-JTb  ,  s5ao  Is.  10 :  34,  H"|a  Ps.  76  :  12, 
^n37']  ,  1'b255q!i;  with  other  short  vowels,  rt7.ni  {d  above),  nan" , 
J-n'J'C  shomra,  "iinp  qdrbhan'ih.-\~  dbrbhan,  *iHl39  Vmndhkha,  etc.; 
on  the  second,  as  'nriJPRSJn,  Ijp-iBn'"!,  t3^t"£n»,  etc.  The  cases  with 
other  vowels  than  Pattahh  or  short  Hhireq,  are  rare,  (i)  On  the  first 
syllable  of  a  polysyllabic  word,  when  this  syllable  ends  with  a  Da- 
ghesh'd  letter  ;  e.  g.  !=p\-2,  a(3rTti«i ,  a^njJH  ,  -ntStt  ,etc. ;  espe- 
cially when  the  first  letter  is  Vav  conversive,  Mem  prefix,  or  rr  article. 

{j)  Very  seldom,  after  a  vocal  Sheva  under  the  first  letter;  as 
nNl ,  Ittto,  -O"  ;  more  rarely  still,  even  before  Sheva  initial,  as  nsp  , 
Est.  9:  7 — 9,  ten  times.  In  these  cases  it  is  called  Methegh  itiilial ;  the 
older  Jewish  grammarians  named  it  N*?a  ,  mugitus ;  a  name  afterwards 
extended  to  Methegh  generally. 

In  respect  to  the  use  of  Methegh   before  a  Maqqcph  ; 

(/)  The  general  principle  is  the  same  as  if  the  two  words 
joined  by  the  Maqqeph  were  one,  (they  being  read  as  one);  so  that 
the  above  rules  generally  apply;  e.g.  ■'a-^JWD,  c;  Vj-riN")"1,  h; 
v,2S>-'>3  ,  e  ;  y- iNrj-1— !P3  ,  e,  etc.  But  (m),  in  many  cases,  long  mon- 
osyllables before  Maqqeph  take  a  Methegh,  (often  otherwise),  although 
a  tone  syllable  follows  immediately;  e.  g.  bNTTn  .  r"T-k\;"r~;  and  ev- 
en when  it  does  not,  and  the  monosyllable  is  a  mixed  one;  as  -z-l* 
D"1N  ,  etc.,  contrary  to  e.  Short  vowels  before  Maqqeph  commonly 
reject  Methegh  ;  as  rP^—ii* ,  etc. 

Such  are  the  numerous  and  very  indefinite,  (not  to  say,  contradictory),  principles  for  the  use  of 
Methegh.  No  wonder,  that  no  two  editions  or  manuscripts  agree  in  regard  to  it.  Some  of  the  very 
words  employed  here  as  examples,  are  differently  marked  in  different  editions. 

Note.  1.  The  conjunction  n  u,  and,  does  not  usually  receive  Me- 
thegh. 

Note.  2.  Several  Metheghs  may  appear  on  the  same  word,  if  ttV 


§§  88,  89.    MAQQKPH.  3& 


different  rules  for  writing  it  should  require  them  ;  e.  g.  ErpN^N^  ,  for 
the  Methegh  on  £  ,  see  e  ahove  ;  for  that  on  2§,  see  a. 

Note.  3.  Instead  of  Metheg,  the  conjunctive  accents,  (especially 
Munahh,  Qadma,  and  Merka,  §  93),  are  frequently  used,  when  a  word 
has  a  distinctive  accent  upon  it  ;  e.g.  D"1"!;^?:'::1]  with  Munahh  under  £, 
instead  of  D-Hanob5!  with  Methegh  ;  and  so  in  very  many  cases.] 

MAQQEPH. 

§  88.  Maqqeph,  (v)£ft  ,  somewhat  like  our  hyphen), 
connects  two  words  together,  and  makes  them  as  one,  in 
respect  to  Jnterpunction  and  reading. 

E.  g.  L3?5bt8n~rrtt  ,  is-npriN: .  Usually,  either  the  former  or 
latter  word,  in  cases  of  this  nature,  is  short ;  as  in  the  examples  pro- 
duced. 

§  89.  The  word  before  Maqqeph  throws  off  its  tonic 
accent ;  and  a  long  vowel  in  its  final  syllabic,  is  for  the 
most  part  shortened,  if  pure. 

E.g.  y"-;N!T"bi',  where  b§  has  no  accent,  Gen.  1:  15.  For  the 
reason  why  the  long  vowels  before  Maqqeph  (which  removes  the 
tone)  are  shortened,  see  §  36.  §  120.  a.  But  here,  the  punctators  are 
not  uniform,  for  we  have  "t^-Sb  llbh-Davidh,  (not  Ti"-^),  and  with- 
out Methegh  too,  in  1  Sam.  24:  6;  but  .alsotfA^-n::  lebh-Sish,  2  K.  12: 
5  ;  and  thus  in  other  cases. 

Note  1.  Maqqeph  sometimes  appears  between  several  words  in 
succession,  as  Vr-"iCN"r2~nN  .  Mostly,  it  is  employed  only  between 
words  closely  connected  in  sense,  e.  g.  between  prepositions  and  their 
nouns,  words  in  regimen,  etc. ;  but  its  use  is  not  confined  to  these,  and 
is  very  arbitrary  in  many  cases,  about  which  manuscripts  and  editions, 
and  also  Jewish  grammarians  and  critics,  disagree.  In  some  few  ca- 
ses it  stands  after  a  polysyllabic  word  ;  as  Mi-^V.^ri"  ,  Gen.  6  :  9. 

Note  2.  Maqqeph  might  itself  well  be  called  a  conjunctive  accent, 
sui  generis,  as  it  in  most  cases  plainly  supplies  the  place  of  a  usual 
Conjunctive.  E.g.  the  famous  Jewish  critics,  Ben  Asher  and  Ben 
Naphthali,  disagree,  in  a  multitude  of  cases,  whether  a  Maqqeph  or  a 
Conjunctive  is  to  be  put  on  certain  words.  It  differs  from  other  Con- 
junctives only  in  this,  viz.  that  it  usually  causes  the  preceding  long  mu- 
table vowel  to  be  shortened.  In  like  manner,  Pesiq,  inserted  between 
words,  is  reckoned  a  disjunctive  accent. 


40  §  00.   hulks  for  EtBADIlta  Mr.niu.w  . 

RULES  FOR  READING  HEBREW. 

§  90.  The  principal  difficulty  is,  to  know  where  to  begin  and  end 
a  syllable.     The  following  rules  may  aid  the  beginner. 

1.  Every  syllable  must  begin  with  a  moveable  letter. 

Note.  Vav  with  Shureq  (r.)  in  the  beginning  of  words  is  the  only 
exception,  and  is  sounded  u  =oo  in  English.  In  ~i£N  $.o-mur,  ~\t2V  3?d- 
mddh,  etc.  the  N  and  3>  are  moveable,  although  we  do  not  sound  them, 
because  we  know  not  what  sound  to  give  them. 

2.  No  syllable  can  have  more  than  two  moveable  letters  before  its 
vowel;  and  none  admits  more  than  one  after  its  vowel,  except  a  final 
syllable,  which  may  have  two. 

3.  Every  vowel  stands  in  a  simple  syllable,  when  followed  by  a 
letter  which  has  a  vowel  belonging  to  it. 

4.  Every  short  vowel  makes  a  mixed  syllable,  and  is  followed  by  a 
simple  Sheva  expressed  or  implied,  or  by  a  Daghesh  forte;  e.  g.  "T."^2 
bar-zel,  in  which  the  first  syllable  has  a  Sheva  expressed;  the  se- 
cond, a  Sheva  implied.     So  Tar  hm-medh  =  1t)»!?  . 

5.  Every  long  vowel  makes  a  mixed  syllable,  when  followed  by  a 
simple  Sheva  expressed  or  implied,  or  by  an  implied  Daghesh  forte, 
provided  such  vowel  be  in  a  tone-syllable.  E. g.  Sp  qam  ;  !"t3«Dp* 
y"iq-(dl-nd,  where  the  Hholem  is  in  a  mixed  tone-syllable  ;  fTB^  yarn- 
md=TVfc'C'*  ;  DN    Heth,  where  Sheva  is  implied  under  the  n. 

6.  A  long  vowel,  not  in  a  tone-syllable,  makes  a  simple  syllable, 
though  followed  by  a  Sheva;  e.  g.  n'rUpT  qd-ttld,  CHa's  bo-ghidhlm ; 
but  not  always  before  a  Maqqeph,  as  Tn-z'r  libh-Dd-zidh. 

7.  Every  vowel  followed  by  a  real  Quiescent  makes  a  simple  syl- 
lable, provided  the  letter  next  after  the  Quiescent  have  a  vowel  be- 
longing to  it,  or  the  quiescent  stands  at  the  end  of  a  word.  E.  g.  in 
rpvbio  re-shlth,  a~\  is  a  simple  syllable,  because  the  'w  which  comes 
next  after  it  has  a  vowel  of  its  own  ;  in  f02  bd-rd,  fit"»  is  a  final  sim- 
pie  syllable. 

8.  Every  vowel  followed  by  a  real  quiescent  makes  a  mixed  syl- 
lable, if  the  next  succeeding  moveable  letter  is  destitute  of  a  vowel. 
E.  g.  in  nM'tt*}  ri-shlth,  rPC  is  a  mixed  syllable.  But  such  syllables 
must  always  be  tone-syllables  ;  excepting  the  very  few  cases  where 
quiescent  1  is  irregularly  used  in  short  syllables,  §  31.  Note  3. 

9.  Every  medial  vowel  stands  in  a  simple  syllable,  §  35. 

10.  Every  composite  Sheva,  and  every  simple  Sheva  vocal,  stands, 
of  course,  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  §  46. 


<§>  90.    READING   OF  THE  HEBREW.  41 


Heading  of  the  Ifebrcw. 

(1)  Gen.  1:  1.  nT:;c02  bfre-shith,  3  with  Daghesh  lene,  79.*1  ;  with 
a  Sheva  under  it,  15.  and  with  a  Sheva  vocal,  46.  —  Nl  re,  with  a  pro- 
tracted vowel,  31,  and  an  Aleph  quiescent,  54  (n).  —  ftMB  shuh,  with 
a  Yodh  quiescent  in  Hhireq,  51  ("') ;  n  without  any  Sheva  expressed, 
having  one  implied,  52  ;  also  without  a  Daghesh  lene,  80. —  nvi."  is  a 
mixed  syllable,  90.  8. 

(2)  WIS  6d-rd,  3  with  Daghesh  lene,  79.  2.  ;  3  in  a  simple  syllable, 
90.  3.  —  N~!  rd,  vowel  protracted,  31,  N  quiescent,  54. 

(3)  DTtVN  nc lo-hiin,  N  with  composite  Sheva,  49,  which  is  movea- 
ble, 4G.  a.  —  b  Id,  simple  syllable,  90.  3,  the  Hholem  is  attached  to 
the  Lamedh,and  is  not  put  over  the  n  ,  61,  because  the  fashion  of  the 
types  will  not  allow  it,  Gl. —  CTJ  him,  with  Yodh  Quiescent,  54,  and 
Hhireq  protracted,  31,  and  in  a  mixed  syllable,  90.  8. 

(4)  nN  ,  Heth,  90.  5.  C^Jri  hdsh-shd-ma-yxm  ;  '&~  hash,  the  sylla- 
ble taking  in  the  sh  which  is  made  by  the  Daghesh  forte  in  the  ttj,  71 
and  73,  also  90.  4.  'ii  slid,  90.  3.  — "Q  ma,  with  Pattahh  pure  and  me- 
dial, 35,  also  with  accent  on  it,  100.  b,  and  in  a  simple  syllable,  90.  9. 
—  D*  yim,  with  short  Hhireq,  141  and  100.  a,  mixed  short  syllable,  90.  4. 

(5)  nCO  victh,  Vav  moveable,  5G.  1.  nN  as  above  in  No.  4. 

(G)  7~!Nn  hd-Hd-rets,  n  90.  3;  N  90.  3,  and  with  N  moveable,  56. 
1.  —  y~\  rets,  with  short  Seghol,  34,  and  in  a  mixed  syllable,  90.  4. 

(7)  Verse  2.  y~>Nrp  vfhd-Hd-rels,  ")  vf,  in  No.  5. 

(8)  nrvrt  hd^yf-ihd,  fi  with  Qamets  long,  66.  a.  —  ";  y,  Yodh 
moveable,  56.  1.  :tn  thd,  n  without  Daghesh  lene,  80,  and  followed 
by  n  quiescent,  54.  (n). 

(9)  nftn  ihd-hu,  n  without  Daghesh  lene,  80.  —  1ft  hu,  with  ft 
moveable,  56.  1,  and  with  T  quiescent,  54.  (")). 

(10)  irv-i  va-bho-hfi,  1  vd,  56.  1,  simple  syllable,  90.  3.-3  bho,  3 
without  Daghesh  lene,  80,  simple  syllable,  90.  3. 

(11)  "pm ,  -jfhhu-shckh,  "1  vf,  56.  1.  ttjn  hhu,  where  the  point  over 
the  right  tooth  of  the  Shin  stands  as  well  for  the  vowel  Hholem  as  to 
mark  sh,  62.  2;  read  as  a  simple  syllable  hho,  90.  3.  —  f$  shtkh,  short 
Seghol  and  mixed  syllable,  see  in  No.  6  ;  with  a  Sheva  in  the  Goal 
Kaph,  52.  1. 

(12)  ^5  "dl,  90.  4.  ",:s  pine,  Pe  with  Daghesh  lene,  79.  2;  Sheva 
vocal,  46.  d.  —  *Z  ni,  54.  (-*). 

(13)  2inn  thfhom,  n  without  Daghesh  lene,  80.  — ni"  hhdm,90  8. 


*  Note.     Tn  this  exemplification,  the  first  niunlier  in  any  reference    itanda  Rn  i  Motion  ($)  in 

I  h«.'  GbUHMI  ;  nt!i«r  rufuronces  following,  this  stand  lor  the  subdit  iniono  under  that  section- 


4v!  92,  !>:{.    a< M  r.Nis. 


(14)  nni  vtrn"hlt,  1  v*  in  No.  5.  rp*l  ru"hh,  with  Pattahh  fur- 
tive, 09. 

(15)  ffWbM H'lo-him,  No.  3.  nsrntt  mfrd-hhe-phfth,  ->  with  Pat- 
tahh  long1,  33.  —  n  /i/tc,  with  Seghol  medial,  35,  and  accented,  §  100. 

(16)  "'?C~V?  Veil  pfni;  No.  12.  D,"3»j  hdm-mu-ylm,  the  Daghesh 
forte  in  Mem  attaches  to  the  first  syllable;  /td/«,  90.  4.  D*73  md-yim, 
see  in  No.  4. 

(17)  Verse  3.  Vdy-yo-mir  tt'lo-him  pehi,  Nor,  with  N  moveable,  56. 
1,  (although  we  do  not  sound  it),  vd-yf-hi  tfor,  (in  cd,  the  Pattahh  has 
a  Daghesh  implied  in  it,  and  is  to  he  regarded  as  long,  59). 

(18)  Verse  4.  6TV1  vdy-ydr,  with  N  otiant  at  the  end,  57.  a.  H'lo-hlm 
cth  hd-Hor  ki-tobh,  vdy-ydbh-del  H  lo-hlin  bin  hd-Hor  ii-bhen  (w,  90.  I. 
Note),  hd-hhb-shikh  (n  /jd,  59). 

(19)  Verse  5.  Vdy-ylq-rd  Hrlo-him  la-Hor  yom,  vtld-hho-shekh  (r  Id, 
59)  qd-rd  lay-Id  (""H  /«y,  66.  a),  vd-ythi  (vd  in  No.  17)  ye-rlbh  vd-ythi 
bho-qer  yom  He-hhddh  (Ne,  58). 


ACCENTS. 

§  92.  The  other  small  marks  of  various  forms  accom- 
panying the  Hebrew  text,  are  accents*  They  are  divid- 
ed into  two  great  classes ;  viz.  such  as  separate  words,  or 
parts  of  sentences,  from  each  other,  which  are  called 
disjunctives;  and  such  as  serve  to  shew  that  words  are  to 
be  closely  connected,  either  in  the  reading,  or  in  the  sense, 
which  are  called  conjunctives. 

[§  93.  The  following  table  exhibits  the  forms,  names,  and  classifica- 
tion of  the  accents.  Some  of  them  are  used  both  in  poetry  and  prose  ; 
and  such  have  no  mark  prefixed.  Some  are  peculiar  to  prose,  and 
these  have  (t)  prefixed.  Others  are  peculiar  to  poetry  ;  and  these 
have  (*)  prefixed.  Poetry  means  (according  to  the  accentuators)  only 
the  books  of  Job,  Psalms,  and  Proverbs,  called  technically  HEN,  these 
being  the  three  initials  of  the  Hebrew  names  of  these  books. 

I.  Disjunctives. 

(1.)   Pause-Accents;  or,  Disjunctives  of  the  first  class. 

1.  {%■ — )  Silluq,    plfcO,   i.e.  stop,  pause.     In   connexion   with   the 
two  large  points  that  always  follow  it,  it  is  named,  p^D 

*  Usually  called  tonic  accentSj  in  order  to  distinguish  them  from  Methegh  which  is  called  th» 
"uphonic  accent. 


§  93.  accents.  43 

p=10s  tpDS  ,  pause  at  the  end  of  a  verse.     Elsewhere,  this 
same  mark  stands  for  Methegh,  §  85.  Note. 
2.  (  — )  Athnahh,  H;nN ,  i.e.  respiration. 
*3.  (  — ')  Merka  Mahpakh,  "jEn^  N3"ifc  ,  a  composite  accent,  see 
Nos.  23.  25. 

(2.)  Occasional  Pause-Accents  ;  or,  Disjunctives  of  the  second  Class. 

t4.  (  —  )  Tiphhha,  n'"QFi  (posterius),  i.  e.  palm  of  the  hand,  from  the 
shape.  It  is  also  named  Nrtin  retardation,  and  (when 
next  before  Silluq  and  Athnahh),  Nb'KE  strong.  In 
poetry,  it  is  merely  a  Conjunctive  ;  see  No.  30. 

*5.  ( —  )  Tiphhha  (anterius)  ;  praepositive,  §  95.  a. 

|6.  (' — )  Zaqeph  Qaton,  yupr  *l£t  ,  i.  e.  elevator  minor,  i 

t7.  (  ,; —  )  Zaqeph  Gadhol,  M*13  ?)j?T  ,  i.  e.  elevator  major. 

f8.  ( "• — )  Segholta,  NPirAD  ,  i.  e.  cluster  of  grapes,  postpositive,  §  95.  a. 

(3.)  Lesser  Disjunctives  ;  or,  Disjunctives  of  the  third  Class. 

|9.  (  : —  )   Tebhir,  -P3PI ,  i.  e.  interruption. 
10.  (' —  )  Rebhia,  Ipn"; ,  i.  e.  resting  upon,  or  lying  over. 
*11.  (  ' —  )  Rebhi'1  Geresh,  a  composite  accent,  with  the  Geresh  prae- 
positive, comp.  Nos.  10,  15,;  also  §  95.  a. 
|12.  (' — )  Pashta,  N13CS  ,  i.e.  expansion  (of  the  voice);  postpositive, 
§  95.  a.'  ' 
13.  ( "— - )  Zarqa,  N|~*1T  ,  i.e.   dispersion;   postpositive.     In   poetry, 
(when  not  postpositive),  it  is  a  mere  Conjunctive  ;  see 
no.  31  ;  also  §  95.  a. 
tl4.  ( — ,  )     Ye.thibh,  STT  ,  i.  e.  sitting ;  praepositive.     Called  also,  ^CID 
trtpltt  tuba  anterior,  and  Vc/.lJ'g  *"lD-ii  tuba  inferior.  §  95.  a, 

*15.  (c — )    Geresh,  X~\i  ,  i.e.   expulsion.     Also    called   D~\p.  shield. 
'icy  *  >S 

(Arabic  /  yjj r'S  clypeus),  and  nVtn  retention  (J/>i   cohi- 

buit).  J 

|16.  (  — )  Garshayim,   0*vy")5 ,   i.e.    double   Geresh.      Also   called 

rrd-jU  ,  "pO^p  ,  dual  and  plural  of  0"}U  shield. 
|17.  ( —  )   Telisha   Gedhola,  nlpia    rV^Vn ,  i.  e.  evulsio  major;  also 

NDHPi ;  praepositive,  §  95.  a. 
tl8.  (v—)  Qarne  Phara,  n~j2  ":nj5  ,  i.e.  the  two  horns  of  a  heifer, 

(from  the  shape). 

19.  (  — )  Pazer,  ^TB,  i.  e.  disperser.     Also  \>\~i\  SJ1 


N  §§  93— 8S.    ton 


20.  (   f  )    Prsic/.  ~~zz  ,  i.  c.   r.c^alinn.      AI*o    NjTCE   reparation.     Al- 

wiiv-  preceded  by  a  Conjunctive,  on  th«-  word  after 
which  it  is  placed. 

II.    CoN.II  NCTIVF.S. 

21.  (  j — *' — )  Munahh,  M315B  ,  i.  e.  joined.     Also  *y&*  *iE;r  ft/on  rec^rr, 

and  *)".'"'  "1B«  '"''f'  amhiilans.  In  poetry  hoth  .mperiue 
and  inferius.  On  an  ultimate  syllable,  and  followed  hy 
Athnahh,  Zarqa,  or  Zaqeph  Qaton,  it  is  railed  "1  ?~  , 
///'/?/,  i.  e.  ascent.  When  placed  at  the  besrinnin<r  of  a 
word,  and  followed  Hy  Zaqeph  Cotton,  it  is  named  :z~Z ": 
Mekharbel,  sieve,  i.e.  agitation  (of  the  voice.) 

22.  (  ' —  )  Qadhma,  &OTJ2  ,  i  e.  before. 

23.  (  — )  Mcrka,  N2-ya   (apoc.  of  NS^N^)  i.e.  prolonging;    also 

T24.  (  — )  Mcrka  Khephula,  nblEO  NS-1?,  i.  e.  Merka  doubled.     Al- 
so 'P'lEJiri  l1"}.!5!,  two  rods. 

25.  (  — " — )  Mahpakh,   "fsrva  .   i.e.  inversion.     Also   ?J9na   1D\I3  , 

crooked  trumpet,  1~^~  "IE-  inverted  trumpet.  In  poetry, 
superius  or  inferius  ;  in  prose,  inferius. 

26.  (' — )  Shahheleth,  n^SJb'Jj »  '•  e-  chain. 
|27.  (, —  )  Darga,  i"t2~n,  i.  e.  steps,  gradation. 

t28.  ( — )   'Jelisha  Qetanna,  ~:E:p  ~ W^PI,  i.e.  evulsio  minor.     Also 
FjttJbpl  eradicalor  ?     Postpositive,  §  95.  a. 
29.  (  — )    Yerafih,  i";"V  ,  i.  e.  moon.     Also  i^i",~]2    hV  //;e  moon  a 
day  old,  JT^J?  round,  ^J:  2  wheel. 

*30.  (f — )   Tiphhha  (posterius),  in  poetry  a  Conjunctive  ;  comp.no.  4. 

*31.  ( — ~)  Zarqa,  in  poetry,  a  Conjunctive   when  not  postpositive; 
see  No.  13.] 

§  94.  The  accents  are  said  lo  be  subservient  to  three 
purposes ;  viz.  (l)  To  mark  the  tone-svllable.  (2)  To 
serve  as  signs  of  interpunction.  (.3)  To  regulate  the  read- 
ing, or  rather,  the  cant  Hinting  of  the  Scriptures. 

§  95.  To  mark  the  tone-syllable,  is  what  they  generally 
do.      But  the  cases  of  exception  are  very  numerous. 

[(a)  Seven  of  them  are  always  confined  to  the  same  position,  let  the 
tone  be  where  it  may;  e.2f.  Segholta,  Pashta.  Zarqa  (Xo.  13).  and  Teli- 
sha  Qetanna,  must  always  be  put  over  the  last  letter  of  a  word,  (and  are 
therefore  called  postpositive)  ;    while  Tiphhha  anterius,  Yethibh,  and 


§  96.  ACCENTS  AS  SIGNS  OF  TONE OF  INTERPUNCTION.      45 


Telisha  Gedhola  belong  only  to  the  first  letter  of  a  word,  (and  are 
therefore  called  praepositive)  ;  see  the  Table.  Of  course,  these  ac- 
cents sometimes  fall  in  with  the  tone-syllable  ;  but  oftentimes  they  do 
not  fall  in  with  it. 

The  s Indent,  therefore,  can  never  depend  on  them  an  universal  guides,  in  respect  to  the  tone 
of  words.     He  must  resort  to  the  general  principles  which  regulate  the  tone,  in  all  doubtful  cases. 

(6)  Many  words  have  two  accents  on  them.  In  this  case,  if  both 
accents  are  of  the  same  form,  ihe  Jirst  marks  the  tone;  e.g.  strin,  with 
the  tone  on  the  penult.  If  the  accents  are  of  different  forms,  then  the 
last  (left  hand  one)  marks  the  tone-syllable  ;  i.  e.  if  it  belong  to  those 
accents  which  always  mark  the  tone.  E.  g.  D'Hsi'alrl ,  where  c^"i_is 
acuted.     Here  is  one  Conjunctive*  and  one  Disjunctive,  upon  the  word; 

but  sometimes  there  are  two  Disjunctives,  as  ^2*lp  ,  Lev.  10:  4  ;  even 

t  p  ■ 

two  on  the  same  monosyllable,  as  ni  ,  Gen.  5:  29  ;  often  two  Conjunc- 
tives are  put  upon  one  word,  as  bVlS  ,  Ps.  96  :  4. 

AJl  this  shews  the  utter  improbability  that  the  accents  were  originally  invented  for  the  pur- 
pose of  marking  the  tone.  The  numerous  cases  of  tluulilc  accentuation,  and  of  praepositire  and 
postpo.-iiliri  "it.  tits  il :.!  do  not  coincide  with  the  tone  syllable,  prove  that  the  marking  of  it  by  the 
accents  in  general,  is  a  secondary,  and  not  a  primary  object  of  these  signs.  But  if  the  cantillation 
is  marked  by  the  accents,  §  97,  then  two  accents  may  both  be  regarded,  when  on  the  same  sylla- 
ble ;  but  not  on  any  other  ground. 

§  96.  Accents  as  signs  of  inter punction.  This  is  the  use  most  com- 
monly assigned  to  them  as  the  principal  one.  In  many  cases  they  ac- 
cord well  with  the  divisions  of  sense.  In  poetical  books,  the  pause- 
accents  are  useful  in  marking  the  end  of  aiiyoi^  as  they  for  the  most 
part  do  this  with  accuracy.  But  in  all  parts  of  the  Bible,  there  is  a 
multitude  of  cases,  where  the  accents  make  pauses  in  utter  disagree- 
ment with  the  sense  ;  so  obviously  is  this  the  case,  that  the  Punctators 
cannot  be  supposed,  by  any  one,  to  have  been  ignorant  of  it.  E.  g.  in 
Gen.  1:  1,  we  have  DVrrN  ,  i.  e.  a  Pause-accent  (Athnahh)  of  the  lar- 
gest kind,  like  our  colon,  placed  between  a  verb  with  its  subject,  and 
the  accusative  case  which  the  verb  governs ;  and  so,  in  many  hun- 
dreds of  instances.  This  serves  to  shew,  that  the  use  of  the  accents 
by  way  of  intcrpunction,  is  only  secondary. 

Note.  'I'Im   Panse-accents  are  supposed  to  mark  the  greater  divisions  of  the  sense,  (liko  our 

colon,  and  semicolon) ;  the  Disjunctives  of  the  second  class,  subdivide  these;  and  those  of  the 
third  cImi,  make  a  division  of  these  parts  into  mimitci  portions  still,  (like  our  comma,  and,  as  it 
wire,  like  a  half-comma) ;  so  that  a  verso  is  broken  up  into  very  small  portions,  of  one,  two,  or 
three  words  each;  rarely  of  more,  lint  all  this  arrangement  of  accents  basils  regular  order,  for 
t  ho  most  part  ;  for  there  is  a  prescribed  i  snsst  NttOH  of  the  accents,  each  Disjunctive  having  its  ap- 
propriate place, (when  admitted  by  the  nature  and  length  of  a  verse),  and  its  respective  Conjunct  ives 

(shewing  what  words  are  to  be  joined  together),  which  are  regularly  attachod  to  it,  i.  e.  precede  it. 
The  manner  and  order  of  this  CuiistTutinii,  belongs  properly  to  a  treatise  on  the  accents.  Tho  stu- 
dent, who  wishes  to  become  acquainted  with  it,  may  find  it  represented  at  great  length  in   Boston'* 

Tractatus Stigmologicus, Wasmuth's Instilt.  Accent., Abicht de  Vcoentibus;    and  in  the  second 

edition  of  this  Grammar,  in  the  Appendix,  he  will  find  an  abridged  exhibition  of  the  whole  q 


46  §§  07 100.    AlCKNTS,  KTC. TONF.-SYU.AIII.I.. 

(j  97.  Accents  as  signs  of  cantillation.  The  Jews  do  not  read,  but 
cantillate  the  Scripture*;  as  the  Moslemans  do  their  Koran.  The  ac- 
cents direct  this.  The  Koran,  too,  has  marks  for  such  a  pnrpOM.  Tlii> 
appears  plainly  to  have  been  the  original  design  of  the  accent-.  \iz. 
to  guide  the  recitativo.  Now  as  this  was  regulated,  more  or  less,  l>y 
the  tones  of  words,  and  by  the  sense  of  a  passage  ;  so  the  accentuation 
very  often,  (and  more  usually),  accords  with  these  objects;  while  in 
a  multitude  of  cases  it  has  no  direct  reference  to  them. 

For  an  exhibition  in  musical  notes,  of  the  recilaiim  power  of  the  accents,  see  Jablonskii 
Praef.  ad  Bib.  Heb.  $  '24,  and  Bartoloccii  Bibliotheca  Rabbin.  I  V.  p.  431. 

vj  98.  The  proper  place  of  an  accent,  (neither  praeposilive  nor 
postpositive),  is  over,  or  under,  the  left  side  of  the  letter  next  pre- 
ceding the  vowel  in  a  syllable.  The  imperfection  of  types  sometimes 
preveuts  the  printed  books  from  following  this  rule.] 

R--nark.  The  student  should  gradually  niako  himself  acquainted  with  the  accents,  so  as  to 
distinguish,  and  to  name  them.  The  Conjunctives  often  show  wiiat  words  should  lie  connected,  in 
sense;  the  Disjunctives,  which  should  be  separated.  They  serve,  therefore,  as  an  index  of  the 
commentary,  which  the  Accentuators  made  upon  the  Hebrew  text.  In  a  very  great  number  of  ca- 
ses, the  pause-accents,  (and  sometimes  all  the  others),  affect  the  forms  of  words,  by  their  influence 
on  tho  vowels  ;  so  that  the  student  should  by  no  means  supersede  so  much  attention  to  them,  as 
will  enable  him  readily  to  distinguish  their  nature  and  office,  so  far  as  they  have  an  influence  on 
the  tone,  or  interpunction,  or  on  the  vowel-system.  One  must  often  be  in  the  dark  on  these  sub- 
jects, who  is  not  familiar  in  some  degree  with  the  power  of  the  accents. 

Tone-Syllable. 

§  99.  The  general  rule  is,  that  the  tone  is  on  the  last 
syllable* 

To  this  there  are  many  exceptions.   InSyriac  and  Arabic,  the  penult  is  more  generally  accented. 

Note.  Technically  an  Oxytone,  (i.  e.  a  word  with  the  tone  on  the 
ultimate),  is  called  yVr^  Milrd"  {from  below)  ;  a  word  with  the  tone 
on  the  penult,  is  called  b^^  Mib'el,  (from  above). 

§  100.  Exceptions.  Several  classes  of  words  are  penacutcd ; 

(a)  All  Segholate  forms,  i.  e.  those  which  have  a  fur- 
tive vowel  in  their  final  syllable,  §  359. 

[This  vowel  is  almost  universally,  Seghol,  Pattahh,  or  short  Hhireq, 
§34.  In  a  few  cases,  Shureq  and  Hhireq  with  Yodh  appear  to  be 
furtive,  and  consequently  employed  as  short  vowels.  E.g.  in  'irtr  and 
ir>z,  which  stand  for  inn  and  iftz  ;  ^B  ,  for  "'-is  ,  §  120.  b.  In  pro- 
per names  ending  with  ^n*; ,  the  penult  syllable  is  accented,  as  Jirrs"^ 
Miariah;  so  also  in  ^nnUJ^  ?  as  the  1  is  quasi  furtive,  §  120.  6.] 

*  Words  with  the  tone  on  the  ultimate,  are  not  in  this  grammar  marked  with  the  accent,  ex- 
eept  for  sprcial  purposes.  The  reader  will  understand,  therefore,  that  a  word  without  a  tone-ac- 
cent noted,  is  after  this  to  lie  regarded  as  having  the  tone  on  the  ultimate,  the  Syuta-x  excepted. 


§   100.    TONE-SYLLABLE.  47 

(b)  All  duals  are  pcnacutcd ;  and  plurals  of  the  same 
form  with  dun  Is. 

E.  g.  dual,  0"!:^~\  •;  plurals  like  the  dual,  D?5b  ,  b*h'2 ;  in  all  which 
cases  the  final  Hhireq  is  short. 

[(c)  Apocopated  futures  in  verbs  ~P,  which  take  a  fur- 
tive vowel;   as  7^,  §  283.  3.  y.] 

(d)  All  the  forms  of  regular  verbs,  which  receive  for- 
mative suffixes  beginning  with  a  consonant  ;  excepting  those 
which  have  DF1  and  ]T),  §  194.  §  197. 

Exceptions  to  this  rule  may  be  found,  but  they  are  either  the  result  of  error  in  copyists  of 
printers,  or  the  accent  has  been  moved  from  its  proper  place  by  some  of  the  causes  described  in 
$101. 

(e)  In  Hiphil  of  regular  verbs,  all  the  persons  are  pcn- 
acutcd, which  have  Yodh  characteristic  between  the  two 
last  radicals.      The  other  persons  follow  the  rule  in  d. 

(f)  In  Kal,  Niphal,  Hiphil,  and  Hophal  of  verbs  J?, 
the  tone  rests  on  the  penult  in  all  the  persons  which  have 
formative  suffixes  beginning  with  a  voice/,  i.  e.  in  all  the 
persons  where  n_,  1,  or  "l_  is  added  to  the  root. 

But  sometimes  the  tone  is  Milra ;  as  13*1 ,  Imper.  ""In.  Such  ex- 
ceptions are  limited  chiefly  to  Kal. 

Note.  In  all  the  persons  of  these  verhs  which  have  formative  suf- 
fixes beginning  with  a  consonant,  (excepting  the  suffixes  CDFi  and  "jP), 
the  tone  rests  on  the  epenthetic  1  or  \_  §  259,  which  is  inserted  be- 
tween the  verb  and  the  formative  suffix.  To  this  rule  there  are  a 
few  exceptions  ;  as  ViiV'T ,  etc.  where  the  tone  is  on  the  ultimate. 

Poel,  Poal,  and  Ilithpocl  of  these  vorbs  aro  regularly  accented  ;  i.  o.  they  have  their  tone  liko 
the  corresponding  conjugations  in  a  regular  verb. 

(g)  In  Kal,  Niphal,  and  Hiphil  of  verbs  12,  the  tone 
rests  on  the  penult,  in  those  persons  which  have  forma- 
tive suffixes  beginning  with  a  vowel,  i.  e.  the  suff.  !"!_  ,  "1 ,  n_ . 

In  a  few  cases,  the  tone  here  is  on  the  last  syllable ;  as  loft},  Imp. 
■"qilUJ.     This  is  very  rare,  except  in  Kal.     Comp.  above  under/*. 

Note.  As  in  the  case  f  Note,  above,  all  the  persons  of  these  verbs 
which  have  an  epenthetic  i  or  ■,_  ,  §  268.  c,  before  formative  suffixes 
beginning  with  a  consonant,  (excepting  the  suffixes  SP  and  ]Pi),  have 
the  tone  on  the   epenthetic  syllable,  i.  e.  on  the  penult. 

All  the  other  parts  of  the  verbs  IV  are  regularly  accented,  viz. 
Hophal,  Polel,  Polal,  Hithpolel,  and  those  persons  in  Kal  which  have 
formative  suffixes  beginning  with  consonants  and  not  preceded  by  an 


I-  §   100.    TONE  SYLLABLE. 


epenthetic  syllable  (i    or   *,_)  ;   EM    rpp_  ,    etc.      So   participle!   of  these 

verbs,  in  the  fern,  and  plural,  an  regularly  accented.    Comp.  under jC 

(/<,)    The  paragogic  endings,  n     and  n_,  when  Buffixed 

to  verbs,  affect  the  tone  in  the  si  mo  nuuinc  r  U  tlic  /o/- 
mative  suffixes  n_,  t,  and  V  . 

Of  course  they  draw  down  the  tone  upon  the  ultimate,  in  all  cases 
except  such  as  are  noted  above,  under  e,f,  and  g,  where  it  is  penucute 
with  these  paragogics.  E.g.  Milra,  ~~\'2l  for  "1ST,  Imp.  I'iel  of  T3T; 
1-iH  for  rj  ,  Imp.  of  yv  .  JV/i/e/,  nB'bfiJ  for  JON  ,  1  pers.  Fut.  of  22C  ; 
!"P3-|3  for  En  3 ,  from  6»^  ;  rPa/Tps  for  o^p:  ,  from  Dip. 

Note.  n_  and  n_  paragogic  are  rarely  added  to  any  persons,  ex- 
cept those  which  end  with  a  radical  letter  of  the  verb;  and  this  most- 
ly in  the  Fut.  tense.  In  the  Fraeter,  only  the  3d  pers.  feminine,  in  a 
very  few  cases,  receives  a  paragogic  n_.  or  n_  ,  (all  other  apparent 
cases  of  paragoge  in  the  Praeter  being  quite  doubtful) ;  and  this  3d 
pers.  feminine  retains,  like  a  paragogic  noun,  the  accent  on  the  pe~ 
nult,  contrary  to  h  above.  E.g.  rrnN2^~  ,  Josh.  6  .  17;  nru\:£: , 
2  Sam.  1:  26,  with  Pattahh  under  N,  where  we  might  expect  Qamets. 

(i)  Nouns,  pronouns,  adverbs,  and  (in  a  few  cases)  par- 
ticiples, are  penacutcd,  when  they  have  H_  or  !"i_ ,,  jxtra- 
govic  or  local, 

E.  g.  rra*1 ,  mart  ,  !"T3U? ,  FT^sfs  masc.  In  a  few  instances,  the  ac- 
cent in  these  cases  is  found  on  the  ultimate. 

Note.     Yodh  paragogic  always  draws  down  the  accent  upon  itself. 

0)  Verbs,  nouns,  etc.  are  JMilel  with  the  following 
suffix-pronouns;  viz,  *%~r  "0-.,  'O-.j  ^H-,  liTI__ ,  ^r»_, 
HL-,  Hi ,  ^ll,  *ial,  KiL.  IBl,  and  some  others;  also 
with  Tj__,  D_,  ]_,  shortened  from  ^_,  ft_,  ]_:  which 
latter  suffixes  are  Milra. 

The  suffix-pronoun  ^,  preceded  by  a  Sheva  vocal,  is  Milra;  pre- 
ceded by  a  vowel,  Milel ;  e.  g.  1")^-,  but  Vl-?"  . 

(k)  JVun  epenthetic  always  makes  tile  tone  penult :  e.g. 
"OlD1,  nDnp  .  i?Vta  paragogic  always  brings  it  to  the 
final  syllable  ;   as  VMOT ,  but  with  Nun,  l^lTQE] . 

(/)  Pause  accents,  (and  in  a  few  cases,  other  accents), 
occasion  the  tone  to  stand  upon  the  penult,  when  its  regular 
place  would  be  on  the  ultimate;   and  vice  versa. 

E.  g.  laro  ,  W»3 ;  rirro ,  n'aw  . 


§   101.    SHIFTING  OF  THE  TONE-SYLLABLE.  40 


Shifting  of  the  tone-syllable. 

§  101.  The  rules,  in  §99.  §  100,  constitute  the  regular,  usual  prin- 
ciples of  accentuation.  But  the  lone-syllable  is  often  shifted  from  its 
natural  place  ;  e.  g. 

(a)  Vav,  prefixed  to  the  Praetcr  of  verbs,  makes  the 
word  Milra. 

E.  g.  "tf&vi ,  "•n^in  ;  pfcsN ,  p^sst)  ;  Hiph.  ttTa^ri ,  nyasrji . 

So  too  in  verbs  9S  and  19,  §  \00.f  g.  also  in  h. 

Exceptions,  (l)  Always;  the  first  per.  plur.  of  verbs ;  as  WjaJJV. 
(2)  Generally ;  verbs  whose  third  radical  is  a  Quiescent;  as  HN'VI  , 
n^Sl ,  nuil-  (3)  Verbs  with  a  pause-accent  on  the  penult,  (4) 
When  a  tone-syllable  immediately  follows,  the  tone  is  then  commonly 
(not  always)  thrown  back;  as  "151  "^Hr'^]  • 

Note.     Besides  these  exceptions,  there  are  other  occasional  instances  of  exception  to  t  lie  rule  iu 
a  above,  which  either  want  of  consistency,  or  inaccuracy  in  transcribers,  has  occasioned. 

(b)  Vav  conversive,  prefixed   to   the  Future,   commonly 

(not  always)  makes  the  word  Mild. 

E.  g.  ifes?1  ,  *T2N*1  •  In  such  cases,  the  verb  must  end  with  a 
radical  letter,  and  its  penult  syllable  be  simple;  otherwise  the  change 
in  question  is  excluded. 

Note  1.  Apocopated  verbs,  with  a  furtive  final  vowel,  are  all  ac- 
cented on  the  penult,  in  the  Future.     See  §  283.  2.  y. 

Note  2.  Futures  with  Vav  conversive  remain  Milra,  (a)  In  the 
first  pers.  sing. ;  ashnfrl.  {b)  In  verbs  Nr  ;  as  N"V*1.  (c)  With  a 
pause-accent  on  the  final  syllable. 

(c)  The  particle  ;?>*  (not)  before  the  Future,  usually 
(not  always)  makes  it  Mild. 

E.  g.  MDin~!jN  do  not  reprove,  FjDin-rN  you  must  not  add,  with  the 
tone  on  the  penult.  But  here  practice  is  not  uniform,  as  the  accent 
is  sometimes  on  the  ultimate. 

Verbs  nb,  preceded  by  *N  ,  commonly  suffer  both  apocope  and 
retraction  of  the  accent. 

(«i)  A  word  regularly  Milra,  if  immediately  followed 
by  a  tone-syllable,  more  usually  becomes  Milel 

E.g.  il  "'P.iir;,  regularly  accented  "^ft;  liN  FW\,  but  alone, 
H3  3 .  But  as  the  penult  syllable  is  often  not  adapted  to  receive  an 
accent,  and  as  the  change  of  tone  would,  in  some  cases,  have  a  ten- 
dency to  obscure  the  sense  in  reading,  the  usage  in  cpiestion  is  often 
neglected. 


60  §§  102 104.    CRITICAL  MARKS  AND  MASORHTIf  NOTES. 


(e)  The  Inij).  and  Fut  apocopated,  wiili  an  Optative, 
hortative  sense,  commonly  (not  always)  throw  back  the  ac- 
cent. 

E.  g.  "1EV3!"T  keep  thyself,  for  ~\hv7-[ ;  H*}^,  hi  him  see,  for  rN-"  ; 
Pl^.n  for  nc-iri  .  The  Future  always  does  this,  when  it  has  a  furtive 
rowel.] 

Critical  marks,  and  Masoretic  notes. 

[§  102.  In  the  common  editions  of  the  Bihle  with  Masoretic  notes, 
etc.  a  small  circle  over  any  word,  e.g.  NxV",  shews  that  the  margin 
is  to  be  consulted,  either  for  a  different  reading,  (as  Gen.  8  :  17,  N^lr: 
in  the  case  above),  or  for  literae  majores  vel  minores,  Piska,  puncta 
extraordinaria,  etc.  The  mark  (  )  over  words  in  Van  der  Hooght,  etc. 
refers  to  a  marginal  note. 

§  103.  Qiri  and  Ktlhibh.  There  are  a  considerable  number  of 
marginal  readings  (about  1000),  in  our  common  Hebrew  Bibles,  most 
of  which  are  quite  ancient.  Some  of  them  correct  grammatical  anom- 
alies, some  are  euphemisms,  and  some  propose  a  different  word.  They 
are  probably  the  result  of  an  ancient  recension  of  Hebrew  manu- 
scripts. The  marginal  word  is  called  V"}P,  Q.frii  which  means,  read  ; 
i.  e.  this  word  is  read,  instead  of  the  word  in  the  text  to  which  it  re- 
lates, and  which  is  called  STlS  ,  Ktthibh,  i.  e.  written  or  text.  The  vow- 
el-points under  the  Kethibh  belong  to  the  Qeri,  which  is  printed  with- 
out points.  If  a  word  is  omitted  in  the  text,  the  vowel-points  stand  in 
the  place  with  a  small  circle  over  them,  while  the  letters  belonging 
to  them  are  printed  in  the  margin;  as  Judg.  20:  13.  This  is  called 
S^nS  tUb"]  ",")Pi  read  but  not  written.  If  a  word  is  superfluous  in  the 
text,  it  is  left  unpointed  ;  as  Ezek.  48:  16.  This  is  called  "nj:  JC-]  -Tp , 
written  but  not  read. 

§  104.  Literae  majores  et  minores  distinguish  themselves,  §  10. 
Piskd  {aptis)  means  separation,  i.  e.  a  space  left  in  the  text  in  the 
middle  of  a  verse  ;  as  in  Gen.  35  :  22. 

Puncta  extraordinaria  are  marked  thus,  HnbiE  »  i  .  See  Gen.  18  :  9. 
33:  4,  where  the  points  over  the  letters  are  extraordinaria. 

The  Rabbins  regard  these,  as  designating  some  mysterious  significations  of  the  words  over  which 
they  are  placed.  Probably  the  original  design  of  them  was,  to  denote  that  the  reading  was  suspi- 
cious. The  number  of  words  over  which  they  are  found  is  only  fifteen.  For  a  full  account  of  all 
the  marginal  and  other  notes  in  the  Masoretic  editions  of  the  Hebrew  Bible,  see  the  preface  to  Van 
Her  Hooght's  Hebrew  Bible,  §j,  -23—45.] 


PART   II. 

CHANGES  AND  PECULIARITIES  OF  CON 
SONANTS  AND  VOWELS. 


Changes  of  Consonants. 

[§  105.  It  is  a  principle,  occasionally  developed  in  the  Hebrew 
language,  that  letters  of  the  same  organ  are  easily  commuted.  E.  g.  13  , 
^3  ,  P)3 ,  all  mean  back  ;  and  the  like  in  a  number  of  cases,  in  the  dif- 
ferent classes  of  letters  mentioned  in  §  12.  But  changes  of  this  na- 
ture belong  to  lexicography,  as  they  do  not  affect  the  grammatical 
forms  of  words. 

§  106.  The  changes  which  affect  the  consonants,  may 
be  ranked  under  assimilation,  casting  away,  addition,  and 
transposition. 

§  107.  Assimilation.  Several  consonants  are  occasionally 
assimilated  ;   viz. 

(1.)  In  the  first  syllable  of  words  ;  viz.  (a)  Nun,  most  frequently  of 
all ;  e.  g.  Wa  for  ttTM  from  this,  uia?  for  3)S3^ .  This  is  very  com- 
mon in  verbs  "]B  ,  §  252,  but  not  universal.  (6)  Lamedh,  rarely ;  pro- 
bably in  the  article  bn  in  all  cases,  §  163,  as  D^fett^J  for  U"h'D  bfl, 
etc.  Also  in  the  verb  nj3b  ;  as  Fut.  rTj£1,  for  ri£b^ .  (c)  Resh,  very 
seldom;  in  1123N  ,  as  ^Vr/J  instead  of  Wf]  "VPN  ,  who  will  be;  N03 
for  ND"p ,  which  is  the  form  of  the  word  in  Syriac  and  Arabic,  {d) 
Tav,  in  the  praeformative  nrt  (in  Hitbpael),  often  assimilates  itself  to 
the  first  radical  of  the  verb';  e.  g.  ISt-jrl  for  "mnrt ,  etc. ;  see  §  187. 
b.  2.  3.  (e)  Mem,  only  in  a  few  foreign  words ;  as  Vsb  for  fBS^ , 
in  Greek  kafiTxadtg.     (f)   Yodh,  in  some  verbs  *D,  §  251. 

(2.)  In  the  last  syllable  of  words.  In  all  the  cases  under  No.  1,  the 
assimilation,  as  we  have  seen,  is  indicated  by  a  Daghesh  forte  in  the 
following  letter.  But  assimilation  occasionally  happens,  at  the  end  of 
words,  where  a  Daghesh  forte  cannot  be  written,  §  72.  This  takes 
place,  in  cases  where  a  furtive  vowel  would  stand  in  the  final  syllabic 
of  the  word  in  its  full  form ;  e.  g.  nn  for  n:r: ,  RN  for  Fl^H ,  ra  for  na's. , 
etc.  So  also,  nb  for  ri"$,  nftN  for  rrj?$K ,  nijttra  for  nijTJtt* » ,  rnii>;a 
for  nnhtua . 


aS  10S — 110.    CHANGES  OP  CONSONANTS. 


Remark.  All  langaagei  bav<  ■>  practical  tendency  toward  shortening  word", 
and   '    imitating  aome  of  the  letters.     I  .  g.  in  Greek  <.i  //. 

hut  ■iiiii.. ;  and  so  at  the  end  ol  p/ords,  A£ot/(  forWirj    (Gen.  MAvto;),  JUijpr/f  for 

Ji'-i,ii,>-  (Gen.   /i /),'",'>  "".')•      In  l>atiu,  illustris  for  inhtttria,  etc. 

§  108.  Consonants  cast  away  or  dropped.  Instances  of 
(his  nature  occur  ;    viz. 

(«)  .ft  f/te  beginning  of  words,  by  aphaeresis,  when  a  Sheva  is  un- 
der the  letter.  E.  g.  (l)  Meph  ;  as  13rT*a  for  torY*3 n  .  and  so  not  unfre- 
quently.  (2)  Yodh  ;  as  1r  for  ~\\* ,  bl3  for  ^W*  .  (3)  Me m  M  n-/? 
for  npbB  .  (4)  Mm  ;  as  ]n  for  ]r>3  .  It  is  doubtful,  whether  any  let- 
ter which  has  a  proper  vowel,  suffers  aphaeresis.  It  seems  to  he  lim- 
ited to  cases  where  Sheva  is  used  under  it. 

(6)  In  the  middle  of  words,  by  Syncope.  This  happens,  when  a 
Sheva  precedes  the  letter  dropped.  In  case  of  syncope,  the  vowel 
of  the  letter  syncopated,  takes  the  place  of  this  Sheva.  E.  g.  sfra  for 
P)V.N73,  D^-jp  for  D\X-ip;  IKfel  for  "irjVrP ,  ^h\  for  "fcrarV: ;  "^  for 
■>1S  ,  ""3  for  '13  ;  s»ba  for  ^*?a  ;  b3  for  t?3  ,  etc  Syncope  of  N  is  pret- 
ty frequent ;  of  r? ,  very  common;  of  1  and  a,  more  seldom,  except 
in  verbs  n; ;  of  3>,  very  rare. 

(c)  .ft  <//e  end  o/  words,  by  apocope,  (l)  A/iem  and  .Vwn  at  the 
end  of  all  plural  nouns,  etc.  in  the  construct  state,  §  332.  (2)  Perhaps 
Nun  at  the  end  of  some  proper  names;  as  I'Wfi  for  "p^STS  .  (3)  It  final 
is  often  dropped,  when  words  receive  suffixes,  etc. 

Note.  The  omission  or  dropping  of  the  Quiescents  as  such,  (which 
often  happens),  is  treated  of  in  §§  63 — 65. 

§  109.    Consonants  added.   Tin's  sometimes  happens:  viz. 

(a)  At  the  beginning  of  words,  by  prosthesis  ;  e.  g.  b*"2~  and  :v:r.N  : 
*U3  ,  ""IVDK  ;  (so  Greek  y&tg,  *£&&).  {b)  In  thp  middle  of  words,  by 
epenthesis  :  e.  g.  sing.  STMN,  plur.  nVprBWfJ  "^^-^  for  ~[^~N  .  (c)  At 
the  end  of  words,  by  paragoge  ;  as  Ifbop?  ,  'pi-Op*  .  Also  ~_  and  ~_ 
are  frequently  added  ;  so  \_  and  i  sometimes,  to  participles  and  nouns. 
See  §  125.  b.  c.  d. 

§  110.  The  grammatical  transposition  of  letters  is  limit- 
ed principally  to  the  conjugation  Hithpael,  when  it  begins 
with  a  Sibilant;   §  107.  a. 

In  lexicography,  there  are  a  considerable  number  of  transpositions  ; 
e.  g.  r~::  and  JC2^ .  a  lamb  ;  "ISE  aad  '|"~)t .  to  break  :  ~~~~  and  ~r"v  , 
wickedness,  etc.  Such  transpositions  are  most  frequent,  between  the 
Sibilants  sod  Rest. 

Note.  The  exchange  of  a  letter,  for  one  of  a  corresponding  class 
which  may  fill  its  place,  is  not  an  unfrequent  thing  in  lexicography  : 


§§  111 113.     PECULIARITIES  OF  GUTTURALS,  ETC.  53 


as  Try  and  ybv  ,  to  exult ;  ""UD  and  -OO  ,  to  shut  up.  But  these  chan- 
ges belong  not  to  grammar.  In  Hithpael  only,  is  the  transposition  in 
question  a  grammatical  one,  §  187.] 

Peculiarities  of  the  Gutturals  and  Resh. 

§  111.  The  Gutturals  are  never  doubled  in  pronuncia- 
tion; and  Resh,  in  this  respect,  is  like  them.  Hence 
Dao-hesh  forte,  (which  is  a  sign  of  reduplication),  is  not  ad- 
missible in  the  Gutturals  or  in  Resh. 

A  few  cases  only  occur,  of  Daghesh  forte  in  Resh  ;  as  rH3 ,  ^.W, 
nijia ,  etc. 

§  112.  As  a  compensation  for  Daghesh  forte,  excluded 
from  the  Gutturals  and  Resh,  the  preceding  vowel  is 
lengthened,  §  58.  §  59. 

E.  g.  !p3  instead  of  -pa,  D3>5g  instead  of  QJ?«,  ^3  instead  of 
?p3_ ,  etc.  But  n  and  n  commonly  take  Pattahh  long  before  them ;  as 
br.3  instead  ofbrtS;  D^hN  instead  ofD^ntt. 

[Note.  In  a  great  number  of  cases,  Pattahh  long  is  the  compensa- 
tive vowel ;  almost  always  before  t\  and  n  ,  when  the  A  sound  is  re- 
quired. In  other  cases,  Daghesh'd  Hbireq,  i.  e.  Hhireq  including  a 
quiescent  Daghesh'd  letter,  is  sometimes  adopted,  instead  of  Tscri ; 
e.  g.  "liga  (not  "iSja)  instead  of  *\ys  BW-tferj  so  Y*N2  (not  yiiz)  for 
y-N;  ;  also  Qibbuts  long  and  impure  instead  of  Hholem,  as  TTttr.z  (not 
FlEin;)  instead  of  FtJOna  .  It  follows,  that  the  student  must  not  always 
expect  a  vowel  long  in  appearance,  before  the  Gutturals ;  because  _ 
and  _  long,  are  frequently  used  instead  of  _  and  _  .  The  use  of  long 
_  (instead  of  Hholem),  is  unfrequent.] 

§  113.  The  Gutturals  are  prone  to  take  the  A  sound 
before  them;   particularly  in  a  final  syllable. 

E.  g.  yiyti  (Imp.)  instead  of  3?»«>,  'J-y\  instead  of  "l\  ■  Often 
too  in  a  penult  syllable  ;  as  ^y\  instead  of  "153. ,  H^fT  instead  ofifcrP. 

Note  I.  In  almost  all  cases,  where  the.  Jinal  syllable  has  a  Guttu- 
ral at  the  end,  and  has  also  a  mutable  vowel,  that  vowel  is  exchanged 
for  Pattahh;  as  Kal  Imp.  5>»"JJ  instead  of  ?'2'^;  Piel,  ";:C  instead  of 
$13$  ,  etc. 

Note  2.  In  case  the  Jinal  syllable  with  a  Guttural  has  a  long  vow- 
el, which  must  be  retained,  Pattahh  furtive  is  put  before  the  Guttu- 
ral ;  as  SfttaJfl  i  rtlM  ,  etc.     See  §  69. 

Note  3.     Resh  never  takes  a  Pattahh  furtive. 


§§  114 — 117.   PECULIARITIES  of  QUiEsr  r  \tv 


§  1  14.  Instead  of  simple  Sheva  vocal,  the  Gutturals 
take  a  composite  Shcva. 

E.  g.  n'-N'  ,  "]tr\ ,  ^il ;  see  §  49.  Note.  Sheva  simple  stands  un- 
der the  Gutturals,  at  the  end  of  a  mixed  syllable,  after  a  short  vowel, 
and  when  a  silent  Sheva  is  required,  §  50 ;  as  ,,P.:fV  ,  iaftij  . 

Peculiarities  of  Quiesccnts. 

In  treating  of  the  vowels,  it  was  necessary  to  notice  the  quiescent 
and  otiant  power  of  the  letters  NnT,  {Ehevi)  $  53 — 57,  so  far  as 
might  serve  to  illustrate  the  nature  of  the  vowel  sounds,  in  which  the 
Ehevi  quiesce.  Some  more  particular  notice  of  the  various  phases 
and  powers  of  these  letters,  is  proper  here. 

§115.  General  principle  which  regulates  quiescence.  The 
letters  tf,  1,  \  (Evi)  quiesce,  when  a  homogeneous  vowel 
precedes  them  (§  53),  and,  according  to  the  analogy  of 
other  consonants,  they  would  stand  at  the  end  of  a  mixed 
syllabic,  and  take  a  simple  Sheva  silent,  express  or  im- 
plied, §  56.  2. 

E.  g.  8t2£»  instead  of  Nv£tt=tf£7:,  STflWa  instead  of  rtWST'a  , 
DD"1?  instead  of  2D 7"; ,  a^in  instead  of  asftn  . 

Note.  If  the  preceding  vowel  be  naturally  heterogeneous,  still,  in 
very  many  cases,  it  does  not  exclude  quiescence.  But  a  peculiar  ex- 
pedient is  adopted  to  effect  this ;  see  §117.1.  Comp.  with  this,  §  56. 3. 

Such  is  the  general  rule  for  cases  of  quiescence,  (subject  however 
to  many  exceptions).  But  quiescence  is  not  limited  to  this  case  only ; 
for, 

§  116.  Quiescence  sometimes  happens,  when  the  Evi 
would  (by  analogy)  have  a  voxcel ;  specially  when  they 
would  take  a  furtive  one  ;  §  119.  c.  2.  §  120.  c. 

E.  g.  Dip  instead  of  DijD  ,  Dip  instead  of  D-Tlj? ,  SlKSaa  instead  of 
nS$s?B3  ,  Ufttl  instead  of  Sip,  nira  instead  of  nVr-3 ,  rfttfU  instead  of 
rpiiii ;  and  so  often,  when  the  .vowel  preceding  the  furtive  one  is  ho- 
mogeneous. But  usage  only  can  enable  the  learner  to  distinguish 
such  cases. 

§  117.  The  general  rule  demands  that  the  preceding  vowel  should 
be  homogeneous,  as  a  condition  of  quiescence ;  but  quiescence  is  often 
effected,  (in  cases  when  such  preceding  vowel  would  be  naturally  he- 
terogeneous), in  two  different  ways  ;  for, 


§  118.    PECULIARITIES  OF  QUIESCENT*. 


(1)  The  vowel  may  conform  to  the  Quiescent,  in  or- 
der to  become  homogeneous. 

E.  g.  for  3v2;in ,  (which  would  be  the  regular  analogous  form),  is 
substituted  S^Unn,  i.  e.  the  heterogeneous  short  Hhireq  in  the  sylla- 
ble in,  conforms  to,  or  becomes  homogeneous  with,  the  Vav  in  in. 
So  nbi"  for  nbw ,  rf£s  for  nPb-J ,  etc. 

(2)  The  Quiescent  may  conform  to  the  vowel. 

E.  g.  DNp  for  Dip  ,  JlVa  for  i>a  ,  nbu;  for  ibt ,  etc. 

Practice  only  can  tcacli  the  Student,  when  the  cases  which  coine  within  these  rules  take  place. 

§  118.  The  letters  &*,  1,  \  having  a  vowel  of  their  own, 
and  being  preceded  by  a  consonant  with  Sheva,  sometimes 
remit  their  vowel  to  the  place  of  the  preceding  Shei  a,  and 

become  otiant. 

E.  g.  a-'-^N-j  for  D^Jf] ,  llttSK-l  for  'pui'Wn , "Ifita  for  *\Ha  ,  n-;NS 
for  rnNS;  »ia  for'jiia ,  t3=ip  for  Dip ,  ''y  for"1]?,  T3  for  *r£;  Ti^% 
for  nn\V,  fia'W  for  n»>V,  ]inn^3  for  ji-in;:  ,  1>a  (with  Yodh 
omitted)  for  l^a,  etc. 

[Note  1.  This  has  been  named  Syriasm  ;  but  improperly,  since  it 
appears  so  very  often  in  Hebrew,  (taking  all  the  cases  together),  as 
to  shew  that  it  is  a  property  of  the  dialect,  and  not  the  result  of  er- 
ror in  Syraizing  transcribers.  Usage  only  can  determine  the  cases,  in 
which  it  is  admitted. 

Note  2.  Such  cases,  also,  have  been  represented  by  all  the  gram- 
marians as  quiescence,  in  respect  to  N* .  That  they  are  not  so,  but  cas- 
es of  otium,  is  plain  from  the  following  examples;  viz.  rKnpr  (instead 
of  niopb)  ;  but  with  a  sing,  suffix,  intfnpb,  with  a  piural  one, 
DpnM*jpb .  So  Fiaabza  (instead  of  nofcrft),  constr.  state  npNr^3 , 
with  suffix  ^npN^73  .  Aleph,  then,  has  no  effect  on  the  mutability  or 
quantity  of  the  vowel  which  precedes  it,  in  such  cases  ;  consequently  it 
is  otiant.  Instances  of  Vav  and  Yodh  do  not  occur  in  the  same  way  as 
those  above  of  Aleph;  but  such  cases  as  "'a  for  "^a,  is  for  ^13?  •  iVjt 
for  'Pba?,  vran  for  "^ban,  etc.  shew  that  Vav  and  Yodh  do  become  as 
completely  otiant  as  Aleph,  and  on  the  like  principles.  For  etymolo- 
gy's sake,  Yodh  and  Vav  are  retained  in  such  words  as  !~r:\Nt  (for 
ns-N),  £03  (for  N13)  ;  and  in  these  cases,  they  have  the  appearance 
of  being  quiescent,  but  are  in  fact  otiant,  as  the  above  examples  shew. 
The  principle  is  an  extensive  one  in  regard  to  Vav  and  1 '<«//<.  in  verbs 
n?  ,  which  are  properly  Vr  and  *r.  It  will  account  for  a  great  part 
of  the  abridged  forms  of  these  verbs  ;  see  §  281.  In  other  classes  of 
words,  such  otium  of  Yodh  and  Vav  is  far  more  seldom  than  that  of 
Aleph. 


§§   119,   120.    PECULIARITIES  OF  QIMXi   vi-.. 


Note  3.    N,  1,  "*,  being  otiant,  ire  frequently  omitted  in  writing; 

e.  g.  pfea  for  P)%fi*a  ,  brr  for  b:^^,', ;  N3  for  Btia  =  Ria  ,  !|b«  for  ""r^  ; 
13  for  "|,]3,  nba";  for  I"*?**,  etc. ;  see  §  57.  §  03. 

§  119.  Peculiarities  of  Au.rn.  These  are  so  many,  that  they  need 
an  explicit  and  separate  statement. 

(a)  Aleph  is  sometimes,  (I)  A  Guttural ;  as  in  f|DH£  .  (2)  A  Qui- 
escent;  as  in  liOfii1,  N^O  •  (3)  It  is  sometimes  treated  as  a  common 
consonant ;  as  n'~3  ,  plur.  B^fit^S  ,  rTttiMa  bbH-sha.  Usage  only  can  de- 
termine all  the  respective  cases  of  these  different  powers. 

(6)  Aleph  at  the  end  of  a  word  has  no  guttural  power  (comp.  §  G9), 
but  is  either  quiescent,  otiant,  or  employed  like  other  consonants  ;  e.  g. 
quiescent,  as  in  N-i72  ;  otiant,  as  in  MTStai"! ,  N~r*  ,  see  §  57.  b.  a. ;  or 
it  retains  a  common  consonant  power,  e.g.  in  Segholates,  asN:3  ,  plur. 
b^ttbS  ;  N3D  ,  with  suffix  BM3D  ,  sobh-adm. 

(c)  Aleph  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  (l)  Like  other  Gutturals,  it  takes 
a  composite  Sheva  where  they  take  one.  But  in  some  cases,  it  drops 
such  Sheva,  and  quiesces  in  the  preceding  vowel,  lengthening  it ;  e.  g. 
Saab  instead  of  ""iSNb  ,  ta^rfbNb  instead  of  cnVs:  ,  rniM  instead  of 
STlfiM ,  attN  for  SHftHJ,  etc.  comp.  §  152.  c.  2.  These  may  be  called 
cases  of  contraction.  In  I-prTr  ,  the  points  are  not  appropriate ;  for 
the  Jews  read,  ,,:"!Nr=",:'~Nb  ,  as  the  Pattahh  is  long.  The  word, 
however,  is  sui  generis  in  respect  iofonn.  (2)  But  where  the  other 
Gutturals  take  a  Sheva  silent  (§  114.  Note),  Aleph  usually  becomes 
quiescent;  e.  g.  iTlfiCfctt  ,  but  with  another  Guttural,  as  "'nrUDip.  (3) 
Aleph  penult,  in  words  that  would  regularly  be  Segholates,  and  where 
8  would  then  have  a  furtive  vowel,  more  usually  (not  always)  rejects 
such  vowel,  and  quiesces  in  the  preceding  vowel  (if  homogeneous), 
and  lengthens  it;  e.g.  SJ&H  for  cqp,  ONS03  for  rX^"::  ;  see  §  116. 
(4)  Immediately  before  a  vowel,  it  sometimes  remits  that  vowel  to 
the  preceding  letter  with  a  Sheva,  and  becomes   otiant;  see  §  118. 

((/)  Aleph  at  the  beginning  of  a  word.  {\)  If  it  have  a  proper  vow- 
el, it  is  regular.  (2)  If  it  have  a  composite  Sheva,  in  some  few  ca- 
ses, (after  the  manner  of  the  Syriac),  it  employs  a  long  vowel  instead 
of  it;  e.  g.  "jl^N  instead  of  "pax,  C31?0N  for  (3^*08,  T-r'"**  for 
*^brtN.     This  happens  only  at  the  beginning  of  words. 

§  120.  Peculiarities  of  Vav  and  Yodm.  (a)  At  the  end  of  syllables 
and  words,  Vav  and  Yodh,  in  case  they  would  regularly  have  a  silent 
Sheva,  and  are  preceded  by  homogeneous  vowels,  uniformly  quicscc, 
§  115.  (6)  They  quiesce  at  the  end  of  words,  also,  when  they  would 
be  preceded  by  a  silent  Sheva,  or  analogically  would  be  preceded 
by  a  furtive  vowel;  e.g.  ""is  instead  of,?"1B,  \~?  for  TTP,  ^ns  in- 


§§  121 124.    PECULIARITIES  OF  QUIESCENTS.  57 

stead  of  lrb,  IfflTIT  for  ir;mr  with  Paltahh  furtive.     To  this  prin- 
ciple there  are  one  or  two  exceptions  in  respect  to  Vav  ;  e.  g.  liij?. . 

With  it,  the  case  is  different;  e.g.  N'Jn  (instead  of  NUn)  with  N 
otiant ;  on  the  other  hand,  N73 ,  with  N  moveable,  like  the  other  con- 
sonants. 

(c)  Vav  and  Yodh  penult,  which  would  regularly  take  a  furtive 
vowel,  reject  it,  and  quiesce  in  a  preceding  homogeneous  vowel ;  e.  g. 
nibs  instead  of  nVri  ,  FiWi  instead  of  n^n  ,  rP13*0  instead  of  n*ri;r  ; 
comp.  §  119.  c.  3. 

§  121.  Pfxuuarities  of  He.  (a)  .^  the  beginning  and  in  the  middle 
of  words,  it  is  always  a  moveable  consonant.  Apparent  exceptions  are^ 
some  compound  proper  names,  (as  "ilSfTlS  with  quiescent  ri),  which" 
depend  only  on  the  transcriber,  (b)  He,  at  the  end  of  words,  is  near- 
ly always  quiescent ;  as  SiV3  ga-lo,  §  54.  When  moveable,  it  is  mark- 
ed with  Mappiq ;  as  nas  ga-bhah,  §  84.  (c)  It  will  bear  a  furtive 
vowel  before  it  without  quiescence  ;  e.  g.  Mpz  ,  n"^^_ ,  fiOa  ,  etc.  and 
must  in  such  cases  be  considered  as  moveable;  comp.  N  in  §  119. 
6,  in  Nb.3 ;,  etc.  {d)  He  is  frequently  made  otiant,  at  the  end  of  a 
word,  by  a  Daghesh  forte  euphonic;  e.g.  —~-?V2=r\V2  ,  3it:~M75 
mdt-ldbh,  "l~)2  T\'Zj'J  VO-sep-pirl.  But  this  belongs  merely  to  modes  of 
reading. 

§  122.  The  Quiescents  are  sometimes  commuted ;  which  naturally  re- 
sults from  the  fact,  that  the  same  vowels  are  homogeneous  with  differ- 


ents. 

(J)  At  til 

ie  end  oi 

f  wc 

»rds.    E. 

&■ 

N_ 

is  put  for 

rt-» 

as 

^^HFr 

for 

rrlnnp 

N- 

— 

• '— .  } 

- 

itijia 

— 

»m 

n! 

— 

•"*-  t 

- 

Kafcp 

— 

~-^* 

N_ 

— 

n_, 

- 

tf3 

— 

-t 

!"J— 

— 

*-> 

- 

mi/j5tt 

— 

H^p;: 

rr_ 

— 

*-» . 

- 

rrn.2 

— 

N~!?. 

'■)_ 

— 

N_, 

- 

cni 

— 

u;n<-' 

T_ 

— 

rr_ , 

- 

»&» 

— 

rito* 

i_ 

— 

«-,, 

- 

D*l 

— 

din 

i 

— 

*-:i 

- 

r^") 

— 

■jri'N-) 

(2)  Sometimes  in  the  middle  of  words;  as  E3*I$SX  forta^ai:. 
u=pp.  for  ta^p  ,  3?h  for  a;in,  etc: 

§  123.     Quiescents  are  frequently  omitted  in  writing  words,  §63. 

§  124.   The  Quiescents  frequently  suffer  apocope. 

(«)  In  verbs  nr,  in  the  Fut.  and  Imper.,  and  when  they  have  suf- 
fixes ;  §283.  3.  y.  §313. 

(b)  In  nouns  with  suffixes  or  increase,  derived  from  the  same 
class  of  verbs  ;  §  378.  b.] 


58  §§  196 — 1-7.    CHANGES  OF  TIIF.  vow  i  i  | 


8  125.  The  Quiescents,  (with  a  yowel  preceding  them), 
are  often  employed  1>\   way  of  paratroge. 

(a)  Jlleph  is  somelimrs  paragogic,  after  the  syllables,  "'-  ,  i  ,  T  ; 
e.g.  N',J3a=,,p)3  ,  Kta-J=i}in  ,  N^rrj—^'r-  they  go.  This  last  form 
is  a  usual  one  in  Araliic. 

(fc)  Also  n_,  n_,  n_;  e.g.  tfcj?J$,  rfctsj;*;  ]-,  r$n;  *iip%, 

(c)  More  seldom  1  ;  e.  g.  pronoun  suffix  D_  ,  parag.  itt—  ;  so  in  the 
noun  n*rj,  parag.  irpft . 

(rf)  Rarely  \_ ,  as  D^Ja  ,  WJMa ;  but  For///  is  often  inserted  be- 
tween two  words,  united  to  form  a  proper  name;  as  "*q\  man,  b$t 
God,  united  bJO-OJ  Gabriel,  i.  e.  man  of  God. 

Note.  Several  pronouns  nre  of  I  he  same  form  and  sound  as  some  of  these  paragogie  letters.  In 
»uch  cases,  the  connexion  of  the  word  with  the  context  must  determine  whether  such  doubtful 
forms  are  pronouns  or  paragogie  tetters. 


CHANGES  OF  THE  VOWELS. 

§  126.  The  changes,  which  words  in  the  Hebrew  (as  in  other  lan- 
guages) undergo,  in  order  to  designate  their  various  relations  and  sig- 
nifications, are  effected  partly  by  a  change  in  the  vowels,  and  partly  by 
a  change  in  the  consonants.  The  laws  which  regulate  the  vowel- 
changes,  are  the  subject  of  our  present  consideration. 

§  127.  Vowf.ls  mutable  axd  immutable.  The  general 
principle  is,  that  pure  Vowels  are  mutable;  impure  ones  im- 
mutable.     See  §  20.  scq. 

[Exceptions,  (l)  Long  impure  vowels  are  sometimes  exchanged  for 
each  other  ;  as  0^272,  plur.  C'O'liQ  .  (2)  hong  impure  ones,  for  long 
pure  ones ;  as  Imp  2d  pers.  masc.  D^p,  2d  pers.  plur.  fern,  TiZ^/p  with 
Hholem  pure;  Niph.  Fut.  3d  masc.  sing  DIE*  with  Hholem  impure 
and  protracted,  3d  plur.  fern,  nrr^r.  with  Hholem  pure  and  muta- 
ble; Hiph.  Imp.  2d  pers.  plur.  masc.  ^bj5n ,  plur.  fern,  fistcpfl 
with  Tseri  pure.  (3)  Long  impure  vowels  for  short  ones ;  as  plia  , 
const,  b^2  gedhul ;  "?::",  constr.  np3ft.  (  1)  Long  impure  rowels  for 
Shevas ;  e.  g.  rib a  ,  fern.  -r':.'i  .  It*will  of  course  be  understood  that 
all  the  long  pure  vowels  are,  from  their  nature,  mutable. 

All  these  changes,  excepting  No.  1,  and  the  first  instance  in  No.  3,  are  very  frequent  in  He- 
brew. The  laws  of  declension,  in  such  cases,  supersede  the  usual  laws  of  the  vowels,  applicable  to 
other  cases ;  so  that  one  can  call  no  vowel  in  Hebrew  absolutely  immutable  :  all  being  liable  in 
certain  cases  to  change.     But  when  and  irhere  this  happens,  can  be  learned  only  by  practice. 

Note  1.  The  composite  Shevas  in  a  like  way,  are  frequently  ex- 
changed for  each  ether,  in  the  course  of  declension;  e.g.  Dr"". ,  fem 


§§  128,   129.    CHANGES  OF  THE  VOWELS.  59 


ftJabttj  ;  "lON^,  with  sufhx.  "»3nO«;.     The  A  sound  is  shorter  than  the 
E  sound. 

Note  2.  The  proper  mutable  vowels  are  these  ;  viz.  Qamets,  Tseri, 
and  Hholem,  all  long  and  pure ;  Pattahh  medial  and  short,  Seghol 
medial  and  short,  Hliireq  medial  and  short,  Qamets  Hhateph,  andQib- 
buts  short,  nil  pure.  The  other  vowels  are  immutable  in  the  sense 
above  defined,  i.e.  they  remain  immutable,  unless  a  particular  form  of 
a  word  becomes  more  imperious  than  the  usual  laws  of  the  vowel- 
changes.] 

§  128.  («)  The  changes  of  vowels  for  each  other  are 
very  generally, (not  always),  limited  to  the  respective  clas- 
ses to  which  they  belong. 

A  few  exceptions  appear  ;  as  IS  ,  plur.  0^772  ;  }*y\1i  ,  plur.  ff*i}*yitt. 
So  Hiph.  b^Bpn,  2  pers.  pfcbpri.  Every  language  has  some  such 
anomalies.     Practice  only  can  teach  how  to  distinguish  them. 

(b)  Each  long  mutable  vowel  has  one  or  more  corres- 
ponding short  ones,  for  which  it  may  be  exchanged ;  and 
vice  versa.      E.  g. 

Long  pure  vowels.  Corresponding  short  vowels. 

Qamets  (-)  Pattahh  (-) 

Tseri      C\  $  Seghol     (v) 

J- sen      (,     )         $  Hhireq  short  (.  ) 

u.    , (  •  \  S  Qibbuts  short  (  ..  ) 

Hholem  l— 1         <  >        .    ,_,,    .     ,v     \ 
x    '         ( Qamets  Hhateph  {    ) 

[  §  129.  Long  mutable  vowels  are  exchanged  for  corres- 
ponding short  ones  ;  (a)  When  they  arc  in  a  mixed  sylla- 
ble on  which  the  tone  rested,  and  from  which  the  tone, 
for  some  special  cause,  has  been  removed,  cither  forward 
or  backward. 

E.  g.  forwards  ;  as  l\  ,  D^T; ;  tt5\  ,  ^Q^. ,  )k  ,  *f?3  i  ~&$1  s  T^R"! 
yiq-tbl-hha;  isb^ ,  n^ziDri ;  before  Maqqeph,  as  S3,  HiuN-bs  kbl 
Hasher,  §  89.  With  tone  moved  backwards,  i.  e.  towards  the  right  hand  ; 
as  *|5j,  ^?.T.2  !  °P?  ^pJll  vay-yd-qbm  ;  t3P"lJp2,  t3ntt)J33.  The 
reason  of  such  changes  is,  that  long  vowels  cannot  stand  in  mixed  syl- 
lables, unless  they  are  tone-syllables,  §  36.  Of  course,  when  the  tone 
is  removed,  they  must  be  shortened. 

Note.  A  few  solitary  cases  are  found,  of  apparent  exception  to  this 
principle;  e.g.  1  Sam.  17:  35,  "lVOarn .  But  the  first  Yodh  here  is 
merely  a  fulcrum,  §  G4. 


GO  180.   «  w anm.s  <>r  tiii.  M>.\  1  i  |, 


(h)  Wlien  thoy  arc  in  a  mixed  syllable,  which  the  con- 
struct state  requires  to  be  shortened. 

E.g.  13*  word,  but  niM^  "Di  tf/ie  word  nf  Jehovah,  where  the  orig- 
inal syllable  13  is  shortened  to  ~D ;  see  §  342.  6. 

(c)  Long  vowels  before  a  Daghesh  forte  latent,  in  a 
a  final  letter  (not  a  Guttural),  when  a  change  is  required, 
for  the  most  part  are  exchanged  for  an  appropriate  short 
vowel. 

E.  g.  (a)  Tseri  goes  into  Hhireq  pai-vum ;  as  fcN  (with  Dag.  forte 
implied  in  the  D),  "'hn  .  (b)  Hholem  into  Qibbuts  short ;  as  ph  ,  rvj,~,  • 
but  sometimes  info  Qamets  Hhaleph,  as  i$,  fyf  bz-zl. 

Note.  If  the  tone  remains,  the  vowel  continues  long  in  such  cases  ; 
e.g.  !"J731B  sham-ma,  Siah  hem-ma. 

(d)  A  pause  accent  falling  on  final  Tseri,  not  unfre- 
qucntly  shortens  it  into  Pattahh.     See  §  J45.] 

§  130.  Short  vowels  in  mixed  syllables  become  long  ;  («) 
When  the  form  of  the  word  is  in  any  way  so  changed, 
that  they  come  to  stand  in  a  simple  syllable. 

E.  g.  T3  ,  "*?D  ;  31 ,  131 ;  r*0£  ,  fcfip.  So,  of  course,  before  a 
Quiescent:  as  N"^»  instead  of  N£"2  .  ttba  instead  of  rtb-2  —  *bi  . 

[(b)  When  a  Daghesh  forte  is  omitted  in  writing,  the 
short  vowel  that  would  stand  before  it  becomes  long  ;  § 
112.  corap.  §58.  §59. 

E.g.  "pa  instead  of  SIS},  ^13  instead  of  *p3,  ^")'z  instead  of 
*P2 ,  etc. 

Note  1.  Daghesh  forte,  implied  in  a  letter  at  the  end  of  a  word, 
(it  cannot  be  written  in  such  a  case,  §  72),  xisually  prolongs  the  vowel 
which  precedes.  E.  g.  !?A*  instead  of  V^ ,  SN  instead  of  72N  ,  18X1* 
for  Ttfrn  y'uh-dw  ;  but  sometimes  the  vowel  remains  short,  as  hi*  for 
W  ,  30  (not  3D)  for  3=3  . 

Note  2.  In  the  case  b  above,  the  syllable  with  the  short  vowel, 
becoming  a  simple  one  by-  the  coalescence  of  the  implied  Daghesh'd 
letter,  the  vowel  must  of  course  be  lengthened,  according  to  the  rule 
a  above.  Before  rt  and  1,  however,  the  vowel  Pattahh  usually  re- 
main*, in  such  cases  ;  but  it  is  long,  §  112.  Note. 

(f)   The  article  prefixed  to  a  few  words,  lengthens  the 

short  vowel  in  them. 

E.g.  tag ,  ta*i ;  11 ,  inn ;  is ,  ixi ;  13 ,  ibi ;  y^Sj ,  '{->*-• 

'Usage  only  can  distinguish  such  cases. 


<j>§   131 134.    FALLING  AWAY  OF  THE  VOWELS.  01 


§  131.  A  Pause  accent  falling  on  a  medial  Pattahh  or 
Seghol,  commonly  (not  always)  lengthens  it. 

E.  g.  toys,  D";70  ;  ?3n  ,  22^T.  Occasionally  other  accents  do  the 
same;  see  §  149.] 

Falling  away  of  the  Voiock. 

§  132.  Vowels  arc  said  to  fall  away,  when  they  are 
dropped  and  a  Sheva  takes  their  place. 

E.  g.  *\"yi ,  t-D"  ,  where  the  vowel  under  the  ~,  in  the  first  word, 
falls  away  in  the  second. 

Note.  Apocope  of  vowels  is  dropping  them  at  the  end  of  a  word  ; 
as  Jl?3"^ ,  ."p*]  ,  where  the  final  quiescent  long  Seghol  of  the  first 
word  is  dropped. 

§  133.  When  the  tone  is  moved  forward  one  syllable,  (i.  e. 
moved  toward  the  left  hand);  («)  The  penult  vowel  of 
the  ground-form*  falls  away,  if  pure  and  mutable. 

E.  g.  *\bfi  ,  -nn- ;  a'sS ,  >aa3> .  If  the  tone  is  not  shifted,  the  vow- 
el remains  ;  e.  g.  20*  ,  ""ab"^  . 

(b)   If  the  tone  is  moved  forward  two  syllables,  both  the 

ultimate  and  penult  vowels,  if  mutable,  fall  away. 

E.  g.  hSjft ,  Cq-nni ;  jj^t ,  t=in",;pT ;  where  both  vowels  of  the 
ground  form  vanish.  In  regard  to  the  short  Hhireq  which  takes  the 
place  of  one  of  them,  see  §  137.  In  regard  to  Sheva  being  inserted 
when  the  vowel  is  dropped,  see  §  52. 

[§  134.  Regimen  or  the  construct  state  (§  332),  usually 
occasions  both  the  ultimate  and  penult  vowels  to  fall  away, 
if  pure  and  mutable. 

E.g.  '"D'sj  word,  fiin?  "1"}DT  the  words  of  Jehovah.  But  not  all  vow- 
els which  appear  to  be  mutable,  are  so;  see  §  20  seq.  on  the  vowels. 
In  particular,  Tseri  in  participial  forms,  and  in  many  others,  remains 
unchanged  by  a  state  of  regimen  ;  e.g.  bEjip,  reg.  the  same  ;  a*jt , 
reg.  the  same  ;  tad ,  reg.  the  same;  other  like  forms  follow  the  rule, 
e.g.  15 ,  reg.  ]3  ;  ^SH  ,  reg.  rjv'o  .  The  vowels  are  sometimes  dubi- 
ous by  usage  ;  as  in  '&~)B ,  reg.  ttJ^S  and  a}"SB  . 

Note.  In  Segholate  forms,  (Dec.  VI.  of  nouns),  the  final  vowel  is 
merely^wr/ire ;  so  that,  these  nouns  being  monosyllabic  in  theory, 


*  The  trround-form  n  the  primary  one.  in  number,   KOlldor,  or  truer    to  »  In 'h  it  belongs  ;  the 
origiuiil,  from  which  the  ethers  rue  derived. 


Ofl       §§    135,    130.    FAILING  AWAY  OF  VOWELS — RISE   OF   NEW  ONES. 


rcgii.icti  makei  no  change  in  their  vowels.     See  in  the  Paradigm  of 
Dec.  VI. 

§  135.  Where  the  ground -form  of  a  word  receives  an  ac- 
cession at  the  end  beginning  villi  a  vowel ;  {a)  Which  re- 
quires both  consonants  of  its  final  syllable  to  be  united  with 
such  accession  in  the  same  syllable,  then  the  final  rowel 
of  the  ground-form  falls  away,  if  mutable. 

This  happens  most  frequently  in  verhs ;  e.g.  Vcj3 ,  fern.  inbup; 
itep?,  plur.  ibtaj?^  ;  "133  ,  fern.  fn33;  part.  pres.  b'Cp,  fern,  "rep, 
plur.  D^Dp;  in  Piel,  labJfl  ,  fem.  PHJa^E  ;  but  also  in  nouns  of  Dec. 
VII.,  as  n^.N,  plur.  D^'N. 

(b)  Also,  where  only  the  final  consonant  is  united  with 
an  accessory  vowel,  but  the  penult  consonant,  from  the 
nature  of  syllabication  necessary  to  the  form  of  the  word, 
must  have  a  Sheva  silent,  the  final  vowel  of  the  ground- 
form  falls  away. 

E.  g.  Imp.  fem.  "'btsp  (not  ''bbp)*  ground-form  Vt2j5  ;  ^-pp  (not 
iV'ttp),  ground-form  b'trp  . 

Note  1.  If  only  the  final  letter  of  the  ground-form  is  to  be  united 
with  the  accessory  vowel,  and  the  penult  letter  must  retain  a  vowel 
instead  of  having  a  Sheva,  then  such  vowel  cannot  fall  away;  e.  g. 
tTT,  with  suffix  i~i37;  3313,  plur.  ta^SlS. 

Note  2.  Usage  only  will  enable  the  student  readily  to  distinguish 
the  cases  where  the  rule  is  to  be  applied.  We  can  see  no  reason,  a 
priori,  why  the  Hebrews  might  not  have  said,  i~n~  ,  as  well  as  i-^"!  , 
(especially  since  they  say  WQp>T ,  etc.)  ;  except  that  in  this  way,  the 
method  of  suffix-forms  is  distinguished  from  that  of  simple  declension, 
which  marks  person  and  number.] 

Rise  of  New  Vowels. 

§  136.  We  have  seen,  that  two  successive  vowels  may  fall  away 
(§  133.  b.  §  134),  on  account  of  the  tone  being  removed,  or  of  regimen. 
In  such  cases,  an  impossible  syllable  would  arise,  (i.  e.  one  with  three 
consonants  before  a  vowel,  §  42)  ;  consequently,  a  ?iea>  vowel  must 
be  inserted,  in  order  to  avoid  this. 

E.  g.  "^7,  constr.  plur.  "*~)3~  dbhre.  But  this  is  inadmissible;  see 
§  42.  So  O'.uai*  ,  constr.  t&3$  (with  one  composite  Sheva),  would 
be  an  impossible  syllable.     A  vowel  must  therefore  be  supplied. 


§§  137 141.    RISE  OF  NEW  VOWELS,  ETC.  €)'•} 

§  137.  In  case  the  vowels  falling  away  leave  two  sim- 
ple Shevas,  the  usual  supplied  vowel  is  short  llhireq. 

E.  g.  *"Q- ,  plur.  constr.  ^~)3~  instead  of  *,n2~  . 

§  138.  But  if  one  of  the  two  letters  that  have  been 
deprived  of  their  vowels,  is  a  Guttural,  then  Pattahh  or 
Seghul  must  be  the  supplied  vowel. 

E.  g.  E3TiJ:JK  ,  constr.  "iu3:n  instead  of  V^:N  ;  &',j??h  ,  constr.  "'jsbrl  • 

[§  139.  II  an  accessory  prefix  letter  with  a  Sheva,  conic 
before  a  syllable  beginning  with  a  Guttural  which  lakes  a 
composite  Sheva,  such  accessory  letter  takes  a  supplied 
short  vowel,   which    is   homogeneous  with   the   composite 

Sheva. 

E.  g.  *ny  ,  but  with  prefix  b  ,  -b>:  ;  V=>N .,  Vdn?.  ;  "^ft.,  vrri2  bd- 
hh°ll.  The  Futures  of  the  verbs  tt"*?1  and  IrPri  make  iT.v*  j  ^T!  5  an(^ 
analogous  to  this  are  the  prefixes,  as  ni""^  ,  contrary  to  the  analogy 
of  other  guttural  forms. 

§  140.  When  in  varying  the  forms  of  words  it  so  hap 
pens,  that  analogically  two  Shevas  would  come  under  two 
successive  letters,  and  the  first  of  these  would  be  a  com- 
posite Sheva  ;  then  the  corresponding  short  vowel  is  sub- 
stituted for  such  composite  Sheva. 

E.  g.  !"Dfiro  instead  of  rr^Dn:  ,  which  would  make  an  impossible 
syllable.  So  *{b*B  po-bl-kha  instead  of  ~:2S  ;  1130?*  instead  of  IISS^. 
The  ground  of  this  is,  that  from  their  nature  two  Shevas  cannot  stand 
together,  unless  the  first  be  silent,  and  the  second  vocal,  except  at  the 
end  of  a  word.  But  in  the  case  above,  the  Jirst  is  vocal,  i.  e.  a  com- 
posite one,  §  46.  a ;  of  course  the  expedient  of  a  new  vowel  must  be 
adopted,  in  order  to  avoid  an  impossible  syllable.] 

Rise  of  furtive  Vowels. 

§  141.  As  the  Hebrews  rarely  admit  two  consonants 
after  a  vowel,  in  the  same  syllable  (§  42) ;  so,  to  avoid 
this,  they  supply  a  furtive  vowel,  in  most  cases  where  such 
a  concurrence  would  otherwise  take  place.  This  vowel 
is  commonly  Seghol  short;  but  under  words  having  a  pe- 
nult Guttural,  it  is  Pattahh  short;  with  a  penult  Yodh,  it 
is  short  Hhireq. 


04      §142.    kisi;  in    itutivi;  \«.\vr.i.s. —  BUnUMHC  OBAMGBS,  ETC. 


E.g.  *{-b  instead  of  ~btt  ■>  "1!??.  f°r  1-y.i  "^'l  fi->r  ~!"i  >  n"?  f°r 
rP? .  See  on  Dec.  VI.  §  359,  and  also  §  283.  3.  y.  on  the  Segholate 
forms  of  verbs. 

[Note  I.  The  2  pers.  fcm.  sing.  Praet.  in  verbs  Lamedb  Qattural, 
takes  PuiUxhh  furtive ;  e.g.  R973QJ  instead  oflW&S,  in  order  to  ease 
the  pronunciation,  §  69. 

Note  2.  All  words  having  a  furtive  vowel  are  Milcl,  i.  e.  accented 
on  the  penult.  In  this  way  they  are  distinguished  from  the  few  forms 
that  resemble  them,  in  the  final  vowel,  but  are  accented  on  the  ulti- 
mate;  e.g.  ^33,  ':*!."!?,  etc.  Comp.  §  100.  a.] 

Euphonic  changes  of  the  Vowels. 

[§  142.  These  are  various,  (a)  A  Guttural  with  Qamets,  seldom 
admits  a  Qamets  or  Pattahh  immediately  before  it,  but  exchanges 
them  for  a  Seghol ;  e.  g.  tZPnrTn  instead  of  d",")^n  ,  T'hiJ  for  T»r1Bt ; 
nns  for  n^E  ,  r^N-rrs  for  ■•afojt-lTO  . 

Note.  The  rule  is  not  uniform.  Such  cases  occur,  as  V",>VJ~  )  "^'i 
S33?n ,  etc.     The  word  ~"l  is  anomalous,  being  put  for  T$1   or  "W1  . 

T      T     7  V  X  O  1  r  f  T  T 

The  practice  of  the  rule  is  occasionally  extended,  to  cases  where  the 
Gutturals  are  not  present;  as  i'TQID  rTfi—IS?,  where  TV%  stands  for  nE; 
also  to  Gutturals  not  pointed  with  Qamets;  as  Q^ii'irtn iforS^cnnr: , 
hd-h"dhu-sh~an. 

(6)  In  mixed  syllables,  losing  their  tone,  Seghol  in  some  cases  takes 
the  place  of  Pattahh;  e.g.  ^ ,  C32*TJ  for  £35*£;  ^D&  for  ^3fr. 
The  reason  of  this  is,  that  Pattahh  is  better  adapted  to  a  mixed  sylla- 
ble with  the  tone ;  Seghol,  to  one  without  it.     Consequently, 

(c)  In  a  tone-syllable,  we  sometimes  find  Pattahh  instead  of  Seg- 
hol ;  e.  g.  "l^T ,  const.  ]pj  ,  not  "jp.T  .     See  Dec.  V.  of  nouns,  Parad. 

(d)  A  furtive  vowel,  at  the  end  of  words,  causes  the  preceding 
vowel,  if  mutable,  to  conform.  E.g.  Qamets;  as  DBn^h  instead  of 
DJIjnin.  Pattahh  ;  as  ififa  for  *£^  ■  '^m' »  asn13a  f°r  nl^  .  So 
in  verbs,  ^.""n  for  1?A»T,  fjnn  for  Spii.     In  Gutturals,  nsnin  for 

naniio. 

(e)  Anomalous  changes  of  the  vowels  occasionally  occur ;  proba- 
bly to  mark  the  peculiar  pronunciation  of  certain  words.  E.  g.  (l) 
Long  vowels  are  put  for  short  ones  before  the  composite  Shevas ;  as 
?£rin  for  -jib-Pi ,  ribW]  for  nbgtt  ,  nryh  for  n  rrn  .  (2)  Short  vow- 
els for  long  ones;  as  =nrs*  for  nhN ,  WrT;  for  sjafp  .  (3)  Long  vow- 
els are  put  for  short  ones  arising  out  of  composite  Shevas  ;  as  tohMj 
for  tonNn,  inbaep  for  inbDNn. 

All  these  under  e  are  very  unfrequent ;  and  it  is  difficult  to  decide,  whether  they  should  be  at- 
tributed to  mere  accidental  euphony,  to  negligence  in  transcribing,  or  to  a  principle  of  the  language* 


§§  143 147.     VOWELS  CHANGED  BY  ACCENTS.  65 

Voicels  changed  by  Accents. 

§  143.  Pause  accents,  (and  sometimes  others,  see  §  149),  not 
only  occasion  a  shifting  of  the  tone-syllable  of  words  (§  100.  /),  but 
very  frequently  occasion  a  change  in  the  quantity  of  vowels;  usually 
lengthening  short  vowels,  but  sometimes  shortening  long  ones. 

§  J  44.  I.  They  lengthen  short  vowels ;  changing  Pattabh 
and  Seghol  (when  used  for  Pattahh,  §  142.  d),  into  Qci- 
mcts ;   and  Qamets  Hhateph  into  Hholem. 

E.  g.  D^b  ,  d:£  ;  ^  ,  !?gj3  j  ^.  (for  !fcfc  ,  §  142.  d\  $%  .  So 
where  they  shift  the  tone  also  ;  as  nriN  ,  nnN  ;  nny,  nnv  .  So  ntt'T 
vay-ya-molh,  rio*} . 

Note  1.  The  praepositive  and  postpositive  accents  (§  95),  may  af- 
fect vowels  without  standing  on  them,  in  the  same  manner  as  other 
accents  which  are  placed  on  them  ;  e.  g.  Tyr 73  (instead  of  *]^?2)  with 
Tiphha  anterius,  Ps.  97:  1  ;  tesUT  (instead  of  inS'^l)  with  Segholta 
on  the  ultimate;  see  §  146. 

[§  145.  II.  They  shorten  long  voicels.  Verbs  in  pause* 
frequently  exchange  Tseri  ultimate  for  Pattahh. 

E.g.  *Hbrt,;iitt*;  ifltfft,  *»p;  fcti*"* ,  Wfl"*-;  Y?"  »*T~--  So  with 
verbs,  when  they  have  suffixes;  as  D^QN  ,  Dr'ftN;  "jn^h^ ,  "jnT;"1 . 
But  the  cases  are  numerous,  in  which  rule  II.  does  not  have  any 
influence.     The  whole  thing  is  mere  arbitrary  euphony. 

§  146.    A  pause-accent  on  a  word,  which  by  declension 

has  dropped  the  final  vowel  of   the  ground  form  (§  135), 

restores  that  final  vowel,  and  also  lengthens  the  same  if  it 

be  short. 

This  takes  place,  (a)  When  such  accent  falls  on  the  restored  voxel; 
asriN-T,  rrN-v,  ground-form  &■£;  ^3)90,  W»t3,  ground-form  }hx2  ; 
^BB^,  Vfup"; ,  ground-form  Vbp*;  ;  n3>JDttT  ,  W3TD?  ,  ground-form  JWM^  . 
(6)  When  it  falls  on  the  succeeding  syllable ;  as  "p^.'V  ,  instead  of 

"P^RT  i Joel  2 :  5 ;  I'PTl' in3tead  of  rr^.i^i  Joel  2 :  8 ;  |*a%£ in- 

stead  of  J«Di£,  Joel  2:  7." 

N.  B.     Both  of  these  usages  are  very  often  neglected. 

&  147.    Pause  accents,  falling  on  those  persons  of  verbs 

ft     m    ^  Urn  ^  * 

TV?  (properly  17,  §  280),  which  drop  a  letter  and  a  vow- 
el, restore  the  letter  as  well  as  the  vowel  dropped,  and 
affect  the  vowel,  as  in  the  foregoing  section. 

*  A  word  or  oylluble  is  said  to  be  in  pause,  wbon  a  pause-accent  rests  upon  it. 

9 


60  §§   I  I"---  (58.    vowki.s  OHANOBD  BY  AOCEMIOfc,  ETC. 


E.  g.  !»B3 ,  "PCM ,  groand-fonn  ~^;  =  ^ ;  ?"-i  """.r  i  ^rnm  "^ 
=  ^3,  $  200.  Note. 

§  I  UJ.    Where  no  vowel  has  hem  dropped)  b  p&use-i  ccent 

(ins)  Falling  on  simple  Sheva  penult,  puts  Seghol  m  it>  place. 

E.g.  CDO,D3^;  ^3b»,  -3^. 

(//)  Falling  on  a  composite  Sheva  penult,  substitutes 
the  corresponding  long  vowel. 

E.g.  i\h  ,  "^N  ;  \bV;,  n5?n;  cases  with  (•.••)  do  not  occur.  But 
the  practice  is  not  entirely  uniform  ;  e.  g.  *>*}? ;,  "H*  ;  ''SEh  ,  *^~ . 

§  149.  General  Remark.  The  effect  of  pause-accents  fa  not  uni- 
form. In  a  great  number  of  eases,  no  change  is  occasioned  by  them. 
On  the  other  hand,  most  of  the  Disjunctive  accents,  and  even  several 
of  the  Conjunctives,  not  unfrequently  produce  the  same  effect  in  pro- 
longing syllables,  as  the  Pause-accents.  For  example,  (a)  Disjunc- 
tives ;  Itib^  ,  TiS-J ;  WHg,-WBi  ft**?'-? \  Wrt ;  IttjW;  ":"!", 
^•5  Ps.  5:  12.  etc.  (b)  Conjunctives;  as  ">nr;n,  "iJjnttlT;  ^  —  £  , 
"Ittjjj;  Sjrona,  'qnsna;  "*0£,  n"C~,  etc.  The  entire  want  of  any 
regular  system,  in  regard  to  the  influence  of  the  accents  over  the 
vowels,  shews  very  clearly,  that  such  influence  belongs  only  to  the 
occasional  method  of  reading  certain  passages  or  words,  and  not  to  the 
csseyitial  mutations  of  the  language  itself.] 

Voicels  changed  by  accession  and  transposition. 

[§  1 50.  Forms  of  verbs  ending  in  1 ,  receiving  an  accessory  pro- 
noun beginning  with  a  consonant,  and  not  having  the  tone  upon  it, 
drop  the  first  vowel  of  the  ground-form,  if  it  be  mutable,  and  restore 
the  second,  which  had  been  dropped  by  declension,  and  (if  it  be  short) 
lengthen  it. 

E.g.  nty,  plur.  int*,  with  suffix  ^£tf9;  sonasa?,  ^ikwr ; 

§  151.  Transposition  is  only  occasional  and  euphonic.  It  belongs 
not  to  the  rules  of  language.  Instances  of  it  are  such  as  the  follow- 
ing, viz.  "3t-r  for  *h; ,  rvrri-js  for  fra^na ,  etc.] 

Vowels  changed  by  position. 

[§  152.  The  prefixes  to  words,  consisting  of  one  letter, 
varv  their  vowels,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  words 
to  which  they  are  attached.      Thus, 

(«)  The  article  'ft  (for  rn  §  162)  has,  (l)  Usually,  Pattahh  followed 


§  152.    VOWELS  CHANGED  BY  POSITION,  ETC.  67 


by  Daghesh  forte  ;  e.  g.  ^tzzrj=  -":  b~  .  (2)  Before]  the  Gutturals 
N  ,  'J  and  1 ,  it  takes  Qamets  ;  as  "^\\n  .  ]"\~  ,  ':«1"  .  (3)  Before 
I"i  and  n,  Pattahh  long  is  the  more  usual  vowel;  as  *V~~  ■>  T*"- 
(4)  Before  all  the  Gutturals,  when  they  have  a  (garnets  under  them, 
the  article  usually  takes  Seghol ;  see  §  142.  rr.  (o)  The  Daghesh  after 
the  article  is  not  only  omitted  before  the  Gutturals  and  Resh  (§  111), 
but  usually  omitted,  also,  before  words  beginning  with  73  and  ?  having 
a  simple  Sheva ;  e.  g.  IiSD^n  for  nOD"2~  ,  H4t?n  for  "UN*" . 

Note.  When  the  article  is  preceded  by  the  particles,  2 ,  3 ,  b ,  it 
frequently  suffers  syncope  (§  108.6),  and  gives  up  its  vowel  to  the  par- 
ticles ;  as  trlbiaa  for  D?$3\8tt3,  D3J3  for  tSSTTS ,  ci-'r  for  irnnnb  . 
But  on  the  contrary,  it  frequently  resists  syncope ;  as  uSm?  ,  etc. 

(b)  The  particles  2,  3,  b,  are  appropriately  pointed  with  Sheva 
simple.  But,(l)  Before  the  composite  Shevas,  they  take  the  correspond- 
ing medial  vowel ;  e.g.  pin?  ,  "'bnb  l°-hh"li,  etc.  (2)  Before  accented 
syllables,  they  usually  take  Qamets  ;  as  T)Wb  ,  n«0^b  ,  Err  .  But  this 
is  confined  chiefly  to  forms  of  the  Inf.  mood  not  in  regimen ;  to  pro- 
nouns ;  and  to  tone  syllables  at  the  end  of  a  verse,  or  of  a  disjunctive 
clause.     In  other  cases,  the  usual  punctuation  is  Sheva. 

(c)  The  conjunction  ")  is  appropriately  pointed  with  a  Sheva  sim- 
ple. But,  (1)  Before  Gutturals  with  a  composite  Sheva,  it  takes  the 
corresponding  medial  vowel ;  asTn^i.  (2)  Before  N  which  would 
regularly  have  a  composite  Sheva,  it  sometimes  takes  a  corresponding 
contracted  vowel  in  which  N  quiesces ;  as  ETTjbNi  for  O^n^ip  ,  see 
§  119.  c.  1.  (3)  Before  a  tone-syllable  it  frequently  takes  Qamets;  as 
-\ihi  ITT,  nt]2]  .  The  usual  cases  of  this  nature,  are  before  a  Dis- 
junctive accent ;  before  a  Conjunctive  one,  t  retains  Sheva.  ( l)  Be- 
fore a  Sheva  vocal  either  simple  or  composite,  under  a  letter  not  a 
Guttural,  and  also  before  1,  23,  D,  it  takes  Shureq  ;  as  rsbl ,  nnTT, 
^py^.1! ,  rPaT,  ifr-Xtf,  fisngl.  (5)  Before  Yodh  with  Sheva,  it  takes 
long  Hhireq ;  as  Ti^i ,  "•JSpl  .  (G)  Before  the  verbs  rTrr  and  rrrr,  it 
sometimes  takes  short  Hhireq  or  Seghol ;  as  taiy^rT] ,  spft"] ,  rv.""1  ■ 

{d)  The  interrogative  T>  changes  its  usual  punctuation,  (1)  Before 
Sheva  simple,  it  takes  Pattahh;  as  niTTpri .  (2)  Before  Gutturals 
with  (garnets,  it  takes  Seghol ;  as  Son"  ,  is  he  wise  ?  (3)  Before  Gut- 
turals without  Qamets,  Pattahh  and  sometimes  (garnets;  ?Tbfitn  ,  shall 
I  go?  QPiNn  vosne?  (4)  It  sometimes  imitates  the  punctuation  of 
the  article  before  a  letter  with  Sheva  ;  e.  g.  n:rizr:  an  tunica  ?  "^n-n 
viaene  mcae?  And  even  before  a  letter  with  a  vowel,  although  very 
rarely  ;  as  3U"".~  an  bonum  erit .?] 


PART  III. 

GRAMMATICAL  STRUCTURE  AND  FORMS 
OF  WORDS. 


§  153.  Radical  Words.  The  Hebrew  and  its  cognate  language.*, 
in  their  present  state,  exhibit  a  surprising  degree  of  regularity  and 
uniformity,  in  the  construction  and  sound  of  the  radical  words.  This 
circumstance  forms  a  broad  line  of  distinction  between  them  and  all 
the  western  languages.  Almost  all  radical  words,  which  with  few  ex- 
ceptions are  verbs,  consist  of  only  three  letters  usually  forming  two 
syllables  ;  as  ^rtt  he  reigned,  yiN  the  earth.  From  such  trilateral  roots 
are  derived  the  various  forms  of  nouns  and  verbs,  which  are  used  to 
express  case,  number,  gender,  person,  tense,  etc.  and  the  different 
forms  of  nouns,  adjectives,  particles,  etc.  From  this  generul  principle 
of  derivation  as  to  nouns,  etc.  (which  was  commonly  represented  by 
the  older  grammarians  as  universal),  are  to  be  excepted,  perhaps,  a 
few  words,  which  constitute  the  names  of  familiar  objects  ;  e.  g.  2N 
father,  E3N  mother,  "1^  hand,  etc.  A  few  particles  and  primitive  pro- 
nouns also  are  biliteral  in  their  root,  and  perhaps  not  derived  from  any 
triliteral  word. 

§  154.  Conformity  to  the  same  principles.  So  extensively,  in  Hebrew, 
is  the  principle  of  inflection  grounded  on  derivation  from  a  triliteral 
root,  that  nouns  which  are  primitive  and  biliteral,  conform  to  the  com- 
mon laws  in  their  declension  ;  i.  e.  they  are  treated  as  though  they 
were  derived  from  triliteral  roots.  Thus  SN  by  inflection  becomes 
■'S*  ="|EaN  ,  as  if  derived  from  E3/3N  ;  although  £K  seems  to  be  a 
primitive. 

§  155.  Biliteral  roots.  From  some  appearances  in  the  Hebrew 
language,  it  is  probable  that  originally  it  contained  a  greater  number 
of  biliteral  roots,  than  at  present;  and  that  its  triliteral  forms  were,  in 
many  instances,  constituted  by  doubling  the  second  radical  of  the  root, 
or  adding  to  it  one  of  the  vowel-letters,  or  the  semi-vowel  Nun.  E.  g. 
3U^  and  2112  to  be  good,  common  root  2U  .  H2:  and  n'E  to  blow,  com- 
mon root  PI2.     ^Dl ,  ^=17,  iOw  ,  ~r~  to  thrust  down,  common  root  ^p7. 

In  like  manner,  there  are  a  considerable  number  of  words  in  the 
Hebrew  and  its  cognate  dialects,  in  which  two  of  the  radicals  are  the 


§§  156 1GI.    GRAMMATICAL  STRUCTURE  OF  WORDS.  (59 

same,  while  the  third  is  quite  different,  and  yet  the  meaning  of  all  the 
words  remains  the  same.  E.  g.  The  verb  signifying  to  lick,  is  either 
93>b  ,  as?* ,  tM>r ,  Ci'b  ,  PJ?b  ,  yvb  ,  or  p'jb  ;  the  letters  *>  being  uni- 
form in  all. 

But  if  biliteral  roots  were  originally  more  numerous  than  at  pres- 
ent, they  had  conformed  to  the  common  laws  of  the  language  at  least 
as  early  as  the  written  Hebrew  now  extant ;  since  the  written  lan- 
guage every  where  presents  the  triliteral  forms,  as  principally  consti- 
tuting the  radical  words. 

§  156.  Quadriliteral  and  quinqueliteral  roots  are  very  rare  in  the 
Hebrew  ;  such  as  -23"}3  a  fruitful  field,  QD13  to  devour,  ]:NbiB  to  be 
quiet.  Those  which  exist,  are  formed  by  the  addition  or  insertion  of 
a  letter  or  letters,  to  lengthen  the  triliteral  root ;  in  the  same  manner 
as  triliterals  are  formed  from  biliterals,  as  described  above  in  §  155. 

§  157.  The  parts  of  speech  in  Hebrew  are,  the  article, 
pronoun,  verb  (including  the  participle),  noun,  adjective,  ad- 
verb, preposition,  conjunction,  and  interjection;  which  will  be 
treated  of  in  their  order. 

§  158.  The  proportional  number  of  roots,  in  the  various  parts  of 
speech  in  the  Hebrew,  may  be  thus  arranged,  (a)  The  verb  is  alto- 
gether most  frequently  primitive.  (6)  Only  a  small  number  of  nouns 
are  primitive,  (c)  The  original  pronouns,  personal,  demonstrative,  etc. 
are  all  primitive,  {d)  Particles  are  some  of  them  primitive,  and  some 
are  derived  from  other  parts  of  speech.  The  Hebrew  has  very  few 
particles. 

Grammatical  structure  of  words. 

§  159.  There  are  two  ways  in  which  case,  number,  gender,  per- 
son, tense,  &c.  may  be  expsessed  in  any  language.  First,  by  the  in- 
flection of  the  original  words  or  ground-forms;  and  secondly,  by  affix- 
ing other  words  or  particles,  which  serve  to  express  relation.  The 
Hebrews,  as  the  sequel  will  shew,  made  use  of  both  these  methods. 

§  160.  Composite  words,  i.  e.  compound  verbs,  nouns,  etc.  which 
the  Greek,  Latin,  and  other  western  languages  exhibit,  are  not  usual 
in  the  Hebrew.  Words  properly  composite  are  found  in  Hebrew,  almost 
exclusively  in  proper  names;  where,  however,  they  frequently  occur. 
§  161.  The  Hebrew  also  differs  from  the  languages  of  the 
west,  in  the  mode  of  writing  many  of  its  particles,  and  the  oblique 
cases  of  personal  pronouns.  These,  instead  of  standing  by  themselves, 
are  commonly  united  with  the  verbs,  nouns,  etc.  to  which  they  belong. 
or  on  which  they  depend,  so  as  to  form  with  them  but  one  word. 


&<\    ](\'l  — 166.    ARTiri.F.. I'ROMH'NS. 


OF  THE  ARTICLE. 

§  102.  The  Hebrew  has  but  one  article,  viz.  pfj,  com- 
monly written  'H .  It  corresponds  in  a  good  degree,  but 
not  universally,  with  the  definite  article  the  in  English. 

§  163.  Jn  writing,  the  Lamcdh  of  the  article  T~  is  al- 
ways assimilated  to  the  first  letter  of  the  noun  to  which  it 
is  prefixed,  and  expressed  by  a  DagJiesh  forte  in  that  let- 
ter, or  by  some  equivalent. 

E.  g.  ^D?3fl  the  rain,  instead  of  ""itttt  r"  ;  ^"JN^J  the  man,  instead 
of  S^N  bn,  etc.,  §  107.  I.  6.  §  111.  For  the  various  pointing  of  the 
article,  see  §  152.  a. 

Note.  That  the  original  form  of  the  article  was  bn ,  seems  prob- 
able from  the  form  of  the  Arabic  article,  Vn  ,  whose  b  is  frequently 
assimilated,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  Hebrew.  The  only  difference 
is,  that  in  Hebrew  the  assimilation,  or  some  equivalent  for  it,  is  uni- 
versal ;  in  Arabic,  it  is  usual  only  before  the  solar  letters. 

OF   PRONOUNS. 

§  164.  I.  Pronouns  personal.  The  Hebrew  is  rich  in 
personal  pronouns;  not  only  distinguishing  the  masc.  and 
fern,  of  the  2d  and  3d  persons,  when  they  stand  as  the 
subjects  of  verbs,  but  possessing  forms  appropriate  to  the 
oblique  cases  which  follow  verbs,  nouns,  or  particles. 

The  following  table  exhibits  the  Nominative  case,  or  ground-fctrm,  of  all  the  personal  pronouns. 
Singular.  Plural. 

com.  7,          *3»,  ""ifij  We,yTi)j(,  Vn\    13*. 

mas.  thou,  nntf ,      Ditt  ye,       EFIN . 

fern,  thou,     f]»,     Vtt|  ye,        }T)&,  ~:FN. 

mas.  he,       fcttlTI,  they,      uH,  fi  1~ . 

fern,  she,      N^H,     &OH  (hi)  they,       Wli  »"'i~- 

[§  165.  (a)  In  pause,  the  pronouns  assume  the  forms,  "^N  ,  MPwS* , 
nN,  etc.,  §  144.  (6)  The  N  in  KVt,  N\-J,  (JOT!  hi),  is  paragogic, 
§  125.  a.  and  otiant,  v>  57.     (c)  The  form  13PJ  seldom  occurs:    WK . 


§§  166 — 170.  pronouns.  71 


only  in  Jer.  42:  6.  (d)  In  n:r.N ,  mih  ,  SlSJTj ,  the  !f_  is  paragogic, 
§  1 25.  6.  (e)  The  forms  HFN ,  FN  ,  "WN  {at),  Dn&j  ,  ]FN ,  are  proba- 
bly for  HFCN,  PIN  ,  "TOB,  DR3«,  fljaJJ,  §  107.  a.  (/)  Nin  (fa),  is 
anomalous,  (probably  the  older  form  of  the  pronoun) ;  the  marginal 
rending  or  Keri  (§  103)  always  supplying  the  form  NTi ,  as  a  correc- 
tion.    It  is  found  only  in  the  Pentateuch. 

Note.  The  ground-forms  of  tbe  pronouns  above,  though  general- 
ly designating  only  the  Nominative  case,  do  sometimes  stand  in  other 
cases,  §  468.] 

§  166.  The  oblique  cases  of  personal  pronouns,  in  He- 
brew, are  represented  by  fragments  of  primitive  pronouns 
united  with  verbs,  nouns,  and  particles,  so  as  to  make  one 
word,  instead  of  being  written  separately  as  in  the  wes- 
tern languages. 

For  an  account  of  these  pronominal  Suffixes,  as  appended  to  the 
above  mentioned  classes  of  words  respectively,  see  for  verbs  §  309 
seq.,  for  nouns  §  336,  for  adverbs  §  405,  for  prepositions  §  408,  and 
for  interjections  §  410. 

§  167.  II.  Pronouns  demonstrative.  Of  these  there 
are  but  few  in  the  Hebrew,  viz. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Masc.    Jit,    fern.  JTINT,    com.  r?*!?  this.     Com.  !"ITtf  these. 

i"i"bn,  "IT,  IT,  this.  78  these. 

Note.  The  usual  forms  are  those  in  the  first  line  ;  those  in  the 
second,  are  unusual.  For  nNT,  the  form  til  is  sometimes  used  ;  once 
TTVn,  Ezek.  36:  35. 

§  168.  III.  Pronouns  relative.  The  only  proper  one 
is  "ViENl  j  who.  which,  what,  of  every  gender  and  number. 

[Note.  This  pronoun  is  contracted  mostly  in  the  later  Hebrew,  by 
dropping  the  N*  (§  108.  a),  and  assimilating  the  *"i  (§  107.  c) ;  as  BtV$ 
instead  of  ib  T«DM  .  The  X  (the  apocopate  form)  lias  various  pointing, 
according  to  the  nature  of  the  word  which  follows;  e.  g.  "i? ,  'ttj,  '£?, 
U9  ,  as  ari;i!  Ecc.  3:  18. 

§  169.  The  demonstratives.  T"\  and  *,T ,  are  occasionally 
employed  as  relatives.] 

§  170.     IV.     Pkdnoi  ns  interrogative.     These  are  two, 

viz.  h£3  who,  and  n£  (fi/Q,  HE)  what. 

Note,  before  a  Daghesh  euphonic,  the  form  rt>2  is  used,  as  ^V~"^  ; 
before  a  Guttural  with  (garnets,  r>72 ,  as  'VSbtA  rlJj  . 


n  ^   171—173.       VKRBS. 


OF    VERBS. 

§  171.  Classification.  They  are  distributed  into  (a)  Primitive, 
i.  e.  underived  from  any  other  words;  e.g.  "fr^  to  reign*  aijj*  to  sit, 
and  so  of  most  of  the  Hebrew  verbs.  (6)  Derivative,  i.  e.  such  as 
come  from  primitives  by  the  accession  of  formative  letters.  Such  are 
all  the  conjugations  of  verbs  excepting  the  first  or  Kul.  (c)  Denom- 
inative,!, e.  those  which  are  formed  from  nouns,  {de  nomine);  e.g.  p~K 
to  live  in  a  tent,  from  ^~'k  a  tent. 

Note.     These  divisions  concern  tlie  origin  of  verbs,  but  not  the  mode  of  inflection.     A  great 
number  of  verbs  is  comprehended  in  the  class  b,  while  very  few  belong  to  the  class  e. 

§  172.  Inflection.  In  respect  to  inflection,  verbs  are  divided  into 
regular  and  irregular.  Regular  verbs  are  those  which  are  analogous  in 
their  inflections,  and  preserve  through  all  their  changes  their  original 
triliteral  root.  Verbs  irregular  are  either  pluriliteral,  or  those  which 
drop  or  assimilate  one  or  more  of  their  radical  letters. 

§  173.  Conjugation,  {a)  The  term  conjugation,  in  grammars  of 
the  Greek,  Latin,  and  some  modern  languages,  is  employed  to  denote 
different  classes  of  verbs,  which  are  distinguished  from  each  other 
by  certain  peculiar  characteristics  of  form  or  inflection,  and  which  are 
therefore  said  to  belong  to  the  first,  second,  third,  etc.  conjugation. 
In  this  sense,  the  Hebrew  might  be  said  to  have  several  conjugations ; 
but  this  word  is  not  so  used  by  Hebrew  grammarians. 

(b)  In  Hebrew  grammar,  the  word  conjugation  is  applied  to  dif- 
ferent forms  of  the  same  verb,  and  corresponds  in  some  degree  with 
the  term  voice  in  Greek  grammar,  although  it  is  employed  in  a  much 
more  extensive  sense.  The  passive  and  middle  voices,  in  Greek,  ex- 
hibit the  original  idea  of  the  verb  under  certain  modifications,  or  with 
some  additional  shades  of  meaning.  So  the  property  of  all  the  conjuga- 
tions in  Hebrew,  is  to  vary  the  primary  meaning  of  the  verb,  by  uniting 
with  it  an  accessory  signification.  The  Hebrews  were  thus  enabled  to 
express,  by  means  of  their  conjugations,  all  those  various  modifica- 
tions and  relations  of  verbs,  which,  in  most  other  languages,  are  ex- 
pressed either  by  composite  verbs,  or  by  several  words. 

Note.    The  most  convenient  arrangement  is,  to  make  as  many  conjugations  as  there  are  forms 
of  verbs,  original  and  derived.     These  are  presented  to  view  in  the  following  section. 

*  Literally,  he  reigned.  The  Infinitive  in  English  is  used  in  this  work,  merely  for  the  sake 
of  brevity,  in  preference  to  the  Praetcr  wbjch  would  exactly  correspond  to  the  Hebrew  root. 


§§  174 — 176.    verbs  ;  peculiar  conjugations.  73 

§  174.  The  Usual  Conjugations  of  the  verbs  are  as  follows, 

ACTIVE.  PASSIVE  AND  REFLEXIVE. 

Name.  Form.  Name.  Form. 

1.  Kal  Voj?  2.  Niphal  Vpp: 

3.  Piel  ^"Jp  4.  Pual  }    ^X 

rjp 


5.  Hipliil       ^ttpfi  6.  Hophal 

7.  Hithpael  VuJp_nn 

[§175.  Peculiar  Conjugations.  The  conjugations  fre- 
quent only  in  certain  classes  of  verbs,  are, 

0)    1  Poel  nniD.    2  Poal   221D.   3  Hithpoel  bbSffit]  ■ 

These  conjugations  are  found  in  (he  class  named  Ayin  doubled  (r"), 
and  very  rarely  appear  in  any  other.  They  take  the  place  of  Piel, 
Pual,  and  Hithpael,  as  these  appear  in  regular  verbs;  see  §  262. 

(b)  In  verbs  Aijbi  Vav  (l2  §  269),  forms  similar  in  ap- 
pearance are  common  substitutes  for  the  regular  Piel,  Pual, 
and  Hithpael ;   viz.  1  Polcl  D'Tip  .   2  Polal  Dfilj?.    3  Hith- 

poiei  Btnpnn. 

.  Note.  Although  the  appearance  is  the  same,  in  the  two  clashes. 
a  and  6,  yet  the  mode  of  formation  is  very  different.  E.  g.  32^0,  etc. 
comes  from  the  root  23D ,  and  is  formed  by  inserting  i  between  the  two 
Jirst  radicals;  while  C30ip,  etc.  comes  from  t31p,  and  is  formed  by 
doubling  the  last  radical.  Most  of  (he  lexicons  and  grammars  name  the 
class  6,  Pilel,  Pulal,  etc.,  because,  in  regular  verbs,  the  shape  of  these 
conjugations  would  be  like  b^pjS  ,  bbtip  ,  etc.  But  as  these  conjuga- 
tions scarcely  have  an  existence  in  regular  verbs,  (and  have  not  even 
a  similar  corresponding  one  in  the  Arabic,  excepting  the  very  rare 
and  peculiar  conj.  IX.  and  XI.),  so  it  is  much  better,  for  the  sake  of 
perspicuity,  to  name  them  as  I  have  done  here.  A  potiori  nomen  Jit ; 
a  good  rule  in  making  out  artificial  denominations  of  this  nature. 

§  170.  Unusual  Conjugations.  Most  of  these  are  of 
very  rare  occurrence ;  and  several  of  them  occur  not  more 
than  two  or  three  times,  in  the  whole  Scriptures.  They 
are  as  follows  ;    \  iz. 

1.  Hothpaal  or  Iluthjiaal,  btSDnri .  biEjSrin,  both  passive   forms  of 
Hithpael.     Comp.  Pual  in  §  17  1.     They  are  of  very  rare  occurrence. 
10 


74  ^^1"~ — ^'-  vi.nns  ;  unusual  roNjr<;\r lONe. 


(2)  Pilel  active,  and  Pulal  passive,  bbt3|3 ,  b^0j3  ,  (romp.  §  175.  fc. 
Note),  occurring  only  in  live  or  six  cafes,  in  regular  verbs. 

(:$)    !'ilj>rl  active,  and  Polpal  passive,  formed  ont  of  verbs   93  and 
13>  ,  by  repeating  the  first  and  last  radicals;  e.  g.  from  r'rj  conn-  : 
baba  ;  from  bl3,  bsbs  and  bsbS.     These  are  equivalent  to  the  forms, 
from  the  same  verbs,  described  in  (j  175.  a.  b. 

(  I)  A  form  Tiphel  seems  to  have  been  in  existence;  e.g.  fl  —  F 
from  n'~}~  ,  bs^R ,  from  ran  .     Once  we  have  a   Ptoel  form  ;    e.  g.  in 

Note.  Some  others  are  made  liy  some  grammarians  ;  but  they  arc  disputed  ones,  and  it  is  of 
lit t  lo  or  no  importance  to  the  student  to  insert  them  liero,  as  his  lexicon  will  give  him  the  requisite 
information, 

vj  177.  Plurilateral  verbs,  i.e.  whose  root  consists  of  more  than 
three  letters,  take  the  following  forms ;  viz.  UX}~\3  ,  ic~;c  ,  ]£tt33  -  ac- 
tive ;  b3"13  ,  2iBCn  ,  L»53"1'3rl ,  passive.] 

§  178.  No  one  verb  in  Hehrcw  exhibits  all  the  conjugations  above 
mentioned  ;  and  very  few  exhibit  all  the  usual  ones  in  §  174.  Neith- 
er does  the  active  or  passive  meaning  always  attach  to  the  forms, 
under  which  it  Is  ranged  ;  as  will  be  seen  in  the  sequel.  Predomi- 
nant usage  directs  the  classification    of  the  respective  conjugations. 

§  179.  The  names  of  all  the  derived  conjugations  are  borrowed 
from  the  various  forms  of  the  verb  -V2  ,  which  the  old  grammarians 
used  in  constructing  the  paradigms  ;  and  are  merely  the  modes  of  pro- 
nouncing those  several  forms.  The  first  conjugation  is  called  b£  QdZ, 
or,  (as  it  is  usually  written,)  Kdl,  i.  e.  light ;  because  it  is  not,  like  the 
derived  forms.,  increased  by  the  addition  of  any  letter  to  the  root. 
The  other  names  are  formed  thus ;  "SKA'i^A-ydl ;  ri;3  Pi-Vil,  Da- 
ghesh  forte  being  excluded  by  the  Guttural ;  H'S  Pv-'Jal,  Daghesh  be- 
ing excluded;  VWDrT  Hlph-Vll ;  -?Erj  Hbph-'Jdl ;  r^snn  Hlth-pd-V'el, 
Daghesh  excluded ;  and  so  of  the  unusual  conjugations. 

§  180.  The  third  person  singular,  of  the  Praeter  tense  in  A*a/,  is 
regarded  as  the  root  of  all  verbs  ;  one  class  (verbs  l")  excepted,  whose 
root  is  the  triliteral  Infinitive,  as  Sip. 

§  181.  («)  Kal  is  generally  active  ;  but  it  may  be  either 
transitive  or  intransitive. 

(6)  The  root  has  three  different  lorras,  distinguished 
by  the  final  vowels,  Patthah,  Tseri,  and  Hholem. 

E.  g.  ~l~tZ  to  visit,  iPT  to  be  old,  and  *}X*  to  fear. 

Note  1.  The  form  with  final  Pattahh  is  generally  active,  and  tran- 
sitive ;  but  sometimes  it  is  intransitive,  as  b^sl  to  be  great.  The  other 
two  forms  are  usually  intransitive,  but  sometimes  otherwise. 


§§  182,  183.    verbs  ;  signip.  op  the  conjugations.  75 

Note  2.  Some  verbs  in  Kal  have  a  passive  meaning;  e.  g.  ■jru  , 
to  inhubit  and  to  be  inhabited  ;  tC^'J  to  elevate,  and  to  be  elevated. 

§  182.  (a)  Nu'hal  is  formed  by  prefixing  Nun  to  the 
ground-form  of  the  verb,  and  dropping  the  first  vowel  of 
the  same  ;   e.  g.  ;?Dp  ,  V ZJp D  . 

Note.  The  real  prefix  seems  to  be  Z~  ;  (in  Arabic,  it  is  :n)  .  In 
the  Infin.  this  developes  itself;  e.  g.  bUj?!"T  =  -!?.{•£*"!  •  Nan  being  as- 
similated in  the  first  form,  §  107.  a.  The  appropriate  pointing  of  the 
prefix  Nun,  in  the  Praeter,  would  be  Sheva  (') ;  bat  short  Hhireq  is 
necessarily  substituted  for  it,  §  137,  or  an  equivalent  vowel  in  case 
the  first  radical  is  a  Guttural,  §  138. 

(6)  Significations  of  Niphal.  (l)  It  is  passive  of  Kal,  when  Kal 
is  transitive.  (2)  Passive  of  Piel,  or  of  Hiphil,  when  they  are  transi- 
tive and  Kal  is  intransitive.  (3)  It  is  often  a  reflexive  form,  correspond- 
ing to  the  middle  voice  of  the  Greeks  ;  as  T3'^n  watch  thyself 
!*N"~:  he  asked  for  himself.     These  are  the  usual  meanings. 

(4)  It  also  has  an  intransitive  sense,  and  often  expresses  passion  or 
affection;  as  fib  n:  ,  he  was  sick,  Kal,  r£)l  the  same  ;  h38M  to  si<th. 
(5)  To  shew  one's  self  as  doing  a  thing,  or  as  suffering  it  to  be  done  ; 
e.  g.  "t33" \  to  shew  one's  self  honourable,  i-'*"1  (="£^)  to  exhibit  one's 
self  as  smitten,  "in"*,  to  suffer  one's  self  to  be  entreated.  (G)  To  ex- 
press reciprocal  action  ;  as  "*E'£2  to  contend,  viz.  with  another;  E*lb* 
to  fight,  viz.  with  an  enemy  ;  SHi:  to  confer  with,  viz.  another. 

Note  It  is  often  used  in  such  a  connexion,  that  it  must  he  translated  by  a  corresponding  verb 
having  can,  may,  must,  ought,  could,  would,  should,  etc.  before  it;  e.  g.Gen.  6:  21.  10 :  10.  20:  9, 
etc. 

§  ]83.  (a)  Piel  is  characterised  by  its  doubling  the 
middle  radical ;   as  7!3p  . 

Note.  In  case  the  middle  radical  is  a  Guttural,  and  cannot  take 
a  Daghesh  forte,  the  preceding  vowel  is  prolonged,  as  a  compensa- 
tion, (§  1 1 1 .  §  1 1 2)  ;  e.g.  ?p-.3  for  ^3  ,  etc. 

(6)  Significations  of  Piel.  (l)  It  is  causative  of  Kal;  e.g.  ***:f*  to 
perish,  "ZN  to  cause  to  perish.     This  is  the  predominant  meaning. 

(2)  To  let  any  thing  or  person  be  or  do  thus  and  so  ;  to  regard  or 
exhibit  it  or  him,  as  being  or  doing  thus  and  so ;  e.  g.  !~[*S":  to  let  one 
live  ;  p"I£  ,  to  shew  or  pronounce  one  to  be  just  ;  ti'zp_  ,  to  pronounce  one 
unclean.  (3)  It  is  intensive  of  Kal;  e.g.  bN'£  to  ask,  rN**J  to  beg; 
"*iZ',b  to  break,  "131JJ  to  dash  in  pieces.  (4)  It  has  a  privative  sense ; 
e.  g.  *"C3  to  know,  "133  to  misapprehend ;  Hiph.  ,£',~VtLi!""  to  take  root, 
Piel.  VU*Ti3  to  root  out.  (5)  It  often  agrees,  in  signification,  with  Kal 
transitive  ;  seldom  has  it  an  intransitive  meaning. 


76  '    l>l — 1>*.    M.lins;    SK.MF.  or  THE  CONJUGATIONS. 


§  184.  Pual  is  simply  the  passive  of  Piel,  and  is  chararfrri»ed  by 
a  Da^liosli  in  the  middle  radical,  (or  a  compensation  for  it  when  it  is 
excluded),  and  by  Qibhuts  short  or  (garnets  Hhateph  in  the  tir-t  -\l- 
lable  ;  e.  g.  ttgj3  ,  or  b"4^  qbtlaL 

§  180.  (a)  Hiphil  prefixes  He,  and  inserts  Yotl'n.  before 
the  tWQ  lasl  radicals;  e.g  bQp,  Hiph.  ^Wfl. 

(6)  Significations  of  HiphiL  (l)  It  is  causative  of  Kal  ;  as  BV 
to  be  holy,  <B*7pn  to  moke  holy.     This  is  the  usual  meaning. 

(2)  iNoi  unfrequently  is  Hiphil  used  in  the  same  sense  (transitive 
and  intransitive)  as  Kal;  e.g.  rTrraJn  to  corrupt,  CjWJri  to  be  quiet, 
"pzrn  to  be  white. 

Note.  Seldom  are  Piel  and  Hiphil,  of  the  same  verb,  both  used 
in  a  causative  sense.  When  both  are  employed,  it  is  generally  with 
some  shade  of  difference  in  their  signification ;  e.  g.  133  to  honour, 
T,23H  to  render  powerful. 

§  130.   Hophal  is  characterised    by  H  prefixed   to   the 

root,    followed    by  the  vowel    Qamets  Hhateph    or  short 

Qibbuts  ;   e.  g.  7JDpn  ,  or  ^T3pi1  . 

It  is  usually  the  passive  of  Hiphil ;  but  it  occasionally  has  an  in- 
transitive meaning,  as  Fut.  Hoph.  Vs'P  he  shall  be  able,  from  H^  . 

§  187.    (a)  Hithpael  prefixes   flH  to   the  Inf.  form  of 

Piel  ;   e.  g.  Inf.  Pi.  Vjp  ,  Hith,  iughft. 

[(b)  The  characteristic  n~  undergoes  several  mutations,  when  it 
comes  before  the  Sibilants,  or  the  cognate  letters.     E.  g. 

(1)  Before  a  Sibilant,  the  n  changes  places  with  it ;  as  in  the  fol- 
lowing examples;  viz. 

E.  g.  D     Kal      V30     Hithpa.     !>2dRDtt     instead  of    ^aOnTl 
to     —      IttiB        —        -i'^rt         —  -?.~T~ 

*    —    P"^     —     f~^h       —       r~-ir)~ 

In  the  latter  case  (£),  the  n  is  not  only  transposed,  but  changed 
into  its  cognate  U .  This  case,  however,  is  very  unfrequent  in  He- 
brew, though  common  in  the  cognate  languages. 

(2)  Before  a  cognate  letter,  the  n  is  more  commonly  assimilated. 
E.  g.  1?7PJ      instead  of     "12-n-         from         12% 

"inert         —  "vnurin         —        *inO| 

c-:n-         —  QS^*i         —         DJgin 

(3)  The  same  usage  of  assimilation  is  occasionally  extended  to  some 
other  letters;  e.  g. 


^  188 — 193.  verbs  ;  sn;nif.  of  the  conjugations.  77 

With  T,    as      ^2Tn     instead  of      I^Ttn    from      not 

—  s,  as  rt&sn     —       *o.5n.n    —    "^ 

—  D,     as      N2:n  —  N?.;^1!        —         N^ 

—  T,     as   ttgv-lSj         —  D»^1xVfi|       —        Crn(§110.) 

—  aj,    as  DJgiien       —        DJaisnpi     —     dtjsj] 

(c)  Significations  of  Hilhpael.  (l)  It  is  reflexive  of  Piel  ;  as  ~~_p_ 
to  sanctify,  '£r}.Ji.r}~  he  sanctified  himself.  (2)  It  signifies  to  make  one's 
self  be  or  do,  or  to  exhibit  one's  self  as  being  or  doing,  that  which 
the  verb  in  its  ground-form  signilies  ;  e.  g.  CSrrnr:  to  show  one's  self 
cunning,  from  CDh  to  be  wise ;  b^an.""!  to  behave  one's  self  proudly,  from 
5:15  to  be  great  ;  n?^Tnn  to  represent  one's  self  as  sick,  from  ~\~  to  be. 
sick.  Also  with  some  slight  modifications,  as  D2nnn  to  think  one's 
self  wiie,  from  DlSrl  to  be  wise;  ^tT:r~,  to  make  one's  self  to  be  sought, 
i.  e.  to  conceal  one's  self,  from  tDDh  to  seek  ;  "Ji^nr!  to  ask  favour  for 
one's  self  properly  to  make  one  gracious,  from  "j2ft  to  be  gracious.  These 
are  the  leading  significations. 

(3)  It  is  sometimes  the  passive  of  Piel;  as  *V£2  to  number,  IJtzr'r] 
to  be  numbered.  (4)  It  is  also  intransitive  ;  as  PjiNriFt  to  be  angry.  (5) 
It  is  not  unfrequently  active  and  transitive;  as  ~vaPf£r|  to  keep  or  ob- 
serve, viz.  laws,  statutes,  etc. 

I  'iiiisnal  Conjugations. 

[§  188.  Poel,  Poal,  and  Hithpoel,  are  merely  substitutes  for  the 
Daghesh'd  conjugations,  §  175.  a;  as  are  also  Pole!,  Polal  and  Hith- 
polel,  §  175.  6  ;  and  likewise  Pilel  and  Pulal,  §  176.  2. 

Note.  When  the  regular  Piel,  Pual,  etc.  of  verbs  Z'J  and  W  are 
employed,  together  with  the  forms  just  mentioned,  there  is  generally 
some  slight  distinction  of  meaning  between  them,  such  as  is  described 
in  §  185.  b.  Note. 

§  189.  Pilpel  and  Polpal  are  only  another  form  for  Piel  and  Pual, 
§  17G.  3. 

§  190.  Hothpaal  and  Huthpaal  agree  in  meaning  with  Hithpael, 
when  it  is  used  in  a  passive  sense. 

Noto.  The  olhei  unfrequenl  conjugations  nave  generally  an  intensive  signification.  Thesisw 
rilittral  verbs  arc  low,  ami  of  various  significations.] 

§  191.  The  moods  and  tenses  of  verbs  are  very  limited  in  Hebrew. 
The  moods  are  the  Indicative,  the  Imperative,  and  the  Infinitive;  the 
tenses  are  the  Praeter  and  Future. 

§  192.  The  number,  person,  and  gender  of  verbs,  are  expressed 
with  unusual  fulness  and  accuracy. 

§  193.  The  ground  forms  of  all  verbs  are  (l)  The  Praeter,  3  pers. 
singular  ;  which  is  the  ground-form  of  the  past  tense  and  the  present 
participle.  (2)  The  Infinitive  construct  ,  which  is  generally  regarded 
as  the  ground-form  of  the  Future  and  Imperative. 


78  §§104 — 107.  vbbbi:  pormatiom  <»i  pbabtbb  i  r< 


Bat  In  varha  with  Futnre  Pattahh,  the  Iailn.  cooa  true  i  Lakei  Hholen  regularly;  which  aoanii 
to  bfl  :u  variance  with  thin  principle  :  m  leut,  it  i*  in  exception  [a  large  i  ••  maxim  «» 

jut  laid  down,  tee  $  211 8  |  Iho  Inf.  conat.  aa  a  ground-form.      ii  t  of 

Kal,  the  tnf.  may  well  be  takan  m  the  ground-form  of  the  Fats  and  Imp.  in  nil  the  conjugation  | 
and  oven  the  participial  i  i  Piejj  Pu.il,  Hiphil,  Hoplial,  and  Elitbpeel,  are  derived  from  the  Inf.  bn 
in  tin-  lame  •  onjugalions. 

§  191.  The  Praeter  is  declined  by  adding  to  the  root, 
(the  3d  pors.  sin g.  masc.),  fragments  of  pronouns,  in  order 
to  designate  person  and  gender;   e.g. 

Si.')<ri/l(ir. 

3  mas.         J?l3p    ground-form.  .... 

3  fern.      M,cp    by  adding  rr_    ....       fragment  of      NT: 

,       '  (|T  *  O  T  ~  • 

2  mas.      rt?pp       —  n     ~n  —    —       nnx 

2  fern.       n:  up,         —  n       Ti  —    —    KM  "rx 

1  corn.     ,Fi*!3p         —  "TO        1?        prob.  from  obs.  VN 

Plural. 

3  com.       'l-^p,         —  1        Nl        derivation  unknown. 

2  mas.  DPrrDp  —  DO  fragment  of  DnN . 
2  fern,  inrup  —  "jlj  -in  —  —  "jriN . 
1  com.     13bp|5        —           na                     —    —  «st. 

§  195.  Tks  Inf.  construe!,  (the  ground- form  of  the  Fut. 
and  Imp.  mood),  has  like  the  Praeter  Kal  (§  181.  6),  three 
forms;  viz.  as  7*L)p,  DDTD •  "jrij .  Tlic  Inf.  in  the  derived 
conjugations,  takes  the  vowels  peculiar  to  such  conjugations 
respectively. 

Note.  Besides  these  endings,  it  sometimes  takes  the  form  of  a 
fern,  noun,  in  regular  verbs,  §  212.  3;  and  in  some  irregular  ones,  the 
fern,  form  is  almost  the  only  one  in  use  ;  e.  g.   in  verbs  Fe  Yodh,  etc. 

§  196.  The  Inf.  absolute  takes  Qamets  in  the  first  sylla- 
ble, and  IJholem  impure  in  the  last;   e.g.  ?10^« 

Note.  This  form  is  preserved,  even  in  most  of  the  irregular  verbs. 
In  verbs  IS,  however,  we  have  Dip  for  C"p  .  Even  the  derived  con- 
jugations preserve,  for  the  most  part,  the  final  Hholein  impure  ;  e.g. 
Niph.  VoBrt  ,  Piel  ?Bj£  ,  Hoph.  Vap  .  Hiphil  has  Tseri ;  as  b^p." 
or  bap  —  .  The  variations  will  be  noted,  under  the  respective  classes 
of  verbs. 

§  197.  The  Future  tense  is  declined,  by  prefixing  frag- 
ments of  pronouns  to  the  ground-form,  i.  e.  the  Int.  con- 
struct ;  and  also  by  suffixing  them,  in  some  cases,  in  order 
to  mark  the  gender  or  number. 


§§  198 200.  VERBS  ;  FORMATION  of  the  future. 


rg 


Compare  the  Praeter,  §  194,  which  is  declined  by  the  aid  of  for- 
mative suffixes  only.  The  following'  table  exhibits  the  probable  de- 
rivation of  most  of  the  Fut.  formative  prefixes  and  suffixes. 

Sing  ular. 
ground-form. 


Inf.  const,  b'ttp 
3  masc.     Vup-1 


II 


by  prefixing 

3  fern.     JrBpft 

2  mas.      bppl-J 

2  fern.    ''btajJPl  bysuff.  and  pref.  "_. 

1   com.     b'tjpfij       by  prefixing 

Plural. 

3  mas.    !lyt3p.'^  by  suffi  and  pref.    1  ; — 


—  n 

—  n 

—  Pi 

—  N 


3  fern.  "l^Lj^ri 
2  mas.  Tbt^n 
2  fem.n:i:b'pn 


I    *= 


—  n 

—  n 

—  p 

—  2 


^  prob.  from  NT  Pi,  ■«  for  1 
I  to  begin  a  word. 

deriv.  uncertaia. 

from  nnN  . 
{  pref.  fr.   pin  ;    suff.   from 
I  NTI  to  mark  the  fem. 

from  "*:N: . 

deriv.  of  =1  uncertain. 

{  deriv.  of  n  uncertain  ;  PI2 
£  from  "fn . 
pref.  from  SFN  . 
^  prefix   from  "JPN  ;  n: 
)  from  "in  . 


1  com.      !>t3p3.    by  prefixing  -    2      from  WK. 

[§  198.  The  praeformalive  affixes  to  the  Fut.,  would  appropriately 
have  a  Sheva  for  their  vowel-pointing,  (as  in  Piel,  Pual,  Hithp.  they 
have),  but  this  receives  various  modifications,  according  to  the  point- 
ing of  the  letter  which  follows;  see  §§  136 — 139. 

§  199.  In  the  derived  conjugations,  (Niphal,  Hiphil,  Hophal,  and 
Hithpael),  the  pracjbrmatives  of  the  Fut.  almost  always  expel  the 
characteristics  of  the  conjugations,  and  transfer  their  vowel  points  to 
themselves ;  e.  g. 


Fut.  Niphal 


iup*1  instead  of   ^'C^'n''  from  Inf.  bttpn 


—  —      in  verbs  t'J    Dip"] 

—  Hiphil  -^p.I 

—  —      in  verbs  12    O^p*1 

—  Hophal  bop"1 

—  —      in  verbs  1J>    Dj5!P 

—  Hithpael 


?3>j3TP         — 


biprr 

^qprji 

cp;-; 
r^pnn"1 


IV 


mpn 


§  200.    The  final  vowel  of  the  Fut.  may  be,  (like  that  of 
the  Praeter  and  Inf.),  either  Hholem,  Pattahh,  or  Tseri. 
E.g.  With   Hholem,  (which   is  by  far  the   most  usual  form);  as 


i't3j?,i  .     With  Pattahh,  (which  is  common  in  intransitive  verbs,  having 


a  Praeter  with  Tseri,  and  also  in  verbs  with  a  Guttural  in  the  final 
syllable,  and  some  others)  ;  as  TaD"? ,  9&BP ,  NiZtt?  =  JM£tt*» ,  *>flp ;= 
b»3*  ,  etc.     With  Tseri  ;  as  1S8P ,  3^^. ,  ^PP  =  ]pr  ,  etc. 


80  §§201 — 20-1.   vkkhs  ;  scnj.  ani>  opt,  MOOOB, 


§201.  T%e  Imperative,  follows  the  same  analogy  as  the 
Future,  taking  the  same  vowels  m  it-  final  syllable,  and  for 
the  like  reasons.  It  is  declined  l)j  means  of  Buffix-frag- 
ments,  like  those  in  the  Praeter  and  Future. 

Note.  The  Imp.  h;is  only  the  2d  persons;  when  an  Imp.  sense 
for  the  1st  and  3d  persons  was  needed,  the  Hebrews  employed  those 
persons  of  the  Fut.  tense. 

§  202.  The  Participles,  in  Kal,  are  both  active  and  pas- 
sive; in  the  other  conjugations  there  is  but  one  form,  which 
follows  the  conjugation  in  respect  to  its  meaning. 

E.  g.  Kal,  3rp3  scribens,  SWriS  scriptum.  But  in  verhs  with  final 
Tseri  and  Hholem,  the  part,  present  retains  the  form  of  the  Praeter, 
as  Praet.  K^JD,  part.  Nra ;  Praet.  "iV  ,  part.  SiST;  so  in  verbs  17, 
Praet.  DP-.,  part.  DP.  In  Niphal  the  same  principle  prevails,  with  a 
slight  variation  ;  as  Niph.  !?tap3  ,  part.  bOP3  ,  i.  e.  with  final  Pattahh 
prolonged. 

Note  1.  Intransitive  verbs  usually  have  but  one  form  of  the  parti- 
ciple in  Kal,  which  may  have  either  an  active  or  passive  meaning,  as 
the  case  requires. 

Note  2.  Beyond  Niphal,  all  the  participles  are  derived  from  the 
Infinitive  form  of  their  respective  conjugations,  by  prefixing  23  ,  and 
dropping  the  characteristic  I"»  where  it  occurs;  e.  g.  btp.PH,  bEptt, 
V'tapfc ,  ?Vpn  ,  -t?,P.na  .  In  the  passive  forms,  the  final  Pattahh  of  the 
ground-form  is  prolonged.  Any  departures  from  this  principle  will  be 
noticed,  where  they  occur. 

Note  3.  Participles  are  declined  in  the  same  manner  as  adjec- 
tives, having  sing,  and  plur.  forms,  of  the  masc.  and  feminine  gender. 

Subjunctive  and  Optative  Moods. 

§  203.  The  Hebrew  has  neither  of  these  in  separate,  regularly 
defined  forms,  as  in  Greek,  (§  191);  but  it  employs  in  the  room  of 
them,  and  to  a  certain  extent,  peculiar  forms  of  the  Future  tense. 

Note.  In  the  Arabic,  the  usage  of  the  Fut.  in  this  way.  is  tar  more  defined  am)  general,  than  in 
the  Hebrew.  In  Syriac  and  Chaldee.  the  usage  does  not  at  all  appear.  The  Hebrew  use  is  a  bind 
of  medium  between  the  two.  as  it  is  somewhat  frequent,  and  yet  far  from  being  general 

§  204.  The  variations  of  the  Future,  for  the  purpose  of  express- 
ing an  Optative  or  Conditional  «ense.  are  made. 

{a)  By  paragoge  of  ~_  and  sometimes  T>-;  e.  g.  Fut  "12TwX  ,  with 
paragoge,  fl'ja'T**  ;  T?.:** ,  n"vajN  . 

{b)  By  a  kind  of  apocope ;  which  consists  in  general,  in  rendering 


§§205 — 207.  vfrrs;  parag.  and  apoc.  futiri:.  81 

shorter  the  final  long  vowel ;  ami  in  some  cases,  in  casting  away  the 
final  letter  and  vowel ;  e.g.  ft3j!£i  aP0C- -V.)"- 5  TClS*  ,  apoc  TCP*  j 
7l\l'  ,  apoc.  ti*  • 

§  205.  The  Paragogtc  Future  is,  for  the  most  part,  con- 
fined to  the  Jst  person,  singular  and  plural.  The  2d  and 
3d  persons  rarely  exhibit  it.      It  is  employed, 

(«)  As  an  Optative;  e.  g.  "nr:N  let  me  die.  {b)  To  express  ex- 
citement, urging,  assurance,  strong  determination  ;  as  !"DbJ*  /  must  go, 
PiTrtt  let  me  rise  up,  n"l3*1fit  I  am  resolved  to  speak,  robs  let  vs  go, 
etc.  (c)  After  the  particles  ]yob  ,  "l  ,  it  expresses  ihc  latter  part  of  con- 
ditional sentences  ;  as  FHSON  *i":b  ,  so  that  I  may  declare  ;  TC-^".^  , 
lhat  we  may  cat.  {d)  In  some  cases,  it  is  used  in  this  last  (conditional) 
sense,  where  the  particle  is  omitted. 

Note.  Vav  conversive  (§  208)  frequently  occasions  the  paragogic 
form  of  the  verb  to  he  adopted,  particularly  in  the  later  Hebrew  ;  but 
not  with  any  speciality  of  meaning;  as  ^;",17:i^■' ,  and  I  said  ;  comp. 
§  200.  Note  1 . 

§  200.     The  Apocopate  Future,    on    the   other   hand,  is 

mostly  confined  to  the  2d   and   3d  persons,   rarely  making 

its  appearance  in  the  first ;   e.  g. 

3d  pen.  3il  pors. 

Keg.  verb  Hi  ph.  b*I3p2  apoc.  bfip* 
Verbs  vj    Kal       m*:^    —      na* 

Hiph.  nia^  —  n*:^ 
Verts  ro    Kal       nbs*    —        irr  (br) 

Piel     iiiil    —       ii".  (-*7) 

Hiph.  rf£p  —    \*i  C-i;) 

This  Future  is  employed  (a)  To  express  command,  wish,  prohibi- 
tion ;  e.  g.  nn^^  ,  let  him  destroy ;  "iFCn  rN  ,  hide  not.  {b)  After  "J 
in  a  conditional  sentence  ;  as  12*1 ,  that  he  may  tell,  (c)  After  the  par 
tides  of  negation,  Nb,  ~N;  as  FjOTD  iNr  ,  thou  shalt  not  add ;  "irrFi  "rN, 
thou  shalt  not  be  preferred. 

[Note  I.  Vav  conversive  (§  208)  connects  itself  very  often  with 
such  apocopate  forms,  but  frequently  without  any  speciality  of  mean- 
ing; e.  g.  b^p;*; ,  and  he  divided.  Comp.  §  205.  Note  ;  also  §  101.  b. 

Note  2.  The  apoc.  Future  is  confined  to  conjugations  and  forms, 
such  as  the  table  above  exhibits.    All  Futures  do  by  no  means  admit  it. 

Note  3.  The  apocopate  Futures,  in  poetry,  and  in  the  later  He- 
brew, are  not  always  of  special  significancy,  but  are  often  employed 
as  the  common  ones.] 

§  207.   The  Imperative,  like  the  Future,  has  both  para- 
1! 


3d  pen. 

2d  pers. 

-*upn 

apoc. 

bvP.F. . 

man 

— 

nbJj. 

n*an 

— 

nan. 

n^n 

— 

r;~  (rsn). 

rrran 

— 

ban  (r^n). 

rrrsn 

— 

**9  (::-). 

BS  §§ftl)H — 210.   Villus  ;    11111:1:    \NI>  I'ltAKTI'.lt  WITH  VAV. 


gogic   and   apocopate  forms,   which   give   intensity  to  tin: 
meaning. 

E.  g.  Paragogic  ;  as  *f»ti  ,  rnTrii  ;  dip,  r.E'p;  *»*5  ,  rt*l»C  .  .7- 
pocopute  ;  as  bttpr;  (for  b^p.") ;  so  nVa  ,  apoc.  '-■:  ;  '-n?:  ,  apoc.  ; ":  ; 
]siip  apoc.  ofnjyBiO,  |4$^j3  apoc.  ofn:N~ip. 

Future  with  Vav  conversive. 

§  208.  Vav  with  Pattahh  prefixed  to  the  Fut.  tense, 
and  followed  by  a  Daghesh  forte,  is  called  Vav  conversive  ; 
because  its  usual  etfect  is  to  convert  such  Future  into  a 
Praetcr,  in  respect  to  meaning. 

E.  g.  "IftN  he  said,  also  ^1338**1  and  he  said,  or,  he  suid.  ]f  the  prae- 
formative  letter  of  the  Fut.  be  K ,  the  Daghesh  is  omitted,  and  the 
vowel  lengthened  ;  as  VojSNrt  ,  §  1 11.  §  112.  If  the  praeformative  let- 
ter of  the  verb  have  a  Sheva  simple,  Daghesh  forte  is  usually  omitted 
after  the  Vav  ;  e.  g.  bBj3?2  ,  §  73.  Note  3. 

[Note  1.  Vav  conversive  is  often  connected  with  the  paragogic  1 
pers.  Fut.,  §  205.  Note  ;  also  with  the  apocopate  2d  and  3d  pers.  Fut., 
§  206.  Note  1  ;  but  without  giving  an  Optative  or  Subjunctive  meaning 
to  them. 

Note  2.  Vav  conversive  commonly  (not  always)  makes  the  Future 
Mild,  and  consequently  shortens  the  final  vowel  if  it  be  long,  §  101.6. 

Note  3.  Vav  conversive  is  probably  a  fragment  of  the  verb  rn~ 
to  be.  The  first  letter  is  dropped,  (as  it  commonly  is  in  Syriac),  and 
the  fragment  !"P  is  united  to  the  Future  by  assimilating  the  r:,  (as  in 
JTp3  =  rrr-ntt)  ;  so  that  tbj?«1  ==  FtJjf^  r^-  it  was  [thai]  he  killed, 
i.  e.  he  killed.  So  the  Arabians  make  their  Imperfect,  only  they 
write  out  the  verb  of  existence  in  full ;  and  so  the  Syrians,  except  that 
they  employ  the  participle  of  the  verb  of  existence.] 

Praeler  with  Vav. 

§  209.  Vav  prefixed  to  the  Praetcr,  is  merely  a  con- 
junction. But  it  often  gives  to  the  Praetcr,  the  sense  of  a 
Future,  because  it  connects  it  with  a  preceding  Future  or 
Imperative. 

Note.  As  Vav  conversive,  prefixed  to  the  Future,  retracts  the  tone 
(^  208.  Note  2)  ;  so,  on  the  contrary,  Vav  joined  to  the  Praeter, 
usually  throws  the  tone  forward,  as  ^PH?"?  1  ^.1^1  ->  §  10'-  a- 

§  210.     General  remark  on  the  tenses.     The  tenses  in  Hebrew  are 


211,212.    RF.rnx.vri  VERBS  TRANSITIVE.  S.'J 


real  Aorisls,  capable  of  every  variety  of  meaning  as  to  designation  of 
time.     See  this  fully  developed  in  the  Syntax,  §  503.  §  501. 

Paradigms  of  Verbs. 

[§  211.  Remarks  applicable  to  the  Paradigms  in  general,  i.e.  to  all 
the  different  classes  of  verbs. 

(a)  Paragogic  letters  are  often  suffixed  to  some  of  the 
forms  ;   e.  g. 

(1)  Nun,  to  persons  ending  in  =1  or  \_  ;  as  1!Hjv>.'V  instead  of  'HJS'V, 
"PP2"PI  instead  of  nj53*lPi;  rarely  to  the  Praetcr,  as  yi9"}*  instead  of 
WVJ;  see  §  109.  c.  §  146.  b.  (2)  He,  usually  to  the  Put.  and  Imp. 
active ;  §  204.  §  205.  §  207 ;  rarely  in  the  Praeter,  as  nnn.^  for 
JVU3;  Niph.  Praet.  fern.  ~Nbs: ,  with  rr_  parag.  nnNre: ;  Hiph. 
fern.  rrJOZMri ,  with  parag.  nnNShr: .  (3)  Jlleph,  paragogic  or  otiant, 
rarely  :  as  'obrj ,  NTDrr]  the  same  ;  so  MiBS?  for  1iZ)3*  ,  §  125.  a.  (4) 
Participles  sometimes  take  He  or  Yodh  paragogic,  especially  the  lat- 
ter, when  they  are  in  regimen;  as  mN"ib  ",b",2Ui-:r; .  Sometimes  the 
Inf.  mood  takes  it;  as  Tyajlttb .     Also  the  Praeter  2d  pcrs.  fern.,  as 

(/>)  Forms  with  Quiescents  are  sometimes  dcfcclirrli/ 
written,  §  63. 

E.  g.  ha«  for  "nJMJ  ,  T,ZV  for  WT^  (comp.  §  122.  l)  ;  hut  this  usage 
is  rare.  Oftener  "|  is  written  for  n:  ;  as  ■JUJaFl  for  r;:"i';n.  Sometimes 
n_  for  \-]_;  as  PfifH^  for  "VIS*]*  ,  tfSS  for'Ti^y ,  etc. 

(c)  The  prepositions  a  ,  3  ,  b  ,  prefixed  to  the  Inf.  of  Niphal,  some- 
times (not  always)  expel  the  n  characteristic,  and  stand  in  its  place  ; 
as  bUj?2  for  btt^rl? ;  comp.  §  199. 

(d)  Mem  praeformalive  in  participles  is  sometimes  (rarely)  omit- 
ted ;  as  'rrjvb  for  n|?:3 ,  Dttipna  for  cxnpntts ,  etc.] 


REGULAR  VERBS  TRANSITIVE.* 

NOTES  ON  THE  PAUADIC.M. 

The  student  is  Brat  of  all  to  commit  Paradigm  I.  of  the  Verbs.    The  following  nalei  "ill  ^n" 

to  explain  variations  and  anomalies.  The  Paradigms  aro,  lor  convenience'  sake,  thrown  together  at 
the  end  of  the  (jrammir. 

[§  212.  Aotcs  mid  Explanations, in  respect  to  Paradigm 
I.  of  t he  verbs. 

*  Some  of  the  verbs  here  treated  of  ate  in'raiuitive  also;    but  in  general  il  ia  Otherwise.    A 
potiori  nomtn  fit. 


84  {  2J2i   fBRJM  :    v<'i  U  "V  k  m  . 


'I'll. i  learnei  » ill  be  careful  i"  note,  tbal  il"-  lone  i-  ""  the  ultimate,  i  .  »l!  eeaet  where  il  i-  sol 

markc.l  with  an >t  ovei  tin-  pnnntt.     Partifiulot  euro  nt  the  outlet,  will  enable  him  alwafl  10 

accent  tii<>  vri> ;  rightly,  wilb<  nt  aoj  mm  Mr. 

Kai..  (I)  The  example  -3~),  exhibits  the  Fat.  with  Pattahh,  (fa- 
miliarly- called  Fut  .'?)  ;  btit  there  are  very  few  verhs  with  such  a 
Future,  unless  the  last  Bjllable  has  a  Go tt oral  in  it,  or  the  verh  be- 
longs to  the  classes  with  final  Tseri  or  Hholem  in  the  Praeter ;  §181.6. 

(2)  The  Inf.  of  23"}  is  Z3n  ;  and  so  in  other  cases  of  the  like  na- 
ture ;  which  seems  not  to  agree  with  the  idea  of  its  hem?  the  ground- 
form  of  such  Futures  and  Imperatives  as  take  Pattahh;  §  193.  2. 

(3)  Other  forms  of  the  Infinitive,  besides  those  in  the  Paradigm, 
are,  (n)  Inf.  absolute,  !:t3J5  (Vav  omitted).     Inf.  construct,  biup  (Vav 

fulcrum  only),  ri33  .     It  h:\sfemirtine  forms  also,  though  rarely;  e.g. 
like  fi'-jcp  ,  ^:*cr.  i  ^-.^k  )  (-^T-^  i  'i,<c  the  Chaldee,  is  doubtful). 

Note.  The  Hholem  in  the  Inf.  absolute  is  impure  and  immutalde; 
but  in  the  Inf.  constr.  it  is  pure  and  mutable.  Hence,  before  Maq- 
qeph,  it  is  shortened  :  as  ~":cp  qftdl.  Before  suffixes  il  is  transposed  ; 
Pee  Par.  of  Inf.  with  suffixes. 

(4)  The  less  vsual  or  uncommon  forms  of  the  Future  are,  bil^p* 
(Vav/»/criw/),  very  rarely  as  rcp^,  still  more  seldom,  as  ^b'Ep";  ;  1st 
pers.  rarag.  ~rcpN  ;    in  pause,  as  silrCp*,  ?32"V  ;  with  ]  parag.  as 

(5)  Imperative  ;  :*wp  (Vav  fulcrum),  sometimes  as  rttj3  .  Parago- 
gic  ;  asn'rep,  rYrttP,  rarely  nb'op  ,  r.ycp.  Imp  2d  pers.  fern, 
sing,  seldom  as  ^r^p  .  2d  pers.  masc.  plur.  seldom  as  ?.rcp  ;  in  pause, 
sometimes  as  ^fwP  ,  sjbep  .  The  Hholem  here  is  pure,  as  in  the  Inf. 
and  Future. 

Note  1.  The  Hholem  in  the  Future  is  pure,  whether  written 
without  a  Vav,  or  with  one  ;  consequently  it  is  shortened,  when  the 
accent  is  thrown  off;  e.g.  hrfore  Maqqeph,  ~-Cp"  yiq-tbh  so  helore  a 
suffix,  crr^p^. 

Note  2.  Some  verhs  have  both  Fut.  O  and  A;  e.  g.  such  as  r3l:, 
S)"^I2  ,  -n:  ,  pel"!,  etc.  (see  Lexicon),  without  any  difference  in  their 
meaning.  Others  have  Fut.  O  and  j9,  with  a  difference  in  their  signi- 
fication ;  e.  g.  *"IXj3  ,  ttJ"nh ,  \L'r~ ,  "ITS  ,  etc.  (see  Lexicon). 

(6)  Participles  active.  Frequently  written  rc'p,  with  Hholem  im- 
pure; very  seldom  as  i^Dip  or  irLpp  ,  or  r*~p.  With  Yodh  parag., 
vru'p,  fern.  "Inrt:'p  (from  ~b w'p).  Participles  are  declined  as  adjec- 
tives, having  masc.  and  fern.,  as  well  as  sing,  and  plural;  see  Parad. 

(7)  Participles  passive.  Sometimes  written  rCj?  (§  H),  seldom  as 
►  ^p  •  The  sense  is  not  uniformly  passive,  but  sometimes  active; 
often  so  in  neuter  and  intransitive  verbs;  as  is  the  case  also  in  Syriac 


§§213 — 216.  verbs;  notes  on  niph.  piel,  pcal,  hipii.        81 


§  213.  Niphal.  (l)  The  Praetor  tins  no  variations  from  the  Para- 
digm. (2)  Inf.  abg.  U;T7«  for  aiTTH  ,  E/.ek.  14:3;  r~:~  for  SJISr! , 
Ps.  68  :  3. 

(3)  The  final  Tseri,  in  the  forms  of  the  Inf.  const.,  Fut.  and  Imp. 
\H  pure,  and  of  course  shortened  when  the  accent  is  thrown  off;  e.  g. 
■"Dgajrt  ,  -"rr"1  ,  Inf.  — HJSn  .  A  disjunctive  accent  often  changes  the 
Tsrri  to  Pattahh  ;  as  ^503*"!  ,  §  129.  d.  §  145.  The  plur.  fern.  2d  and 
3d  pers.,  more  usually  have  Pattahh,  even  without  a  disjunctive  accent, 
or  the  presence  of  a  Guttural  ;  as  nr'rDXn,  Jer.  24 :  2 ;  so  that  as  to 
the  forms  with  Tseri,  in  the  paradigm  here,  it  is  somewhat  doubtful 
whether  they  are  the  predominant  ones. 

(t)  Future  1st.  pers.  sing,  often  takes  Hhircq  under  the  praeforma- 
tive  ;  e.  g.  as  ":p.£wN  ,  ^T^ ,  etc. 

§  214.  Pif.l.  (l)  Praeter  sometimes  with  Seghol,  as  "i^";  oftener 
with  Pattahh,  as  Tjfr  ,  specially  before  a  IMatjqeph,  as  NWttVH  . 
(2)  Infinitive;  fern,  forms  rather  frequent,  as  rH73T ;  with  suff,  as 
•jnp^S  .  (3)  Imperative  .J,  as  ;TtE  .  (  l)  Participle  sometimes  with- 
out h  ,  as  hSttj  for  h?"^7-?  ,  Fee.  4:2.  §  108.  a.  3. 

Note  1.     The  final  Tseri,  throughout  Piel,  is  pure;  and  of  course 
should   be  shortened,   whenever  it  loses  the  accent  ;    e.  g.  ",'r"-~^ 
Nun  parag.  usually  retains  it;  as  "p^V"*  . 

Note  2.  Daghesh  forte  in  the  middle  radical,  is  not  unfrequently 
omitted  in  writing,  when  the  middle  radical  has  a  Sheva  ;  as  ' -.'j~?? 
for  liijS^  ,  §73.  Note  3. 

§  215.  Pual.  (l)  Praeter,  very  rarely,  as  itMB  (a  mere  orthogra- 
phic variation).  Once  n^j^  for  rt^jvb  .  (2)  Participle  sometimes 
omits  » ;  as  Tifib  for  T^/p^  ,  U"U)  for  tt^toS  ,  etc.  §  108.  a.  3. 

Note.  Daghesh  is  sometimes  omitted  in  writing  here,  as  in  Piel : 
see  Note  2  above. 

§  21G.  lhi'iiiL.  (l)  Praeter  sometimes  with  Seghol  under  the  n  , 
as  ^"ibDr;  instead  of  'Z'z'izr] .  Rarely  N  is  put  for  tt,  as  Ty; n;x 
1st  pers.  sing,  for  ■'Pr^n  .  (2)  Inf.  absolute;  also  written  frequent- 
ly, as  bcpri;  very  rarely  as  -Opfcj  (n  for  n),  or  J^Opn  .  (3)  Inf. 
construct,  sometimes  as  tt3j?H .  With  preposition,  as  r"1!:""'?  ami 
b^pr,  §103.  b.  In  a  few  instances,  the  praeformatire  has  llhircq  ; 
as  i\nn,  like  the  Praeter. 

(4)  Future  apocojiatc,  as  rCJV  ,  with  Tseri  pure  and  mutable;  § 
20G.  This  of  course  i-;  shortened,  when  it  loses  the  accent.  (5)  Impe- 
rative takes  the  same  Tseri,  in  the  2d  pers.  sing.  masc.  and  2d  plur. 
fcm. ;  but  in  the  other  forms,  and  with  parag.  ~,  and  with  suffix  pro- 
nouns, it  follows  the  model  of  the  Inf.  constr. ;  as  n'r-q^r: ,  ^i^r.'1w|;rT 

(G)  Participles  rarely  as  JytJDH  ,  plur.  C'rcp*:  ,  fern,  n'rbptt  . 


80  §§'-217 — 222.   m.ii.m  on  i:r.<-.  M-.Riis  iN'rnANsrnvi.. 

Note.  See  respecting  the  tone  syllable,  in  this  conjugation,  §  100. ft 

§  217.  Hofhal.  Some  verhs  have  both  forms,  i.e.  m  »DBH  and 
i>Opn  ;  some  the  one  exclusively,  and  some  the  other.  No  actual  case 
of  the  Inf.  construct  occurs  in  this  conjugation. 

In  a  very  few  cases,  the  i~,  characteristic  of  tho  Conjugation  n- 
mains  after  the  Pracformative,  e.  g.  rnJPSpha  for  niTSpn  ;  BO  in 
Hiph.  nnin^  for  -"li"1 ,  verb  frr  . 

§  218.  Hithpael.  (l)  The  end  syllable  with  Pattahh  i*  frequent 
here  ;  which,  in  Pause,  of  course  makes  Qamets  ;  aatt^Tpni"]  .  anjjrjil  . 
(2)  In  the  second  and  first  persons,  (where  the  usual  vowel  between 
the  second  and  third  radical  is  Pattahh,  as  in  the  Paradigm),  if  the  tone 
is  thrown  off  from  this  penult  syllable,  it  occasionally  takes  Hhircq  in- 
stead of  Pattahh  ;  "'rr.p-^nrn  ,  Dr.'i'r^nrp  . 

(3)  Before  Maqqeph,  the  forms  with  Tseri  of  course  shorten  it,  as 
it  is  pure  and  mutable;  e.g.  rti — pz-nrr.  (4)  Nun  parag.  usually 
retains  and  prolongs  the  Pattahh,  when  that  vowel  is  used  ;  as  l":Vr:»~!r:. 
(5)  Daghesh  forte  in  the  middle  radical,  is  sometimes  omitted  here, 
as  in  Piel  and  Pual  ;  e.  g.  ^pcrT  ,  Judg.  20:  15,  (for  *"~2rr),  the 
Pattahh  being  prolonged  as  a  compensation.  So  TipEnri  (passive 
form  of  Hithpael),  Num.  1  :  47.   2:  33,  et  al. 

§  219.  Besides  the  conjugations  of  the  regular  verbs  here  noted, 
Pool  and  Poal,  and  Pilel  and  Pulal  occur;  but  they  are  exceedingly 
rare.  E.  g.  of  the  former,  are  •vr^iuj  and  ii'ysi  ,  part.  Dfi'i&fi  Job  9  : 
15,  1  wVr;:  (for  so  it  should  be  pointed)  Ps.  101 :  5  ;  of  the  latter,  r'rs:. 


REGULAR  VERBS  INTRANSITIVE. 

NOTES  ON  THE  r-ARADIGMS. 

§  220.  The  3d  pers.  sing.  Praeter,  is  the  principal  one  which  ex- 
hibits a  departure  from  the  forms  of  the  regular  transitive  verb  ;  as 
will  be  seen  by  inspection  of  the  Paradigms. 

§  221.  Verbs  final  H'nolem  (of  which  there  are  not  half  a  score), 
generally  retain  the  Hholem  in  the  derived  forms;  as  lPriin  from 
n:p  ,  "^Vs"'  from  bb^  ;  but  not  always,  as  "T^d  shd-khal-ti  from  b-~*  . 
As  the  Hholem  in  these  verbs  is  pure,  so  it  is  shortened  when  it  loses 
the  accent ;  as  pn.'.'n  vtya-ghbr-(a. 

§  222.  In  the  same  manner,  those  few  verbs,  which  retain  Tseri  in 
the  derived  forms,  shorten  it  either  into  Hhireq  or  Seghol,  when  the 
tone  is  removed  ;  e.g.  l\^  ,  ^'Vi'ir'!  !  '**."£/  j  D»2»1|?'  • 

[Note  1.  All  the  Futures  are  with  Pattahh,  unless  the  Praeter  has 


§§  223 — 226.  verbs  with  gutturals.  >7 


two  forms,  A  and  E ;  as  }0"ij  and  ]3/iJ  ,  Fut.  only  f$B*  ,  as  in  the  Para- 
digm. 

Note  2.  In  pause,  the  Tseri  of  verbs  intransitive  most  frequently 
makes  its  appearance  ;  e.  g.  Ipl/t  ,  and  so  often.  In  a  number  of  cases, 
a  pause  accent  makes  the  Tseri  appear,  which  elsewhere  does  not  ap- 
pear ;  as  "(S"^ ,  ]3;i;  only  in  pause.] 

Note  3.  Out  of  Kal,  the  intransitive  verbs  conform  to  the  model 
of  the  transitive  ones,  and  need  no  separate  Paradigms.  The  whole 
number  of  them  is  very  small ;  and  the  cases  of  departure  in  inflection 
from  Par.  I.,  comparatively  very  few,  even  in  those  which  do  occur. 

Note  4.  The  verbs  called  intransitive  are,  in  some  cases,  transitive. 
As  before,  a  poliori  nomcn  Jit. 


VERBS  WITH  GUTTURALS. 

§  223.  We  have  seen,  §  179,  that  the  verb  ^jr© ,  (the  example  for 
Paradigms  in  the  old  grammars),  is  employed  to  give  technical  desig- 
nations to  the  various  forms  of  verbs.  Accordingly,  as  D  is  the  first  let- 
ter in  this  verb,  5>  the  second,  and  b  the  third  ;  so  verbs  with  Gutturals 
may  be  denominated,  S  guttural,  9  guttural,  b  guttural,  whose  first,  or 
second,  or  third  radical  letter,  is  a  Guttural. 

Verbs  Pr.  Guttural. 

§  224.  Where  other  verbs  would  take  a  simple  Sheva. 
under  the  first  radical,  these  more  usually  have  a  composite 
Sheva.      This  may  be  called,  the  smooth  enunciation. 

E.  g.  *fa»;,  fjcfr,  pirr,  n»y,  Pfoa,  pm,  etc. 

Note.  The  Praeformative  letters  must  have  the  short  vowel  which 
corresponds  with  the  composite  Shevas,  in  such  cases;  see  §  139.  This 
extends  to  the  letters  formative  of  conjugation,  as  well  as  of  tense  ; 
e.  g.  Niph.  mgyj ,  Hiph.  "PSSPJ ,  Iloph.  IJMJH  ,  etc. 

§  225.   But  often  the  Guttural  retains  Sheva  simple  :  and 

then  the  vowel  under  the  praeformative,  etc.   Is  the  same 

as  it  would    be    in  case  a  composite  Sheva  had    been  em- 
ployed.     This  may  be  called  the  rough  enunciation. 

E.  g.  Hon:  ,  HT3.;: ,  !-jcn: ,  'JJatt; ;  instead  of  Son;  or  -io*r ,  Star 
or  Sta>^  ,  ^2":  or  "75~: ,  ttJah^  or  ti^fF  .  Only  the  verbs  tt^tt  and 
!"pn ,  make  such  forms  in  Pe  Guttural  as  rsri*  and  rrrr . 

§220.  When,  in  the  course  oi'  inflection,  a  simple  She- 
va comes  immediately  to  follow  a  composite  She\a  under 


§§227,22*3.    mm  i>  "\  \  :  i.i.-   !•:•   <.i  i  i  i  i:  \!  . 

the  Guttural,  the  Guttural  assumes  the  corresponding  short 
vowel  ;   see  §  140. 

E.g.  SH3MJ2 ,  not  ^"i"^  ,  which  would  make  an  impossible  syllable, 
§  42.  §  140.     So  ^pN?. ,  not  S|B0»;  ;  sHOJPI  ,  not  •1"'^"~  • 

§  227.  Where  the  first  radical  would  regularly  ho  doubled,  (as  in 
the  Inf.  Fut.  Imp.  of  Niplial),  hut  this  is  prevented  by  it-  tn'in^  a  Gut- 
tural (§  111),  the  preceding  vowel  is  lengthened  (§  112),  as  the  Para- 
digm shews. 

Note.  In  this  respect,  verbs  Pe  Resh  agree  with  verbs  Pe  Guttural 
§111;  e.  g.  0%nn  instead  of  O^n . 

§228.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm,  (a)  Km.,  (l )  Inf.  const,  receh  ing 
prefix-prepositions  with  a  Sheva,  causes  them  to  be  pointed  as  the 
praef or /natives  in  the  Future  are  ;  e.  g.  "Vasb  ,  r3J<r  ,  also  '^DH'.  ■  Inf. 
fern.,  like  tt«'3N  ,  rtpTri ,  rirttn  . 

(2)  Future  also  as  S)5N£ ,  (n  commonly  takes  Hhaleph  Seghol  in 
preference  to  any  of  the  composite  Shevas,   and  Seghol  in  preference 

to  any  of  the  short  vowels).      The  two  forms and  _-  are  not  un- 

frequently  interchanged  in  the  Fut.  of  the  same  verbs;  and  sometimes 
the  singular  has  one  form,  and  the  plural  another,  just  as  adjunct  words 
may  require  the  pronunciation  to  be  more  or  less  rapid  ;  e.  g.  !)DS£  , 
plur.  ^EpwX^1  •  The  sounds  __  are  reputed  shorter  and  more  rapid 
than  __  .  The  reason  of  their  exchange  for  each  other,  in  many  ca- 
ses, is  not  apparent  to  us ;  and  it  depended,  no  doubt,  on  the  niceties 
of  viva  voce  enunciation. 

The  Futures  with  Sheva  simple  are  as  Haft*  ,  -H''?. ,  having  Pat- 
tahh  in  the  first  syllable  when  the  last  is  O,  and  Seghol  when  the  last 
is  A;  so  as  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  two  Pattahhs.  The  declension 
of  these  forms  is  otherwise  regular,  as  in  Par.  I;  excepting  that  where 
the  final  Pattahh  falls  away,  the  Praeformative  may  take,  and  some- 
times does  take,  Pattahh  ;  as  ">p*"T  ,  plur.  ^HOrP. 

(o)   Imperative  with   N,  as  PjDSt,  THN.     With  n  parag.,   aslltSN. 
Imp.  fern.  sing,  "•oipil ,  "'THN  . 

(6)  Nifhal.  The  common  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  is  of  the  Se- 
ghol class;  e.g.  1^53,  or  (according  to  the  rough  enunciation)  2'rft?. . 
But  in  the  Inf.  absolute,  with  Hholem  final,  it  is  Pattahh  (see  a.  2.  a- 
bove)  ;  as  ^2^;: ,  "linya ;  very  seldom  with  Pattahh  in  other  cases, 
yet  sometimes  so,  as  nN'2h: ,  Gen.  31:  27.  Vav  prefixed  commonly 
occasions  Pattahh.  The  increased  Part,  forms  also  receive  it ;  as  cr "~. , 
Tiizbvz  ,  E^^ri;:  .     In  Est.  8  :  8,  we  find  STPr::  ,  a  Part,  sui  generis. 

(c)  Hiphil.  (l)  Sometimes  with  the  rough  pronunciation,  as  T,cn~. 
Peculiar  is  nri'n  .   ^  142.  e.  1.     Vav  prefixed  changes  the  composite 


§§  229 232.  VERBS  AYIN  GUTTURAL.  89 

Sheva  to  the  A  class;  e.g.  ■'nEnnrp  ,  i.e.  it  hastens  the  pronunciation 
of  the  first  part  of  the  word,  because  the  tone  is  thrown  forward.  (2) 
Inf.  abs.  and  constr.  are  sometimes  interchanged  in  their  usage  ;  e.  g. 
"VaWJi  Josh.  7  :  7,  for  Inf.  absolute  T^h  ;  ItMjb  ,  Dent.  26  :  12,  for 
Inf.  const.  T'toyb  .  (3)  Future  with  rough  enunciation,  as  TO**  ;  and 
so  the  Part,  as  T»q hJO  .     -pTTa  is  for  "p!^.7?  ,  §  119.  c.  1. 

{d)  Hopiial.  With  rough  pronunciation,  ^"n ;  also  very  rarely, 
StVstI  ,  §  142.  e.  1  ;  Irnhn  ,  Inf.  abs.  sui  generis,  Ezek.  16:4. 

Note.  The  Daghesh'd  conjugations,  (i.  e.  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hith- 
pael),  are  regular,  because  they  can  never  have  a  Sheva  under  their 
first  radical. 

Verbs  Ayin  Guttural;    Par.  V. 

§  229.   Where  other  verbs   have   Sheva  simple   under 

the  middle  radical,  these  of  course  take  a  composite  She- 
va, §  49. 

§  230.  Final  syllables  in  the  ground-forms  of  any  of  the 
conjugations,  having  Hholcm  or  Tscri  in  them,  often  (not 
always)  exchange  these  for  Pattahh.  But  the  Inf.  const, 
in  Kal  takes  Hliolcm. 

E.g.  Fut.  p»P,  rarely  as  d'n^;  Piel  an:,Drtt;  Hiphil  Imp.  p*ntt, 
etc.     Verbs  Ayin  Resh  sometimes  imitate  this. 

§  231.    As  the  conjugations  Piel,  Pual,  Hithpael,  cannot 

admit  a  Daghesh   in  the  middle  radical,   they  prolong  the 

preceding  vowel  in  cases  where  analogy  would  require  one; 

in  which  verbs  Ayin  Resh  imitate  them ;  §  1 1 1.  §  1 12. 

[§  232.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm,  (a)  Kal.  (l)  Inf.  fern,  as  HDrTaj  , 
HbJj.N  ;  also  as  nj3Hn ,  S1J3?^  §  142.  e.  1.  (2)  Future,  anomalous  phi*J , 
§  142.  e.  I. 

(6)  Piel.  In  the  Praeter,  middle  N  takes  either  Tseri  or  Hhireq 
long  before  it ;  as  ]NE ,  yND  .  Middle  n  ,  long  Hhireq,  as  ]ir3  .  Mid- 
dle h  and  3?,  long  Hhireq,  and  rarely  Tseri ;  as  ©113 ,  ^rjJJ ,  ^53 , 
Jis>n  .     Resh  demands  Tseri ;  as  T^2  . 

In  the  Future,  Inf.,  Imp.,  and  Part.,  middle  N  and  1  usually  require 
Qamets  before  them  ;  as  INtD"; ,  *p3 .  But  n,  ft,  ?,  most  commonly 
take  Pattahh  ;  as  yn^  Dh-O  ,  ^'"  ,  etc. 

(c)  Pual  usually  compensates  for  Daghesh  excluded,  by  a  Hholem, 
as  Vip?  ,  ^na  ;  sometimes  by  Qibbuts  impure,  as  yfn  ,  D"1 . 

(ti)  In  Hithp.,  the  vowel  before  the  Guttural  is  varied,  just  as  in 
12 


9t  §§23U 238.    VKRHS  I.AMKDII  OUTTIRAI.. 

the  fut.  Picl ;  see  above  under  b.  The  accent  affects  Qamets  here, 
in  a  peculiar  way;  e.g.  iF^ninn  ,  instead  of  ",p'3n:nn  ,  which  is  ex- 
plained by  §  142.  er,  and  §  lit.  'fti'iK  =  y*'ina  (§  187.  b.  3.),  is  an  in- 
stance of  Jlithpoci] 

Verbs  Lamedh  Guttural;  Par.  VI. 

§  233.  Where  by  analogy  the  Guttural  must  have  B 
Sheva,  the  vowel  points  are  like  those  of  the  regular  verb, 
Par.  I.      This  appears  by  Par.  VI. 

Note.  The  2  pcrs.  sing.  fem.  takes  a  furtive  Pattahh  under  the 
Guttural ;  e.g.  fVatti  instead  of  nyJDIS  ,  §  52.  2.  If  the  Pattahh  under 
9  here  was  a  proper  vowel,  the  pointing  would  be  nsft'V  ,  i.  e.  with 
n  Raphe.     Punctuation  like  Sp3M3  is  very  rare. 

§  234.  Where  the  Guttural  is  preceded  by  1 ,  *■  or  l,_ 
immutable,  it  takes  a  Pattahh  furtive,  §  69. 

E.  g.  in  the  Iuf.  absolute,  in  the  Part.  pass,  of  Kal ;  in  Hiph.  through- 
out, where  ^  is  usually  retained.  The  Inf.  const,  in  Kal  commonly 
follows  the  same  usage,  as  gfetfj ;  compare,  in  §  230,  a  similar  punctu- 
ation as  it  respects  the  Hholem. 

§  235.  In  Kal,  the  Fut.  and  Imp.  always  take  Pattahh; 
also  the  fem.  Part.  Segholate ;   as  r?12JD . 

§  236.  All  the  forms  with  pure  final  Tseri,  may  retain 
it,  and  put  a  Pattahh  furtive  under  the  Guttural  ;  or  substi- 
tute a  real  Pattahh  in  their  stead  ;   e.g.  £530,  or  Pfi©. 

Note  1 .  The  prolonged  forms,  i.  e.  such  as  the  Inf.  abs.,  the  forms  with 
a  Pause-accent,  etc.  retain  Tseri.     The  apocopate  forms  take  Pattahh. 
Note  2.  Verbs  -lb  frequently  imitate  this  class  of  Guttural  verbs. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

§  237.  Under  this  class  are  included  all  those,  in  which 
any  of  the  radical  letters  are  either  dropped,  or  assimilated, 
or  become  quiescent. 

§  238.  These  maybe  most  conveniently  distributed,  into  (a)  Those 
which  are  irregular  Q,  i.e.  in  their  first  radical,  (§  223).  (b)  Those 
which  are  irregular  y,  i.  e.  in  their  second  radical,  (c)  Those  which 
are  irregular  b  ,  i.  e.  in  their  third  radical,  (d)  Those  which  are  irreg- 
ular D  and  b ,  i.  e.  in  their  first  and  third  radical. 


§§  239 24*2.    IRREGULAR  VERBS  J    PE  ALEPH — PE  YODH.  91 

I.  CLASS  OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

§239.  These  consist  of  verbs  iXD,  ^S,  and  "ID,  i.  e. 
whose  first  radical  is  either  jtf ,  ^ ,  or  3  • 

Verbs  Pe  Aleph  ;  Par.  VII. 

§  240.  In  most  cases,  verbs  with  N  for  their  first  radi- 
cal, belong  to  the  class  Pe  Guttural,  &  being  treated  as  a 
Guttural.  The  verbs  belonging  to  the  class  now  in  ques- 
tion, are  those  in  which  !tt  as  first  radical  is  quiescent. 

[Note.  Of  these  there  are  only  Jive,  viz.  ISK  ,  rQN,  rSN  ,  "ISK  , 
•TICK  .  Three  more,  viz.  3r?K ,  TftN ,  >]0N  ,  sometimes  exhibit  a  quies- 
cent N  ,  and  sometimes  a  guttural  one;  e.g.  TrjiO,  WW.  For  other 
explanations,  see  under  Paradigm  VII. 

§  241.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm,  (a)  Kal.  (l)  Future  drops  N  quies- 
cent of  the  root  in  the  1st  pers.  sing.,  and  retains  only  the  N  praefor- 
tnative,  which  designates  the  Jirst  person;  e.g.  "15D&  instead  of  "lENtf , 
thus  avoiding  the  occurrence  of  two  Alephs.  (2)  In  a  very  few  cas- 
es, the  first  syllable  takes  a  Tseri  instead  of  Hholem ;  as  finN;1  (not 
nriN"1)  ;  in  *2-N  ,  the  Fut.  has  both  forms,  e.  g.  1st  pers.  sing,  nftN  and 

^~N  • 

Note.  Quiescent  M  here  is  not  unfrequently  omitted  in  writing;  as 
P|Di  for  P1DN-1,  "HJSh  for  nnN1,  etc ;  see  §  63. 

(3)  Inf.  const,  from  TEN  ,  ibisr.for  "iENlr,  §  119-  c.  1.  Imp.  once 
UBJJ  for  3B»,  see  §  119.  d.  2. 

(6)  Derived  conjugations,  (l)  Niphal  once  as  VrjN;:.  (2)  Piel  ad- 
mits contraction  ;  as  fcj^H  for  V\tii73 ,  nTP!  for  *T7Nn  ;  see  §  118.  Note 
3.  (3)  Hiphil  also  admits  contraction,  in  a  little  different  manner; 
e.g.  b"3n  for  b^fittS-  Future,  b  ¥.***'-  (with  accent  retracted  §  129) 
instead  of  b^tf*]  ,  Vta  for  pWj;  see  §  119.  c.  1.  Fut.  once  with 
Hholem,  as  nn^j*  ,  Jer.  40:  8.  Imperative,  Vxrn  for  rfjfiti}  ,  §  119. 
c.  1.  (4)  Hofhal,  nr^i"1  (l  for  N  §  122.  2)  for  ^iT ,  like  the  con- 
tractions in  §  119.  c  1.] 

Verbs  Pe  Yodh  ;  Par.  VIII. 

§242.  These  may  be  divided  into  three  classes;  viz. 
( I)  Such  as  have  (originally)  a  Vctv  for  the  first  radical; 
e.g.  Ip^sss^1).  (2) Those  whose  first  radical  is  proper- 
ly Yodh  ;  as  2Dn .  (3)  Such  as  follow  the  analogy  of 
verbs  Pe  Nun,  in  assimilating  the  first  radical. 


90  §§  343 — -17.   iKiti.(;.  \  i.Kits  ;    it.  BOOH,  i.  CLAM. 

Fir.it  Clms  of  vi.tIh   I'u  Vo.lli  ;    Tar.  VIII. 

§213.  0)  In  K;il  inf.,  Put,  and  Imp,  the  fodh  is  for 
the  most  part  dropped  ;  the  Praeter  and  Part,  are  regu- 
lar. 

(b)  In  Niph.,  Hiph., and  Hoph.,  the  original  1  appears; 
but  it  is  quiescent,  except  in  the  Inf.,  Fut.,  and  Imp.  INiphal, 
where  it  is  moveable. 

§  244.  The  Inf.,  Fut.,  and  Imp.  of  Kal  exhibit  two 
forms ;  viz.  one  with  final  Tseri,  and  another  with  final 
Pattahh. 

(a)  The  forms  with  final  Tseri  take  Tscri  in  the  first  syllable  also, 
and  more  generally  omit  the  Yodh ;  as  2d*;,  etc.  in  Par.  VIII. 

[Note.  The  Fut.  sometimes  (rarely)  retains  the  Yodh  in  the  writ- 
ing of  these  verbs ;  as  1st  pers.  sing.  Fut.  parag.  !"Ob\X  (from  ft*), 
^iV.".  (from  *ij^),  with  final  Pattahh  because  of  the  Resh.  With  a 
Guttural  in  the  final  syllable,  Pattahh  of  course  takes  the  place  of 
Tseri;  as  2>"T  ,  not  gV  .  In  the  Inf.  const,  and  Imp.,  Yodh  disappears 
almost  throughout,  in  the  forms  with  final  Tseri.] 

(6)  The  forms  with  final  Pattahh  more  usually  retain  the  Yodh  in 
Inf.  Imp.  and  Fut.  of  Kal,  and  the  Fut.  takes  Hhireq  prolonged  in  the 
first  syllable  ;  as  ■}&?,  #1?,  ^T1  •     See  in  Par-  VIII. 

Note.  1.  Yodh  quiescent  is  sometimes  omitted  here,  in  writing;  as 
\TS?  for  Bin**  ,  Ps.  102:  5,  §  63.  So  WV  for  Ifc-j^  . 

Note  2.  The  Inf.  constr.  of  the  masc.  form,  is  not  analogical  here. 
It  takes  Hholem  ;  as  ttl* ,  "j'ii "^ .     One  would  naturally  expect  Pattahh. 

§245.  The  derived  conjugations,  of  both  these  species 
of  verbs  are  alike  ;   and  are  as  the  model  in  the  Paradigm. 

[§  246.   Some  verbs  ^2  take  both  of  the  forms   above 

noted ; 

E.  g.  pagj  ,  Imp.  pt  and  pr; ;  *\fc*  ,  Fut.  Tig*']  and  1^  •>  also  Tg^  • 
The  lexicons  mark  such. 

§  247.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm.  Kal.  (a)  The  Inf.  of  the  class  Fut. 
£,  has  more  usually  the  fern.  Segholate  ending,  as  in  the  Paradigm. 
With  a  Guttural,  Pattahh  of  course  is  used ;  e.  g.  r&\  (not  n~\)  from 
3>V  ,  §  113.  But  sometimes  the  apoc.  masc.  form  is  used  ;  as  £-  from 
3>V  ;  fem.  rYlb  from  nb^;  with  suffix,  'fltoffl  (^ttj)  from  MJ" ,  ^irn 
from  "JV  ,  suff.  state  of  the  usual  inf.  forms,  nauj,  rrn ,  etc. 

(6)  The  Inf..  of  the  class  Fut.  A  is  regular ;  see  §  244.  b.  note.  2. 


§§248 — 250.    IRREGULAR  VERRS  ;    PE  YODIT,   t.  II.  CLASS.  03 

Feminine  forms  are  as  ribh"] ,  from  b?* ;  HJJ'V  from  N"T  .     A  form 
with  Vav  fulcrum,  is  \V&[  . 

(c)  Future  which  has  Tseri,  is  pure,  so  that  it  may  he  shortened  ;  as 
it  is  in  Sttj*2,  with  tone  retracted,  §  129.  With  n  parag.,  as  ""V  ,  rT3»*l*. 
Altogether  anomalous  is  JH?.?  . 

(d)  The  Imperative,  (l)  Of  those  with  Fut.  £,  is  commonly  parago- 
gic  ;  as  rVH  ,  Tob  ("?),  from  "n  ,  ^b  masc.  forms  ;  so  with  rr_  parag., 
as  ivn  ,  masc.  2H  ,  §  125.  b.  (2)  The  Imp.  of  the  verbs  Fut.  A,  reg- 
ularly retains  its  Yodh  radical. 

(e)  Niphal.  (l)  Future  sometimes  retains  the  Yodh,  instead  of 
exchanging  it  for  the  original  1 ;  e.  g.  "i.^  ,  ibft**  with  retracted 
tone,  §  129.  It  is  peculiar,  also,  that  the  first  pers.  sing,  here  retains 
Hhireq  (like  the  other  persons)  in  its  first  syllable,  as  Sltt-lfit  ,  '<H~)W , 
nOTN  ,  etc. ;  not  auijfij ,  etc.  as  in  most  other  analogous  cases. 

(2)  Part.  plur.  const.  ^313  (instead  of  "Ui:)  from  rr^  ;  also  tf.:£i: 
with  Tseri,  instead  of  ir^i: ,  from  VJi* . 

{/)  Piel.  The  Fut.  here,  preceded  by  Vav  conversive,  drops  the 
first  of  its  Yodhs,  and  writes  it  by  a  Daghesh  in  the  second ;  e.  g. 

"03.11  instead  of  "ilJ3^2  ,  ^"723  f°r  ^212  1  ctc- 

(g)  Hiphil.  (l)  Future  with  retracted  tone;  as  "ri'i .  Some- 
times the  characteristic  M  is  retained  in  the  Future  ;  as  Jplpiyp  for 
grin'' ;  so  iin/irP  ,  S]0/irP  ,  from  rT£  ,  ^C;  ;  comp.  §  199.  (2)  Imper- 
ative sometimes  retains  its  Vav  moveable  as;  N'^n  for  KSin,  Gen. 
8:  17  .  so  Tfilrt  for  "lUnrt  ,  Ps.  5  :  9. 

{h)  Hithpael  sometimes  retains  the  original  Vav,  and  uses  it  as 
moveable,  e.  g.  SHinn  ,  n  Tin  ft ,  fiSinn  .] 

Second  Class  of  Verbs  Pe  Vmlli ;   Tar.  IX. 

§  248.  These  are  such  as  have  a  Yodh  originally  for 
their  first  radical;  which  they  retain  in  Hiphil,  anil  thus 
distinguish  themselves  from  the  other  class  above  described. 

See  remarks  in  Par.  IX. 

Note.  Only  seven  verbs  belong  to  this  class  ;  viz.  Ma"1 ,  r:* ,  *\'Qn% 
P3^'  ^53 1  ""*£,  PT*J  HiPh- 

§  249.  The  Future  Kal  here  is  sometimes  u  ith  Pattahh, 
and  sometimes  with  Tseri;  mostly  plene,  but  sometimes 
defective. 

E.  g.  &D!"  ,  as  in  the  Paradigm  ;  but  also,  *tie*  ,  ^\^  ;  yp^ , 
VB  .2"  Of  course,  this  class  of  verbs  agrees  with  the  preceding  one, 
as  to  the  forms  in  Kal.     But  no  Inf.  of  any  of  them  actually  ocean. 

[§  250.   Notes  on  the  Paradigm.     IIii'iui.,  as  the  Paradigm  shew-*. 


*J4       §§251 — 253.  irkk<;.  VEiins  ;  PS  vomi,  III.' CLAM. — n  WON. 


may  be  written  either  pleiu  or  defective,  (l)  The  Fut.  sometimes  ex- 
hibits moveable  Yodh,  instead  of  Yodh  quiescent ;  1*V^D^  j  Prov.  4  :  25; 
D'YV^tf  ,  llos.  7:  2.  Comp.  §  247.  g.  2.  /«. 

Note.  Two  Futures  are  altogether  anomalous  ;  e.  g.  i'tD^"' ,  ,~^^!!',  • 
The  like  to  this,  is  in*"?  in  Kal  Future,  §  247.  c. 

(2)  Imperative  once,  Ps.  5  :  9,  retains  a  moveable  Yodh  in  the 
Qeri ;  as  T^^n  .     So  the  Part.,  as  WZ^-q  ,  1  Chron.  12  :  2.] 

Third  Class  of  Verbs  Po  Yodh  ;  Par.  X. 

§251.  The  peculiarity  of  these  verbs,  is,  that  they  as- 
similate their  Yodh,  in  Kal  Fut.,  Niph.,  Hiph.,  and  Hophal. 

[Note  1.  Only  four  verbs  belong  wholly  here;  viz.  n:~,  J£* , 
D^"1 ,  J>^ .  Five  others  partake  partly  of  the  peculiarities  of  these 
verbs,  and  partly  of  the  other  classes,  viz.  ID"1 ,  "ID"1 ,  p^  ,  "1SF ,  TD"1  . 

Note  2.  Simonis  and  Eichhorn  derive  all  the  peculiar  forms  of  this 
class  of  verbs,  from  roots  7D;  whose  derivatives  are  of  the  like  forms. 
The  question  is  one  of  etymology.  It  matters  not  for  the  student, 
which  way  it  is  decided.  I  follow  the  Lexicon  of  Gesenius,  for  con- 
venience' sake,  rather  than  from  conviction.  The  fulness  of  the  Pa- 
radigm, supersedes  the  necessity  of  additional  notes.] 

Verbs  Pe  Nun  ;    Par.  XI. 

§  252.  The  peculiarity  of  these  verbs  is,  (a)  That 
whenever  3  (their  first  radical)  would  analogically  take  a 
Sheva,  in  the  course  of  declension,  etc.,  it  more  usually  be- 
comes assimilated  to  the  letter  which  follows,  and  is  ex- 
pressed by  a  Daghcsh  Jbrle. 

(b)  That  in  the  Inf.  and  Imp.  of  Kal,  the  Nun  is  some- 
times dropped,  in  the  manner  of  verbs  Pe  Yodh. 

[In  this  case,  the  Imper.  more  commonly  takes  the  parag.  form,  as 
aja  ,  TVOi  ;  "jn ,  n:n .  The  Inf.  commonly  has  a  Segholate  form,  in 
cases  of  aphaeresis,  i.  e.  where  the  first  radical  is  dropped  ;  as  n'wJ 
in  the  Paradigm.  But  apocopate  forms  in  these  verbs,  either  of  the 
Inf.  or  Imp.,  are  not  frequent  at  all.  These  moods  more  generally 
preserve  the  radical  : ,  even  when  the  Fut.  assimilates  it ;  e.  g.  Inf., 
Imp.  Dp: ,  Fut.  dpi ;  Inf.,  Imp.  y'n: ,  Fut.  y"rp  .] 

§  253.  Verbs,  whose  second  radical  is  a  proper  Quies- 
cent or  a  Guttural,  exclude  the  peculiarities  of  verbs  JD. 

The  reason  is,  that  the  Daghesh  (compensative  of  Nun)  cannot  be 
inserted  in  either  of  these  classes  of  letters ;  and  therefore  usage  com- 


§§  254,  255.    IRREGULAR  VERBS  J    PE  NUN,  ETC.  95 


monly  preserved  the  Nun  before  them.  But  in  Niphal  Praeter,  where 
a  Guttural  is  the  second  radical,  and  Nun  would  be  repeated  ifit  were 
preserved,  it  is  dropped,  as  D^: ,  not  Drr:2  ,  the  vowel  in  the  first  syl- 
lable being  prolonged  as  usual,  §  112.  The  verb  n^;:  more  usually 
drops  5  in  the  Fat.  of  Kal ;  as  niY| ,  but  also  rihaft  2d  person.  In  oth- 
er respects,  the  verbs  above  named  are  regular  in  respect  to  Nun. 

[§  254.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm,  (a)  Kal.  (l)  Inf.  const,  like  r,'-2J \ , 
occurs  only  in  six  verbs.  Once  8*liB  from  Nb:  ,  Ps.  89:  10.  The  reg. 
form,  as  3>A3  ,  HX3  ,  Dp2 ,  is  most  frequent.  Some  verbs  have  both 
forms  ;  as  V'C  and  nJPtJ  .  I  find  no  example  of  reg.  Inf.  with  final  Pat- 
tahh.     Fern,  form  with  suffix,  as  IPX?*  . 

(2)  Future  O  is  more  frequent  than  ./?,  in  these  verbs.  Fut.  E  only  in 
"jn:  .  Some  verbs  have  both  Fut.  O  and  A,  as  7iz ,  bl-  .  Some  at  one 
time  retain,  and  at  another  omit  2 ,  in  different  examples  of  the  Fut. ; 
as  ^T: ,  "lis ,  etc. 

(3)  Imp.  like  the  Inf.  seldom  drops  the  radical  2  ,  §  252.  6.  The  apoc. 
forms  are  like  *J3  ,  ba  (before  Maqqeph  TB3),  ^n  from  in:  . 

(6)  Niphal.  (1)  Praeter  appears  like  Piel,  because  it  drops  the  2 
of  the  root,  and  inserts  a  Daghesh,  or  prolongs  the  vowel ;  as  JttoJ  , 
Piel  and  Niph.  Nifi3  ;  on:,  Pi.  and  Niph.  an2 ,  §253.  Once  with  Hho- 
lem,  as  >ia2  .  (2)  Inf.  abs.  sometimes  as  ^^2  ,  Sp2n  Ps.  68  :  3,  "pn:  tt 
Jer.  32 :  4.     (3)  Part,  once  as  *rj'r-r—  r  ,  with  suffix  ~. 

(c)  Hiphil  very  rarely  retains  the  2 ;  as  iFFCrl ,  rs:V  .  So  in  Ho- 
phal,  sipPDtt  .  The  usual  vowel  here  is  short  (^ibbuts,  as  in  the  Para-" 
digm. 

Note.  The  verb  fi^b  imitates  "jD  in  Kal ;  see  Lexicon.  The  verb 
■Jrj2  assimilates  its  final  ]  also,  before  suffixes  beginning  with  n  or  2  ; 
as  Rn5  instead  of  nt:n:  ,  nin: ,  etc.  The  Inf.  is  nn  for  n:r;  (§  107. 
2),  with  suff.  WJ. 

Remark.  The  great  variety  of  usage,  in  verbs  of  this  class,  shews 
that  the  sound  of  2  was  quite  variable,  and  the  letter  less  prominent 
and  distinct  than  most  of  the  consonants.  The  predominant  usage  in 
Kal,  is  regular;  in  Niph.  Hiph.  Mophal,  irregular.  The  Daghesh'' d 
conjugations  are  regular  throughout ;   so  that  no  Paradigm  is  needed.] 


II.  CLASS  OP  IRREGULAR  VERBS, 

or  Verbs  irregular  2> . 

§  255.  These  comprehend  such  as  arc  defective  in  respect  to 
their  middle  radical ;  i.  e.  such,  whose  middle  radical  cither  falls  out, 
or  becomes  quiescent. 


i)(i  <J4  2."»<> — 960.   ini:r.r;ri.\n  verbs;  avin  Dorm.r.n. 


Verbs  Atfin  doubled  (^'") ;  Par.  XII. 
§  25(>.    This  cla~s  comprises  all  those,  whose  second  and 
third  radicals  are  the  same    letter,   and    which  often  drop 
the  second    radical    in  the   course   of   inflection;    as  220  , 
Praet.  2D,  Inf.  50. 

These  verbs  might  well  he  named  contracted  verbs,  (not  very  un- 
like the  Greek  rifuxo),  zi/nol,  (iiltu),  q.i\o),  etc.);  for  a  great  part  of 
their  irregularity  arises  from  contraction.  But  dispute  about  names 
would  not  be  important. 

§  257.  The  principal  law  of  contraction  is,  that  the  sec- 
ond radical  is  dropped,  and  with  it  the  points  of  the  pre- 
ceding letter,  (whether  a  proper  vowel  or  a  Sheva),  and 
the  vowel  belonging  to  the  second  radical  is  then  transfer- 
red  to  the  first  radical. 

E.  g.  33D  ,  3D  ;  33D  ,  3D ;  3*3p2  ,  3D*  ,  etc.  The  alterations  oc- 
casioned in  the  formative  praefixes  etc.  by  this,  will  be  considered  in 
the  sequel. 

Note.  All  the  forms  which  have  an  impure  vowel  in  them,  or  a 
Daghesh  forte  in  the  middle  radical,  are  incapable  of  contraction ; 
e.  g.  aai  D ,  313D  ,  313D  ,  3zp  ,  etc. 

§  258.  Any  accession  to  the  end  of  a  contracted  form, 
(by  declension,  or  in  any  other  manner),  causes  the  second 
radical  to  reappear  by  a  Daghesh  forte,  but  does  not  re- 
store to  the  first  its  original  vowel. 

E.g.  33D,  contr.  3D,  with  accession  12D  sab-bu  (not  12DD),  ^n'lZD, 
"*20,  33D* ,  etc.  In  all  such  cases,  the  middle  radical,  having  lost  its 
vowel,  is  written  by  a  Daghesh  in  the  last  radical,  and  joined  on  to 
the  preceding  vowel. 

§  259.  In  order  to  render  more  audible  the  doubling  of 
the  final  letter  of  the  root,  the  epenthetic  syllables,  i  and 
\  with  the  tone,  are  inserted  before  suffixes  beginning 
with  a  consonant. 

In  the  Praeter  T,  as  rvizp  ,  Wiatj;  in  the  Fut.  and  Imp.  \  ,  as 
ttl^Dn ,  rr^zp  .  The  Arabian,  while  he  writes  the  words  fully  re- 
gular in  these  cases,  pronounces  them  like  the  Hebrew. 

§  260.   The  Praeformativcs  of  tense  and  conjugation,  in- 


§§261 — 263.  irrf.(;ilar  verbs;  AYIN  DOUIJLF.D.  97 


stead  of  the  short  vowel  which  they  have  in  regular  verbs, 
usually  assume  long  pure  vowels  in  the  contracted  forms, 
§  130. 

Hophal  only  has  an  impure  vowel  following  its  characteristic ;  e.g. 
SDin  instead  of  aaoJi. 

Note.  In  most  cases,  the  original  grounil-forms,  from  which  the 
contracted  forms  seem  evidently  to  he  derived,  are  somewhat  different 
from  those  of  the  regular  verbs;  e.g.  Kal.  Fut.  do"1  appears  to  come 
from  a  full  Fut.  isc? ,  (like  the  Arabic  Future),  so  that  when  0  is 
thrown,  by  contraction,  into  the  second  syllable,  and  Pattahh  comes 
to  stand  in  a  simple  syllable,  it  of  course  becomes  long,  i.  e.  goes  into 
Qarnets,  §  130.  So  in  Niph.,  where  we  have  2D:  apparently  for 
5203  ,  and  in  the  Fut.  SEP  for  220"; ;  in  Hiph.,  a  on  from  3  2  On  ,  etc. 
But  in  some  few  cases,  the  contracted  forms  appear  to  come  from  re- 
gular original  ones  ;  as  Fut.  "\732 ,  apparently  from  H^E? »  80  Niph. 
£>rj2  as  from  irbh: ;  Inf.  rnn,  as  from  b^hn,  etc. 

§  261.  A  second  mode  of  contraction  is,  to  insert  a  Da- 
gliesh  in  the  first  radical  (after  Praeformatives),  to  give 
those  Praeformatives  the  regular  short  vowel,  and  then 
omit  doubling  the  last  radical,  when  the  word  receives  an 
accession  at  the  end.  The  epenthetic  1  and  1_  arc  also 
omitted,  in  this  case. 

E.  g.  Kal  Fut.  231  ,  etc. ;  Hiph.  Dl£  (from  B&ft)  instead  of  crv  ; 
Hoph.  nE>*  (from  nn3)  instead  of  ro^P . 

Note.  In  Kal  Fut.  this  is  not  uncommon  ;  in  other  conjugations  it  is 
rare.     In  Chaldee,  this  is  the  reigning  method  of  contraction. 

§  262.  The  conjugations  Poel,  Poal,  Hithpocl  usually 
take  the  place  of  the  regular  Daghesh'd  conjugations  here ; 
but  not  always:  and  sometimes  both  exist  together,  either 
as  synonymous,  or  with  shades  of  difference,  §188.  §  175.  a. 

§  263.  Verbs  3?3?,  with  the  second  and  third  radicals 
Guttural,  lengthen  the  preceding  vowel,  in  cases  where 
Daghcsh  forte  should  be  inserted  but  is  excluded  by  the 
Guttural,  §112. 

E.  g.  nhiy ,  contr.  ttia  ,  3d  pers.  fern.  nfra  ,  1st  pers.  T^rrjj .  So 
*n72  ,  3d  fem.  fntt  (not  n^tt),  "'ninTa  (not  Vp^a),  etc. 

Remark  1.     The  tone  syllables   in  the  usual  contracted  forms  are 
peculiar.     See  an  account  of  them  in  §  100.  f. 
13 


98  '   Ht\.    IftttBGl  LAB  \  BRBI  ;    a  v  i  s  i.oi  1:1.1:  n. 


Remark  2.  The  student  must  not  fail  to  note,  that  in  An/.  lerbiSS 
often  retain  the  regular  form  ;  Bpeciftllj  in  ihe  I'rartcr,  and  sometime! 
in  the  Infinitive.  In  most  other  cases,  they  generally  follow  the  mo- 
dels in  the  Paradigm;  with  more  anomalies,  however,  than  rrn  »»1  other 
classes  of  verbs,  as  the  sequel  will  shew.  An  instance  of  conformity 
to  both  models  in  the  Fut.  is  ]2t1,  Fat  "jn'  and  "jah^  ;  so  "j:n,  Iliph. 

[§  264.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm,  (a)  Kal.  (l)  Praeter  of  verbs  final 
Hholem,  conforms  to  the  law  of  contraction  in  §  257  ;  e.  g.  C£"1  ,  3 
plur.  Mir\ ;  and  so  lin  ,  etc.  Once,  n:En  =  so^tePi ,  Ps.  64  :  7,  or  per- 
haps for  Taan  of  the  second  form  of  contraction,  Daghesh  being  omit- 
ted, §  73.  Note  3. 

(2)  Inf.  const,  sometimes  with  Pattahh  ;  as  fj  ,  bsj  .  Inf.  fern.  r>'/-\ 
from  i'J?"! .  The  Inf.  is,  in  a  considerable  number  of  cases,  written 
with  a  Vav  fulcrum,  §  64;  e.g.  ^13,  D^~,  -n£.  So  Imp.,  even  with 
a  Daghesh,  as  ^i,  flurip.     Rarely  is  the  Inf.  as  "ns,  Fee.  9:1. 

In  the  suffix  state,  or  before  Maqqeph,  the  Inf.  having  a  pure  O, 
shortens  it;  as  y'n ,  ij>H;  en,  ~Dn  <6«i. 

(3)  Future  usually  has  Hholem  pure  ;  but  sometimes  it  appears  with 
Vav  fulcrum,  §  64  ;  as  liv^  for  19*  .  This  Hholem  is  shortened  by 
losing  the  tone  ;  as  ]rT  ,  I33.rr  ,  Ps.  67  :  2,  or  Tii.t/?  i  Is.  27:  1 1  ;  }&»!  . 

The  Fut.  with  Pattahh  also  occurs,  which  gives  a  Tseri  to  the 
Praeformative  ;  as  ~\J2i ,  ^j?^,  Dr?. ,  DrPN  1st  pers.  with  Yodh  ful- 
crum, §  64,  from  CEn  . 

The  Fut.  also  has  Shureq,  in  a  few  cases  ;  as  *j*~>"  ,  "f  r"V  .  So  the 
second  kind  of  contracted  Future;  as  ann  (  =  DlPtPl)  instead  of  DP.TI , 
from  CttPi . 

4.  Imper.  also  has  Pattahh  sometimes;  as  r£ ;  with  n  parag.  as 
nS3:  with  a  Resh,   as  i*nN  .     The   Imp.   O   of  course  shortens  this 

T~  TX  NX 

vowel,  when  the  tone  is  removed;  '•fl ,  n'Vc  . 

(6)  Niphal.  (1)  Praeter  sometimes  with  Tseri,  as  JrjJ3;  also  with 
Hholem,  as  "? ;:  ,  Is.  34:  4.  The  Praeform.  has  sometimes  other  vow- 
els besides  Qamets;  e.g.  ]hi  from  JJfl,  bn;  from  bb  h ;  n~:  from 
nn2  ;  where  the  vowel  under  :  is  long,  because  of  the  Dag.  forte  omit- 
ted in  the  second  radical ;  which  conforms  to  the  second  mode  of  con- 
traction described  above,  §  2GI.  Comp.  §  260.  Note,  at  the  end;  also 
§111.  §112.  According  to  these  forms,  we  find  Frn2  (from  bb_~), 
Ezek.  22:  16;  "ran:  (from  ]3l),  Jer.  22:  23. 

(2)  Inf.  abs.  with  Hholem  ;  as  pisn  ,  V.z~  ■  Inf.  const,  with  Tse- 
ri;  as  D^n,  )rftn,§261.  §  112. 

(3)  Future  with  Hholem  ;  as  BT^with  Resh  "p'nr)  2d  pers.,  lan^ 
3d  pers.  plur.  from  D»*3  . 


§§  2G5 — 2G7.    irrf.oi_-i.ar  verbs  5   win  doubled.  90 


(4)  Imp.  with  Hholem;  as  IfcVn.     (5)  Part,  with  Tseri ;  asC'::  . 

(c)  Hiphil  has  a  pure  Tseri  throughout,  in  both  of  its  syllables  ; 
which,  therefore,  is  liable  to  change,  as  is  usual  with  all  pure  vowels; 
e.g.  2Dn  Hiph.,  2  pers.  nizon ,  etc. 

(1)  It  should  be  noted  here,  that  Hiphil  not  only  takes  a  Paltahh 
final,  in  case  it  has  a  Guttural  or  a  Resh  in  the  last  syllable,  as  nr"  , 

10n;  and  in  Pause,  as  Tnri ,  §  145  ;  but  also,  not  unfrequently,  with- 
out either  of  these  reasons;  as  p"  ,  labn  ,  Part.  irXTa  . 

(2)  Praeter,  once  bnfj]  <=&! rt ,  §  2(51.  Sni  generis  is  n^BM  for 
rrjpffiri,  Prov.  24:  28;  unless  it  may  come  from  nnr.  which  is  more 
probable.     (3)  Future  with  tone  retracted,  as  !3Q»i  ,  etc. 

{d)  Hophal  has  no  special  anomalies  except  the  manner  in  which 
the  Praeform.  is  pointed,  20^—  for  22on  .] 

§  265.  The  resemblance  between  verbs  23?  and  13?  is 
great.  Hophal  is  the  same  in  both ;  and  the  Prael'orma- 
tives  take,  in  the  same  way,  a  long  pure  vowel.  Besides 
these  general  resemblances,  there  are  many  particular  in- 
stances, in  which  verbs  s'J  exhibit  the  same  appearance  as 
verbs  13?. 

E.  g.  Inf.  IIS  from  -ns  ,  iplrja  (instead  of  iplia)  from  pfc'n  .  Fut. 

)W*,  y>^1,  iV^i  etc-    HiPh-  ,nf-  T^r1"  (for  sjati^)  from  nan . 

Fut.  i_PiSJ^  ,  from  DOttJ ;  "|»T;T  (for  Jntt*)  from  nn"  .  It  may  be  doubt- 
ed, however,  whether  the  root  is  not  IS  in  all  these  cases,  §  298.  § 
299.     1  conform  to  the  Lexicons,  in  this  arrangement. 

[§  266.  Peculiar  Anomaly.  Verbs  ••,  with  the  first 
ibrm  of  contraction  (§§  257 — 260),  sometimes  omit  the 
usual  Daghesh  forte  in  the  increased  forms  (§  258),  and 
also  the  vowel  which  precedes  it. 

E.  g.  Fut.  nba:  for  rtVaJ,  VOI*  for  laT^;  Inf.  DJDrjV  for  DahV; 
Niph.  hj?a2  for  fijpas  Is.  19:3,  Fut.  r.E7:  for  SiB^a  Jer.  8:  14.  'But 
these  anomalies  are  by  no  means  frequent.] 

Note.  The  conj.  Poel,  Poal,  and  Ilithpoel,  with  their  substitutes, 
Pilpel,  Pulpal,  and  Ilithpalpal,  are  declined  regularly;  the  final  Tseri 
in  them  being  pure,  and  subject  to  changes  as  usual. 

Remark  1.  Of  the  whole  number  of  verba  Ayia  doubled    ISM  ,96  hive  IV  I  ete.  Ibrm  -nhi  ,•  'JO 

linvc  Poel  etc.   forms  only  ;     10  have  Pilpel  etc  forms  only  :     II  have  both  Kel  <tr.,  and  Pot!  >•!<•.  . 
2  have  Piel  etc.,  with  PilpeJ  etc.  ;  and  3,  Poel  etc.  with  Pilpel  etc.     The  other  59  supply  DO  exam- 
ple! of  any  of  those  conjugations.  It  appears,  therofam,  thai  the  rr«ular  form  in  Pud,  is  U 
us  any  Other. 

Remark  2.    Tho  Imnm.  are  very  irregular  in  designating  the  oonjugationa  1  I 

The  student  must  accommodate  the  designation  to  the  uctual  foim.    The  Hholem  in  UwM  OOOJOga 
tions  is  sometimes  omitted  in  writing,  $  63. 


100  §208 — 'i<i!>.    HUUBOOfcAB  TBBM  j    .\vi\VW. 


Remark.  Almost  all  the  anomalies  perplexing  to  the  student,  arise 
from  the  peculiarities  noted  in  §  2G1  and  §  266.     But  those   in  I 

are  altogether  of  the  most  frequent  occurrence.  If  the  student  tho- 
roughly possesses  himself  of  the  second  mode  (if  contraction  there  ex- 
hibited, he  will  meet  with  but  few  cases  which  will  trouble  him. 

Verbs  Ay  in  Vav;  Par.  XIII. 

§  267.  This  class  comprises  all  those  whose  second  rad- 
ical is  Vav,  and  whose  root  throughout,  in  Kal,  Niphal. 
Hiphil,  and  Hophal,  becomes  monosyllabic. 

This  species  of  verbs,  also,  might  justly  be  called  contracted;  so 
that  verbs  Ji>  may  be  named  the  first  species  of  contracts,  and  verbs 
IS*  the  second. 

§  268.  The  laws  of  contraction  are  substantially  the  same  here, 
as  in  verbs  W> ;  the  principal  differences  are  occasioned  merely  by  the 
nature  of  Vav,  which  is  a  Quiescent. 

(a)  The  vowel  of  the  contracted  form  of  the  verb,  is 
regulated  by  what  would  be  the  last  regular  vowel,  in  a 
full-form  of  two  syllables  ;  it  being  transferred  to  the  first 
radical,  and  taking  the  place  of  its  appropriate  punctuation 
which  falls  out;   comp.  §257. 

E.  g.  Uncontracted  C1J5  ,  contracted  C£=  DN£;  the  original  1  con- 
forming to  the  heterogeneous  vowel  (§  117.  2),  i.  e.  *i  becomes  N,  in 
order  to  conform  to  the  Pattahh  of  the  root,  which  Pattahh  then  qui- 
esces  in  the  substituted  N  ,  and  therefore  becomes  Qamets.  So  Prae- 
ter  E  and  O  ,•  e.  g.  rPE  ,  contr.  na  =  n?» ,  Vav  conforming  to  the 
final  vowel  Tseri  (§  117.  2);  ufta  ba-vosh,  contr.  '^,12.  bosh;  Hiph. 
B-,1R_  i  contr.  D^  ,  the  Vav,  after  conforming  to  the  vowel  i.  e.  after 
becoming  Yodh,  having  fallen  out  as  superfluous  before  another  Yodh 
in  Hiphil.  In  Hoph.  DjSliT,  there  seems  to  be  a  transposition  of  the 
Vav  to  the  first  syllable  ;  as  if  Dj^n  were  put  for  D^n  .  But  see  and 
comp.  Hoph.  of  verbs  h ,  §  260.  Note.  §  264.  d. 

Note.  All  the  forms  where  Vav  takes  a  Daghesh  forte,  and  also 
where  it  is  immediately  followed  by  n  as  the  third  radical,  are  inca- 
pable of  contraction  ;  e.  g.  "ip> ,  T^p  ,  etc. 

(b)  The  Praeformativcs  all  take  long  pure  vowels,  in 
the  contracted  forms;  the  kind  of  which  is  determined  by 
the  original  uncontracted  forms,  which  appear  to  have  dif- 
fered from  the  common- regular  forms;  like  those  in  verbs 
h,  §  260.  with  the  Note.  " 


§§269,270.    IUKIICCF.AR  VERBS  J    A  YIN'  VAV.  101 


E.  g.  Kal  Fut.  ttpi ,  as  if  from  Onif^  (comp.  the  Arabic  Fut.  !?Bf£  ); 
Part.  trip  ,  as  if  from  a^p ,  an  old  Part,  form  ;  Imp.  and  Inf.  C'lp  ,  as 
if  from  C31J3  .  So  in  Niph.  Sip: ,  as  if  from  E3"»f>3  ;  Hipli-  B"^  • 
&"»"»pn ,  etc. 

(r)  In  like  manner  as  verbs  ??  (§  250),  these  verbs  in- 
sert 1  and  "_  with  the  tone,  in  the  Praeler  and  Future, 
before  suffixes  beginning  with  a  consonant. 

E.  g.  Niph.  Praeter,  nvmp: ,  EJiyiianpD  Hiph.  nib"^-;  Kal  Fut. 
Hr'Wpn.  So  far  as  the  principle  extends,  it  is  just  the  same  as  in 
verbs  $9  .  But  in  verbs  Vf  ,  it  extends  only  to  the  Praeter  of  Niph. 
and  Hiphil  fori,  and  only  to  the  Fut.  of  Kal  for  \_;  while  in  verbs 
3?S ,  it  extends  throughout  the  four  contracted  conjugations. 

(d)  The  tone-syllable  in  these  verbs  is  throughout  anal- 
ogous to  that  in  verbs  J*3?-;  see  §  100.  g. 

§269.  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpacl  are  here  very  rare; 
instead  of  them,  Polel,  Polal,  and  Hithpolel  arc  employed, 
§  175.  b,   §  188. 

Examples  of  Piel  are  TIJ?,  Irnp .  Most  instances  of  Piel  assume 
Yodh  ;  as  Izrp  ,  S*ft  ,  for  a  up  ,  ajrj  ,  etc.  In  regard  to  the  differ- 
ence between  nnio  in  verbs  yy,  and  Ottip  here,  see  §  175.  b.  Note. 
Remark  1.  The  2d  and  first  persons  in  Kal  Praeter,  are  peculiar, 
inasmuch  as  they  take  a  short  vowel  in  their  contraction.  So  it  is,  al- 
so, in  the  corresponding  Arabic  and  Syriac.  Hophal  also  takes  a  short 
vowel  in  the  contracted  root.  Both  these  cases  conform,  indeed,  to 
the  general  principle  §  268.  a  ;  but  they  differ  from  the  manner  in 
Kal  Praet.  3d  persons,  and  in  Niphal  throughout. 

Remark  2.  The  anomalous  vowels,  in  different  tenses  and  conju- 
gations, may  be  easily  accounted  for,  on  the  principles  developed  in 
§  117.  E.  g.  in  the  Fut.  talp^  ,  (instead  of  Sip^1  which  we  might 
expect),  the  vowel  conforms  to  the  Vav  with  the  U  sound.  It  might, 
indeed,  take  the  O  sound  equally  well,  (for  aught  we  can  see) ;  bat 
its  present  form  distinguishes  it  more  clearly  from  the  Fut.  of  verbs 
yy  .  So  in  Niph.  Praet.,  Sip:  (instead  of  Dp;),  the  vowel  h;i\  ing 
conformed  to  the  Vav,  §  1 17.  1.  So  also  in  the  Inf.,  Fut.,  etc.  of  Niph. ; 
the  Hholem  arises  from  the  conformity  just  described.  In  Hiph.,  the 
usual  vowel  is  adopted,  because  it  accords  well  with  the  Quiescent, 
which  there  conforms  to  the  vowel  and  becomes  Yodh,  §  117.  2;  or. 
if  you  please,  is  omitted  because  of  the  characteristic  Yodh. 

[§270.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm,  {a)  K.u,  (l)  Procter  r;ird\  u 
l»J3,  Hos.  10:14;  Fern.  3d  pers.  once  with  n,  as  MTU  (like  theChaM  , 


I  (hi  §270.    IBBEGOLAB  vr.nns  \   avin\\\. 


Syr.,  and  Arab.),  for  Mad .  Ezek.  40  :  17.  In  Mai.  3:  20,  —  r-E  come* 
from  TE  ="IJ1B,  comp.  §  101.  b.  Very  seldom  is  the  3d  person  with 
Pattahh  ;  e.  g.  72  ,  HD  ,  as  if  from  TT3  ,  nnu  . 

j?  verb  final  Tscri.  (he  Par.  exhibits.  The  final  n  of  MD,  (and  of 
other  verbs  ending  with  n),  before  a  suffix  beginning  with  n,  is  desig- 
nated by  a  Daghesh  in  the  Suffix  letter,  instead  of  being  fully  written. 

Verbs  Jinal  Hholem  are  also  found,  among  the  class  12  .  They  re- 
tain the  T  in  the  3d  pers.  Praeter,  because  it  is  homogeneous,  and  the 
third  person  is  protracted  ;  e.  g.  wis,  "Pi* .  But  in  the  other  persons, 
(which  are  shorter),  they  usually  omit  the  Vav  ;  e.  g.  ttjSa,  fllftz, 

Raja,  raia,  "vraJa — iitfia,  Eai-pa,  jJ-npa,  wi&a.  Inf.  imp.  Part,  also 
atfa. 

(2)  Inf.  const,  sometimes  with  Hholem;  as  rri»,  fitia,  aiD,  etc.; 
the  Vav  is  sometimes  omitted,  as  fit  a::  etc.  §  63. 

(3)  Fut.  sometimes  with  O ;  as  fifing  ,  atf3>  ,  cir;^  ,  bipV  Defec- 
tive forms  are  tDp^ ,  w3j^^  ,  etc.  Fern.  plur.  sometimes  without  the 
epenthetic  T_ ,  as  Piaaton  ,  or  jS&'n  ,  instead  of  rt3^3fifft . 

Fut.  apoc.  as  Cap^.  ,  with  Hholem  pure  and  mutable  ;  e.  g.  —  p'2 
vay-ya-qbm,  fit2""3ttjfi  td-shobh-na.  It  is  sometimes  written  as  Eaip^ 
(Vav  fulcrum)  ,  not  unfrequently  it  appears  with  Qibbuts,  as  Oj5£. 
With   a   Guttural  or  Resh,  the  apoc.  Fut.  usually  takes   Pattahh  ;  as 

(4)  bnper.  also  written  as  Q|3  ,  ntt ,  etc.  §  63.  Parag.  as  flE'.p, 
"iu  ,  etc.     /m/?.  o/;oc. ,  as  i»H  ,  like  the  Fut.  O  pure. 

(■>)  Part,  with  O,  as  ta^lSj  with  £,  as  n"1:?  ,  §  202.  With  fit  re- 
tained, as  Bfct'IJ  ,  iZPB&itt?  =  ta^EJttJ . 

(6)  NiniAL.  (1)  Praeter  rarely  with  Tseri  penult,  as  -py: .  Out  of 
the  3d  pers.  Hholem  is  usually  exchanged  for  Shureq,  (§  127.  Exc.  1), 
as  being  equally  homogeneous  with  the  Vav,  and  somewhat  shorter; 
which  is  required,  because  the  accent  is  thrown  forward  upon  the 
epenth.  i.     Hholem  rarely  remains;  as  taiJIXSS  . 

(2)  Inf.  const,  rarely  with  U ;  as  ^-n .     (3)  Part,  also  has  rarely 

U;  astraac  forta,'a:)aD=sa,,bia3. 

(c)  Hiphil.  (l)  Praeter  written  defectively  is  rare  ;  iyn=Ty?i . 
Sometimes  the  epenth.  i  is  omitted ;  as  Ms\n  =  nib:"  ,  \Vr^~,i  = 
"n^Bnj  ;  Przri ,  "wan ,  instead  of  nirPEri ,  "•nin'Wi  ■  So  also,  not 
unfrequently  in  the  2d  and  1st  pers.,  the  forms  imitate  verbs  yy ;  e.g. 
■wbn  for  "'nirPEn  ,  fcatj|»n  for  Caijirpan ,  etc.  Sometimes  with  Tse- 
ri; as  nibnn,  niiar^,  MijbjPn  ,  etc.  With  Hhateph  Seghol  under 
the  Praeform.  ;  as  pi'TCH  . 

Peculiar  is  ynn ,  "in ,  and  icr; ,  as  if  from  roots  yy  ;  see  Lexi- 
con.   Once  TP&n  (from  n^D),  like  verbs  yy    in  the  second  form  of 


^  071 — 273.  IRREGULAR  VERBS  J  AYIN  VAV. AYIN  YODH.   103 

of  contraction,  §  261.     The  praeform.  It,  (in  the  derivates  of  my  and 
■Wj  takes  Pattahh  instead  of  a  comp.  Sheva  ;  e.  g.  niViTj  ,  niTSSl  , 

(2)  Inf.  fem.  once  r"»c:rr  1  apoc.  form  of  masc.  rp:n .  Inf.  abs. 
once;  T3jn  because  of  the  Guttural.  (3)  Fut.  *\  v\l ;  comp.  forms  in 
§261,  which  this  imitates.  In  the  plur.  fem.  fMttjya,  instead  of  nr'TpP, 
because  a  mixed  syllable*  with  Yodh  and  Hhireq  long  cannot,  by 
usage,  be  penultimate,  even  if  an  accent  supports  it.  Fut.  apoc.  short- 
ens the  Tseri,  whenever  it  loses  the  tone;  e.g.  tajjVi,  "j^nrrJl. 
With  a  Guttural  or  Resh  ;  as  3nni ,  tO»] . 

(4)  Imper.  once  with  Tseri ;  as  2v»;n ,  2  K.  8  :  6.  (5)  Part,  rare- 
ly as  rPBH  ,  yzv,  (for  rpqa  ,  f^fc),  imitating  verbs  99  ;  see  §  261. 

(d)  Hophal  is  sometimes  written  with  Qibbuts  vicarious ;  as  ^np"1  , 
icrr ,  instead  of  1  nE"*1 ,  "inn  ,§41. 

(e)  Polel,  Polal,  and  Hithpnlcl  are  declined,  in  all  respects,  like 
Poel  etc.  in  verbs  99 ,  i.  e.  like  Piel,  Pual  etc.  in  regular  verbs,  as 
the  former  stand  in  the  place  of  the  latter.  Polal  occurs  in  only  four 
verbs. 

(/)  Hithpolel,  like  Hithp.  in  reg.  verbs  §21 8,  often  takes  Pattahh 
in  the  final  syllable ;  which  in  pause  becomes  Qamets,  as  " :  isnrt  . 
Once  the  H  of  the  Praeform.  is  omitted  in  the  Part.,  as  CaigipTia  for 
S7?.ipn?j2,  Ps.  139:  21. 

{g)  Pilpel  etc.  are  declined  like  Polel  etc.  Pilpel  is  found  in 
only  five  verbs;  Polpal  only  in  b"2;  and  Hitbpalpal  only  in  r1"^  . 

§  271.  General  remarks  on  verbs  "12  .  (a)  The  great  similarity  of 
them  to  verbs  99  is  very  manifest,  from  §  268.  a.  b.  c.  d  ;  and  indeed, 
from  many  of  the  forms  produced  under  §  270,  specially  under  §  270. 
c.  1.  It  might  indeed  be  doubted,  whether  more  or  less  of  these  forms, 
so  much  like  99 ,  have  not  a  root  belonging  to  that  species  of  verbs. 
The  resemblances  in  the  general  principles  of  contraction,  are  too 
manifest  to  escape  notice. 

(b)  The  number  of  verbs  ",9  is  about  141.  Of  these,  13  are  fib, 
and  incapable  of  contraction,  §  268.  a.  Note  ;  6  resist  contraction,  \\/.. 
Sj2  ,  "nfi,  rn 9 ,  hiJE ,  fH"1  >  an('  ?V®  >  the  res^  are  contracted.  Fiot 
only  have  the  conj.  Pick] 

Vtrhs  A;/ in  Yudh. 

§  272.   These  arc  such    as   have   a  Yodh  originally  for 

their  middle  radical,  and  which  retain  it  in  more  or  less  of 

the  forms  in  Kal. 

n 

273.  Out  of  Kal,  verbs  V  in  all  respects  arc  like 
those  fo. 


101  §§274—277.    IBRBGULAB  VCBBi  J    i.\.i;i.!i    UEPH. 

[§  271.  JVotcs  cm  the  Paradigm.  Kai..  (l)  Praeter  has  Yodh  only 
in  three  verbs,  viz.  "pz ,  3",~\  ,  Fl ;  and  where  this  i9  retained,  the 
epenth.  i  is  inserted  before  the  formative  suffixes,  beginning  with  a 
consonant ;  as  the  Far.  shews.  All  the  other  cases  of  the  l'raeter, 
conform  to  that  of  verbs  1»  . 

(2)  future  in  all  respects  resembles  Hiphil,  in  regard  to  form. 
.So  the  apoc.  form  also  ;  e.  g.  T^ ,  ]3r]  ;  tBtD*  ,  Op\l  ■  (3)  Part. 
in  one  case  is  regular,  viz.  ^TN,  from  n^J*  . 

Note.  Very  few  verbs  are  exclusively  *9;  most  being  also  iy 
in  Kal.  The  older  grammarians  and  lexicographers  admitted  no  class 
"y  ,  but  ranked  such  forms  as  M^a  under  Hiphil,  with  an  aphacresin 
ef  the  M  .  But  as  this  is  without  other  example,  and  as  the  kindred 
languages  exhibit  verbs  ""y,  this  class  is  now  generally  admitted.] 


III.  CLASS  OP  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

§  275.  This  comprehends  those,  whose  third  radical  becomes  qui- 
escent, or  disappears. 

Verbs  Lamcclh  Aleph. 

§  276.  Aleph,  at  the  end  of  words,  is  usually  quiescent, 
§119.6.  Throughout  verbs  N^,  Aleph  is  quiescent  or 
otiant,  when  it  ends  a  word  or  a  syllable. 

§  277.  The  general  laws  of  quiescence  are,  (ft)  In  the 
Praeter  of  all  the  derived  conjugations,  before  formative 
suffixes  beginning  with  a  consonant,  itf  quiesccs  in  Tseri. 
(b)  In  the  Fut.  and  Imp.  of  all  the  conjugations,  before  a 
sujformafivc  consonant,  tf  quiesces  in  Seghol.  (c)  In  all  oth- 
er cases,  it  quiesces  (when  at  the  end  of  a  word  or  sylla- 
ble) in  the  regular  vowel ;  excepting  that  whenever  it 
meets  with  Pattahh,  it  lengthens  it  into  Qamets. 

E.  g.  n»&»,  sisaaKgi.,  ftaKsaR,  naasjbrt^  etc.     In  Kal,  the  Fut. 

NIT:-;  with  Pattahh  (Aleph  affects  the  Fut.  like  a  Guttural  §235),  be- 
comes ttsa^ ;  in  Niph.  we  have  N£"::  instead  of  ax*::  f  Pnal,  WED 
instead  of  N3ffi  ,  etc.  §  11 5. 

Note.  But  the  vowels,  made  long  by  such  quiescence,  do  not  re- 
main immutable.  The  laws  of  declension  supersede  the  laws  of  quies- 
cence ;    and  Qamets  etc.  (made  by  quiescence)  fall  away,  like   any 


§§278,270.  irregular  verbs;  lamedh  alepii.  105 

mutable  pure   vowels;    e.g.  M2Z!Q,  fem.  rtNlTS  ;    Fut.  N£?3%  2d  fem. 
"WXaPj,  etc.   See  §127.  Exc.  4.     So  Piel  N'S* ,  fem.  ttKKO,  etc. 

[§  278.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm,  (a)  Kai..  (1)  Procter  of  verbs  final 
Tseri,  usually  retain  it  here;  as  2fV,  n^V,  Er^-T,  etc.  The  3d 
pers.  sing.  fem.  sometimes  takes  n  (like  the  Aramaean)  ;  ;i-  .-\\^~  .  b. 
7:  14.  Sometimes  these  verbs  are  written  defective;  as  "ln3£)a  for 
■'njtsa ,  §  63. 

(2)  Inf.  fem.,  as  !"JiJ*V,  tt&MBH,  also  with  n,  as  ntfbJa  =mn;':-:. 
tllfiHp  (with  1  fulcrum  merely)  =  ruNnp  ;  see  §  H9.  c.  3.  Inf.  masc. 
sometimes  as  ittft  =  JtlBlrf ,  §  63. 

(3)  Imp.  INT;  yi-rft,  =.1Jt^';,  see  §  118.  In  plur.  fem.,  }8t^j3 , 
apoc.  for  n:N->p  ;  ~:\\^  for  n3i*X ,  from  8tX^  ,  is  sui  generis,  Cant.  3: 
11.  Qaere,  is  not  the  root  fiNi:  ? 

(4)  Part.  fem.  DNStt  for  Plfijka,  n^i"1  for  r^fi|^C^', ,   §  119.  c.  3. 

With  suff.  carta  for  tayfa ,  §  lis. 

(b)  Niphal.  (l)  Procter  fem.  riNrc: ;  see  under  a.  1.  above.  Forms 
defective,  SJIJttJBS  for  ar^atfa  .  (2)  /»/.  abs.  Nip:  .  (3)  Air?,  some- 
times as  O^Nlza: ,  seemingly  from  N££3  . 

(c)  Piel.  Inf.  sometimes  as  DNlrQ  ,  niJtVtt  ;  comp.  a.  2.  above. 

{d)  Hiphil.  Praeter  defective,  as^q^r;  =  {T,B^n i;  Inf. also  ^n", 
Jer.  32 :  35. 

§  279.  Interchange  of  forms  between  verbs  Nb  and  ~b.  In  the  Chal- 
dee  and  Syriac,  these  two  species  of  verbs  fall  under  one  and  the  same 
category,  and  have  the  same  forms  throughout.  In  Hebrew,  there  is 
plainly  an  incipient  tendency  toward  this  idiom,  which  developes  it- 
self in  the  frequent  interchanges  of  these  verbs  for  each  other,  in  re- 
gard to  vowels,  or  consonants,  or  both.     E.  g.  verbs  JO  imitate  verbs 

(2)  As  to  consonants. 

Kal.  Imp.       !r»B*l     for        ND-] 
riD3     for         nc: 

Fut.  Ttv\ Sn    forinSK^n 

Niph.  natT)    for      Nnr: 

n^a    for      njej: 

Inf.  const.     hB"1?J     for      NS^n 
Hitm.    n'N'n:ri  for  N2:nn  Piel,  -\72*    for       Bt\>»^ 

(3)  Jls  to  both  vowels  and  consonants.  Kal.  tW£  for  ntt&£  ,  Pibti  for 
HI&12  ,  see  §  1 1 8.  Part.  act.  STST  for  n«X^  ,§118.  Sy^fc  for  tffyftt  , 
§  118.  Pass.  -«lto3  for  «1i!»,  Ps.  32  :  1. 

Niph.  wfeoa  for  WNJgBJ .  nns-O  for  nac-i: .  Fat  *  309  *  for 
•!«»»:,  ^H8.  ' 

p'iel.  IBV  for  IKB'V ,  §  H8. 
14 


(1)  As  to  vo 

wrls. 

Kal 

T863  for 

T)»b3 

Part. 

£t£»  for 

K3t» 

Piel 

kVb  for 

NV73 

T)Jt£l  for 

TINE1 

Fut. 

NH^  for 

nsjp 

Inf. 

nifctett  for 

N'r: 

lOii  280,383.    ii:i;i;«.i  i.\u  VEBM  :    LAttBDB  ■«. 


Ilinc.  *jn*>aran  for  spJwxBii  •    Pa*t  ~z.?.'± r,,r  N":r=  • 
Hith.  rpfcann  for  rtttz&nn  .    m2:n-  for  N2:nn. 
Compare  with  these  reaemblaocee  to  rerba  ~r,  t ho  similarities  of 
those  verbs  to  <xr,  in  §290.     See  on  the  general  principle  of  such  in- 
terchanges, §  122.] 

Verbs  Lamedh  I  Ft. 

§  280.     These   comprise   verbs   originally  with    a    final 
Yodh,  or  a  final  Vav ;     both  of  which  coming  at  the  end 
of  a  word,  alter  a  heterogeneous  vowel  (Pattahh),  conform 
to  the  vowel,  i.  e.  become  I"i,  and  quiesce  in  it,  §  117.  2. 

Note.  Verbs  originally  1?  are  few  ;  e.  g.  as  rtr^  for  "ir'£ ,  1st  pers. 
Praet.  Tp'i'^  ;  most  verbs  Sir  ,  are  originally  *?  .  Only  the  tlerivate 
forms  devclope  the  original  root;  e.g.  ^pz  from  npz  =  "^3  ;  r±p  from 
7TiipT  =  V±pt .  Verbs  with  n  Mappiq,  are  verbs  which  originally  have 
a  final  ~  ,  and  belong  to  the  class  of  r  Gutturals. 

§  281.  The  final  radical  in  these  verbs  cither  quiesccs, 
or  becomes  otiant  and  falls  out,  both  in  conjugation  and  de- 
clension, every  where  with  only  two  exceptions. 

These  are  (l)  Pract.  3d  pers.  fern.,  where  the  final  radical  is  ex- 
changed for  n;  as  !"Tnb:. ,  rrnr>: ,  etc.  (2)  Part,  pass.;  as  '^s  ga- 
iety, where  the  Yodh  remains  a  proper  consonant. 

§  2S2.  The  rules  of  quiescence,  and  the  form  of  the  quiescent  let- 
ter, differ  in  different  persons  and  tenses.     They  are  as  follows : 

(«)  Tlic  Practcr,  3d  inasc.  sing,  in  all  the  conjugations, 
requires  H  quiescent  in  Qamcts.      See  Paradigm. 

(6)  The  other  forms  without  accession  at  the  end, 
take  n_  throughout  ;  excepting  the  Imp.  2  masc.  sing., 
which  has  n_,  and  the  Inf.  abs.  which  lias  n_  . 

(r)  Before  suffhrmafioes,  beginning  with  a  consonant. 
(1)  The  Praeter  of  Kal  has  \_/.  (2)  The  Practcr  of  all 
the  derived  conjugations,  has  *»__  .  (.3)  ThcFut.  and  Imp. 
throughout   have  "^  .      See  Paradigm. 

(«/)  Before  sutfbrmatives  beginning  with  a  voted,  the 
Quiescent  falls  away. 

E.  g.  Tra  instead  of  !Pr-: ,  "'ra  for  ""fra ,  etc.  §  118.  Rut  a  pause- 
accent  restores  the  Quiescent,  and  prolongs  the  original  vowel  which 
preceded  it ;  c.  g.  V*\l1  instead  of  "r^  ,$117. 


§283.      IRREGULAR  VERBS;    LAMEDH    HE.  107 

Note.  The  fulling  away  of  the  Quiescent  here,  throughout,  de- 
pends on  the  principle  stated  in  §  118  with  the  Note. 

[§  203.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm,  (u)  K.u..  (l)  Praeter  sometimes 
has  the  Chaldee  form,  as  nilMP  for  Srnipy,  comp.  §  278.  a.  1.  With 
Vav  moveable,  once,  'Rlbffl  ,  Job  3:  26.  Forms  written  defective  are 
rather  unusual ;  as  "V)\s  for  ""n"1":  3  . 

(2)  Inf.  abs.  sometimes  drops  the  !"i ,  and  takes  the  form  S^S  for 
nVri  ,  etc.  Twice  it  even  takes  n;  as  rnrr<U ,  rnn*v  Inf.  conUr. 
rarely  as  rizp  ,  SliUP  .  Fern,  form  SlJKl  ,  retaining  the  Vav,  Ezek. 
28  :  17.     Once  n;n  ,  in  Ezek.  21  :  1 5. ' 

Note.  The  usual  Inf.  constr.,  as  nV;:  ,  is  a  fern.  Segholate  form, 
and  is  merely  a  contraction  of  nita  ;  see  §  120.  c.  Comp.  fern.  Infin- 
itives, §  212.  3. 

(3)  Future.  («)  rrnn ,  Btah,  "»3Tin,  (instead  of  rrnn,  rOfin,  nr.Tn), 
are  merely  imitations  of  the  Chaldee  pointing  in  the  Pat.  of  these  verbs, 
and  are  probably  errors  of  transcribers. 

(,?)  TAe  Yodh  quiescent  of  the  root,  is  sometimes  omitted  before  suf- 
fixes as  ft3ip3>n  for  tta'Mpj'fi ;  and  sometimes  it  becomes  otiant,  by 
reason  of  a  Dag.  euphonic,  as  npxnn;  and  even  falls  out  here  also, 
as  n|\?n . 

{"/)  The  Apocopate  Future  is  common  to  all  the  conjugations  of  this 
verb.  It  is  formed  by  dropping  the  final  ~  with  the  preceding  vowel. 
It  then  appears  (l)  Usually  with  a  furtive  vowel  under  the  first  radi- 
cal.    (2)  Without  one.     E.  g. 


u: 

1   Fo 

rim  with  :i 

furtive  vowel. 

0-2) 

Forms  without  b  furtive  vowel. 

full  form, 

apoc.  form. 

full  form. 

Sing. 

3 

~".^ 

C- 

¥1)  -**3  "■ 

r,+z* 

ft:  i  (-=-.)            » 

— 

2 

!"»v»n 

"  -^2    * 

"?■"? 

^i  '-;-  ('"«,  "-:)> 

— 

1 

*%& 

*-::ni    c 

— -— - 

^V^C1*™')          * 

Plur. 

1 

rt:sg 

"mti  & 

--^                             I 

t 

"  gutt. 

3 

ii%&1 

"'<r\l    c 

"".-": 

nS-»J  Job  31  :  27.           m 

— 

2 

rp;nn 

»nni  / 

ni§-p 

6n?2,  wN  m  olio  (s^  57. «)  n 

B  gutt. 

J 

~V?.l 

togji  g 

~"T. 

^i^i  ""!".":  p*  T->:  8-  ° 

3 

"in;. 

in* n  /t 

-3w^ 

alb*]                     p 

Note  1.   T/te  Segholate  forms  in  verbs  differ,  in   one  respect,  from 
those  of  nouns,  etc.;  inasmuch  as   verbs  take    Hhireq  medial  for  a  pe- 
nultimate vowel ;   whereas  nouns  etc.  allow  only  of  Seghol,   Tscri, 
Pattahh,   Qamets   (in  a  few  cases),  and    Ilholem,   all    pure.     In  the 
above  table,  a,  c,  and  />,  have  Hhireq  medial  for  a  penult  rowel. 

Note  2.  In  the  apoc.  forms  of  the  2d  and  1-t  persona,  sing,  and 
plural,  the  Hhireq  is  prolonged  into  Tseri,  so  6,  c,  d  :  not  bin]  ■  b$R1 , 
etc.  On  the  other  hand,  the  third  person  very  rarely  has  a  Tseri  in 
the  penult,  like  b/1§\  from  rfr-ii ,  under  a. 


108  $§  283 — 285.    IRREGULAR  VERBS  ;    I.  wir.nir  n  i  . 


Note  :'..  When  the  second  radical  i-  a  Guttural,  the  apoc.  forms 
assume  the  usual  Pattahh  in  the  Goal  syllable  ;  ai  in  <  aod  f.  k  113. 
When  the  firel  radical  is  a  Guttural,  both  vowels  more  usually  arc 
Pattahh,  as  in  g;  but  rt  and  n  may  take  Hhireq,  as  in  /.-. 

Note  4.  The  nude  apoc.  forms  in  No  J,  without  furtive  vowels, 
are  not  frequent;  yet  they  occur  sufficiently  often  to  be  distinctly  ac- 
knowledged. Iu  form  they  resemble  such  nouns  as  B'JJp,  "i"G,  etc. 
The  learner  will  observe,  that  the  Hhireq  under  the  Praeform.  is  oc- 
casionally prolonged,  and  becomes  Tseri ;  e.g.  in  i.  In  /,  the  Pattahh 
in  ""■;  yi'lilul,  is  only/urttve,  as  the  Dag.  lene  in  ~  shews. 

Note  5.  In  the  forms  under  j,  k,  the  Segholale  shape  accommodates 
itself  to  the  words  which  have  a  final  Yodh  ;  e.  g.  Vr  instead  of  TP 
or  TJ*  ,  etc.  See  the  ground  of  this,  in  §  120.  b.  So  also  W  (writ- 
ten once  8*!j!"p  §  125.  o),  from  rPrj . 

Note  5.  All  the  apoc.  forms  of  the  Future  more  usually  have  a 
1  conversive  before  them ;  but  some  occur  without  it ;  and  1  does  not 
always  occasion  apocope,  e.  g.  fT3£*1   2  K.  1:  10.  «T^3*1  2  K.  6 :  23. 

Remark.  The  student  will  observe,  that  none  of  the  Segholates  in 
A'u/,  have  the  common  form  of  two  Seghols,  as  "Tj'-h  •  1°  this  respect 
the  forms  of  Kal  are  distinct  from  those  of  Hiphil,  which  adopts  the 
double  Seghol,  wherever  the  nature  of  the  word  permits. 

(4)  Imp.  For  the  forms  ^j) ,  >'■:■:  ,  instead  of  ^ba  ,  ^Vi!  ,see  §  118. 
Notes  1.  2.  3. 

(5)  The  act.  Part.  fern,  is  ftVSa  (for  !"Pbiil  §  118).  Sometimes  it 
assumes  the  form  rrrii ,  plur.  rri'ba  ,as  if  from  ^3,  of  the  form  """r. 
§  212.  6. 

(6)  The  pass.  Part,  rarely  as  ni»#  for  ""liD*,  IBSfc  Ifor  ^&X.  In 
Kelhib,  nilt33  nttu-voth,  Qeri,  rri^Da  . 

§  284.  In  all  the  forms  where  Yodh  radical  is  dropped,  it  is  oc- 
casionally restored,  either  by  a  Pause-accent,  by  Nun  parag.,  or  by 
the  emphasis  required  upon  the  word.  See  §  147,  for  pause-accent. 
With  Aim,  =12-T  ,  ]T«a"P  and  J^")}  Emphasis,  !"POrl  Vs.  57:  2.  Imp. 
I^ya ,  Is.  21  :  12.     With  -  parag.,  also,  Fut.  n;^s  . 

Note.  From  these  cases  of  restored  and  prolonged  vowels,  it  is 
clear,  that  the  Fut.  and  Imp.  of  verbs  ni  have,  in  the  real  ground- 
form,  a  final  Pattahh,  since  the  restored  vowel  goes  into  Qamets  ;  §  146. 

§285.  Niphal.  (l)  Praeter  sometimes  with  Hhireq  before  ■»;  as 
ry^D  from  n(~:  ,  ":"'r5: .     In  pause,  ^c:  from  r?D:  . 

(2)  Inf.  aba.  rarely  as  n;'r.": .  Inf.  const,  very  rarely,  as  !TtK*^Jj| , 
Judg.  13:  21. 

(3)  The  fut.  apoc.  here,  merely  drops  the  final  T\  with  the  preced- 
ing vowed. 


§§  286 291.      IRREGULAR  VERBS  J    LAKEDH  HE.  10'J 

§  286.  Piel.  (l)  Praeter  sometimes  with  Hhireq  before  i ;  rp]?a  . 
(2)  The  apoc.  forms  in  this  Conj.,  not  only  drop  their  final  n  with  its 
vowel,  but  also  the  Daghesh  forte  from  the  middle  radical,  (see  Par.), 
because  this  letter  now  becomes  a  Jinal  one;  §  72.  The  preceding 
vowel  is  sometimes  prolonged,  as  "jrP1  =  ~i!r"]  . 

(3)  With  Yodh  restored  ;  Imp.  V\n  (for  ^^,  §  73.  Note  3).  Fut. 
with  Sufi.  ",::ir:nr . . 

§287.  Hipiiil.  (l)  Praeter  sometimes  with  Hhireq;  as  ^n^'rr.n, 
T^nin.  Sing.  fern.  3d  pers.  sometimes  as  nb:~ ;  comp.  §  283.  a.  I. 
In  some  cases  the  ~  prefix  takes  Seghol ;  as  nb^r: ,  nsin  .  Also  as 
the  Chaldee,  fJjWj  for  ttrhn  ;  comp.  §  283.  3.  a'. 

(2)  Inf.  abs.  once  as  ~2~in  .  Inf.  const,  once,  niXptn  for  rjlSprl , 
Lev.  14:  43.  (3)  Fut.  once,  3d  pers.  plur.  "POXlfl  Irim-slv,  like  the 
Chaldee  Viy-\ ,  etc.     Once  ^rrtii-i  for  --?;n  ,  Jer.  18  :  23. 

§  288.  Futures  apocopate.  Like  those  in  Kal,  they  are  divided 
into  two  kinds,  (l)  With  a  furtive  vowel ;  e.  g.  Vi\]  ,  SQ^I ,  -~  "*  ]  . 
Here  the  penult  vowel  is  Seghol,  or  (under  a  Guttural)  Pattahh.  The 
usual  forms  of  noun-Segholates  are  here  prevalent,  in  distinction  from 
those  in  Kal;  Remark,  p.  108. 

(2)  With  nude  apocope  ;  as  -""V  ,  'T'V  ;  fir.-D?  ,  Fi3>  ,  etc. 

Note.  The  Imper.  follows  the  analogy  of  No.  1  ;  e.  g.  with  a 
furtive  vowel,  always  as  l~\n  ,  Pp7?i  instead  of  i"I2p?3 ,  "3")" ,  etc. 
With  a  Guttural,  as  r^n  for  Flbsrt ,  etc. 

§  289.  Peculiar  anomalies.  Such  are  the  endings  in  (  •  •),  in  Inf. 
Fut.  and  Imp. ;  e.g.  Inf.  Kal,  J"i*n  to  be  ;  Piel,  1~tiy  opprimendo  ;  Hoph. 
rpT3n.  Kal  Fut.  rvrrn,  N!ah  for  nnxn.  Piel,  nr;n.  In  Syr.  and 
Chaldee,  the  Fut.  ends  in  6t_  or  1_. ,  in  these  verbs. 

§  290.  Imitations  of  verbs  nb ;  comp.  §  279.  (a)  Imitation  in  re- 
spect to  the  consona7its  ;  e.g.  "'rifitXI  for  "1n",^~j ;  fcticl  Inf.  abs.  for  rr;r:  , 
Imp.  fitnrr  .  So  Kara*,  N>n;,  for  n:ur ,  nirn: ;  asttj  for  tiro  Piel; 
6t|BP  forn?u"!,  Ecc.  8:1.  (b)  Aa  to  voweh;  e.  g.  n'rsn  for  rt^an, 
rwzjjj  for  -"VX;  Piel  Inf.  n::?  forrriSJg  ;  Part.  Niph.  nbha  for  r,~-.z  ■ 
n?3n  for  n^an . 

§  291.  General  remark  on  the  usage  described  in  §  279,  §  290.  The 
number  of  these  anomalies  will  be  increased  or  diminished  very  much, 
according  to  the  principles  assumed  by  the  Lexicographer.  If  he 
constitute  roots  both  in  Nb  and  in  n'p,  with  the  same  meaning,  then 
the  anomalies  are  reduced  to  a  very  small  number.  If  he  make  but 
one  root,  then  they  are  multiplied.  1  observe  that  Gesenius,  (very 
rightly  in  my  apprehension),  in  his  latest  work*,  increases  the  num- 
ber of  the  roots,  and  thus  diminishes  the  anomalies. 


J10  1203  -206.    tBBBOULAH  \ii:r.>:    I  wn.mi    r\v    i   PC. 


§  292.  J'ilrl  appears  only  twice,  viz.  in  rPN:.  (contract,  rvs: 
§  119.  c.  1),  from  ~n:  ;  and  in  ^ihljn  Part,  const  plur.,  from  HrTD, 
Pllel  rnrjiu. 

IliihjHilfl  appears  only  in  ~~r,  Ilitli.  !-."----.  Fat  :,p.,.  "-r^- 
instead  of  lftnp? ,  §  120.  6.    Inf.  with  r.  parag.  rrirjwpn ,  2  K. 

Verbs  liaraedh  Too. 

[§  203.  These  are  not  strictly  Irregular;  but  in  all  the  persons 
which  receive  a  sutlix  beginning  with  n,  the  n  final  of  the  root  i-  in- 
serted by  a  Dag.  forte  in  the  suffix  letter;  e.g.  rn2  ,  r~\Z  ,  1,IV}5>, 
£3Pn3  ,  etc.     So  also,  WD  lie  died,  FBfl  ,  \n?3  ,  etc. 

Verbs  doubly  anomalous. 

§291.  These  are  such  as  have  two  radicals,  (usually  the  first 
and  third),  which  may  be  dropped,  or  assimilated,  or  may  become 
quiescent ;  as  iinN  ,  N2211  ,  ""V  ,  Nto:  ,  T.VZ ,  etc. 

Note.  Very  few  cases  occur,  like  NTS ,  where  two  irregular  let- 
ters come  together.  Two  cases  only  occur  of  verbs  irregular  E  and 
1"" ;  e.  g.  "n: ,  and  CE: ;  for  which  see  Lexicon.  The  verba  v:  and 
5s!  2  ,  are  regular  as  to  the  ,Vim,  §  253. 

§  295.  In  regard  to  the  first  radical,  these  verbs  exhibit  all  the 
various  phases  of  verbs  irregular  E  ;  and  in  regard  to  the  third  radical 
all  the  phases  of  verbs  irregular  r  ;  see  Par.  XVII  seq. 

§  296.  The  following  examples,  and  notes  on  the  Paradigms  jii«t 
mentioned,  exhibit  all  the  forms  of  these  verbs  in  which  the  student  is 
likely  to  meet  with  any  difficulty. 

(«)   Verbs  isis  and  r.7  • 

nrx  ,  Hiph.  fut.  apoc.  rioi   1  Sam.  14:  24  for  ft^ji»1 . 

ftBN,  Imp.  "EN  Ex.  1G:  23,  by  Syriasm  for  H>*  (§  119.  d.  2)  : 
Fut.  with  suff.  inbnl  1  Sam.  28  :  24,  for  ISnSfifrn  . 

nrwX,  Praet.,  in  pause  nTK  Jer.  3  :  22 ;  Imp.  in  pause,  "Tun;  for 
^M  (§119.  d.  2.  §  147)  ;  Fut.,  »rj\i  Deut.  33  :  21,  for  nryw ,  the 
first  N  being  dropped,  and  final  N  put  for  -,  §  290;  riKjl  Is.  41  :  25, 
for  rHjNJI .     Hiph.  Imp.  in  pause,  IVlSl  for  ITiarj,  §  119.  e.  1.  $  147. 

(b)   Verbs  ^S  and  sfe . 

N^  ,  Inf.  fern.  D8S  for  nfip| ,  $  1 19.  c.  1.     Imp.  as ,  §  243.  a. 

0)   Verbs  ^  and  jft ,  Par.  XVII. 

-T,  not  found  in  Kal ;  Piel.  Fut.  H'qQ  Lam.  3:  53,  for  ^"V 
Hiph.  Fut.  with  n  retained,  rTjTJT  Neb.  11  :  17;  first  person  with 
suffix  T]iN,  Ps.  35:  18,  and  in  pause  ^i&,  Ps.  30:  13. 


§§  29G — 299.    irrf.o.  vf.rbs  ;  doubly  anomalous,  etc.      Ill 


nil  i  Fut-  lst  Pers-  P,ur-  wilh  sulT--  °V- 1  Ps-  74 :  8- 
ttbl ,  Fut  apoc.  Pp*1 ,  Ezek.  31:7;  Popaal,  nnl>*Bj ,  Ps.  45:  3. 
iTV  ,  Fut.  1  pers.  with  saff.,  D"V:  ,  Num.  21  :  30.     Hiph.  Fut.  with 
suff.,  D-V,  2  K.  17  :  27  ;  SplR,  Ps.46  :  8  etc. 

GO    Verbs  ]S  and  A  ,  Par.  XVIII. 

The  Paradigm  exhibits  in  Kal  and  Niphal  the  forms  of  N",r:  ;  in 
lliphil  those  of  tfd:  ,  because  the  former  does  not  occur  in  Hiphil. 

Infinitive  construct,  nNfcJ  for  fitgv  (§119.  c.  1).  Fut.,  n:;|p,  Ruth 
1:14,  without  Aleph.     Hiph.  Fut,  W  ,  Ps.  55  :  16,  Kethib  for  WQ  • 

(c)   Verbs  JB  and  jft,  Par.  XIX. 

The  three  verbs  in": ,  ~c: ,  ~3: ,  are  all  of  this  form.  Kal.  Fut. 
apoc.  with  Vav,  D»1  and  -0*1  ;  7*1 ,  2  K.  9  :  33.  Niphal  rtn: ,  Praet. 
3  pers.  plur.  in  pause,  VE:  ,  Num.  24  :  G  ;  Fut.  3  pers.,  SttiS^  ,  Zech. 
1:  16;  3  pers.  plur.  1t3|"  ,  Jer.  6:  4  ;  from  !7:d:  ,  Praet.  !l33 ,  2  Sam.  11: 
15  ;  1833  ,  Job  30  :  8,  wilh  N  for  n,  §  290,  or  perhaps  the  root  is  N2:  . 

Hiph.  Fut.  with  suff.,  as  is:  •>  2  Sam.  14:6;  SjB.2,  Job  36  :  18  etc. 
Fut  apoc.  with  Vav,  O^l ,  ^'i  etc.  The  Imp.  also  suffers  apocope, 
and  takes  the  forms  arr ,  ^*n  ,  which  are  of  frequent  occurrence. 

§  297.  The  verb  N13  has  all  the  common  inflections  exhibited  in 
Paradigm  XX.  But  it  has  many  forms  mi  generis,  besides  these. 
E.  g.  with  suff,  as  *j«3,  FT3$2;  Fut.  in*]  for  603*2-  Pern.  3d  plur. 
n:"Nxbn,  with  epenth,  \  .  Also  finJWR,  Deut  33:  16,  for  N3R;  and 
T1M3R  ,  1  Sam.  25  :  34,  for^Jt*3n.     Hiphil  sometimes  takes  epenth.  i ; 

as  ■'Snis^nri ,  rrjiirah,  DniN^n.  Defective,  "'n-  for  N-n- 

Note.  The  verbs  NT 2  and  Nip,  are  used  only  in  lliphil ;  where 
they  are  declined  like  N13 . 

Relation  of  irregular  verb*  to  e.arh  other. 

§  298.  In  the  irregular  verbs,  in  general,  only  two  of  the  radicals 
appear  to  be  permanent  and  immutable.  The  other  radical  may  be, 
and  often  actually  is,  supplied  in  different  ways,  according  to  the 
forms  adopted  by  the  different  classes  of  irreg.  verbs.  E.  g.  from  the 
biliteral  "p  ,  have  been  formed  "p-  ,  "y-  ,  Hyy  ,  rt5i ,  all  of  the  same 
meaning.  So  also  3^  and  2'^:  ;  "IX*,  113t,  and  -ni:  ;  K^j3  and  !T^J3  ; 
2TU  and  zz:* :  and  so,  more  or  less,  of  a  large  proportion  of  the  irreg- 
ular verbs,  much  larger  than  has  yet  been  generally  noticed.  This 
principle  reigns  extensively,  also,  in  the  kindred  Shemitish  languages. 

§  299.  In  consequence  of  different  forms  having  the  Bame  mean- 
ing, it  happens  in  many  cases,  that  one  forin  Is  employed  only  in  some 
particular  tense  or  conjugation,  while  another  H  employed  ovlu~i\  el\ 
in  another.     E.  g.  from  ^fl ,  ivit,  la  derived  the   Praet.   and   Part.  : 


112  §§  30(1 — 303.    I-i.mmi.ITI-.RAI.  \\.\:n-  —  PAETICIPLEB. 

while  its  equivalent,  -|r?  i  furnishes  the  Inf.,  Fat,  :in«I  Imp.  So  pj:r , 
a^-  asaal  in  AV//,-  but  Paal  "^Ti  an('  Hith.  risnnri,  come  from  ~p~. 

Compare, in   Latin, /bro,  twli,  latum;  Greek, <p*Qv>,  ototo,  "/viyxa.     [|  nriebed 

Hint  lexicographer!  woald  makes  ranefa  nore  entendre  om  of  thii  obvioni  end  nridar}  extended 
principle  in  Hebrew  etymology.  It  would  greatly  diminiab  the  «<>  called  anomalies  of  tlic  Inn- 
gunge. 

Plurilateral  Verbs. 

§  300.  These  are  properly  very  few  ;  and  they  are  declined  like 
the  Conjs.  Pilel  and  Polal.  The  following  list  comprises  the  whole 
number  that  actually  appear;  viz. 

(l)  &K2W3,  1  pers.  with  sufTix  IrPnKttJtta  ,  Is.  14:  23.  (2)  r=~3  . 
participle  b2~)r?J  ,  1  Chr.  15:  27.  (3)  D^3 ,  Fut.  with  suffix.  ns^tnb*, 
Ps.  80:  14.  (4)  ti-)B,  Job  2G:  9.  (5)  ttfi'cn,  Job  33:  25.  (G)  -~)r.r  , 
2  pers.  fut.  STjfnn,  Jer.  12:  5;  participle  !i*MwB  ,  Jer.  22:  15.  (7) 
A  few  other  forms  are  noted  in  some  of  the  lexicons,  but  in  others 
they  are  more  properly  referred  to  the  Pilel  form,  derived  from  a 
triliteral  root ;  as  Pilel  3  pers.  fem.  in  pause  ^^T".'!l  ->  J°b  15:  32.  Cant. 
1:  16,  from  |**n.] 


PARTICIPLES. 


301.  Participles  are  treated  as  adjectives,  i.  e.  declined  as  nouns; 
which  is  common  in  other  languages.  Participles,  in  regard  to  case, 
tone-syllable,  etc.  follow  the  usages  of  nouns.  Par.  XXI.  exhibits  the 
various  phases  and  declensions  of  their  absolute  cases. 

§  302.  All  of  them  in  the  fem.  may  form  Segholates,  except  the 
ground-form  has  an  immutable  penult  vowel.  E.  g.  ~E£  i  !"*30J!3  ,  !"!?3',p}2  , 
etc.  are  incapable  of  a  Seghol.  form,  because  the  penult  vowels  cannot 
be  so  changed  as  to  conform  to  the  laws  of  Segholates;  see  §  142.  d. 
But  in  Hiphil,  the  fem.  Segholates  are  derived  from  an  apoc.  fem. 
form  ttlbttptt,  like  the  apoc.  Fut.  ££>[£. 


VERBS  AVITII  SUFFIX  PRONOUNS. 

§  303.  Pronouns,  following-  verbs  and  governed  by 
them,  are  attached  to  them  and  united  in  the  same  Avord. 
This  is  effected  by  taking  the  fragments  or  parts  of  the 
pronoun,  with  an  appropriate  vowel  of  union  (where  one 
is  needed),  and  adjusting  the  form  of  the  verb,  when  ne- 
cessary, so  as  to  receive  it. 


§§304 307.    VERBS  WITH  SUFFIX  PRONOUNS.  113 

E.  g.  ^JfBJJ  ,  instead  of"W  t^j? ,  Ac  H/fet/  me  ;  D^DJJ ,  instead  of 
Dr:  ffccj?  ,  f/'O"  didst  kill  them.     Comp.  Latin  eccum,  for  ecce  cum,  etc. 

§  304.  Most  of  the  suffix  pronouns  influence  the  tones 
of  the  verb,  i.  e.  they  move  it  forward  or  toward  the 
left;  and  consequently  they  occasion  more  or  less  change  - 
in  the  mutable  vowels  of  verbs,  usually  (not  always)  ac- 
cording to  the  general  principles  of  the  vowel  changes;  § 
12G  seq.  In  some  few  cases,  the  consonants  of  the  verb 
suffer  a  change  in  order  to  receive  a  suOix,  §  311. 

§  305.  As  all  the  conjugations  of  verbs  ternrnate  in 
the  same  manner,  they  all  receive  suffixes  in  the  like 
manner  with  Kal,  with  very  little  variation.  But  neuter 
verbs,  and  those  which  arc  passive  or  reflexive,  do  not 
from  the  nature  of  the  case  admit  of  suffixes,  as  they  do 
not  govern  words  after  them  ; 

Note.  Verbs  of  the  first  and  second  persons  do  not  receive  suffix- 
es of  the  same  persons,  because,  the  reflexive  forms  of  the  verbs  ex- 
press the  sense  which  would  be  thus  conveyed. 

§  306.  The  Inf.  mode,  and  participles,  receive  suffixes 
either  in  the  manner  of  verbs  or  of  nouns. 

But  not  with  the  same  meaning,  as  it  respects  the  Inf.  mode ;  for 
a  noun-suffix  appended  to  it,  denotes  the  subject  or  agent  of  the  verb  ; 
but  a  verbal  suffix,  the  object  of  the  action  implied  by  the  verb.  E.  g. 
Inf.  *ips,  with  noun  suff.,  ""ips,  my  punishment,  viz.  that  which  I  in- 
flict; with  a  verbal  suff.  ^npoi:  to  punish  me. 

[§  307.  Different  forms  of  pronovn  suffixes.  Most  of  the  verbal-suf- 
fixes, or  fragments  of  primitive  pronouns,  have  at  least  three  different 
forms,  adapted  to  the  different  ending  or  tense  of  the  verb  to  which 
they  are  appended. 

(a)  The  most  simple  form  of  the  suffixes  is  that  in  which  they  be- 
gin with  a  consonant.  In  this  shape  they  are  appended,  through  all 
the  tenses  and  moods,  to  forms  of  verbs  which  end  with  a  vowel ;  see 
Note. 

(b)  To  the  simple  form  is  prefixed  a  vowel  of  the  A  class,  viz. 
Qamets  or  Pattahh.  In  this  shape  they  are  appended  to  forms  of 
verbs  which  end  with  a  consonant,  usually  in  the  Praeter  only. 

(c)  To  the  simple  form  is  prefixed  a  vowel  of  the   E  class,  viz 

15 


114 


'r/\  :10^,  309.    VERM   WITH    SIFFIX  PRONOUNS. 


Tseri  or  Scghol.     In  this  shape  they  ;irc  appended  to  forms  of  verbs 
which  end  with  a  consonant,  in  the  Fnt  and  Imperative. 

Not*.  The  vowel  which  it  thai  prefixed  to  tbe  tafixee,  lervei  to  connect  them  nore  reedily 
with  the  verb,  mid  is  therefore  celled  » i •* ■  it*unt-t>aw*l.  \\  ben  tbe  rerb  endt  io  i  rowel,  thai  row- 
el ofcoilrM  servos  an  a  union-vowel. 

§  308.  Between  the  suffix  and  the  union-vowel,  there  is  sometimes 
inserted  an  epenthetic  Awn,  §  lo'i.  />,  which  is  usually  assimilated  to 
the  first  letter  of  the  suffix  and  expressed  in  it  hy  a  Dagbesb  forte. 
In  poetry,  the  Nun  is  sometimes  fully  written.  Thi^  cla-<  of  sullixes 
is  limited  principally  to  the  sing,  number  of  the  pronouns,  and  to  the 
Fut.  tense  of  verbs. 

§  309.  The  following  table  exhibits  the  suffixes  as  appended,  (a) 
to  verbs  ending  with  a  vowel  in  all  the  moods  and  tenses.  (6)  To 
those  ending  with  a  consonant  in  the  Fraeter.  (c)  To  those  ending 
with  a  consonant  in  the  Fut.  and  Imperative,  (rf)  It  exhibits  also 
those  suffixes  which  receive  an  epenthetic  Nun. 


Sins,  common. 


1. 

2  m. 

2  f. 

3  m. 


h3- 

sjL-nbf 


3  f.    n_ 
pi.  i.  \L 

2  m.  DS 

2  f.  ]5 

3  m.  D  poetl&l 
3  f.  1 


Praetcr. 

hD_  in  pause  h2_ 
w|  in  pause  *[    S|_ 


P. 


_  u_  poet.  T2  " 


M 

Future  etc. 

Ti  &c.   ilD_ 

I  TV.' 

R 

u_  u_!  poet.  'TD_ 


w 


Future  with  epenthetic  Nun. 


Sing.  1 .   ^j_  h3_  for  h2:_  &c 
-  2  m.  ^j-  !"u)_.  for  Tp_~  &c. 


Sing.  3  m.  -13..  for  VW-.,  also  13 
-    3  f.  T\l—  for  ~I_ 


§  310.  Notes  on  the.  table  of  suffixes.     (1)  In   a  very  few   instances, 
the  Fut.  has  the  suffixes  ",:1,  D_,  like  the  Praeter  ;  and  vice  versa  the 


§  310.    VER15S   WITH   SUFFIX   PRONOUNS.  H; 


Praet.  very  rarely  takes  suffixes  like  the  Future,  viz.  1:1.  and  a  few 
times  "l:l.  . 

(2)  The  original  union-vowels  would  seem  to  be  Qamets  and  Tseri, 
which  shorten  into  Pattahh  and  Seghol  when  the  tone  is  removed. 
Before  the  epenthetic  Nun,  the  two  latter  only  are  found.  So  also  in 
",:_.,  which  in  pause  becomes  "':_. 

(3)  The  2d  pers.  sing  feni.  "J_  in  b,  occurs  but  seldom  ;  the  more 
common  form  in  the  Praeter  is  ^_,  and  without  the  tone  f_\  as  in 
the  Future.  The  form  with  parag.  Yodh  in  c,  occurs  often  in  the 
later  Psalms. 

(4)  The  suffixes  CD ,  "}3  ,  never  take  a  union-vowel ;  nor  does  the 
suffix  ^  or  ~D  ,  except  in  pause.  The  3  pers.  sing.  fern,  of  the  Praeter 
also  takes  suffixes,  either  with  or  without  a  union-vowel ;  see  below  § 
312.  2. 

(5)  The  forms  T73_  T72_  ia!_  with  a  parag.  i  ,  are  common  in  po- 
etry. The  form  1H  is  found  as  a  suffix  once,  Ex.  15:  5 ;  so  in  Ethio- 
pia    The  form  Drt_  occurs  in  Dent.  32:  26. 

(6)  Instead  of  the  fern,  suffix  "J  of  the  3d  pers.  plural,  the  masc. 
form  □  appears,  specially  after  the  sufform.  1  and  ■•_  ;  perhaps  in  or- 
der that  the  fern,  suffix  may  not  be  confounded  with  the  parag.  ] ;  as 
DttHins,  Ex.  2:  17,  for  -jT-nri;  DI^O^l ,  1  Sam.  G:  10.  Gen.  26: 
15.  Num.  17:  3,  4.  Josh.  4:  Series.  2:  14.  Prov.  6:  21.  But  ]  is  used 
in  Jer.  48:  7. 

(7)  The  suffixes  with  epenth.  Nun  are  occasionally  found  in  the 
Imp.  and  rarely  in  the  Praeter;  see  No  1.  above.  In  Chaldee,  an 
epenth.  Nun  is  always  found  before  the  suff.  of  the  Fut.  Imp.  and  In- 
finitive. 

(8)  Wherever  there  is  a  union-vowel,  it  uniformly  takes  the  tone. 
The  suffixes  CD  and  ]3  always  draw  down  the  tone  upon  themselves, 
removing  it  two  places  if  necessary,  and  are  on  that  account  denomi- 
nated grave  suffixes.  The  others  never  move  the  tone  more  than  one 
syllable,  and  are  called  light  suffixes. 

The  suffix  ^  or  FID,  when  appended  to  verbs  ending  in  a  conso- 
nant, usually  takes  the  tone.  The  3  pers.  sing.  fern,  of  the  Praeter 
is  excepted;  see  Paradigm. 

(9)  Some  of  these  suffix-forms  of  pronouns  are  derived  from  primi- 
tive forms  which  are  still  in  use  ;  as  D,  ],  from  Z~,  ]n,  etc.  Others 
would  seem  to  come  from  forms  which  are  now  obsolete  in  Hebrew  ; 
as  ^  from  n3J<  =  n2:N  thou,  like  "OiK  /  ;  C^  from  c?N  etc.  The 
form  "^  still  appears  in  Ethiopic,  as  a  regular  sufform.  in  the  flexion 
of  verbs. 

Note.   Wrli'il  snilixos  arc  alao  united,   in  all  theil   limn-,  with  certain   adverbj  anJ  interjec- 
tions; in  which  condition  they  are  in  the  .Yum.  case. 


I  ((J  §§  811,  B12t    Minis  wrni  si  mix  PRONOUN*. 

§  311.  The  changes  in  (he  vowels,  of  the  verh,  occasioned  by  the 
suffix  prnnourn,  are  seen  in  the  Paradigm.  In  the  conmmanU,  the  Ibl- 
lowing  cbangea  take  place  ;  viz.  Praet.  3  fem.  n_  becomes  n_  ;  the 
fern.  Pi  ("Ti)  becomes  "'Fi  ;  2.  plur.  masc  DJJ  hecomes  TF;  as  the  Par. 
shews.     The  forms  ending  with  n:  receive  n  in  its  room. 

§  312.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm.  Kal.  Pratt.  3d  pers.  masc.  In 
"Q^13J3  ,  as  the  tone  is  moved  Forward,  the  first  vowel  falls  away,  §  132  ; 
the  second  vowel  of  the  original  word  is  thrown  into  a  simple  syllahle, 
and  becomes  long-,  §  130;  hut  where  the  syllable  remains  mixed,  Pat- 
tahh  continues,  as  DsbCP  .  In  such  a  way,  the  student  will  easily  ac- 
count for  most  of  the  changes  made  in  the  original  vowels  of  the  verb. 
Verhs  final  Tseri  retain  it,  when  a  long  vowel  is  required  in  the  ult. 
of  the  verb  ;  as  :ca:  . 

(2)  Praeter  3  fern,  substitutes  n  for  the  final  n,  unites  this  (for 
the  most  part)  in  a  syllable  with  the  last  radical  of  the  verb,  and  al- 
ways puts  the  tone  upon  the  same  syllable.  It  is  only  when  a  suff.  be- 
gins with  a  vowel,  (which  occurs  only  in  "J_  C_  •)_),  that  the  final  n  is 
taken  away  from  this  syllable  (§  90.  1),  which  of  course  prolongs  the 
Pattahh,  §  130.  E.  g.  with  suff.  *7_. ,,  !jri VbjD ,  where  the  Tseri  of  the 
suff.  is  shortened,  in  consequence  of  falling  into  a  mixed  syllable  with- 
out the  tone,  §  129  0.  So  with  D-  ]_  ,  it  makes  by  the  same  rules, 
Dn?Bj3 ,  Tnb'cp. 

Note.  The  suff.  Wand  n  sometimes  assimilate  their  n  to  the  final 
n  of  the  verb;    e.    g.   TO?333  ==*nn5»a  ,  1  Sam.   1:24;    rtB*in»  = 

hnffrtg,  Jer.  49:  24. 

(3)  Prael.  2 fen.  exhibits  the  form  ''FlbOP  before  a  suffix,  (as  sta- 
ted in  §  311);  and  in  this  way  appears  in  the  same  manner  as  the 
1  pers.  sing,  when  it  takes  the  suffix  of  the  third  pers.  sing,  and  plu- 
ral. The  student  will  remark  that  here,  and  in  the  second  pers.  plur., 
a  union-vowel  is  provided  for  the  verb,  by  adopting  the  forms  ^nrUP, 

4.  The  Inf.  most  usually  takes  suffixes  in  the  manner  of  Segholate 
nouns,  in  Dec.  VI;  i.  e.  the  final  vowel  is  thrown  back  upon  the  first 
radical,  and  shortened.  If  the  verb  be  y  Guttural,  then  the  points  are 
regulated  by  the  usual  principles,  in  §  114.  §  128.  See  the  examples 
in  the  Paradigm.  The  variety  of  punctuation,  with  suff.  "  ,  23,  73, 
may  also  be  there  seen. 

The  Inf.  of  a  verb  Fut.  Pattahh  usually  takes  Hhircq  under  the 
first  radical,  before  suffixes ;  as  2>"p.2  in  the  Par. ;  but  sometimes 
Pattahh,  as  ^ypn  ,  ifc»D,  etc.  Verbs  Pe  Gutt.  sometimes  take  a 
Seghol  in  the  first  syllable  ;  as  FT33lrJ ,  Ps.  102:  14. 

The  Inf.  fern.  Segholate  takes  suff.  like  nouns  of  Dec.  XIII.    Hhireq 


§§  313 315.    VF.URS  WITH  SUFFIXES NOUNS.  117 


is  the  usual  vowel  in  the  first  syllable;  e.g.  D"^"\ ,  ",ri«2Jn ;  but  some- 
times Pattahh,  as  rui  ,  ",rou; . 

(o)  Future  suffixes  are  provided  with  a  union-vowel,  in  most  cases, 
where  the  verb  ends  with  a  radical  letter;  in  which  cases,  the  final 
Hholem  or  Tseri  of  the  verb  is  dropped.  But  with  stiff.  ~,  CD  ,  "jD, 
these  vowels  are  retained  and  shortened,  because  they  lose  the  tone. 
But  verbs  Fut.  Pattalih  retain  this  vowel,  and  prolong  it  before  a  union- 
vowel ;  as  DHJ^-^  from  '^?~?- 

(6)  Imp.  follows  the  analogy  of  the  Fut.  throughout ;  in  regard  to 
verbs  final  Pattahh,  as  well  as  other*. 

(7)  Participles  follow  the  manner  of  the  nouns  to  whose  declension 
they  belong,  in  receiving  suffixes. 

(8)  Piel  usually  drops  its  final  Tseri  before  a  union-vowel,  as  in 
the  Par. ;  but  before  tj,  CD  ,  "jD,  it  commonly  shortens  it  into  Seghol, 
or  short  Hhireq,  as  ^^j?  ,  DDUi-iS  ;  rarely  into  Pattahh,  as  *pH3  ,  Deut. 
2:  7.     Pattahh  final  here  remains,  as  "£nn  . 

(9)  Poel,  Polel,  etc,  imitate  Piel  in  their  suffixes. 

(10)  Hiphil  appends  suffixes  to  its  full  forms;  not  to  the  apoco- 
pate ones.  Very  rarely  is  the  final  vowel  of  the  verb  dropped  ;  as 
in  linttKE  instead  of  iS^'iM^  • 

Verbs  Lamedh  He  with  Suffixes. 

§  313.  Suffixes  here  cause  the  final  letter  and  vowel  to  fall  away. 
The  union-vowel  is  then  supplied,  or  omitted,  as  the  nature  of  the 
case  requires. 

Note  1.  Praet.  3  sing.  fern,  rejects  the  final  n_  ,  and  then  follows 
the  analogy  in  regular  verbs,  as  to  the  n  before  the  suffix. 

Note  2.  Suffixes,  beginning  with  a  consonant,  sometimes  cause 
the  original  Yodh  to  be  restored  ;  asniT'Yn  ,  i^CTT  ,  Ten  ,  D^fiHMJ, 
etc.] 


NOUNS. 

§  314.  Derivation.  Most  nouns  in  Hebrew  are  derived  from  verba  , 
and  in  general  they  have  for  their  ground-form*  the  Inf.  mode  or 
Participles.  A  comparatively  small  number  of  nouns  are  probably 
)>rimitive ;  but  these  conform,  in  their  inflection,  to  the  usual  laws 
which  regulate  those  derived  from  verbs. 

§  315.  Declension  in  Hebrew  nouns,  differs  much  from  declension 
in  Greek  and  Latin.  The  plural  and  dual  numbers  are,  indeed,  dis- 
tinguished by  appropriate  endings  added  to  the  ground-forms  ;  but  case. 


118  §816.    Niiins;    &BlflRAL  CLASSIFICATION,   BT< 


properly  considered,  is  not  marked  by  any  peculiarity  of  inflection  in 
the  noun  itself     For  the  most   part,  it  a  designated  i>\  prepositions 

and  the  construct  state  of  the  preceding  noun,  §3:32.  Hut  the  plural 
and  dual  endings,  the  suffixes,  and  whatever  increases  the  original 
ground-form  of  the  noun,  and  shifts  the  place  of  its  tone,  occasion  a 
variety  of  changes-  in  the  vowel-points  and  in  the  forms  of  nouns, 
which  may  not  unaptly  be  called  declensions. 

§  316.  Classes  of  Noum  in  respect  to  origin.  Nouns,  like  verbs, 
are  either  primitive  or  derivative.  Those  of  the  latter  class  are  di- 
vided into  verbals*  or  those  derived  from  verbs  ;  and  denominatives,  or 
those  derived  from  riouns.  Three  classes  of  nouns  may  therefore  be 
reckoned. 

(a)  Nouns  primitive  ;  which  are  principally  those  that  designate 
animals,  plants,  metals,  numbers,  members  of  the  human  and  animal 
body,  and  some  of  the  great  objects  of  the  natural  world.  But  among 
the  names  of  all  these,  are  some  of  verbal  derivation. 

JVote.  The  form  of  primitive  nouns  is  not  distinguished  from  that  of  derived  ones.  They  are 
treated,  in  their  inflections,  in  the  same  manner  as  if  they  were  derived.  Only  a  knowledge  of  ety- 
mology, therefore,  can  enable  the  student  to  determine  whether  a  noun  is  primitive  or  derivative; 
and  in  some  cases,  it  may  be  doubtful  to  the  best  etymologist,  whether  a  noun  belongs  to  the  first, 
second,  or  third  class  above  specified. 

(6)  Nouns  derivative  ;  which  are  altogether  the  most  numerous 
class.  Very  many  of  them  appear  to  be  derived  either  from  Parti- 
ciples, or  from  the  Inf.  mood.  The  former  more  commonly  denote  the 
subject  or  object  of  action  or  passion,  {nomen  agentis  vel  patientis); 
the  latter  denote  action  or  passion,  {nomen  actionis  vel  passionis). 
The  first  class  are  named  concretes,  being  used  to  designate  some 
being  or  thing;  the  second  obstructs,  denoting  simply  action  or  pas- 
sion.    But  to  this  principle,  there  are  very  many  exceptions. 

(c)  Nouns  denominative;  which  are  nouns  derived  from  other 
nouns,  either  primitive  or  verbal.  E.  g.  2"i2  a  vine-dresser,  from  the 
primitive  D"ns  a  vineyard;  "p'-li;  eastern,  from  the  verl  al  2*ip.  the  east. 
The  forms  of  these,  resemble  those  of  the  other  classes. 

[Note.  Denominatives  are  usually  formed,  (l)  by  adding  to  verbals 
the  masc.  termination,  ■>_  or  the  fern.  rr_ ;  e.  g.  WU  six,  ^SJH  sixth  ; 
"QSOE  a  Moabite,  from  UOJOj  ^KniD1;  an  Israelite,  from  -N")'^  ,  etc. 
Several  adjectives,  also,  are  formed  in  this  manner ;  as  '■■J32  ,  fem. 
!"P"p3  strange,  from  13:  a  stranger ;  ^z'vCfc  Jirst,  from  pD*lj2 ,   etc. 

(2)  By  adding  n,,_ ,  which  is  usually  of  the  fem.  gender.  E.  g. 
wJO  princeps,  nv£Nn  principium.  Words  of  this  form  are  sometimes 
defectively  written,  as  nx1^  for  FVUpX . 

(3)  Rarely  by  adding  the  terminations  n_  n_,  \_  and  ^_ .  E.  g. 
i-p-\N  a  lion,  from  "|-)N  ;  n»«  fire-offering,  from  UN  ;  "lr"'3  a  deceiver, 
from  j"1^ ;  l"|T:2  a  treasury,  from  T?.\ . 


§§317 320.     NOUNS    COMPOSITC  AND  PROPER  J    GENDER.         110 


§  317.  Nouns  composite  and  proper.  Composite  noons  are  very 
rarely  found  in  Hebrew,  except  in  proper  names.  A  few  however 
occur,  which  are  made  up  of  two  nouns,  or  of  a  noun  and  a  particle. 
E.  g.  nia*2Z  =ma  jr^  shade  of  death  ;  "ri'"r2  worthless,  from  *r2  not 
and  h?2  profit- 

Note  1.  Proper  names,  in  their  formation,  follow  the  general  an- 
alogy of  verbals  as  given  in  §  21G.  b.  Very  many  of  them  are  com- 
posite, and  consist  usually  of  two  nouns,  or  of  a  noun  and  a  verb. 
E.  g.  "pJEPSa  Benjamin,  or  son  of  my  right  hand;  D^p^in"]  Jehoiakim, 
or  Jehovah  will  exalt. 

Note  2.  To  the  first  word  in  composite  proper  names,  a  Yodh  is 
usually  added,  as  rJOnss  Gabriel  or  man  of  God,  from  "133  and  rN ;; 
sometimes  a  Vav,  as  ^KlftiS  Samuel  or  name  of  God,  from  D'S  and  bx  . 
The  name  of  God,  either  bx  or  mr,*  ,  forms  the  beginning  or  the  ter- 
mination of  a  great  multitude  of  Hebrew  proper  names.] 

§  318.  Gender  of  nouns.  The  Hebrew  has  only  two 
genders,  viz.  the  masculine  and  feminine.  These  are  dis- 
tinguished sometimes  by  the Jbrm,  and  sometimes  by  the 
signification,  ol  words. 

§319.  I.  Gender  distinguished  by  form,  (a)  In  gene- 
ral, nouns  arc  masculine  which  end  in  one  of  the  original 
radical  letters  of  the  word. 

(b)  The  feminine  is  distinguished  by  adding  to  the  mas- 
culine, cither  m_  ,  P.  P_  or  r __  . 

E.  g  "p.".  a  king,  ttSlriO  a  queen;  KSi]  a  sinner,  nftKDh  sin;  and 
^^SfS  a  Hebrew  man,  n"1"!^'  a  Hebrew  woman  ;  *!1t3p ,  fern.  fi"lbjP  in- 
cense ;  3>*vto,  fern.  DV~pl2  acquaintance.  The  fern.  n_  is  appropriate 
to  words  with  Gutturals  at  the  end,  §  141. 

[Note  1.  The  following  terminations  of  the  feminine  actually  occur, 
but  they  are  rare;  viz.  (l)  N_ ;  as  N:irr,  for  n:ip,  §  122.  J.  (2)  n_: 
as  PHBT,  poetic  for  n*lHT.  {$)  n_  with  the  proper  vowel  Pattahh, 
and  with  the  tone  on  the  ultimate;  as  n^pa  emerald,  nNp  pelican,  Vs. 
102:  6. 

Note  2.  The  endings  n"1-  and  PJl  are  also  feminine.  They  arc 
contracted  forms,  for  the  full  fern.  rP_  and  flj— ,  neither  of  which  the 
language  permits,  §  120.  c] 

§  320.  II.  Gender  distinguished  by  signification,  (a) 
Nouns  which  designate  objects  such  as  the  following,  are 
masculine,  though  thew  hare  a  lorn,  termination. 


120  §§321,322.  nouns; 


(1)  Names  of  men  ;  as  ni^T  Judah.  (2)  Offices  of  men  ;  a1-  r~t 
a  governor.  (:l)  Nations;  as  rfllrr^  the  nation  of  Judah.  (t)  Kivers; 
as  !"T;?2N  Amana. 

(b)  Nouns  which  designate  objects  such  as  the  follow- 
ing, are  feminine,  though  thev  have  a  mnsc.  termination. 

(I)  Names  of  women  ;  as  brj*n  Rachel.  (2)  Office  or  relations  of 
women;  as  CN  mother.  (3)  Countries;  as  TI1SK  Assyria.  (4)  Towns  ; 
as  ~n£  Tyre.  (5)  Female  lieasts  ;  as  "pntf  a  she-ass.  (6)  Members 
of  the  body  by  nature  double  ;  as  "jTN  the  ear. 

Note  1.  The  same  word  may  be  masc.  in  one  meaning,  and  fern, 
in  another;  as  MTUr  ,  Judah  or  the  Jews,  masc;  but  rmrP  ,  the 
country  qfJudea,  feminine. 

Note  2.  There  are  some  nouns  which  are  feminine,  although  des- 
titute of  any  distinctive  sign  of  this  gender,  either  in  form  or  signifi- 
cation ;  as  "1N2  a  well;  133  a  talent,  etc.  These  can  be  learned  only 
from  practice. 

§321.  jXouns  of  common  gender.  A  considerable  num- 
ber of  nouns  are  of  common  gender.  Such  are  generally 
the  names  of  beasts,  birds,  metals,  etc. 

Note.  1.  These  nouns  are  mostly  masculine  as  to  form.  Some  of 
them  are  more  commonly  employed  as  masc.  nouns ;  others  more  fre- 
quently as  feminine.  These  can  be  learned  only  from  practice. 
What  is  of  the  neuter  gender  in  the  western  languages,  is  generally 
designated  in  Hebrew  by  the  fern.;  as  m^  r>3,  daughter  of  'lyre,  i.  e. 
city  of  Tyre. 

Note  2.  Nouns  of  the  dual  number  are  universally  of  the  common 
gender. 

§  322.  Gender  of  the  plural.  In  the  plural,  the  appear- 
ance of  nouns  as  to  gender  is  in  many  cases  dubious.  A 
considerable  number  of  masc.  nouns  form  their  plural  as 
if  they  were  feminine;  while  many  fern,  nouns  have  plu- 
rals of  the  masc.  form,  §  327.  1. 

E.  g.  masc.  3N  a  father,  plur.  rn^tt  .  Fern.  ~'6f[  wheat,  plur.  BPBrl 
etc. 

Note.  The  gender  of  the  plural,  let  the  form  be  as  it  may,  is,  with 
few  exceptions,  regulated  by  that  of  the  singular.  Some  words  exhi- 
bit both  the  masc.  and  km.  forma  of  the  plural ;  but  the  gender  of  both 
forms  is  the  same,  viz.  it  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  singular. 

[§  323.  Formation  of  feminine  nouns.  The  addition  of  the  fem. 
terminations  (§  319.  b)  to  the  masc.  forms,  usually  occasions  some 


§323.  nouns;  gender.  121 


change  in  the  vowels  of  the  masculine,  hecause  these  terminations  af- 
fect the  tone-syllable  of  the  ground-form.  E.  g.  (a)  1 .  The  ending  n_ 
draws  down  the  accent,  and  consequently  causes  the  penult  vowel  of 
themasc.  form,  if  mutable,  to  be  dropped  ;  §132.133.  (2)  In  nouns  etc. 
if  the  original  word  has  more  than  one  syllable,  and  is  of  the  form  of 
Dec.  VII.,  the  final  vowel  is  dropped.  (3)  Such  norms  as  Dec.  VIII., 
in  case  they  have  a  long  vowel,  exchange  it  for  a  short  one  with 
Dag.  forte,  or,  in  case  this  is  excluded,  substitute  an  equivalent  for  it, 
§  111.  §  112.  (4)  Masc.  Segholales  receiving  !l_  fern.,  assume  the  suf- 
fix-form in  order  to  take  it ;  see  Par.  Dec.  VI.  (5)  Nouns  of  declen- 
sion IX.  drop  their  final  n  and  its  preceding  vowelj  in  order  to  receive 
the  fern.  tt-.  All  these  principles  are  apparent  in  the  following  ta- 
ble of  formations,  in  which  those  nouns  not  accompanied  by  a  common 
numeral  mark,  form  the  fern,  by  the  mere  addition  of  the  fern.  n_  to 
the  masculine  ;  those  marked  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  correspond  in  their  forma- 
tion to  the  rules  given  in  1,  2,  etc.  above.  The  Roman  numerals 
mark  the  declensions   to  which   the  masc.  nouns  respectively  belong. 

Pec.        Masc.  Fem.  Dec.     Masc.  Fein.  Dec.     Masc.  Fern. 


I. 

DID 

riDTO 

VI. 

m 

^3ba(4) 

n 

tVt9 

■pnftn 

nsinfin 

9$\ 

^■2  (4)  VIII. 

on 

nan  (3) 

II. 

KXi'a 

rt«xija 

^;h 

man  (4) 

rl 

*»=  (3) 

III. 

bv-u 

nWi*  (i) 

b$\ 

*\$  (4) 

n 

w?  (3) 

pina 

rtjpina(l) 

!?3& 

Tib6«  (4) 

ph 

rtgtj(s) 

DiJtr 

rroixsj  (l) 

P!" 

*&?*(*) 

T3 

-T3  (3) 

ima 

n^-aO) 

-!•% 

rtbis  (4) 

n 

rna(3) 

DV.a 

tt»"'p.»(l) 

vk 

rtn-»a  (4) 

1JP 

rt-ito  (3) 

IV. 

D?,l 

*»B?(0 

VII 

•  Tl^ 

nnnfc»(2)  ix. 

ncr 

rt»:(6) 

V. 

m 

wjhCO 

ijsP*> 

!"Hj?ia  (2)        W$"|J3 

nN-)o(5) 

W: 

— :(<*) 

2^t 

ftyi 

Note.  As  nouns  of  Dec.  V.  not  unfrequently  imitate  those  of  Dec. 
VI.  in  their  const,  form  (see  Par.),  so  among  the  feminities  derived 
from  ground  forms  belonging  here,  are  some  that  imitate  the  fem.  of 
Dec.  VI.  E.  g.  *\11 ,  fem.  na-P  ;  ban  ,  fem.  rtb3>\  For  the  form  pfa» 
fem.  rtjjina  ,  under  Dec.  III.,  comp.  §  127.  Except.  1.  §  270.  b.  1. 

(b)  The  ending  n  makes  no   change   in  the  original  word  ;  e.  g. 

6ttoi3 ,  nNtah  ;  ''"ja*,  nSas ,  etc. 

(c)  The  Segholate  endings,  n_  n_  ,  (l)  Affect  the  penult  vowel, 
in  the  like  manner  with  -_  ;  see  above,  a.  (2)  They  change  the  ulti- 
mate mutable  vowel ;  according.to  the  rule  in  §  142.  d.  (3)  If  the  final 
vowel  be  impure,  they  subsitute  a  pure  one  in  its  room  ;  e.  g.  lL^st  , 
(n«*jji  ;  tiibv ,  rn$?tt) ;  nunn: ,  nun:  ;  -psa  ,  tl^l ,  etc. ;  see  §  127 
Except. 

16 


I9B  §§324 — :t-2i'».   MH.Ns,    FORMATION  OF  TBE  PLURAL. 

Note.  The  Fem.  Segholate  form  is  usually  cboMO  Utt  1  h<n  const. 
state  ;  while  n_  is  more  common  in  the  nbs.  state.  In  the  fem.  Inf. 
and  Part.,  the  Segholate  ending  is  the  usual  one.  Nouns  in  Dec.  VI. 
IX.  are  not  susceptible  of  fern.  Seghol.  endings.  Nouns  in  Decs.  VIII. 
omit  the  Dagh.  in  the  doubled  letter,  when  they  assume  the  Seghol. 
form ;  e.  g.  TT&XS  ,  rv«s*J£ .] 

§  324.  Formation  of  the  plural.  The  Hebrew,  like 
the  Greek,  has  three  numbers,  viz.  the  singular,  dual,  and 
plural.  The  plurals  of  masc.  and  fem.  nouns  are  usually, 
but  not  always,  distinguished  by  appropriate  forms. 

§  325.  Plural  masculine.  The  plural  of  masc.  nouns  is 
formed,  (a)  Usually,  by  annexing  to  the  singular,  (l)  C^—. 
(2)  2  simply,  in  some  words  ending  in  >1_ . 

E.  g.  (1)  DTD,  plur.  tTDIO.  (2)  "133  ,  C1-)^:  ;  also  as  ^  ,  D*lb 
But  the  plur.  ending,  as  might  be  expected,  is  sometimes  written  de- 
fective ;  as  izpprri,  D:"1:!?  idem,  §  63. 

{b)  The  unusual  forms  of  the  plural,  are  (a)  "p.—  ;  e.  g.  ^b,  plur. 
■pDbs,  Prov.  31=  3.  {b)  \_  ;  e.g.  ]1>rj,  ^iVh,  Jer.  22:  14.  (c) 
Perhaps  ",_  ;  e.  g.  ]X3 ,  ^iQ  ,  Ps.  45 :  9.  The  forms  a  and  6,  coincide 
with  the  Chald.  and  Syr.  plurals. 

§  326.  Plural  feminine.  The  plural  of  fem.  nouns  is 
formed,  («)  By  changing  the  terminations  n_,P__,  D_  of 
the  fem.  sing,  into  m,  and  by  corresponding  vowel-changes. 

E.g.  nnin,  plur.  ni-nn,-  fi*i\«,  plur.  roiae*  ;  nyru,plur. 
ni"30  .  The  n  of  the  fem.  ending  sing,  is,  in  a  few  cases,  retained  in 
the  plural,  as  if  it  were  a  radical ;  e.  g.  masc.  in  ,  fem.  rib~, ,  fem.  plur. 
rnnrr. 

(b)  By  annexing  m  simply  to  those  feminines,  which 
in  the  singular  have  a  masc.  form ;  as  ")JSG ,  plur.  rniNS , 
§  320.  Note  2. 

(f)  By  changing  rP_  into  IT)*1-,  as  nh"C?,  plur. 
rh*-Q?;   and  rfl  into  ni*_ ,  as    rfirfjjO,  plur.  r'Tlh'Z. 

Note.  The  plurals  under  c,  appear  to  be  derived  from  obsolete 
forms  of  the  sing,  in  n*_  and  rp_  .  Nouns  of  these  classes  sometimes 
also  torm  their  plural  after  the  usual  manner;  as  ITCH,  plur.  D*n,,:)i 
and  nimsri;  ffl3T ,  plur.  C\-i"T .  The  plural  ending  of  the  fem.  form, 
also,  is  sometimes  written  defective ;  as  ri'rp  for  nV:p,  etc. 


§§327 — 320.  nouns;  formation  of  the  dual.  123 


[§  327.  Heteroclites.  Thus  we  may,  in  the  manner  of  the  gram- 
marians, name  those  nouns  which  specially  depart  from  usual  analogy. 
They  are  of/we  classes.     These  are, 

(l)  Such  as  are  masc,  and  yet  have  plurals  of  the  fern,  form  and 
masc.  gender,  e.  g.  3N  ,  n^ai*  ,  §  322.  and  the  Note.  (2)  Such  as  have 
two  forms  of  the  plural,  while  the  gender  of  both  follows  that  of  the 
singular,  e.g.  ~:u;  fern,  a  year,  plur.  D^.tfj  and  m:-i5  fem.,  §322. 
Note.  (3)  Some  nouns  have  only  a  plur.  form ;  e.  g.  W2Z  ,  the  face. 
(4)  Some  are  found  only  in  the  singular;  e.  g.  PpS  /ow/,  S|B  children, 
etc.  These  have  a  collective  and  plur.  sense,  as  well  as  a  sing.  one. 
(b)  Some  words  exhibit  (like  many  in  the  Arabic)  o  pluralis  plura- 
lium,  i.  e.  a  plural  formed  by  a  second  plur.  additional  to  the  first  one  ; 
e.  g.  n£3  a  high  place,  plur.  niQ3  ,  plur.  pluralium  STiTEa  .] 

§  328.  Formation  of' the  dual.  This  is  usually  formed, 
by  adding  the  termination  D\_  ("P-)  to  the  forms  of  the 
sing. ;  e.  g.  (a)  To  masculines  without  change,  (b)  To 
feminines  in  H_ ,  after  changing  the  final  H  into  P . 

E.  g.  (a)  En"*,  t'biv  (6)  rt3-P,  trn3-p .  In  nouns  of  Dec. 
VI.,  the  dual  ending  is  appended  to  the  suff.  form  ;  as  b^H. ,  &*biH, 
see  Par. 

Note.  The  dual  endings  appear,  in  some  few  cases,  to  suffer  con- 
traction ;  e.g.  "jn"-  for  j"?rn ,  Qns-T  for  S^ro-p ;  *y*  for  Q?V  . 
These  contracted  forms  are  limited  mostly  to  proper  names. 

§  329.  Use  of  the  dual.  It  is  used  principally  to  de- 
signate such  objects,  as  are  double  cither  by  nature  or  by 
custom. 

[E.g.  t3^~^  (he  two  hands;  t3")?y.3  a  pair  of  shoes,  etc.  The  names 
of  members  of  the  human  body,  which  by  nature  are  double,  have  al- 
so a  plural  as  well  as  dual  form;  but  the  dual  is  generally  taken  in  a 
literal,  and  the  plural  in  a  figurative  sense  ;  as  ETC  5  hands,  rhB3  han- 
dles. 

Note  1.  In  a  few  instances,  the  dual  form  stands,  instead  of  the 
plural,  for  a  greater  number  than  two.  E.  g.  tn*~:3  U31Zp  six  wingi . 
E3")e.'JJ  "iJblp  three  teeth.  It  hardly  needs  to  be  remarked,  that  tho  dual  is 
of  course  essentially  plural,  requiring  a  plural  verb,  adjective  etc  In 
some  cases,  it  is  difficult  to  show  the  reason  of  the  dual  form;  as 
fia^rlX  mid-day.  etc.     Perhaps  it  is  intensive. 

Note  2.  The  words  B^'jj  heavens,  and  dyi  waters,  though  ap- 
parently dual,  are  used  as  plurals.] 


124     §§  330 — 333.  nouns  ;  gender  or  the  dual — declension. 

§  330.  Gender  of  the  dual.  It  is  erf  common  gender  ; 
and  it  is  found  only  among  nouns,  and  not  among  adjec- 
tives or  participles. 

§  331.     The  dual  ending  is  sometimes  annexed  to  the  plural  ;  e.  g. 

niEin  walls,  dual  Q^nan  two  walls  etc.  Comp.  §  327.  5. 


DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 


§  332.  Construct  state.  The  Hebrew  has  no  cases,  in 
the  sense  in  which  we  speak  of  cases  in  Latin  and  Greek. 
But  when  two  nouns  come  together,  the  second  of  which 
is  to  be  translated  as  a  Genitive,  this  relation  is  indicated, 
contrary  to  the  usual  custom  of  other  languages,  by  some 
change  in  the  jirst  noun  (if  it  be  susceptible  of  change) 
instead  of  the  second.  The  first  noun  so  situated,  is  said 
to  be  in  regimen  or  in  the  construct  state  ;  while  any  noun 
not  thus  placed  before  a  Genitive,  is  said  to  be  in  the  ab- 
solute state. 

Two  nouns,  in  such  a  relation,  are  supposed  to  be  uttered  nearly  as  if  they  were  one  word;  for 
which  reason  the  first  noun  is  usually  contracted  in  the  utterance,  (if  it  be  capable  of  contraction), 
so  that  the  stress  of  voice  may  be  transferred  to  the  second. 

§  333.  The  consonants  of  the  ground-form  or  absolute 
state,  are  modified  in  regimen  or  the  construct  state  as 
follows ;   viz. 

(a)  In  all  classes  of  masc.  nouns  sing.,  the  const,  is  like 
the  abs.  form  as  to  its  consonants. 

(b)  Feminines  singular  in  H_  ,  change  this  ending  into 
ri- ;  as  FttTV],  const,  n&tT  •  Other  feminines  singular 
suffer  no  change  of  their  consonants. 

(t)  The  plur.  ending  D1*--  and  the  dual  C\L  become 
•L  ;  as  C^DIO ,  const.  WO  ;  fi^  ,  const,  vjj . 

(d)  Plurals  in  Dl  suffer  no  change  in  their  consonants, 
in  the  construct  state. 

Remark.  The  vowels  of  words  are  also  affected  by  regimen  or  con- 
struct state;  see  §  341  seq. 


§§334 — 336.  nouns  ;  suffix  state.  I2fi 

§  334.  Suffix  stale.  This  is  that  form  of  nouns,  to  which 
are  appended  or  suffixed  fragments  of  pronouns,  equivalent 
in  signification  to  our  pronominal  adjectives  in  En^lisli. 

E.g.  DTD  a  horse,  with  suffix,  "iOTD  his  horse,  etc.  So  Jsip  voice, 
i?p  vox  ejus. 

Note.  Pronouns  or  fragments  of  pronouns  thus  suffixed,  may  be 
considered  as  equivalent,  in  general,  to  nouns  in  the  Gen.  case,  and  as 
putting  the  noun  to  which  they  are  suffixed  into  a  kind  of  regimen,  or 
const,  state.  Frequently  the  suff.  state  requires  the  same  vowel-chan- 
ges as  the  const,  state,  but  not  always;  as  may  be  seen  by  the  Para- 
digm of  nouns,  where  both  states  are  exhibited. 

§  335.  Most  of  these  suffixes,  (like  those  of  verbs  § 
304  seq.),  cause  the  tone  of  the  word  to  which  thev  are 
appended  to  be  moved  forward,  and  of  course  produce  a 
change  in  the  vowel-points;   see  §  129  seq. 

§  336.  Noun-suffixes  (like  those  of  verbs  §  307  seq.) 
have  generally  three  different  forms,  adapted  to  the  end- 
ing or  number  of  the  word  to  which  they  are  appended. 

(a)  The  most  simple  form  of  the  suffixes  is  that  in  which  they  be- 
gin with  a  consonant,  and  are  appended  to  nouns  singular  ending  with 
a  vowel. 

(6)  To  the  simple  form  of  some  of  the  suffixes,  is  prefixed  a  union- 
vowel,  in  which  shape  they  are  appended  to  nouns  singular  ending 
with  a  consonant. 

(c)  The  third  form  of  the  suffixes  is  peculiar  to  nouns  plural. 
Here  all  the  suffixes  take  a  union-vowel ;  and  all  of  them,  except  that 
of  the  first  person  singular,  insert  a  Yodh  between  the  union-vowel 
and  the  suffix. 

[The  following  table  exhibits  the  suffixes  as  appended  to  the  various  forms  of  nouns  ;    lb 
column  (fl),  containing  those  which  are  attached  to  DOUOl  singular  ending   with  ■  roirrl  ;  Hi 
cond  (A),  those  which  are  attached  to  nouns  singular  cm]\u«  with  n  consonant  ;   the  third    ■ 
hibiting  the  suffixes  as  they  are  attached  to  nouns  plural.     Bevotal  BMUIial  formi  of  suffixes  are 
mihjoined. 


i-2<; 


V)  336.    NOITNS  ;    SUFFIX  STATE. 


(«) 


«Df. 


Pimple  form 


] .        my  \^. 

2  ....  %  ?J,    q. 
2f.     thy  <] 

3  in.  /lis  Vltl- 
3  f.    for  nl 


PI.  1, 


our 


2  m.  your 

2  f.     ?/o?/r 

3  m.  their 
3  f.    //iezV 


13- 
CD 

on 


Wild  un.  vowel,  etc. 


1    3* 

i  ri  "inl 

id! 
P. 

D_  poet.  I'D-- 


SufT.  to  noun«  plural. 


V-  i_  poet.  wl. 

"\- 

P.V. 
dpp_ 


poet.  ift^_ 


Note  1.  Unusual  suffixes  to  nouns  singular.  Sing.  2  masc.  FllD-  ,  Ps. 
139:  5;  riD-  ,  Ps.  10:  14.  2  fern.  sing.  f-%  Ezek.  5:  12;  }_,  Ezek. 
23:  28.  3  fern.  J1_  without  Mappiq,  Num.  15:  28  ;  N_  ,  Ezek.  36:  5 
forn_.  Plural  1  pers.  wl ,  Ruth  3:  2.  Job  22:  20.  2  fern.  n:D  ; 
Ezek.  23:  48.     3  masc.  Dn_,  2  Sam.  23:  6.     3  fem.  rtDH^   1  K.  7:  37, 

Note  2.  Unusual  suffixes  to  nouns  plural.  Sing.  2  masc.  "3-,  Nah. 
2:  14.  3  masc.  th,  Ps.  116:  12,  Chaldaic.  3  fem.  MrK- ,  Ezek.  41: 
15,  for!-rl.  P/ur.  2  fem.  n:?.%. ,  Ezek.  13:20;  3  masc.  nan\-  , 
Ezek.  40:  16;  3  fem.  n:;^- ,  Ezek.  1:  11;  all  with  n_  paragogic. 

Note  3.  The  suff.  '_  ,  joined  to  a  noun  ending  with  * ,  usually  co- 
alesces with  it;  e.g.  '13  a  nation,  ^ia  my  nation;  but  sometimes  as 
"^D  my  fruit. 

Note  4.  The  sing,  forms,  3  pers.,  !|i"r_  !"!_  are  appended  to  nouns 
of  Dec.  IX.  nal-  is  parag.  for  fi_,  §  125.  c. 

Note  4.  Anomalies,  (l)  Yodh  in  the  plur.  suff.  is  sometimes  omit- 
ted in  writing;  as  "in"  for  T,2")" ,  in—"  for  irparn  ,  Gen.  4  :  4. 
T^l"  for  V~)3~ ,  etc.  (2)  Sometimes  a  sinsf.  suff.  is  attached  to  a 
plur.  noun;  Vns  for  ^ny  ,  Ps.  132:  12;  ~ns"3  forVn.273,  Deut  28: 
59;  laniaK  for  arpnhs*  ,  etc.  (3)  Vice  versa,  plur.  suff.  are  some- 
times appended  to  the  singular  ;  e.  g.  SpIJShR  for  *fr»*]?rTFj,  "]\"|i33  , 
thy  building,  for  *frp33 ,  Inf.  noun  from  r.:2  ,  Ezek.  16:  31.  Nos.  2 
and  3,  are  doubtless  oversights  of  transcribers. 


§§  337 — 342.  nouns  ;  vowel  changes  in  declension,  etc.   127 

Remark.  The  suffixes,  d3 ,  ]D ,  tan,  ]n,  are  called  grave,  be- 
cause they  always  bring  down  the  tone  upon  them.  With  nouns  sin- 
gular, they  take  no  union-vowel.  With  nouns  plural  they  have  one, 
but  do  not  allow  it  to  take  the  lone.  In  all  other  cases,  without  excep- 
tion, the  union-vowel  takes  the  tone  upon  itself.  The  sing.  suff.  "^ 
takes  the  tone  when  preceded  by  a  consonant ;  and  loses  it  when  pre- 
ceded by  a  vowel.     Other  suffixes  are  called  light.] 

§  .'337.  Feminines  in  Jl_ ,  in  order  to  receive  suffixes, 
change  the  final  H  into  n. 

§  338.  Nouns  dual  take  the  suffixes  of  nouns  plural. 

§  339.  The  plural  and  dual,  in  order  to  receive  suf- 
fixes, drop  the  appropriate  endings  of  the  abs.  state,  and 
take  the   suffixes  in   their  place. 

E.g.  "I^T,  plur.  La^tl?,  with  suff.  T^"-  So  S\2 ,  dual  &?&§, 
with  suff.  T^e?. 

§  340.  Notes  on  Par.  XXIV.  This  Par.  shews  the  manner  in  which 
the  suffixes  are  attached  to  masc.  and  fern,  nouns.  No.  I.  exhibits  the 
usual  suffixes  in  connection  with  a  masc.  noun,  ending  with  a  conso- 
nant. A  fern,  noun,  terminating  in  a  consonant,  receives  suffixes  in  the 
same  way.  No.  II.  exhibits  the  manner,  in  which  suffixes  are  attach- 
ed to  nouns  ending  with  a  vowel  or  quiescent  letter.  The  noun  3N 
in  its  abs.  state  ends,  indeed,  in  a  consonant,  but  it  is  in  this  respect  ir- 
regular. The  const,  and  suff.  state  has  Yoilh,  as  if  from  a  form  "^N 
ending  with  a  Quiescent.  The  suffixes  are  of  course  of  the  simple 
form,  i.  e.  without  a  union-vowel.  The  plur.  of  2tf  is  rniMJ ;  which 
takes  suffs.  like  the  plur.  of  min . 

No.  III.  exhibits  suffixes  in  connection  with  a  fern.  noun.  For  fem- 
inines in  n_  and  n_  with  suffixes,  see  §  390  and  Dec.  XIII.  in  the 
Paradigm  of  nouns. 

Voioel  changes  in  declension  of  Nouns. 

§  341.  As  Regimen,  and  the  suffix  state,  usually  either 
change  the  tone  of  words,  or  occasion  contraction  in  the 
method  of  uttering  them,  it  follows,  of  course,  that  the 
vowels  must  be  affected  by  them.  Hut  in  almost  every 
case  of  this  nature,  only  the  ultimate  -and  penult  vowels  arc 
affected. 

Fur  tlio  changes  in  the  Consonants,  sec  $  333. 


138  $§343,344  n<>i  \- ;  vdwu.  eiiAiraBi. 

§  342.  Laws  of the  vowel  changes*  (a)  When  any  ac- 
cession beginning  with,  a  vowel,  by  means  of  declension  or 
suffixes,  moves  the  tone  forward  one  place,  the  penult  mu- 
table vowel  of  the  ground  form  falls  away  ;  m  nouns,  etc. 
of  (he   form  of  Dec.  VII.,  the  ultimate,  vowel  (alls  away. 

E.  g.  -O'}  ,  plnr.  E^-o-  ;  with  suff.  "nM  ,  13*337  5  an(*  so  uitn 
all  the  suffs.  which  are  either  monosyllabic,  or  being  disyllabic,  have 
the  tone  on  the  penult.  Examples  of  Dec.  VII.,  where  the  final  vow- 
el falls  away,  are  a;ii» ,  ETq-iM,  "Sri*  ,  »3*iK,  etc.  See  Par.  of 
nouns,  Dec.  VII. 

Note  1.  Nouns  of  Dec.  VI.  i.e.  Segholates,  inasmuch  as  their  abs. 
form  is  an  artificial  one  (§  141),  assume  their  original  ground-form,  in 
order  to  receive  suffixes,  or  to  make  the  dual ;  e.g.  abs.  -T^O ,  with 
suff.  "^btt  ,  dual  E3*3l?a  . 

(b)  When  the  tone  is  moved  forward  one  place,  by  a 
syllabic  accession  beginning  with  a  consonant,  and  when  the 
word  is  in  the  const,  state,  the  penult  vowel  is  dropped, 
and  the  ultimate  usually  shortened. 

E.g.  (l)  By  syllabic  accession,  viz.  the  grave  suffixes  (§  336. 
Rem.),  as  ll'T,  Qp-157.  (2)  In  the  const,  state;  as  tSTj^R  -07, 
the  word  of  God.  But  in  Dec.  VI.,  the  const,  state  remains  unchang- 
ed, on  account  of  the  artificial  form  of  the  word  (supra  Note  1).  In 
Dec.  VII.  words  in  the  const,  state  often,  (but  not  always),  remain  un- 
changed ;  see  Par.  of  Dec.  VII. 

Note  2.  The  suff.  "^  allows  of  two  different  forms  in  the  noun  to 
which  it  is  appended  ;  e.g.  (l)  It  shortens  the  ultimate  vowel;  as 
C3UJ  name,  1\nv?  thy  name.  (2)  It  places  it  in  a  simple  syllable,  by 
combining  the  final' letter  of  the  root  in  a  syllable  with  itself,  and  of 
course  requires  the  previous  vowel  to  be  long;  as  "~ia-  thy  word. 

(c)  When  the  tone  is  moved  forward   two   places,  and 

in  the  const,  state  of   plur.  nouns,    both   the    ultimate  and 

penult  mutable  vowels  fall   away. 

E.g.  (l)  By  plur.  grave  suffixes;  as  SaD""^**.  (2)  By  const, 
state,  as  ta&Tt  ^"y^l  the  words  of  the  people.  For  the  mode  of  supply- 
ing new  vowels,  see  §  137  seq. 

§  343.   All   fern,  nouns,  having   forms  like    masc.   ones, 

are    declined    in   the   same   manner.      Besides    the    usual 

changes  in  the  penult  vowel,  as  in  masc.  nouns,  feminines 


§§  344 — .347.  nouns  ;  dec.  I.  II.  129 

in  n_,  (l)  Before  a  surf,  beginning  with  a  vowel,  change 
H  into  D.  (2)  Before  a  suff  beginning  with  a  consonant 
they  both  change  the  H  into  n,  and  shorten  the  vowel  im- 
mediately preceding  the  I"l . 

E.g.  (0  tt3"«p,  with  suff.  inSttJ.  (*)Cj^n3».  Am.  plurals  and 
Segholates  follow  the  analogy  of  masc.  nouns,  as  to  their  vowel  chan- 
ges. 

§  344.  General  rule  respecting  suffixes  attached  to  the 
plural,  (l)  In  masc.  nouns  plural, light  suffixes  are  attach- 
ed to  the  abs.  state  ;  grave  suffixes  (§  336.  Remark)  to 
the  const,  state.  (2)  In  Jem.  nouns  plural,  all  the  suffixes 
are  attached  to  the  const,  state. 


Characteristics  of  Declension. — Nouns  Masculine. 

§  345.  The  first  declension  of  nouns  comprehends  all, 
whether  monosyllabic  or  pollysyllabic,  whose  vowels  are 
all  immutable. 

E.  g.  1P9  ,  CDJ5  ,  *i2  ,  ans  ,  jVotf ,  nibJrJJ ,  etc.  The  single  circum- 
stance that  the  vowels  are  immutable,  marks  this  declension ;  not  the 
kind  of  vowels,  nor  the  number  of  syllables.  In  many  cases  it  is  easy 
to  decide  whether  the  vowels  are  immutable,  in  others  not.  Thus  in 
Vip ,  i^ab  etc.  the  vowels  are  obviously  immutable;  but  the  vowels 
in  2N3,  'Bis ,  etc.  can  be  known  to  be  immutable,  only  from  a  lexi- 
con, or  from  a  knowledge  of  etymology. 

346.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm,  (l)  As  the  vowels  are  immutable 
here,  additions  to  the  ground-form  of  course  occasion  no  change.  (2) 
Some  few  nouns  are  treated  sometimes  as  belonging  here,  and  at  other 
times  as  being  of  Dec.  II. ;  e.  g.  Ulnh  ,  const.  BJ^h  ,  Dec.  II. ;  but  plur. 
const.  v>P"jh  ,  Dec.  I.  The  Lexicons  note  such.  (3)  Some  few  nouns, 
having  i  in  the  abs.  state,  exchange  it  for  =1  in  some  of  the  derived 
forms;  see  Par.  Dec.  I.  c,  also  §  127.  Except.  1.  §  270.  6.  1.  In  the 
Par.,  d  presents  the  manner  in  which  nouns,  with  a  final  Guttural  and 
Pattahh  furtive,  are  declined. 

§  347.     The  second  declension  includes  nouns  with  final 
Qamets  or  Pattahh  pure  and  mutable,   whether   monosylla- 
bles, or  polysyllables  with  preceding  vowels  immutable. 
17 


130  §§  348—352.   nouns  ;  dec.  II.  III. 


§  348.  Changes.  In  the  const,  state  lingular,  before 
the  i^rave  suffixes,  and  sometimes  before  ~,  final  Qamets 
goes  into  Pattahh,  §  342.  b.  In  the  plural,  the  final  \o\v- 
el  falls  away  in  the  const,  state,  and  before  the  grave  suf- 
fixes, §  342.  c. 

Remarks,  (a)  The  permit  vowel  in  nouns  of  this  Dec,  being  im- 
mutable, of  course  is  not  affected  by  either  regimen  or  suffixes.  (6) 
Final  Qamets,  also,  in  many  words  is  immutable,  although  it  cannot  be 
distinguished  by  the  mere  appearance  ;  e.  g.  "w^ilO  ,  plur  const.  Tb-jiTS, 
etc.  of  Dec.  I.  Etymology  and  the  Lexicons  determine  such  cases,  (c) 
Some  nouns  with  final  Qamets  mutable,  belong  to  Dec.  VIII. ;  e.  g.  D^  , 
plur.  O'Va*  ,  etc.  The  mode  of  declension,  and  of  appending  sufls.  etc., 
enables  the  student  easily  to  distinguish  cases  of  this  nature. 

§  349.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm.  (1)  Under  a,  t^Q^  (for  CDE-)  is 
sui  generis.  So  from  T  hand,  we  have  both  D3"P  and  S2H"  .  (2)  Ca- 
ses like  c  and  d,  with  final  Pattahh,  are  rare.  Only  the  forms  of  the 
plural,  determine  the  declension  to  which  they  belong.  (3)  Some 
participles  in  Niphal,  from  verbs  tc,  seem  at  first  view  to  belong 
here;  but  they  drop  their  Qamets  in  the  plural,  e.g.  CNEE:  ,  in- 
stead of  C'Vt'JU;  ;  and  such  forms  of  participles  as  a\\)72l3: ,  probably 
have  a  ground-form  like  N2312: . 

§  350.  The  third  declension  comprises  all  nouns  which 
have  an  immutable  vowel  in  the  final  syllable,  and  Qamets 
or  Tseri,  pure  and  mutable,  in  the  penult. 

§  351.  Changes.  Out  of  the  abs.  state,  the  mutable 
vowel  of  the  penult  falls  away. 

Remarks,  (a)  Polysyllabic  nouns,  like  "pnV3  etc.,  belong  here,  as 
well  as  dissyllabic  ones.  (6)  In  many  cases,  the  penult  vowel  is  appa- 
rently mutable,  but  really  immutable  ;  e.  g.  i3","l2=~',^2  ,  Dec.  I.  The 
Lexicons,  and  etymology,  and  declension,  determine  cases  of  this  na- 
ture. Sometimes  they  are  quite  unexpected;  as  in  mba,  rflTH,  etc. 
with  Qamets  impure. 

§  352.  A'otes  on  the  Paradigm,  (l)  Such  nouns  as  the  examples 
in  d  and  e,  more  generally  omit  the  Daghesh  forte  in  the  const,  state, 
etc.  as  in  the  Par. ;  but  they  sometimes  retain  it,  as  the  nouns  in 
smaller  print  shew.  (2)  The  Seghol,  under  M  in  const,  "p^yn ,  is  oc- 
casioned by  the  Guttural ;  so  C,:S^y  ,  etc.  But  3?  also  takes  Hhireq 
short,  as  const.  firsts  ■  (3)  As  to  the  exchange  of  Hholem  for  Shu- 
req,  in/,  g,  see  §  346.  3.  §  127.  1.     (4)  In  g,  the  Tseri  under  N  in  the 


§§  353—357.   nouns  ;  dec.  IV.  V.  131 

sing,  is  immutable,  only  because  it  is  a  supposititious  euphonic  vowel, 
§  119.  d.  2;  the  plur.  is  regular.  The  word,  however,  can  scarcely 
be  considered  as  belonging  to  Dec.  111.  (5)  In  h  ,  the  short  form  in 
the  const,  state  (bia  gidhul)  is  rare,  §  127.  3.  It  is  used  only  before  a 
Maqqeph.  (6)  In  such  rare  cases,  as  "JTTTO  ,  plur.  □"^"HE  ,  it  is  proba- 
ble that  the  ground-form  of  the  plural  is  like  ]3"1>3.  (7)  A  very  few 
nouns  fluctuate  between  Dec.  I.  and  III.;  e.  g.  O^nO  ,  const.  O^D  ,  as 
of  Dec.  111.;  but  plur.  DWO,  as  of  Dec.  I. 

§  353.  The  fourth  declension  includes  all  dissyllabic 
nouns  with  Qamcts  pure  in  the  ultimate,  and  Qaniets  or 
Tseri  pure  in  the  penult. 

§  354,  Changes,  {a)  Out  oi'  the  ground-form,  the  pe- 
nult vowel  always  falls  away.  (b)  In  the  const,  sing.,  be- 
fore the  grave  suffixes,  and  sometimes  before  7j,  the  jinal 
Qamets  shortens  into  Pattahh,  §  342.  b.  (c)  In  the  plur. 
const.,  and  before  the  plur.  grave  suffixes,  both  the  vowels 
of  the  ground-form  fall  away,  §  342.  c;  and  then  a  new 
vowel,  viz.  Hhireq  or  Pattahh,  is  inserted,  §  137.  §  138. 

§  355.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm,  (l)  The  vowels  here,  as  in  other 
cases,  often  present  an  ambiguous  appearance.  The  Lexicons  will 
determine  their  nature.  (2)  The  examples  c,  rf,  e,  conform  to  the 
principles  of  pointing  Gutturals,  §  138.  §  139.  In  e,  however,  the 
const,  and  suff.  plur.  conform  to  the  analogy  of  other  consonants,  in 
their  first  vowel ;  as  the  Gutturals  sometimes  do.  (3)  So,  on  the 
contrary,  other  letters  sometimes  conform  to  the  usage  of  Guttunils; 
e.  g.  const,  and  suff.  plur.  of  C|:3 ,  in  f,  with  a  Pattahh  for  the  first 
vowel.  (4)  Nouns  of  the  form  g,  derivates  of  Nb  ,  belong  in  general 
to  Dec.  III.,  having  the  final  N_  immutable.  But  in  some  few  cases, 
like  N3£  ,  the  final  Qamets  is  dropped  in  the  const,  and  suff.  plural; 
in  which  case  they  are  of  Dec.  IV.  (5)  Cases  like  h  and  i,  with  a 
const.  Segholate  form,  are  not  frequent  in  this  declension  ;  yet  they 
occur  often  enough  to  demand  a  distinct  recognition. 

§  356.  The  fifth  declension  comprehends  dissyllabic 
nouns  with  Tseri  pure  in  the  ultimate,  and  (Jaunts  pure  in 
the  penult. 

§  357.  Changes.  The  vowel-chances  follow  the  anal- 
ogy of  Dec.  IV.,  even  in  the  const,  and  suffix  forms. 


Lfl|  $$  8W  <0>1.  noom;  dkc  V.  VI. 


$358.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm.  (1)  This  declension  might  have 
been  ranked  with  Dec.  IV. ;  but  1  conform  to  present  usage.  (2) 
The  Seghol  forms  of  the  sing1,  const,  in  c  and  d,  are  like  those  in  A, 
t,  of  Dec.  IV.  (3)  The  assumption  of  Pattabh,  in  the  const,  fcing., 
and  before  the  grave  suffixes,  etc.,  is  peculiar  to  this  declension,  and 
can  be  accounted  for  only  by  the  near  relation  of  the  vowels  Pattahh 
and  Seghol.  (4)  Derivates  of  nb  ,  like  MrO  ,  which  apparently  be- 
long here,  have  a  Tseri  immutable,  and  belong  to  Dec.  Hi.  The 
same  is  the  case  with  a  considerable  number  of  other  nouns,  and  par- 
ticipials;  e.g.  "jv ,  rjIP ,  *}•£*  ,  yslTT ,  ba.N  ,  HD'iJ ,  rVC/l),  etc.  all  of 
Dec.  111.,  having  their  Tseri  immutable,  (o)  A  few  words  fluctuate 
between  Dec.  III.  and  Dec.  V.;  e.g.  3j?3> ,  const.  3j5  2  ,  Dec.  III.; 
but  plur.  const.  ^p'J  ,  Dec.  V. 

§  359.  The  sixth  declerision  comprises  dissyllabic  nouns, 
which  have  the  tone  on  the  penult,  and  a  furtive  vowel  in 
the  final  syllable. 

In  other  words,  this  declension  includes  all  Segholate  nouns  of  two 
syllables;  excepting  a  few  nouns  and  Infinitives  with  the  fem.  Segho- 
late endings  n_  ,  n_ ,  which  belong  to  Dec.  XIII.  The  furtive  vowel 
of  the  final  syllable  is  Seghol,  Pattahh,  or  short  Hhireq,  §  141. 

Note.  All  Segholate  forms  are  factitious  and  merely  euphonic. 
They  appear  only  in  the  abs.  and  const,  states  of  the  singular;  for  all 
nouns  of  this  species,  when  they  receive  an  accession,  neglect  the  fur- 
tive vowel  and  develope  their  original  state,  which  is  a  monosyllable 
ending  with  two  consonants;  as  ?t^b ,  original  form  ^b^  ,  with  suff. 
isrE,  etc. 

§  360.  Changes,  (a)  The  const,  sing,  is  generally  the 
same  as  the  absolute.  (6)  The  suffixes  of  the  singular 
are  usually  appended  to  the  original  form  of  the  noun, 
(c)  The  plur.  absolute  assumes  a  form  like  that  of  nouns 
belonging  to  Dec.  IV.  (</)  In  the  plur.  const.,  and  before 
the  grave  suffixes,  the  penult  vowel  of  the  plur.  abs.  is 
dropped,  and  the  original  vowel  of  the  ground-form  in  the 
first  syllable  is  restored. 

Note.  The  plur.  ab$.  of  this  declension  is  quite  anomalous,  and 
cannot  be  derived  from  either  the  original  or  factitious  form  of  the 
singular,  by  any  of  the  usual  laws  of  declension. 

§  361.  The  original  vowel  of  the  monosyllabic  ground- 
forms    is    pure    in    all    cases,   and    mostly  short.        It    is 


§§  362— 365.  nouns  ;  dec  VI.  l:3:j 

either  of  the  A,  E,  or  O  class;  as  (l)  *&&•  (2)  "]£D , 
"1BD,  p5h-  (3)  P^H'  ^.K  '  PIP*  'n  the  factitious  forms, 
the  original  vowel  (if  not  of  the  O  class)  is  mostly  chang- 
ed to  Seghiol  by  the  influence  of  the  furtive  vowel,  §  142.  d. 

§  362.  Segholate  nouns  may  be  divided  into  three 
classes,  according  to  the  original  vowels  of  their  ground- 
forms  ;  and  may  be  called  Segholates  of  the  A,  E,  or  0 
class. 

§  363.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm  of  the  A  Class,  (l)  All  these,  hav- 
ing Pattahh  under  their  first  radical  for  their  original  vowel,  assume  it 
in  the  suff.  state,  §  360.  b.  (2)  The  examples  b,  c,  shew  the  manner 
in  which  Gutturals  influence  the  form  of  these  Segholates,  §  141. 
(3)  The  const,  form  of  c,  viz.  i'^T  ,  (like  that  of  Dec.  V.),  is  not  usual. 

(4)  A  few  words  belonging  here,  retain  the  original  ground-form ; 

e.  g.  *ra ,  aya,  ■**}£  ,  (not  into),  etc. 

§  364.  Notes  on  the  E  class,  (l)  In  such  cases  as  d,/*,  h,  we  might 
naturally  expect  that  the  Tseri  would  be  changed  into  Seghol,  §  142. 
d ;  but  Tseri  often  remains.  (2)  The  examples  f  g,  exhibit  the  in- 
fluence of  3»  Guttural;  the  example  A,  that  of  the  final  Guttural. 
Sometimes,  however,  Hhireq  short  is  used  in  the  const,  and  suff.  plu- 
ral of  words  Pe  Guttural,  like  ^Iph  from  ^j?.n  .  (3)  The  student  will 
not  fail  to  note,  that  although  such  nouns  as  -D£  ,  ir.rt ,  etc.  exhibit, 
in  the  abs.  state,  the  same  appearance  as  those  of  the  A  class,  viz. 
^V.^.  ?  etc.,  yet  in  theswjf.  state,  the  difference  in  the  original  vowels  is 
at  once  discerned  ;  e.  g.  *"^p.  >  *^H  i  Dut  *P—  >  ",?*?'9  i  e*c- 

(4)  Original  forms  are  sometimes  found  here ;  as  Nun ,  in:  ,  etc. 

Remark.  Some  nouns,  by  usage,  are  treated  as  belonging  both  to 
the  A  and  E  classes ;  e.  g.  *V*iri ,  nr^, ,  etc.  see  Lex. 

§  365.  Notes  on  the  O  class,  (l)  The  examples  i,  j,  exhibit  the 
two  short  vowels  (in  the  suff.  state),  which  correspond  to  the  Hholem 
of  the  abs.  state,  and  from  which  this  Hholem  is  derived.  (2)  In  k,  I, 
the  influence  of  s  Guttural  is  seen.  For  the  form  of  the  suff.  state 
'ZD'y^VB  pij-ol-khem,  see  §  140.  Sometimes  this  form  appears  without 
a  Guttural;  e.  g.  ^Staj? ,  from  nap  ,  etc.  (3)  In  /,  a  comp.  Sheva  is 
assumed  under  the  first  radical,  in  the  plur.  and  light  sufl'.  state  ;  an 
occurrence  very  rare  among  nouns  of  this  class. 

Anomalies.  The  nouns  "£"vij ,  C*jj5  ,  rriN  .  exhibit  some  anomalic- 
in  regard  to  their  vowels;  e.g.  plot.  t2PS)"lti  sho-rd-slum,  ta'^TjS 
qd-dd-shtm,  ta^rrii*  etc.  Also  MS ,  hj3 ,  hara  ,  have  anomalous  plu- 
rals;  see  the  Lex.  on  these  words. 


184  §§  386—386.  nouns  ;  Die.  VI. 


An  original  form  hero  is  cujp. 

§  3GG.  Segholates  of  verbs  12  and"*  2.  («)  Those  of  the  A  class  have 
two  forms,  viz.  with  middle  1  (as  in  m,  n),  which,  out  of  the  abs.  <-tate, 
quiesces  in  Shureq  or  Hholem,  as  in  the  examples;  or  with  middle  * 
(as  in  o,  ;»),  which  out  of  the  ahs.  state,  quiesces  in  Tseri  or  Hhireq. 
The  forms  like  rRib  ,  "p.r  ,  with  Qamets  for  a  penult  vowel,  without 
the  influence  of  an  accent,  are  sui  generis,  and  belong  only  to  Segho- 
lates  with  middle  1 ,  in  proper  Heb.  nouns.  Some  of  the  forms,  like 
*V3>  ,  have  a  regular  plural. 

(6)  Those  of  the  E  class  all  belong  to  Dec.  I.,  and  quiesce  in  Tseri 
or  Hhireq;  as  pa,  pf,  etc.,  the  Segholate  form  not  being  admissible 
here. 

(c)  Those  of  the  O  class  all  quiesce  in  Hholem  or  Shureq,  in  the 
singular,  which  belongs  to  Dec.  I  ;  as  q,  r.  But  the  plur.  is  occasion- 
ally regular  ;  as  in  these  examples.  The  form  T.~is  equivalent  to 
Tl.T  ,  and  -n^=nri'  . 

§  367.  Segholates  derived  from  verbs  jjfe,  imitate  the  Inf.  Segholates. 
The  root  of  verbs  n'r  is  properly  vr  or  "lb,  §  280.  Hence,  as  neither 
11  nor  "1,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  will  bear  a  furtive  vowel  before  them,  § 
120.  6,  (so  that  we  cannot  write  ""-IE  ,  "i~2),  the  form  of  the  word  is 
changed,  so  as  to  accommodate  the  nature  of  the  final  *  or  1,  i.  e.  the 
Inf.  Segholate  form  is  chosen,  and  the  final  vowel  becomes  homoge- 
neous with  the  Quiescent,  §  117.  1.  The  examples  s — w  exhibit  the 
modes  of  declining  these  peculiar  nouns.  They  appear  all  of  them  to 
belong  to  the  E  or  0  class  of  Segholates.  The  Par.  exhibits  the 
change  which  a  pause  accent  produces  upon  them.  The  examples  «, 
r,  w,  exhibit  the  regular  plurals  which  they  occasionally  form. 

Note.  The  final  quiescent  ^  and  T ,  here,  do  not  make  their  vowel 
immutable.  The  general  law  of  the  vowel  yields  here,  to  the  law 
which  respects  the  form  of  the  noun  in  the  suff.  and  plur.  state.  Forms 
like  =jri's=l77'i  ,  are  not  found  in  the  suff.  or  plur.  state,  in  our  present 
Hebrew. 

§  368.  Infinitive  Segholates.  So  I  would  choose  to  call  such  as  are 
monosyllabic  in  their  ground-form,  with  the  vowel  after  the  second  rad- 
ical ;  which  is  the  established  form  of  the  Inf.  construct,  so  often  em- 
ployed as  a  mere  noun.  The  class  of  mere  nouns  with  such  forms  as 
USajf  .  3tp ,  ~inz  ,  is  not  large  ;  but  the  Inf.  forms  of  this  kind  are  ve- 
ry numerous,  and  the  majority  of  them  take  a  Hholem,  as  bDjD  .  The 
examples  x,  y,  e,  exhibit  the  modes  of  declining  nouns  of  this  sort;  yy 
and  —,  the  method  of  declining  the  const.  Infinitives.  See  also  in  Par. 
XXII.  the  Inf.  with  suffixes,  etc. 


§§  369—373.  nouns  ;  dec.  VI.  VII.  135 


Note.  The  reason  of  classing  these  nouns  and  Inf.  forms  among 
the  Segholates,  is,  that  in  the  suff.  state,  etc.  they  conform  altogether 
to  the  model  of  Segholates. 

§  369.  Anomalous  plurals  of  Segholates.  Of  these  there  are  a  num- 
ber, which  in  the  plur.  absolute  take,  in  the  first  syllable,  the  vowel 
appropriate  to  the  plur.  construct ;  e.  g.  ~^v\ ,  Q^tJJJ  instead  of 
Cf-)Tljy  ;  so  3>3b  ,  S^aa  ;  1-tfJ »  ^1-.^  ;  """^  tor  ^l'-'.  ■  Forms  like 
fca^pip  for  a^i^i;  ;  S^n  for  :zp:nn,  etc.  sometimes  occur. 

Note.  In  the  plur.  construct,  Daghesh  forte  euphonic  is  not  unfre- 
quent;  as  ipfcr]  for  ""jjbh  ,  rriaaJT  for  rrt3»*,  §  73.  Note  3.  Some 
other  singularities  of  particular  words,  are  noticed  in  the  Lexicons. 

§  370.  Segholates  with  a  paragogic  !"T-  .  This  is  appended,  like 
the  light  suffixes,  to  the  original  form  of  the  word  ;  e.  g.  ynN  ,  ~:£~*N  ; 
tnp. ,  ftJBljS:  ;  b?b,  ilb"^  ;  taS^P)  ~?3\l;  etc-i  tne  tone  uniformly 
remaining  on  the  penult. 

§  371.  The  seventh  declension  comprises  nouns  with  Tseri 
pure,  which  are  either  monosyllabic,  or  have  the  preceding 
vowels  immutable. 

§  372.  Changes,  (a)  The  const,  singular  is  generally  like 
the  absolute ;  in  a  few  cases,  it  exchanges  final  Tseri  for 
Pattahh.  (b)  In  case  of  accession,  the  final  Tseri  generally 
falls  away  ;  except  in  the  plur.  abs.  of  monosyllabic  words, 
(c)  Before  suffixes  beginning  with  a  consonant  and  taking 
the  tone,  the  final  Tseri  is  shortened  into  Hhireq,  Pattahh. 
or  Seghol,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  word. 

§  373.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm.  (1)  This  declension  includes  most 
of  the  active  participles,  in  their  masc.  forms  ;  which  are  declined  like 
6,  c.  The  Part,  of  verbs  b  Gutt.,  are  declined  like  d.  (2)  The  forms 
like  d,  e,  with  Pattahh  final  (instead  of  Tseri)  in  the  const,  state,  are 
not  confined  to  nouns  b  Guttural,  but  appear  in  several  other  DOOD8; 
e.  g.  TDOtt  ,  const.  *1ED73  .  It  is  peculiar  here,  that  a  number  of  nouns, 
which  take  a  final  Pattahh  in  regimen,  throw  away  the  preceding 
Pattahh,  in  such  a  case,  and  take  a  Hhireq  ;  e.  g.  Knvv  .  ~~z':  ;  >'2")73 
y?~)73  ,  etc.  Probably  this  may  be  in  order  to  avoid  two  Pattahha  in 
mixed  syllables,  immediately  in  succession.  (4)  The  case  e  presents 
Seghol  before  the  consonant  suffix  ;  as  in  some  few  cases  is  the  mage. 
(5)  The  final  Tseri  in  this  Dec.  is  not  unfrequently  retained,  in  the 
plur.  absolute,  as  though  it  were  immutable.  Usually  it  is  retained,  in 
monosyllabic  words  ;  as  in  the  example  g.  Comp.  §  358.  4, 


130  §§*J74— a76.  nouns;  dec.  VIII 


(»>)  Some  nouns,  as  na,  ]T  ,  rn  (obs.  root),  lose  their  vowel  in  the 
Buff,  state,  and  when  they  receive  an  accession,  as  if  they  belonged  to 
this  declension;  e.g.  ^4  ,  CS^T  ,  CnS  . 

(l)  Some  nouns  with  final  Hholem  pure,  are  inflected  in  the  same 
way;  e.g.  HSttJt) ,  plur.  nV;2«L"N  ;  "ip*W ,  suff.  tig.*©.  Peculiar  is 
plur.  nitta  ,  plur.  pluralium  DTiES  . 

§  374.  The  eighth  declension  Includes  all  nouns,  which  in- 
sert Daghesh  forte  in  the  final  letter  of  the  ground-forms 
when  they  receive  accession. 

§  375.  Changes,  («)  The  construct  state  is  generally 
the  same  as  the  absolute;  bat  before  Maqqeph,  ultimate 
long  vowels  are  shortened.  (6)  Any  accession  causes  the 
Daghesh  forte  of  the  final  letter  to  appear  ;  and,  if  such 
accession  takes  the  accent,  the  final  long  vowel  (if  pure) 
of  the  ground-form  is  shortened,  (c)  Penultimate  vowels, 
if  mutable,  conform  to  the  rules  in  §  242  seq. 

The  following  classes  of  words  fall  under  this  declension. 

(a)  Nouns  derived  from  verbs  yj>  ;  as  pV;,  f?  ,  b^,  Jh,  etc. ;  and 
also  the  participles  of  those  verbs  in  Niphal,  Hiphil,  and  Hophal. 
(6)  Other  words  in  which  the  penult  letter  is  dropped  or  assimilated  to 
the  final  one  ;  as  sb  for  22b  ;  Inf.  nR  for  n:ri ,  etc.  (c)  Some  words 
which  are  either  primitive  or  derived  from  a  Pilel  form  of  verbs ;  as 

§  376.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm,  (l)  In  a,  6,  c,  the  const,  state  is  gen- 
erally with  Pattahh.  In  a  few  cases  where  the  ground-form  is  as  E3^  , 
Qamets  is  retained.  (2)  In  c,  the  exchange  of  Pattahh  for  Hhireq, 
in  the  suff.  state,  e.  g.  TQ  ,  +#B  ,  is  peculiar,  and  is  found  in  but  few 
cases.  (3)  In  d,  the  Tseri  sometimes  goes  into  Pattahh;  as  "jr,  i;3; 
n3>,  ^W  ,  hut  with  n_  parag.  nny  .  In  like  manner,  Seghol  goes  into 
Hhireq  short;  as  b>!-p  ,  ifen*l2B  .  (4)  In  e,  f,  the  short  vowels  may 
be  either  short  u  or  0,  §  128.  b.  (5)  Polysyllabic  nouns  regulate  their 
ultimate  and  penult  syllables  in  conformity  with  the  laws  of  other  de- 
clensions ;  as  in  the  cases  g,  A,  the  former  with  a  pure  penult  vowel, 
the  latter  with  an  impure  one.  (6)  Nouns  of  the  forms  in  i.  make 
the  const,  in  s_  ,  except  in  the  phrase  Sfin*  '•n  .  Nouns  in  \*  double 
the  Yodh ;  as  *£,  EP^b  .  (7)  When  the  final  letter  is  a  Resh  or  a 
Guttural,  and  cannot  be  doubled,  the  compensation  for  Daghesh  ex- 
cluded is  as  usual ;  see  in  /,  k,  and  also  in  ^  1 12.   For  k,  see  §  1 1 2.  Note. 


§$  377—382.  nouns  ;  dec.  IX.  X.  137 

Note.  A  few  nouns  belong  to  this  declension  in  some  of  their 
forms,  and  to  other  declensions  in  others;  e.  g.  n>t ,  C,:"!i-,3  ,  etc.  ; 
for  which,  see  the  Lexicons. 

General  Remark.  Nouns  of  various  declensions,  as  to  the  naturo  of  their  rowels,  helon"  to 
this  declension.  It  is  only  the  doubling  of  the  final  consonant,  which  makes  the  peculiarity  of  it. 
The  vowel-changes  are  all  governed  by  laws  belonging  to  the  general  principles,  adopted  respec- 
tively in  other  declensions. 

§  377.  The  ninth  declension  comprises  all  those  words 
ending  in  n_  ,  which  are  derived  from  verbs  T\?  • 

§  378.  Changes,  (a)  In  the  const,  singular,  final  Se- 
ghol  is  changed  to  Tseri.  (6)  With  suffixes,  etc.  the 
ending  H—  is  dropped,  (c)  Penultimate  vowels,  if  muta- 
ble, conform  to  the  usual  rules  respecting  the  vowel-chan- 
ges. 

§  379.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm,  (l)  It  is  only  the  final  ending  T>-  , 
which  characterises  this  declension.  The  penult  vowel  may  be  im- 
mutable, as  in  a ;  or  mutable,  as  in  b.  It  is  treated  according  to  the 
general  laws  of  the  vowel  changes.  (2)  With  suffixes,  these  nouns 
imitate  the  verbs  from  which  they  are  derived,  and  throw  away  their 
final  consonant  and  vowel,  as  in  a,  b.  (3)  The  const,  vowel,  Tseri, 
{longer  than  the  Seghol  of  the  ground-form),  is  altogether  a  peculiari- 
ty in  the  phenomena  of  declension. 

NOUNS  FEMININE. 

§  380.  The  tenth  declension  includes  all  nouns  with  the 
feminine  ending  I"I_ ,   and  the  preceding  vowels  immutable. 

§  381.  Changes.  In  the  const,  state  Jl_  becomes  D_; 
before  suffixes,  it  becomes  H—  or  D_  .  The  plural  is 
usually  ni . 

§  382.  JVotes  on  the  Paradigm,  (l)  In  regard  to  the  fern,  ending 
rt_,  in  the  abs.  state,  although  its  vowel  coalesces  with  a  Quiescent, 
and  on  general  grounds  would  be  immutable ;  yet,  in  this  case,  the 
laws  of  vowels  yield  to  the  demands  of  case  or  relation,  i.  e.  a 
change  of  the  vowel  is  effected,  by  a  more  imperious  law  which  re- 
quires a  change,  in  order  to  designate  the  relation  in  which  the  noun 
in  question  may  stand  to  other  parts  of  the  sentence  connected  with  it. 
(2)  The  student  will  see  that  Qamets  is  retained  under  the  penult 
letter,  whenever  it  stands  in  a  simple  syllable  ;  according  to  §  130. 
18 


138  §§383—389.  noons;  dec.  XI.  XII. 


§  383.  The  eleventh  declension  comprehends  all  nouns 
with  the  fern,  ending  H_  ,  and  a  mutable  (jaunts  or  Tscri 
in  the  penult  syllable. 

§  304.  Changes.  These  are  the  same,  by  reason  of 
declension,  as  in  Dec.  X  ;  except  that  here,  the  mutable 
vowel  of  the  penult  falls  away  in  the  const,  state  and  be- 
fore sufltxes. 

§385.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm.  (1)  The  cases  a,  5,  simply  follow 
the  analogy  of  Dec.  X,  with  the  exception,  that  the  penult  vowel  un- 
dergoes the  mutations  which  the  general  laws  of  declension  demand. 
(2)  In  c,  ci,  e,  after  the  penult  vowel  falls  away,  there  would  remain 
two  Shevas  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable  ;  which  being  impossible, 
a  new  vowel  arises,  agreeably  to  §§  137,  138.  (3)  Many  nouns 
(of  Dec.  XI.  in  the  abs.  state)  conform  out  of  this  altogether  to  Dec. 
XIII;  so  that  only  the  abs.  state  belongs  to  Dec.  XI.,  and  all  the  rest 
to  Dec.  XIII.     Such  are  noted  in  the  Lexicons. 

§  386.  Remarks,  (l)  Many  fem.  nouns  apparently  belong  here,  but 
really  to  Dec.  I.,  because  the  penult  vowel  is  immutable  ;  e.  g.  nrN , 
flN-H) ,  ft^fa  ,  !~D"Y3  etc.  ;  all  such  a  good  Lexicon  notes. 

(2)  A  few  nouns,  by  usage,  are  employed  as  belonging  both  to 
Dec.  X.  and  XI ;  e.  g.  ftfc*,  const.  nc"«,  suff.  TiB*  Dec.  X. ;  so  rib?:,  const. 
HbM,  suff.  ,,r)VM  ,  Dec.  X.,  commonly  as  nbn; ,  inba: ,  etc.  The  Lex. 
should  designate  such. 

§  387.  The  twelfth  declension  includes  all  those  fem. 
nouns  in  ?"l- ,  derived  from   Segholates  of  Dec.  VI. 

The  feminine  ending  is  attached  to  the  original  masc.  form  of  the 
Segholate,  as  ^b.^. ,  fem.  nsbtt  ;  so  that  these  nouns  have  the  appear- 
ance of  belonging  to  Dec.  X. 

§  388.  Changes.  Nouns  belonging  here  are  declined 
exactly  like  those  of  Dec.  X.  in  the  singular;  but  the  plu- 
ral conforms  to  the  model  of  the  plurals  in   Dec.  VI. 

§  389.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm.  (1)  The  example  a,  is  a  derivate 
of  the  A  class  of  Segholates  ;  6,  c,  of  the  E  class ;  d,  of  the  O  class. 
(2)  The  form  in  e,  exhibits  the  effects  of  Ayin  Guttural  upon  the  vow- 
el-points of  a  word. 

Remark.  There  are  a  number  of  nouns,  which  to  appearance  be- 
long to  this  declension,  e.  g.  STlSfl ,  ntpB ,  etc.,  but  which  in  reality 
belong  to  Dec.  X.  The  plural  at  once  distinguishes  them  ;  e.  g.  plur. 
nYlXE  ,  not  frilttH  ,  etc.  as  it  would  be  in  Dec.  XII. 


§§  390 — 394.  nouns  ;  dec.  XIII. — dual  number.  139 


§  390.  The  thirteenth  declension  includes  all  fem.  Sc- 
gholates  in  n  _  and  D  _  ;  i.e.  all  those  which  have  the 
tone  on  the  penult,  and  a  furtive  vowel  in  the  final  sylla- 
ble. 

The  furtive  vowel  here  is  Seghol  or  Pattahh ;  and,  as  it  is  facti- 
tious, it  appears  only  in  the  abs.  and  const,  state.  The  original  vowel 
re-appears,  as  in  Dec  VI.,  whenever  the  word  receives  any  accession. 
All  fem.  Infinitives  and  Participles  in  n_  or  n_,  fall  under  this  de- 
clension. 

§  391.  Changes.  The  sing,  number  is  declined  as  in 
Dec.  VI.  The  plur.  absolute  is  quite  anomalous,  some- 
times dropping  the  original  final  vowel  of  the  ground-form, 
and  sometimes  retaining  it. 

§  392.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm,  (l)  The  example  a  exhibits  the 
manner  of  Segholates  belonging  to  the  A  class  ;  6,  c,  those  of  the  E 
class  ;  d,  e,  those  of  the  O  class,  whose  short  vowel  may  be  short  o  or 
u.     (2)  The  fem.  Inf.  forms  are  declined  as  in/",  g. 

Remark.  Some  nouns  of  the  E  class  take  Pattahh,  in  their  final 
syllable  before  a  suffix  ;  e. g.  rip.?. i"» ,  ",np3:P ;  Inf.  form,  nn\b. ,  ^PO-^ , 
Ps.  23:  6. 

Nouns  of  the  Dual  number. 

ft  393.  These  are  exhibited  in  Par.  XXVII.  (a)  From  the  Par.  it 
appears,  that  the  const,  state  of  the  Dual  is  the  same  as  that  of  the 
plur.  masc.  in  ft",_  .  To  this  form  the  grave  suffixes  are  attached,  as 
in  the  plural;  see  §  344.  (6)  The  Dual, in  general,  effects  the  same 
contraction  of  the  vowels  of  the  sing,  ground-form  as  the  plural ;  but 
in  Dec.  VI.,  the  contraction  is  still  greater;  e.  g.  *p.a  ,  Dual  D^S"»2  ; 
the  plur.  would  be  D^Sna . 

Note.  There  are  but  a  few  nouns  of  the  dual  form.  Dec.  IX.  ex- 
hibits none.  Of  those  that  actually  occur,  some  have  no  singular  \ 
others  have  no  const,  form.  The  nouns  O^b-b  and  a"«73  ,  are  of  the 
dual  form,  but  are  used  as  plurals. 

Nouns  with  Anomalous  forms. 

§  394.  Such  are  at; ,  mj ,  lrjt$ ,  niftM ,  tt»^  ,  httt* ,  ni£>N ,  rVJ$  . 
■JS,  rtn ,  Eah ,  Or* ,  *}>3  ,  Cava ,  V* ,  fiQ  ,  ttjrfl ;  the  peculiar  deriv- 
ative forms  of  which,  the  Lexicon  exhibits. 


140  <§4  896,  M(>.  noi;ns  ;  cardinal  numrf.rs,  BTC. 

NUMBERS. 

§  395.  Cardinal  numbers,  (a)  From  1  to  10  the  forms  of  cardinal 
numbers  have  the  distinction  of  gender,  and  generally  also  that  of  the 
abs.  and  const,  states.  From  3 — 10  however,  the  primitive  forms  are 
of  the  f em.  gender;  while  the  derivate  forms  (in  n_  and  n_)  are  of 
the  masc.  gender. 

{b)  From  11  — 19,  the  cardinal  numbers  are  of  a  compound  form, 
i.e.  they  are  made  up  by  joining  the  word  "VZ)y  in  the  masc,  and  nHfcJS  in 
the  fem.,  to  the  units.  These  numerals,  thus  formed,  have  no  const, 
state,  but  are  put  in  apposition,  or  adverbially,  with  other  nouns. 

Note.     The  words  "liuy  and  iniDS   are  found  only  in  the  above 

T       »  Y  f 

connexions,  and  are  evidently  derived  from  "VJpy  (en ;  somewhat  like 
the  termination  teen  for  ten  in  thirteen,  fourteen,  etc. 

(c)  From  20 — 90,  the  cardinal  numbers  are  the  plural  forms  of  the 
corresponding  units ;  except  that  the  form  for  20,  is  the  plural  of  the 
form  for  10.  All  these  are  of  common  gender,  and  have  no  const,  state. 

Note.  When  intermediate  units  are  to  be  expressed,  they  may 
either  precede  or  follow  the  tens;  as  jpVSgjl  so*.:;  =  ssiih  CVTJJ 
=  77. 

(d)  Hundreds  are  expressed  by  the  forms  of  the  word  nN£  pre- 
ceded by  the  nine  units  ;  thousands,  by  the  forms  of  S)bj*  with  the  same 
units ;  ten  thousands  in  a  similar  manner  by  the  forms  of  ~-2"i ,  T3"! , 
or  Ni3"n ;  see  in  the  Par.  under  D.  E. 

Note.  In  expressing  a  sum  of  hundreds,  with  intervening  tens  and 
units,  the  smaller  numbers  may  either  precede  or  follow  the  hundreds; 
as  n:UJ  asig5!  nzt  ^VZl  t=rn\i;  =  162  years,  Gen.  5:  18;  or  cViO 
SZTJip1)  fia^aSJ  msa  =372,  Ezra  2:  4.  The  latter  mode  prevails 
in  the  later  Hebrew. 

In  expressing  thousands,  with  intervening  smaller  numbers,  the  for- 
mer are  placed  first ;  as  Sa^attH  nifitJQ  ©J0tt3  P^s*  nsasi  =  8580, 
Num.  4:  48. 

§  396.  Ordinal  numbers.  The  ordinal  numbers  extend 
only  from  two  to  ten.  Beyond  this  last  number,  and  some- 
times also  below  it,  the  cardinal  numbers  are  used  as  or- 
dinals. 

The  ordinals  are  derived  from  the  cardinals  by  annexing  to  them 
the  termination  T. .  Most  of  them  likewise  insert  *«.  before  the  final 
letter  of  the  ground-form. 

Note.  The  ordinals  sometimes  have  a  fem.  form  in  rp_ ,  and  some- 


§§  397 — 399.  nouns — adjectives.  141 

times  in  n*_  .  In  this  shape,  they  are  commonly  employed  to  de- 
note part  ;  as  Wl'tW ,  the  tenth  part. 

§  397.  Notes  on  the  Paradigm,  (l)  A  exhibits  the  usual  forms  of 
the  cardinals  from  one  to  ten.  The  fern.  nr:N  is  for  rnna  .  The  form 
13  ^2.  IB  is  dual,  as  if  from  ]'d  ;  the  fem.  D*hv  (for  D^n:^)  is  also  dual, 
as  from  an  obsolete  root,  n:d  .  The  Daghesh  in  3Tn£J  is  regarded 
as  Dag.  lene,  3  being  dropped,  but  the  Dagh.  that  would  follow  it  be- 
ing retained.  (2)  There  is  a  dual  form  of  mase.  cardinals,  which  is 
used  adverbially  ;  as  O'n^tt  sevenfold,  Gen.  4:  15,  24,  etc.  t3"^n?2"lN 
fourfold,  2  Sam.  12:6.  (3)  The  plurals  of  some  of  these  forms  like- 
wise appear;  as  3P"inN ,  Gen.  27:  44;  rn-Upy  tens,  Ex.  18:  21,  25, 
etc.  (4)  A  few  of  these  cardinals  are  also  found  with  suffixes ;  tas 
^ZIZJ,  both  ofus;  t33ir1b;,'<p  ,  ye  three,  etc 

(5)  B  presents  the  forms  of  cardinals  from  eleven  to  nineteen. 
Those  for  eleven  and  twelve  have  two  forms ;  and  3r:'«p  and  CTntt?  co- 
incide with  the  Aramaean  dual.  The  form  "UDy  n:b\U,  eighteen,  oc- 
curs once,  Judg.  20:  25. 

§  398.  Method  of  notation.  The  Hebrews  made  use  of  the  letters 
of  the  alphabet,  in  order  to  denote  numbers.  Like  the  Greeks,  they 
divided  the  letters  (including  the  final  ones)  into  three  classes ;  of 
which  the  first  denoted  units,  the  second  tens,  and  the  third  hundreds. 
After  400,  the  final  letters  were  sometimes  employed,  as  in  the  Par. 
To  express  thousands  and  higher  numbers,  they  began  the  alphabet 
anew,  placing  two  dots  over  each  letter.  When  more  than  one  letter 
was  employed,  the  accent  called  Garshayim  or  double  Geresh  was  some- 
times used  to  mark  them  as  numerals.  In  designating  composite  num- 
bers, the  letters  which  represent  the  larger  numbers  are  p\aced first ; 
asD2>n'=429;  ttXSp  =  4898  ;  nD:^' =  1828. 

Note.  Fifteen  is  denoted  by  1t:=  9+6  =  15  ;  never  by  !"P  ,  be- 
cause this  last  is  the  contraction  for  the  word  nin1  . 


ADJECTIVES. 


§  399.  Hebrew  adjectives  have  no  peculiar  and  appro- 
priate forms,  but  only  such  as  are  common  to  nouns.  The 
fem.  form  of  the  adjective  is  derived  from  the  masoulne 
in  the  same  manner  as  the  fem.  nouns,  §  323.  The  dual 
number  does  not  occur   here. 

Whatever  has  been  said  of  the  forms  of  noun*,  in  the  maeftding  sections,  applies  nl««  lo  atijer 
fives  ;  ko  that  the  InttPr  do  not  need  to  be  treated  of  separately. 


142  §§   400 4  OH.    TAHTICLES — A9VMSS. 

Note.  Comparison  in  adjectives  ig  formed  by  a  periphrasis,  for 
which  see  §  454  seq.  The  const,  state  of  adjectives  appears  mo^t  fre- 
quently when  they  are  used  as  nouns,  or  with  a  noun  understood  ;  as 
Sk"*^  ,  the  upright  of  heart,  Ps.  6:  II. 


PARTICLES. 

§  400.  Under  the  general  appellation  of  Particles,  are 
comprehended  adverbs,  prepositions,  conjunctions,  and  inter- 
jections. 

§  401.  Like  nouns,  some  of  these  are  primitive,  but 
most  of  them  derivates.  Of  the  derivates,  some  have  an 
ending  appropriated  solely  to  the  form  of  particles,  as 
OD'DH  truly,  from  "jftN  truth;  while  most  retain  the  form 
of  verbs,  nouns,  or  pronouns. 

Note  1.  Compound  words  are  more  frequent  among  particles,  than 
among1  the  leading1  parts  of  speech.  Apocope  is  also  more  common  ;  all 
the  prepositions,  etc.  which  consist  of  only  one  letter,  being  doubtless 
apocopated  words  ;  as  b  for  bN   -M  for  "jft  ,  etc. 

Note  2.  The  older  grammarians  have,  for  the  most  part,  consider- 
ed all  the  particles  as  derivative  nouns ;  but  this  is  hardly  probable,  as 
primitives  are  found  in  all  the  other  parts  of  speech.  It  is,  however, 
very  difficult  to  draw  the  exact  line  between  the  primitive  and  deri- 
vative forms,  as  the  etymology  is  often  much  obscured,  by  the  chan- 
ges which  the  particles  have  undergone. 


ADVERBS. 

§  402.  Some  derivative  adverbs  have  appropriate  endings  ;  e.g.  (a) 
In  &_  ;  as  =u£N  truly,  from  "J73N  truth.  (6)  In  D  J ;  as  a^nc  sud- 
denly, from  "nc  the  wink  of  an  eye.  (c)  In  rP—  ;  as  rP3'.2J ,  a  second 
time,     (d)  In  "»_.  ;  as  VK  ,  from  TN  then. 

§  403.  Many  derivative  adverbs  have  the  forms  of  other  parts  of 
speech  ;  e.  g.  (a)  Of  nouns  with  a  preposition  ;  as  O^cb  before,  n^ra 
upwards,  etc.  (6)  Of  nouns  in  the  Accusative  ;  as  sing.  ftu\  securely, 
plur.  E^-iU^S  uprightly.  Some  of  these  forms  are  no  longer  used  as 
nouns  ;  as  "pi*  not.  (c)  Of  adjectives  ;  as  masc.  SiVwell,  fern.  S"HH*3 
quickly,  plur.  rhioiD  fearfully.    These  are  used  in  a  neuter  sense, 


§§  404 — 407.  prepositions.  143 


like  multum,  nollu,  etc.  {d)  Of  the  Inf.  absolute,  especially  in  Hiph- 
il ;  a9  *i\9  again,  literally  redeundo  ;  H2")n  much,  lit.  multiplicando  ; 
QSJiJr]  early.  Sometimes  with  a  preposition;  as  3i^b  abundantly. 
(c)  Of  pronouns  ;  as  HT  here  ;  na  how  etc. 

§  404.  Some  adverbs  are  compounded  of  other  words,  (a)  Of  pre- 
positions and  adverbs  ;  as  "jS-b^.  wherefore  ;  T'J»r^_  how  long  ?  (fc) 
Of  two  adverbs;  as  HCW  where,  from  "W  and  t"JD  ,  etc. 

§  405.  Several  adverbs  receive  after  them  verbal  suffixes  ;  in  which 
connexion  the  suffixes  are  generally  in  the  Nominative  case.  E.  g.  ^I'T'J 
I  am  yet,  IS^IS  he  is  yet ;  13|*$  he  is  not ;  i'N  where  is  he  ?  Gen.  3'-  9, 
flS^.N  (for  ^p.N)  where  art  thou?  The  suffixes  are  usually  those  with 
an  epenthetic  Nun,  which  belong  to  the  Fut.  tense. 


PREPOSITIONS. 

§  406.  Four  prepositions,  3:,  3  ,  b  ,  a  (•»),  consisting  of  only  one 
letter,  are  united  with  the  words  which  they  govern.  E'robably  they 
are  all  derivates  of  roots  which  were  of  a  more  complete  form.  This 
is  certain  as  to  a  (which  comes  from  "ja)  ;  and  probable  as  to  the  oth- 
ers ;  see  the  articles  in  the  Lexicon.  For  the  various  vowel  pointing  of 
these  prepositions,  see  §  152.  b. 

§  407.  Derivative  prepositions,  making  words  by  themselves,  (and 
most  of  them  are  of  this  kind),  have  the  forms  of  other  parts  of  speech, 
viz.  (a)  Of  nouns  sing,  in  the  ace.  case,  or  const,  state  ;  as  y/l  causa, 
on  account  of ;  "n:..  before ;  niin  under,  etc.  {b)  Of  nouns  plural  in 
the  const,  state  ;  as  b*f  ,  to,  for,  """rtf  poetic ;  "j&  ,  ^53  ,  etc.  Several 
prepositions  take  suffixes  of  such  a  form  as  are  usually  attached  to  the 
plural,  as  well  as  such  as  are  attached  to  the  singular ;  as  nrtn ,  1rrr. 
"^"^i  Dut  also  w'tn  sing.  suff.  dnrtn,  etc.  So  bv  upon,  plur.  const. 
*\9  poetic,  with  suff.  "^y  ,  *p£jP ,  SS^SJ  .  (c)  Of  nouns  in  the  const, 
state  with  prefix-prepositions;  as  TJ3  by;  "'SSb  before  etc.  (d)  Of  ad 
verbs  with  prefix-prepositions ;  as  pN3 ,  "'fibsb  without ;  TNtf  since,  etc. 
(e)  Of  adverbs  followed  by  a  preposition,  so  as  to  denote  but  one  idea; 
as  b  1^30  around;  b  b?73  above;  ]73  yin  without,  etc.  (f)  Of  a  dou- 
ble preposition  ;  as  £a^a  from  with  ;  ^2.12  between  ;  D^n  bx  under  . 
like  the  French  aVaupres,  de  chez  etc.  (g)  Of  a  paragogic  letter  or  suf- 
fix, viz.  H-  toxvards,  to  ;  as  fflWo  towards  Sodom  ;  "JpN  to  the  ground, 
etc.  So  also  n_  and  n_  ,  in  a  few  cases  ;  as  n?.\o  to  Syene,  Ezck.  29  : 
10;  T\fltoNob,  1  Sam'  21:  2. 

Note.  Prepositions  take  noun-suffixes,  (both  in  the  manner  of  ling. 
and  plur.  nouns)  ;  very  seldom  are  verbal-suffixes  appended  to  them, 
e.  g.  as  "^nftn ,  narftn ,  ,:n  ^3  . 


144 


§  40*.    I'REI'OSIIID.Vs. 


§  408.  Several  prepositions  and  particles,  are  united  with  the  pro- 
nouns in  a  peculiar  way.  The  following  table  exhibits  a  view  of 
these  peculiarities. 


3 

V 

\a 

iV 

W  * 

w  « 

»R 

« 

is 

ft 

13*2 

D33 

cab 

TO 

T* 

D3 

T     '                *.*  T 

(TO)  TO 

n\ 

sis-ri&a 

rnaa 
WiSaa 

(D31733)  D33 

Dns    ens    ani?23 


_5 

(osisa)  ana 
TO 


DN  of  the  Ace. 

ns  Tt'i'^A. 

Ti'lN ,  "»rjN 

=i:nN 

"** 

I3n« 

Ci™)1^ 

ti&P.fy 

D3.PIN 

ft™!)  W 

D3P,K 

-fnk 

n^N 

■jn« 

Dn«, 

Dn.r?s$ 

ift« 

DDK 

T      - 

-nix 

W 

"jrjn^ 

T     • 



Notes  on  the  Paradigm,  (l)  The  suff.  ^  sometimes  takes  the  par- 
ag.  "_ ;  e.  g.  "33  =  ^3  ,  nab  =  ^b  ,  etc.  (2)  Before  suffixes,  3  re- 
quires the  parag.  173  as  a  union-syllable ;  as  in  the  table.  (3)  "J73  , 
becomes  "paa  (=  1?2*a  i.  e.  ]73  doubled),  before  most  of  the  pronouns; 
not  before  all,  e.g.  0353  =  C3:a  ,  etc.  (4)  n»  ,  the  sign  of  the  Ac- 
cus.,  (also  standing  sometimes  before  other  cases  §  427.  Note  2.),  in 
union  with  pronouns,  always  assumes  the  form  DN ,  or  (as  it  is  often 
written  plene)  niN .  (5)  DN  ,  with,  appears  to  be  derived  from  a  root 
3>3> ,  or  to  stand  (as  Gesenius  supposes)  for  n*N .  It  is  imitated 
throughout,  in  its  Daghesh  and  its  mode  of  taking  suffixes,  by  a? 
•with  ;  as  **}& ,  ^as ,  etc. 

Note.     The  parag.  forms,  nan ,  Ttlh  ,  take  prepositions  without 
change ;  as  rtaftS ,  rtsna ,  nana  ,  etc. 


§§  409,  410.    CONJUNCTIONS — INTERJECTIONS.  1  16 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

§  409.  Of  primitive  conjunctions,  there  are  only  a  few  ;  and  most 
of  these  are  monosyllabic.  Derived  conjunctions  have  the  forms  (n) 
Of  pronouns;  as  Tiljfit  (■*)  because,  that;  like  on,  quod,  etc.  (6)  Of 
pronouns  preceded  by  prepositions  ;  as  itN'ir  because  ,  "lllN-"? 
until,  etc.  (c)Of  a  double  conjunction;  as  ",~>  C3  although;  CX  "O  but, 
unless. 


INTERJECTIONS. 


§  410.  Interjections,  being  exclamations  expressive  of  joy  or  sor- 
row, are  for  the  most  part  primitive. 

Derived  interjections  have  the  forms,  (o)  Of  verbs  in  the  Impera- 
tive, both  of  the  sing,  and  plural  forms;  as  nnrj  age !  plur.  Ian,  from 
in"1;  C~  hush,  be  still!  plur.  ISn  in  Piel,  from  n"n  ;  HN~\  idov,  ecce ! 
(6)  Of  nouns;  as  "l"V£N  O  the  blessedness  of!  n'^infar  be  it  from,  God 
forbid!  "Q  O  hear!  "2~\  enough,  hold! 

Note.  The  interjection  !"i:ri  takes  after  it  verbal  suffixes  in  the 
Nominative  case  ;  as  -,:>3,ri ,  "'3*3,71  ecce  ego !  ~:ri  ecce  tu  !  etc. 


10 


PART    IV. 


SYNTAX. 


I\  tlio  Syntax,  etymological  arrangement  is  not  followed,  but  that 
which  is  most  convenient  and  simple,  in  the  natural  order  of  senten- 


ces. 


ARTICLE. 

§411.  Insertion. of  the  Article.  In  general,  the  He- 
brew article  (§  162),  like  the  in  English,  is  used  in  speak- 
ing of  a  definite,  beibre-mentioned,  well  known,  or  mona- 
dic object. 

E.  g.  Y- 7?^  (he  king ;  Gen.  2:  7,  S"1J$~  the  man  before  mentioned  ; 
l£X}i$3  the  sun  ;  V"?:N^  the  earth,  etc.  But  in  poetry,  definite  objects 
are  often  designated  without  the  article  ;  as  Ps.  48:  3, '  the  city  in  ~:/:. 
of  the  great  king  ?  Ps.  72:  1.  In  a  similar  manner  the  earlier  Greek 
poets,  particularly  Homer,  omit  the  article  where  the  Attic  prose  wri- 
ters insert  it. 

§  412.  The  article  is  commonly,  but  not  always,  used  in  cases  such 
as  the  following,  viz.  (a)  Before  a  noun  in  the  Genitive,  when  the 
first  noun  requires  the  article  ;  e.g.  "f"1.^"  "-£■?  ^ie  kings  of  the  land ; 
WBftban  "iu3:N  the  men  of  war  i.  e.  the  warriors,  (b)  Before  a  noun  of 
multitude  in  the  singular;  e.g.  yttj*>!l  the  wicked,  p^l^Jj  the  righteous, 
^:y:3~  the  Canaanite.  (c)  Before  generic  nouns,  when  used  with  a 
particular,  individual  signification  ;  e.  g.  ~^~}~  the  river,  i.  e.  the  Eu- 
phrates; "12"^-  the  desert,  i.e.  the  Arabian  desert;  ]"^w*~  the  adver- 
sary, i.  e.  Satan,  6  diaf/okog.  {d)  Before  the  Vocative  ;  e.g.E3?fo&n  O 
heavens!  EL*n  O  sea  ! 

Note  1.  The  article  is  sometimes  used  as  a  pronoun,  either  demon- 
strative or  relative;  e.g.  Bl'tl  this  day,  ~'r*"r-  this  night,  t3?sri  this 
time.  So  also  Jos.  10:  24,  '  the  warriors  iflN  8M3bnrj  who  accompani- 
ed him  ?  Judg.  13:  8,  '  the  child  n'^'"  which  is  born  ;'  etc. 

Note  2.  The  Hebrews  sometimes  employed  the  article  with  an 
indefinite  signification,  like  the  English  a  or  an;  e.g.    1  Sam.  17:  34, 


s§  413,  414.  syntax:  article.  147 


■n»tn  a  lion  ;  Num.  11:  27,  -\vztj  a  youth  etc.  So  Is.  7:  14,  nftbyn 
may,  in  conformity  with  this  rule,  be  rendered  a  virgin  and  not  tAe 
maiden,  as  Gesenius  and  othors  have  translated  it.  In  cases  of  this  kind, 
however,  the  article  is  usually  omitted;  as  Job  1:  1,  'there  was  w\\ 
a  man  ;'  Ex.  2:  I  5. 

Note  3.  The  indefinite  article,  a  or  an,  is  sometimes  expressed  by 
IriwNt  one;  as  1  Sam.  1:  1,  'there  was  inx  E^  a  man,''  etc.  This 
construction  is  usual  in  Chaldee  and  Syriac.  So  in  Greek,  Matt.  21: 
19,  Gvxtt  ptu,  a  Jig-tree ;  Mark  14:  51,  fcTg  Tig  veuvioxog,  a  young  man, 
etc. 

§413.  Omission  of  the  article.  This  takes  jilace,  (l) 
Before  proper  names,  especially  those  of  persons, countries, 
rivers,  mountains,  and  places. 

To  this  principle,  however,  there  arc  so  many  exceptions,  that  it 
can  by  no  means  be  regarded  as  a  general  rule  in  the  language.  Thus 
rHS  Euphrates  always  omits  the  article,  and  'IW'vrj  the  Jordan  al- 
most always  has  it.  So  ■,:",q  .Sinai,  "p*£  Sion,  etc.  are  always  without 
it;  but  pzibn  Lebanon,  rEp^ri  Carmel,  etc.  often  with  it. 

(2)  Before  a  noun  in  the  const,  state  followed  l>\  a 
Genitive. 

E.g.  rrirP  *"DT  the  word  of  Jehovah,  instead  of  "^-H  etc.  But  ex- 
ceptions here  shew  that  usage  is  variable.  Thus,  when  the  following 
Gen.  is  a  proper  name,  which  excludes  the  article,  the  frst  noun  may 
take  it;  as  Gen.  31:  13,  barn^  ran  ,  the  Clod  of  Bethel;  Gen.  24: 
G7,  m\U  —'rnxri ,  to  the  tent  of  Sarah.  So  where  two  Genitives  come 
together;  as  Ezek.  45:  1G,  yi^n  D^rj  iris  ,  all  the  people  of  the  land 
In  a  few  other  cases,  it  is  also  used  by  way  of  emphasis,  etc. 

(.'3)  Before  a  noun  which  has    a  sullix  pronoun. 

But  here  also  the  article  is  sometimes  used,  especially  with  a  Gen- 
itive, or  for  the  sake  of  emphasis,  etc. ;  as  Josh.  7:  21,  ^nftjn  -pM  ,  in 
the  midst  of  my  tent,  etc. 

Note.  Hefore  Iho  predicate  of  a  sentence,  it  ia  mora  usually  omitted  :  bul  often  Inserted  »  BM 
definiteness  is  required. 

Gmrral  Remark.    In  nil  the  case-;  where  tho  article  is  omitted,  and  in  n  nich  tii'-  objeol  siill 

is  a'ejEiute,  either  the  nature  of  the  thing  itself,  or  of  its  adj its,  marks  thai  defniteoM       I    | 

in  No.  1.  above,  being  a  proper  name  makei  the  noun  iiifimn  ,■  in  No.  •-'.  the  follow  in|  Gen.  makes 

it  definite;  in  No.  3,  the  pi ran  doea  this ;  audio  in  other  caaea  of  omi n  which  i*i"in  tbeii 

nature  are  ilrjimi. 

§414.    (l)  Article  before  adjectives,     [n general,  where 

a  noun  has  the  article,  the  adjective  or  pronoun  agreeing 
with  it  must  also  have  the  article, 


IIS  §§  414,  4l5i  syntax;  abtkm: — NOUNS. 


I.  g.  Gen.  10:  12,  nbiian  1!*97\  the  great  city;  Num.  1 1  :  34, 
NTnn  Zip  ;:n  ,  this ;  place.  But  this  principle  is  not  uniform;  forsOBMP 
times  the  noun  has  ;m  article,  and  the  adjective  omits  it;  as  Gen.  89l 
2,  n-ilJI  "p.N.rj ,  the  great  stone ;  2  Sam.  G  :  3,  ~~~~  riblWt,  t/je  new 
waggon. 

(2)  The  article:  is  usually  omitted  before  adjectives, 
(a)  When  the  noun  to  which  the  adjective  belongs,  omits 
the  article;   e.  g.  "mTN  u23,  a  lame  lamb,  etc. 

Note  1.  But  when  the  noun  omits  an  article,  required  hy  the 
sense,  merely  through  the  influence  of  a  suffix  pronoun,  or  of  a  Gen. 
which  follows  it,  the  adjective  which  helongs  to  it  may  still  take  the 
article  ;  as  2  Chr.  6  :  32,  ^i"!^  f»ttS ,  thy  great  name ;  Deut.  11:7, 
blTiin  "Iff  HtoTa  ,  the  great  work  of  Jehovah. 

(b)    When  the  adjective  is  the  predicate  of  a  sentence. 

E.g.  to^ifbfijn  S^B,  God  is  good;  ft-lfr*  C3^n  "]"~12,  the  name  of 
Jehovah  he  blessed.     Compare  §  413.  Note. 

Note.  Practice  is  not  uniform  in  regard  to  the  article,  in  any  of  the 
cases  tinder  §  414.  Instances  are  not  rare,  where  the  noun  omits  the 
article,  (without  any  of  the  reasons  for  it  assigned  in  §  41.3.  ahove), 
and  the  adjective  still  has  it  ;  e.  g.  1  Sam.  19:  22,  b'nz-  i;2,  the 
great  cistern  ;  Jer.  3C  :  14.  46:  16.  50:  16,  etc.  In  some  cases  ap- 
parently of  this  nature,  the  article  is  to  he  rendered  as  a  pronoun; 
e.g.  STJirrrn  ~l"n,  [like]  '  a  wall  which  is  tottering.' 


NOUNS. 

§  415.  The  case  absolute.  By  this  is  meant,  the 
case  of  a  noun  which  stands  in  the  beginning  of  a  sen- 
tence, without  any  verb,  or  predicate,  directly  belonging 
to  it.  The  case  absolute  is  more  commonly  the  Nomina- 
tive. 

§  416.  Mcdcs  of  construction,  {a)  When  the  noun  in  the  case  ab- 
solute, is  the  real  subject  of  the  sentence  which  follows,  a  Vav  copu- 
lative succeeds  it ;  as  Job  36:  26,  "lJ3rl  NlM  TIB  ",tI?fc  >  " :,s  ,0  tfie 
number  of  his  years,  surely  there  is  no  computation,"  i.  e.  his  years  can- 
not be  computed.  (6)  The  case  absolute  is  sometimes  found,  where 
the  sense  requires  an  oblique  case  ;  and  then  the  oblique  case  is  most 
commonly  made  by  a  pronoun  ;  e.g.  Ps.  18:  31,  i-^"  —  Van  -$~,  ' as 
to  God,  perfect  is  the  way  of  him,    i.  e.  the  way  of  God   is  perfect, 


§§417—420.  syntax  of  nouns;  case.  149 


where  the  Gen.  of  btin  would  be  required;  for  the  Ace,  Ps.  74:  17, 
&rnSP  nnN  B)"jrn  y"]f3  ,  '  as  to  summer  and  winter,  thou  hast  made 
them.''  So  Jer.  6: 19,  rn  nosn'T.  Vnip,  'as  to  my  law,  they  have  ab- 
horred tV.'  (c)  Sometimes  a  participle  is  joined  with  the  Nom.,  like  the 
English  case  absolute  ;  as  1  Sam.  2:  13,  ttnT  ttnT  aJ^-^3  ,  'any  man 
offering  a  sacrifice,  the  servant  of  the  priest  came,  etc.' 

Note.   Pronouns  ate  found  in  the  case  absolute,  as  well  as  nouns. 

§  417.  The  case  absolute  is  sometimes  made,  (a)  By  the  Ace,  as 
Gen.  47:  21,  3CTTIN  ,  l  as  to  the  people,  he  led  them  from  one  town 
to  another.'  (6)  By  the  Dat. ;  as  Ps.  16:  3,  C^iipb  ,  '  as  to  the  saints, 
who  are  in  the  land,  all  my  delight  is  in  them.'  (c)  By  the  Abl. ;  as 
Gen.  2:  17,  y^l  3iC2  n;^"  V?*?.,  '"in  respect  to  the  tree  of  knowledge  of 
good  and  evil,  thou  shaft  not  eat  of  it,'  etc. 

Cases  relative. 

§  418.  Declension,  In  the  Latin  or  Greek  sense  of  the 
word,  the  Hebrew  has  not.  The  case  of  a  noun  is  mark- 
ed, therefore,  as  in  English,  cither  by  the  relation  which 
it  sustains  to  the  sentence,  (as  subject,  object,  etc.)  ;  or  by 
its  relation  to  sonic  specific  part  of  it,  (as  regimen  or  const. 
state) ;  or  by  prepositions  connected  with  it,  either  ex- 
pressed or  understood. 

§  419.  The  J\~o?n.  case  is  known  by  its  being  the  sub- 
ject of  a  sentence. 

This  may  be  either  one  noun,  or  several,  either  sing,  or  plural, 
and  the  nouns  may  be  of  the  ground-form,  or  in  the  state  of  regimen, 
(which  belongs  also  to  all  cases.)  See  also,  §  426.  Note.  §  427.  Note  2. 

§  420.  The  Genitive  case  is  most  commonly  made,  by 
a  noun  preceding  it  in  the  const,  state,  §  332  seq.  The 
noun  itself,  which  is  in  the  Genitive,   undergoes  DO  change 

of  form. 

Note.  The  Gen.  in  regimen,  is  generally  placed  immediately  after 
the  noun,  etc.  vvbicb  causes  it  to  be  put  in  the  Genitive  ;  but  in  ■  few 
cases,  some  word  closely  connected  with  the  clause  Ifl  Inserted  be- 
tween the  Gen.  and  its  antecedent.  Thus,  Gen.  7  :  6,  a*  73  ^Ti  -^-^  i 
a  flood  of  waters  was,  Heb.  a  flood  was  of  waters;  Hos.  14:  3,  ~,3 
"py  N'tDPl,  thou  wilt  forgive  all  transgression,  Heb.  all  thou-wilt-forgive 
transgression;    Is.  40:  12.   Job  15:  10.    Is.  19:  8.     One  can  scarcely 


180  §§421 428.     SVNTW   Ol'   NOUN.S  J     OKNITIVi:   CASE. 


refrain   from   believing  that   Sticfa   <  uses,  so  contrary  to  the  common 
usage  of  the  Hebrews,  must  have  originated  from  error  in  transcribing. 

§  421.  The  Gen.  is  often  expressed,  also,  by  tin  id 
of  the  relative  pronoun  with  a  preposition;  or  by  prepo- 
sitions alone;   c.  g. 

(o)  By  b  T«pBt  ,  which  belongs  to,  which  is  to  ;  as  1  Sam.  21  :  8,  '  the 
overseer  of  the  herdsmen  b-lBttS)!?  T<??Nt ,  which  belonged  to  Saul,1  i.e.  of 
the  herdsmen  of  Saul ;  Bzek.  11  :  9,  '  the  breadth  of  the  wall  "YD& 
Sbxb  ,  which  belonged  to  the  side?  i.  e.  of  the  side-wall.  This  kind  of 
circumlocution  is  more  frequent  in  the  later  Hebrew,  and  is  common, 
with  little  variation,  in  all  the  kindred  dialects. 

Note.  This  mode  of  expressing  the  (Jen.  is  most  commonly  used,  when  two  or  more  Genitives 
follow  each  other  in  succession  ;  as  Cant.  1:1. 

(6)  By  b  simply:  as  "UJ^b  "J3  ,  the  son  of  Jesse ;  Y"l&*b  h^TD,  the 
shrub  of  the  earth.  This  occurs  particularly  in  the  designation  of  time  ; 
as  Gen.  7  :  11,  '  in  the  six  hundredth  year  t;i~",'nb  ,  of  the  life  of  No- 
ah? Also  in  designating  an  author;  as  Til!;  "^'-^  ,  a  psalm  of  Da- 
vid ;  in  which  case  it  is  technically  called,  b  auctoris.  Also,  in  de- 
scribing the  materials  of  a  thing;  as  Ezra  1:11,  2^Tb  Q"V:3,  ves- 
sels of  gold. 

Note.  Instances  like  these  in  b,  are  common  in  the  kindred  dia- 
lects, and  not  unfrequent  in  Hebrew.  All  of  them  may  be  resolved 
info  the  case  a,  excepting  that  there  is,  in  b,  an  ellipsis  of  the  relative 
pronoun  XX,  as  "^b  [nTT  "IwN]  ]2  the  son  [which  is]  to  Jesse  ,  so 
y?.Nb  i"pj  the  shrub  [which  belongs]  to  the  earth;  the  600th  year  [which 
belonged]  to  the  life  of  Noah,  etc. 

(c)  By  ]73  denoting  origin ;  as  Job  6  :  25,  t3373  roi!"  the  reproof 
from  you,  i.  e.  your  reproof.     This  is  rather  unfrequent. 

§  422.  In  Hebrew,  the  Gen.  frequently  stands  where 
we  might  naturally  expect  apposition. 

E.  g.  nis  *")""  ,  the  river  of  Euphrates,  i.  e.  the  river  Euphrates; 
1  K.  10  :  15,  a^nnn  "^:N  ,  the  men  of  the  mcrchaiils,  i.  e.  the  merchant- 
men. 

§  423.  The  Gen.  sometimes  follows  adjectives,  or  ver- 
bals, which  express  qualities  belonging  to  the  noun  in 
the  Genitive. 

E.  g.  2  Sam.  4  :  4,  S^bsn  ~t!?  •>  ^aine  °ffecti  *•  e-  m  ms  ^eet !  P*- 
24 :  4,  Q1S3  "'jSa  i  Pure  °f  hands,  i.  e.  of  pure  hands ;  Prov.  6  :  32, 
3b"-™'.0^.  deficient  of  [in]  understanding.  So  in  Latin,  integer  vitae, 
scelerisquc  purus,  etc. 


vji§  424 427.    SYNTAX  OF  NOUNS  ;    DATIVE — ACCUSATIVE.        l")l 


§  424.  Significations  of  the  Genitive.  This  case  marks 
a  great  variety  of  relations  and  dependencies  in  Hebrew, 
which  can  be  better  exhibited  by  examples,  than  taught 
by  rule. 

E.  g.  Judg.  9:  24,  b?2"V  ^a  05311,  the  violence  of  [towards]  thi 
sons  of  Jerubbaal.  Prov.  20  :  2,  *]i:73  n*?^*  i  '^e  terror  of  the  king,  i.  e. 
which  he  causes.  Prov.  1  :  7,  riirr  ntf-p ,  the  fear  of  Jehovah,  i.  e. 
reverence  towards  him.  1  Sam.  14:  15,  ESTl'bJJ  ri~nn,  the  terror  of 
God,  i.  e.  that  which  God  hath  sent.  Is.  26  :  11,  OJ>~nK3p.,  jealousy 
of  [for]  the  people.  Lev.  26:  45,  OTJttJjfl  fl'Ha,  covenant  o/'[with] 
the  elders.  1  Sam.  16  :  20,  D^r  "133»?,  the  ass  of  bread,  i.  e.  which  car- 
ries bread.  Ezek.  35  :  5,  y£  flW  ,  the  sin  of  the  end,  i.  e.  which  brings 
consummation.  Is.  34  :  5,  ",ft"")i7  C£ ,  the  people  of  my  curse,  i.  e.  whom 
I  have  cursed.  Is.  54  :  9,  ft:  "TO  ,  the  waters  of  Noah,  i.  e.  of  the  time 
of  Noah. 

§  425.  Sometimes  the  Genitive,  following  an  adjective, 
is  used  as  a  noun  of  multitude,  and  the  adjective  then  de- 
notes a  part  of  this  multitude. 

E.g.  Prov.  15  :  20.  21:  20,  DnN  ^03  ,  the  foolish  of  men,  i.  e.  foolish 
men.  1  Sam.  17 :  40,  '  five  D^IN  "^Vrt  smooth  of  stones,''  i.  e.  smooth 
stones  ;  Job  41:  7,  D^raa  "•D,,SJM,  the  strong  of  shields,  i.  e.  strong  shields. 

§  426.  Dative  case.  This  case  is  marked  bj  7  signi- 
fying to  or  for. 

Note.  In  a  few  cases  b  stands  before  the  Nom. ;  as  1  Chron.  3 : 
2, '  the  third  was  ci'rcnxr  ,  Absalom?  Sometimes  before  the  Ace.  ; 
as  Ezra  8  :  16,  'I  sent  "iTiplrN^,  Eliezer,  etc.'  The  latter  usage  la 
common  in  Syriac. 

§  427.  Accusative  case.  This  is  sometimes  designated 
by  Dtt ,  Tltt  ;    otherwise  it  is  without  any  distinctive  sign. 

Note  1.  The  use  of  ntf  with  the  Ace.  is  limited,  (a)  To  nouns 
with  the  article,  (b)  To  nouns  having  a  Gen.  or  sufiix  after  them, 
(c)  To  proper  names.  Consequently,  it  is  used  only  in  casea  where  a 
definite  idea  is  conveyed  by  the  noun.  But  in  poetry,  this  usage  is  not 
observed  with  any  strictness. 

Note  2.  Sometimes  nN  is  used  before  the  Nom. ;  as  2  K.  6 :  5, 
7T-)2-nN1  ,  '  and  the  iron  fell  into  the  water.'  Especially  before  the 
Nom.  of  passive  verbs  ;  as  Gen.  17:5,  £J93J~rtfj  ,  '  thy  name  shall  no 
more  be  called  Abram.'  Sometimes,  before  the  Nom.  of  neuter  verbs  ; 
as  2  Sam.  11:25,  ntn  -U^n-nat  ,k  this  matter,  may  it  not  displease  thee; 


1;V2         §§  428 — 431.  syntax  of  nouns  ;  constri  n  t-hm 


Ezek.  35 :  10,  D^iarj  ""r^-nN  ,  '  the  two  nations  arc  mine.'     See  nX  in 
the  Lex. 

§  428.  Use  of  the  Accusative  case.  This  commonly, 
as  in  other  languages,  denotes,  (l)  The  objjecl  of  a  transi- 
tive verb.  (2)  In  a  great  number  of  cases,  it  forms  ad- 
vcrbial  designations  of  time,  place,  measure,  etc.  (3)  It  is 
also  used,  in  all  those  cases  where  the  Greeks  understand 
yard,  and  the  Latins,  secundum,  quoad,  etc.      E.  g. 

(a)  Place  whither ;  as  2  Chr.  20 :  36,  tt^ttJ^R  n=>V.b  ,  to  go  to  Tar- 
shish.  (6)  Place  where;  as  Gen.  18:  1,  brrN~_nnE,  at  the  door  of 
the  tent,  (c)  Time  when  and  how  long  ;  as  3~\2  ,  in  the  evening;  "1^.2, 
in  the  morning.  So  Gen.  27:44,  CHnN  DV3^  ,  during  certain  days, 
(d)  Measure ;  as  Gen.  7  :  20,  '  the  waters  rose  fifteen  n*:N  cubits.1 
(c)  The  material  from  which  any  thing  is  made  ;  as  Gen.  2:7,'  God 
formed  man  *1B5  ,  of  dust  from  the  earth.'  See  §  511.  Note  1.  {/) 
Cases  where  ymto.  would  he  implied  in  Greek ;  as  1  K.  16  :  23,  '  lame 
"Pra^-Di*  as  to  his  feet ,-'  Ps.  3:8,'  thou  hast  smitten  all  thine  ene- 
mies ^n^. ,  as  to  [on]  the  cheek  bone.''  (g)  Cases  where  a  noun  is  taken 
in  an  adverbial  signification  ;  as  Deut.  23:  24,  ~3T: ,  voluntarily  ;  Ezek. 
11  :  19,  "ItlN  3b  ,  unanimously  ;  Ex.  24  :  3,  irut  J?lp,  unanimously,  etc. 

(.3)  The  Accusative  is  sometimes  put  after  participles, 
or  verbal  nouns  with  an  active  signification,  and  is  govern- 
ed by  them. 

E.  g.  2  K.  4 :  1,  nir!^-rJ<  N^  ,  fearing  Jehovah  ;  Is.  1 1  :  9,  ?!??> 
yjifPTiN  ,  the  knowledge  of  Jehovah,  lit.  the  state  of  knowing  Jehovah. 

§  429.  Vocative  case.  This  more  generally  has  the 
article  to  designate  it;   but  not  always. 

§  430.  Ablative  case.  This  takes  ]12  .from,  out  of;  1 .  in. 
by  ;  U2,  with,  etc.  In  other  cases,  the  preposition  is  mere- 
ly implied. 

Construct  State. 

§  431.  A  noun  in  this  state,  usually  precedes  another 
noun  in  the  Genitive ;  and  this  without  any  intervening 
word,  §420.  §332  seq. 

It  also,  in  all  cases  where  the  nature  of  the  vowels  admits,  suf- 
fers some  change  in  its  form,  in  order  to  designate  this  state,  §  333. 


§§  432 — 434.  syntax  of  nouns;  construct  state.         l.">3 

§  432.  The  form  of  the  const,  state,  however,  is  not 
limited  to  nouns  before  a  Gen.  case  ;  it  often  appeari  be- 
fore nouns  in  other  cases,  governed   by  prepositions;   and 

sometimes  before  adjectives,  ")'CN  ,  and  1  copulative  ;   e.g. 

(a)  Before  a  noun  with  2;  as  Is.  9:  2,  "V^p z  n-r:r  .//ir  joy  in 
[of]  harvest;  Is.  5:  11,  "ip.25  'WS'iJM  ,  who  rise  early  in  the  morning. 
(6)  Before  a  noun  with  b  ;  as  Is.  56  :  10,  t3*3b  ^"^  ,  lovers  cf  slum- 
ber, (c)  With  bN;  as  Is.  14:  20,  -nn— '334t^bN  *yyf* ,  going  down  to 
the  stones  of  the  pit.  (d)  With  ni*  ;  as  Jer.  33:  22,  the  Levites  *-->-': 
TjN ,  who  served  me.  (e)  With  ]H ;  as  Jer.  23  :  23,  31TDH  "TTVK ,  a 
God  near  at  hand.  (/)  With  by  ;  as  Judg.  5:10,  "J  ■}"":?  "-'"H 1  w,in 
go  on  the  way. 

{g)  Sometimes  before  adjectives;  as  2  K.  12:  10,  Ihij  "JT"?^ ,  one 
coffer  (§  440.  a);  Is.  17:  10,  p*3*3*y  'spl ,  pleasant  plants  ;  see  § 
445.  §  440.  (A)  Before  -i;L\V  ;  as  Lev.  4  :  24,  TIN  Sipa,  //'<•  pioM 
which.  So  also,  even  if  TwN  is  only  implied,  as  Is.  29  :  1,  ~:~  n'np 
TIT  ,  the  city  [*VgM  where]  Dam'd  c/we/f,  rp~)p  being  in  the  const,  form. 
See  also  1  Sam.  3:  13.  Jer.  48:  36.  Lam.  1  :  14.  Ps.  81  :  6.  (i)  Be- 
fore I  copulative  ;  as  Is.  33  :  6,  r>v Ti  n^D~  ,  wisdom  and  knowledge. 
So  also,  Is.  35:  2.  Is.  51  :  21. 

§  433.  In  a  few  cases,  the  const,  form  is  .employed,  where  we 
should  naturally  expect  the  absolute;  but  most  of  these  are  cases  oi 
such  a  nature,  as  shew  that  some  noun,  etc.  in  the  Gen.  after  such 
const,  form,  is  implied,  although  not  expressed. 

E.  g.  2  K.  9:  17,  '  I  see  nypiB  ,  a  multitude,  i.  e.  the  multitude  of 
Jehu,  as  the  preceding  part  of  the  verse  shews.  Ps.  74  :  19,  '  give 
not  rrnb  ,  to  the  beasts,"1  i.  e.  to  the  beasts  of  the  forest  (n<in),  or  to 
the  wild  beast.  So  in  Ps.  16  :  3,  "'"V^N  is  probably  for  Yytt]  ^y-$  , 
as  supplied  from  the  preceding  part  of  the  verse. 

For  the  supposed  use  of  the  abs.  instead  of  the  const.,  see  §  435. 

§  434.  Const,  stale  or  regimen,  has  reference  solely  to  (be  rela- 
tion of  the  two  nouns  etc.  connected  together  in  this  state  ;  but  not 
to  the  relation  these  may  sustain,  in  regard  to  the  rest  of  the  sentence. 
Hence  the  const,  state  is  found  in  all  the  cases  of  nouns;  e.  £.  (<')  hi 
the  Nom.  ;  as  1  K.  12  :  22,  trrrfrNrj  ^39 .  '  the  word  of  God  came  to 
Shemaiah.'  (6)  In  the  Gen.;  as  Job  12:  24,  fytn-p*  ^IN")  a: , 
the  heart  of  the  princes  of  the  people  of  the  land ;  where  ^-j-N"?  i>  '"  '''•■ 
Gen.  in  regard  to  3r  ,  and  in  the  const,  as  it  respects  t"_  ;  while  ~'-l  ll 
in  the  Gen.  with  regard  to  "%'Nn ,  and  in  the  const  ;i-  it  respects  V"^*$n. 
(c)  In  the  Dat. ;  as  Job  3  :  20,  ic:  ""yob  ,  to  those  who  arc  grievod  m 
20 


154  §§    VVt,  W).    SYNTAX    Of    MilNS  j     APPOSITION. 


spirit,  where  the  former  word  is  in  the  const,  state  and  Dative,  (d)  In 
the  Ace.  ;  as  1  8am.  9 :  27,  t  that  I  may  show  thee  D1-';^  "i;--nx, 
the  word  of  God, ,'  where  -iSi  is  in  the  const,  state  Accusative.  (<•)  In 
the  Voc;  as  2  K.  1  :  13,  DVjbtfH  tttyt  ,  O  man  of  Cod.  (f)  In  the 
Aid. ;  as  Ps.  17  :  4,  *pljBiB  1313  ,  by  the  word  of  thy  lips,  where  the 
first  noun  is  in  the  const,  state  Ablative. 

Apposition. 

§  435.  In  Hebrew,  two  nouns  designating  the  same 
thing,  are  not  only  placed  in  apposition  (as  is  usual  in  oth- 
er languages),  but  apposition  is  frequently  employed,  where 
the  Gen.  might  be  used  and  would  naturally  be  expected. 

E.  g.  Prov.  22:21,  n»K  C""lEN ;,  n-ords  [which  are]  truth,  i.e. 
words  of  truth;  Zech.'l  :  13,  b^aha  S",",.2':: ,  words  [which  are]  con- 
solations, i.  e.  words  of  consolation;  Ex.  24:  5,  E3*/9b3J  az",~n"  ,  of- 
ferings [which  are]  peace-offerings. 

Note.  Of  two  nouns  thus  placed,  one  is  frequently  used  as  an  adjective  ;  as  in  the  examples 
above,  we  may  render,  true  icords,  consolatory  words,  etc.     See  $  440  seq. 

§  435.  a.  Nouns  are  usually  put  in  apposition,  which 
designate  weight,  measures,  time,  etc. 

E.  g.  2  K.  7  :  1,  ft\b  M«D ,  a  seah  [of]  fine  meal ;  ,2  K.  5  :  23, 
51C.3  tS^SS,  two  talents  [of]  silver;  Gen.  41  :  1,  D"^*  ^"X'-'^  •  tZi:0 
years  [of]  time  ;  1  K.  7 :  42,  D^fa"!  a^lD  ^}.p  ,  two  rows  [of]  pome- 
granates ;  Ezek.  22:  18,  >\Z3  D^aO  ,  dross  [of]  silver.  Comp.  §  463. 

These  last  instances  may  be  explained,  also,  by  supposing  the  latter  noun  to  be  in  the  Accusa- 
tive and  used  adverbially,  as  it  is  in  the  Arabic  ;  or  (which  amounts  to  the  same  thing)  we  may 
pay  that  the  latter  noun  is  in  an  oblique  case,  and  governed  by  a  preposition  understood,  e.  g. 
talents  [in]  silver,  etc.     Comp.  §  428. 

Note  1.  Sometimes  nouns  are  put  in  apposition,  where  the  latter 
noun  designates  a  whole  or  genus,  of  which  the  former  designates  only 
a  part  or  species ;  e.  g.  Judg.  5  :  13,  Z?  S^-P^N  ,  the  nobles  [of,  among] 
the  people. 

Note  2.  Some  examples  occur  of  apparent  apposition,  in  which 
the  latter  noun  is  probably  in  the  Gen.,  by  reason  of  a  word  implied  ; 
e.  g.  rriNSS  ["'"Vn]  Si1}}"!?,  Jehovah  [God  of]  hosts.  So  probably,  Is. 
30:20,  yrjb  [i»j  a^a  ,  water  [water  of ]  trouble;  ISN  [WSt£]  !TOn, 
the  glow  [the  glow  of]  his  anger. 


§§  436,  437.  syntax  of  nouns  ;  gender — number.         155 


Gender  and  Number  of  Nouns. 

§436.  Gender.  The  Hebrew,  having  do  neuter  gen- 
der, commonly  employs  the  fem.  to  express  it:  but  some- 
times the   masculine,  §  321.  Note  1. 

E.  g.  Ps.  27:4, '  I  have  asked  nrjK  ,  one  thing  ;'  Ps.  12 :  4,  nV;'-;:  . 
great  things  ;  Gen.  42  :  30,  nViJS  ,  hard  things,  etc.  Less  often,  the 
masculine ;  as  Prov.  8  :  6,  D"1"!1^? ,  noble  things. 

Note.  The  fem.  is  sometimes  used,  also,  in  a  collective  sense,  for 
objects  which  are  properly  masculine  ;  as  Mic.  1:11,  12,  n^ttJV,1  in- 
habitress,  i.e.  inhabitants;  Mic.  7:8,  10,  n^'j*  ,  enemies.  So  yv  a 
tree,  T"t±y  a  grove  of  trees,  etc.  So  in  Arabic,  the  pluralisfractus,  which 
is  used  as  a  collective,  very  often  has  a  fem.  form. 

§  437.  Number,  (l)  The  Hebrews  often  employ 
nouns  sing,  in  a  collective  sense,  especially  national  denomi- 
nations; e.  g.  *^"2~n,  the  Cauaanitc,  i.  e.  the  inhabitants 
oi'  Canaan,  etc. 

(2)  For  the  sake  of  emphasis,  the  Hebrews  commonly 
employed  most  of  the  words  which  signify  Lord.  (><  </, 
etc.  in  the  plur.  form,  but  with  the  sense  of  the  singular. 
Tins  is  called  the  nlwalis  cxccllcntiac. 

Examples.  "piX  Lord,  in  all  the  forms  of  the  plural  except  "^IN 
my  masters;  the  form  *2*MX  is  always  used  with  the  sense  of  the 
sing.,  for  God.  (b)  ~vrN  God,  in  all  the  forms  of  the  plural,  (c) 
^3J2  lord,  in  all  its  forms.  (</)  C^Hp  ,  the  most  Holy  One,  Ho<.  12: 
1.  Prov.  9  :  10.  30  :  3.  Jos.  24  :  19.  (e)  ""yd  the  Almighty,  is  proba- 
bly of  the  plural  form,  §  325.  6.  (/)  D^S^FI  household  god,  as  sing. 
1  Sam.  19:  13,  1G.  (g)  Occasionally,  in  a  few  other  words;  as  Job 
35  :  10,  l  God  ->Z-V,  my  Maker  ;'  Ecc.  12:  I,  VT^i  thy  Creator.  See 
also  Is.  22  :  11.  42  :  5.  Ps.  149  :  2.  Comp.  §  404.  ' 

(.3)  The  plural,  especially  in  poetry,  is  not  unfrequen> 
ly  used  where  we  might  expect  the  singular. 

E.  g.  Job  G  :  3,  '  the  sand  EF122  ,  of  the  seas,'  i.  e.  of  the  sea.      Even 
where  only  one  can  po88ibly   be   meant,  is  this  the  case  :   a>  Judg.    I  -' 
7,  '  he  was  buried  "1"P"2  ,  in  the  towns  of  Gilead,"  i.  e.  in  a  town  ;   Gen. 
8  :  4,  c  the  ark  rested  "*~}.~)~ 3,  on  the  mountains  of  Ararat,  i.  e.  on  the 
mountain  ;  Job  21  :  32,  rri*ttUt ,  the  graves,  i.  e.  the  grave. 


|.">(»  §§438 — 440.    SYNTNX   OF  NOUNS  ?    PECULIAR  -M.  M  I 

Peculiar  tignificancy  attached  to  certain  modes  of  empfoi/iinj 
nouns. 

^  438.  Repetition  of  nouns.  The  Hebrews  frequently 
repeated  nouns  without  the  copula  1  between  them,  lot 
various  purposes  ;    viz. 

{a)  To  denote  multitude;  e.  g.  Gen.  14  :  10,  "nrn  rvnN2  hVltt^, 
pits  pits  of  bitumen,  i.  e.  many  pits,  etc.  (6)  To  denote  distribution ; 
e.  g\  Gen.  32  :  17,  Tfyalfc  -r.r  -»•$»  ,/ZorA:  y?oc&  6y  ifse//",  i.  e.  each  flock 
by  itself,  (c)  To  denote  all,  every;  e.g.  Deut.  14:22,  rtW  hfltj, 
y«/r  year,  i.  e.  every  year.  Sometimes  also  with  a  copula ;  as  Deut. 
32:  7,  hlli  "H"  ,  generation  and  generation,  i.  e.  all  generations,  (a*) 
To  denote  intensity  ;  e.  g.  Ecc.  7  :  21,  pto£  pfoj  .  deep  deep,  i.  e.  very 
deep.  So  earnestness  in  warning  or  threatening,  in  grief,  joy,  etc.  is 
usually  expressed  by  repetition. 

Note.  In  order  to  denote  intensity,  it  is  not  always  necessary  that 
the  same  word  should  be  repeated ;  but  a  synonymous  word,  or  a  word 
of  similar  sound  and  signification,  is  often  substituted  with  the  same 
effect ;  as  Ps.  40:  3,  "p.'rr  t^u  ,  clay  of  mire,  i.  e.  the  miry  clay  ;  Job  30  : 
3,  PWt'tDXJl  ttNitti,  wasting  and  destruction,  i.  e.  great  wasting,  etc. 

§  430.  Repetition  with  the  copula  1 ,  usually  denotes 
diversity. 

E.  g.  Deut.  25  :  13,  13.&J1  *2N  ,  stone  and  stone,  i.  e.  different  stones 
or  weights  ;  Ps.  12  :  3,  3b]  3^3  ,  with  a  heart  and  a  heart,  i.  e.  with 
different  hearts,  with  deceit. 

§  440.  JYoitns  employed  ets  Adjectives.  Of  two  nouns 
in  regimen,  one  is  frequently  employed  as  an  adjective,  in 
order  to  qualify  the  other. 

This  principle  is  regulated  thus  :  (a)  The  second  or  Gen.  noun 
commonly  qualifies  the  first;  e.  g.  PCD  ,:3,  vessels  of  silver,  i.e.  silver 
vessels  ;  ub"1"  riThN  ,  possession  of  eternity,  i.  e.  everlasting  possession  ; 
Is.  24 :  10,  WPlTi^np  ,  city  nf  desolation,  i.  e.  desolate  city  ;  Gen.  34  : 
30,  ™l£073  yjto  ,  men  of  number,  i.  e.  which  can  be  numbered,  few  men. 

Note.  This  construction  is  a  very  common  one  in  all  languages; 
and  the  Hebrew  not  unfrequently  adopts  it.  when  adjectives  might  be 
employed;  as  wNl"  "j~3,  priest  of  the  head,  i.  e.  high  priest,  instead 

(6)  Sometimes  the  first  noun  qualifies  the  second  ;  e.  g.  rt/3ip 
"PT'nN:  ,  the  tallness  of  his  cedars,  i.  e.  his  tall  cedars  ;  hw2  ftt'itf 2  ,  the 


§§441 — 444.    SYNTAX  OP  NODNS  J     PECULIAR  SIGNIF.  UR 


fatness  ofhisjlesh,  i.  e.  his  fat  flesh  ;  DT:<n~b3,  the  whole  of  men,  i.  e. 
all  men.     But  this  construction  is  less  frequent  than  the  other. 

§  441.  When  two  or  more  nouns  are  connected  In 
the  verb  of  existence,  rPH  ,  expressed  or  understood,  those 
which  designate  quality  are  usually  employed  as  adjectives. 

E.  g.  Gen.  1:2,'  the  earth  Trial  Wn  ~rrrr ,  was  desolation  and 
emptiness,'  i.  e.  desolate  and  empty  ;  Ps.  10:  5,  tpttBUSB  c'"n73  ,  high- 
ness [are]  thy  statutes,  i.  e.  they  are  high,  out  of  sight;  Job  8  :  9,  r;73n 
^aft:^  ,  yesterday  [are]  we,  i.  e.  of  yesterday,  hesterni  sumus. 

§  442.  Nouns  with  prepositions  prefixed,  are  some- 
times used  as  adjectives. 

E.  g.  Ps.  77:  14,  ^3"H  ttftpa,  in  holiness  [is]  thy  way,  i.  e.  thy 
way  is  holy  ;  1  Chr.  26 :  14,  b3'i2  Y*^ ,  a  counsellor  with  wiidom,  i.  e. 
a  wise  counsellor;  Ps.  17  :  9,  'iC:3  "^N,  my  enemies  in  respect  to  life, 
i.  e.  my  deadly  enemies. 

§  443.  Of  two  nouns  connected  by  a  conjunction,  one 
is  sometimes  employed  as  an  adjective. 

E.  g.  Gen.  4:  4,  ■p-jajjrjicn  iaNi:  ni-nDaiq,  of  the  firstlings  of  his 
flock  and  of  the  fat  of  them,  i.  e.  of  the  fat  firstlings,  etc.;  Gen.  3:16, 
^phn"!  ''jria^y  ,  thy  pain  and  thy  conception,  i.  e.  thy  painful  concep- 
tion. Perhaps  Ps.  119  :  168.  This  construction  may  be  called  lhndi- 
adys,  i.  e.  ev  dice  dvotv. 

§  444.     The   Hebrews   sometimes  used  circumlocution 

to  express  qualities,  which  in  other   languages  are  usually 

designated  by  adjectives. 

Examples,  (a)  *i;,,tf  man;  as  D^")i~  85*W  fl  man  of  words,  i.  e.  an 
eloquent  man  ;  Ibh  tfhs  ,  a  man  of  piety,  i.  e.  a  pious  man.  {b)  D^ntt 
men ;  as  3*1  "TIE ,  men  of  hunger,  i.  e.  hungry  men.  (c)  bVt  lord, 
possessor  ;  as  "1S>UJ  ?3?3  ,  possessor  of  hair,  i.  e.  hairy  ;  tr^lS  *??  j  J"'s- 
sessors  of  a  covenant,  i.  e.  bound  together  by  covenant,  (d)  72  ton,  ami 
n2  daughter  ;  as  b^—ja,  son  of  strength,  i.  e.  a  hero  ;  ni.TZ-p.  son  of 
death,  i.  e.  condemned,  worthy  of  death  ;  Mlt;  "jS ,  son  of  a  ymr.  i.  <\ 
a  yearling.  So  *VtfJn  rn33  ,  the  daughters  of  song,  i.  e.  singing  women, 
Ecc.  12:  4.     See  Lex. 

Note.     The  first  noun  in  constructions  of  this  kind   is  somelinir- 
omitted,  and  can  be  supplied   only  from  the  sense  of  the  passage  ;  a- 
Job  31  :  32,  H-}N  way,  for  rn&   "}3  ,  son  of  tin-  w?y,    i.  e.   a  tra\ill<  1 
Prov.  17:  4,  *tp*j  falsehood,  for  a  man  qf  falsehood,  i.  <\    a  liar.     So 
Gen.  15:  2,  pi£72Q,  for  son  of  Damascus,  i.  e.  a  native  of  Dauia->  ;tU 


1.3N  §§   I  I"> — 147.    >vm.\\;    u.ji.i  i  n  i.> 


ADJECTIVKS. 

Cs  115.  The  Hebrew,  like  other  languages,  often  su|>- 
plies  the  place  of  nouns  by  adjectives  taken  in  an  abstract 
or  neuter  sense. 

E.  g.  Jos.  24:  14,  D^EP ,  integrity,  lit.  upright,  innocent;  Job  20: 
22,  ^53$,  trouble,  lit.  troublesome,  etc.  Ps.  10:  10.  So  "n  rvi'N  ,  a 
woman  of  evil,  i-  e.  an  evil  woman,  where  v~\  is  constructed  as  a  noun 
in  the  Gen.  ;  N?#73  "'»  ,  waters  of  fulness,  i.  e.  full  streams,  instead  of 
D^btt  W]12  .  Comp.  in  Greek,  to  y.ulov,  to  notfov,  etc. 

Note.  In  this  way  some  adjectives  are  constantly  used  as  epithets 
of  persons  or  things  ;  as  "i^N  strong,  for  l  God ;'  ""P3K  strong,  for 
'  bull,  horse,  hero  ;'  rrarr  hot,  for  '  the  sun  ;'  Tfcdb  while,  for  i  the 
moon'  etc.  So  for  God,  we  say  in  English,  the  Almighty,  the  Omnipo- 
tent, etc.  in  French,  PEternel,  etc.     This  is  called  the  epitheton  ornans. 

§446.  Adjectives  as  predicates  of  a  sentence,  (a)  When 
an  adjective  is  the  predicate  of  a  sentence,  and  the  verb 
of  existence  (JITi)  is  omitted,  the  adjective  stands  regular- 
ly before  the  noun,  and  is  usually  without  the  article. 

E.  g.  Gen.  4:13,  *lh9  V'na  ,  great  [is]  my  iniquity.  In  a  very  few 
cases,  the  adjective  stands  after  the  noun;  as  in  Gen.  19:  20.  1  Sam. 
12:  17. 

(b)  Such  adjective  generally  agrees,  in  number  and 
gender,  with  the  noun  to  which  it  relates;  but  there  are 
manv  apparent  exceptions. 

Note.  These  exceptions  may  be  explained,  on  the  principle  that 
when  adjectives  are  used  as  predicates,  they  are  often  to  be  taken  in. 
an  abstract  sense,  as  nouns  of  the  neuter  gender.  Thus  Ps.  73  :  28, 
5TD  "*\  DTrbfl  r>3"!R  approach  to  God  [is]  to  me  delightful,  lit.  a  plea- 
sant or  delightful  thing,  the  noun  being  in  the  fern,  and  the  adj.  in  the 
masc,  and  used  as  a  neuter  noun,  §  445.  So  Gen.  27:  29,  n'HJJ  Tj"n~)X, 
the  cursers  of  thee  [are]  cursed,  lit.  an  accursed  thing;  Is.  21  :  2,  n"Tr 
flUTp  ,  the  vision  [is]  a  cruel  thing.  So  Virgil,  Aen.  iv.  569,  varium  et 
mutabile  semper  femina  ;  Statius,  Theb.  n.  399,  blandum  potestas  ;  Acbill. 
Tat.,  iiovtifjov  f.uv  yvftj.  So  to  nuv,  tu  navru,  the  universe,  rational 
or  material. 

§  447.  Article  before  an  adjective  used  as  a  predicate. 
When  this  happens,  the  verb  of  existence  rPH ,  or  its 
equivalent  the  pronoun  fc^n ,  is  usually  inserted. 


$§448 — 453.  syntax;  adjectives.  168 

E.  g.  1  Sam.  17  :  14,  ]Bj5rt  8Mfi  -,'-,  David  was  the  smallest,  i.  e. 
the  youngest.  In  cases  of  this  kind,  the  adjective  is  placed  after  the 
noun  to  which  it  relates. 

Note.  In  like  manner,  participles  used  for  the  Pres.  tense  of  verbs, 
sometimes  stand  as  predicates  after  the  noun,  and  take  the  article  ; 
e.  g.  Deut.  3:21,  rri  iort  Sp3^5  ,  thine  eyes  see. 

§  448.  Adjectives  qualifying  nouns.  Adjectives  used  as 
epithets,  or  simply  qualifying  nouns,  (so  also  participles 
and  pronominal  adjectives),  generally  agree  with  the  noun 
in  gender  and  number. 

§  449.  Exceptions,  (a)  The  pluralis  excellentiae,  commonly  but  not 
always,  takes  an  adjective  singular,  §  437.  2.  E.  g.  Is.  19  :  4,  tP3IlM 
JT^jP  a  hard  master;  on  the  contrary,  Jos.  24 :  19,  Ea^hs  OVrtK ,  a 
holy  God. 

{b)  Nouns  of  multitude  in  the  singular,  commonly  but  not  always, 
require  a  plural  adjective  ;*  e.  g.  Jer.  50:  6,  n'nis  "jX^: ,  a  wandering 
flock. 

§  450.  Dual  nouns  take  plural  adjectives  ;  e.  g.  ^',*,, 
DID") ,  weak  hands. 

§  451.  Nouns  of  common  gender,  having  more  than  one 
adjective,  admit  both  the  masc.  and  fern,  forms  in  the  ad- 
jectives. 

E.  g.   1  K.  19:  1 1,  pJHI   fTlp"n    ftVl ,  «  great  and  strong  -wind. 

§  452.  Position  of  Adjectives.  When  they  qualify  noun«,  thov  are 
usually  put  after  them.  The  number  of  apparent  exceptions  to  this 
rule  is  so  very  small,  and  some  of  them  so  equivocal,  that  it  appears 
dubious  whether  real  exceptions  are  to  be  admitted.  See  howevpr 
Ps.  89  :  51,  CD^JSy  S",2"n~V3  ,  all  the  numerous  people ;  also  Is.  53:  11: 
Jer.  3:  7,  10.  16:  1G. 

Note.  The  pronominal  adjective  tt|  this,  not  unfrequently  pre- 
cedes the  noun  with  which  it  agrees. 

§  453.  When  an  adjective  serves  to  qualify  two  or  mon-  coons, 
it  is  usually  put  after  them  ;  and  the  gender  of  it  may  be  either  masc, 
as  the  more  worthy,  or  the  same  a-;  the  getider  of  the  last  noun.  F..  g. 
Neh.  9:  13,  CP3TU  rilXS5!  Q\$h ,  good  laws  and  statu/,- .  Ezek.  I:  II, 
rnT^D  dffE'Di  Cn'1:!: ,  their  faces  and  wings  were  separated.  Here 
niTnS  ,  a  part,  adjective,  is  fern. ;  as  is  the  noun  also,  which  oexl 
precedes  it. 

*  Note.  When  the  Mncord  is  directed  by  the  u  »"•,  as  in  a.  b,  rather  ihu  l>y  Ibe  gri 
cat  form  of  tlic  noun,  it  \i  called  Oonstrttttio  nil  sensum. 


100  §§454,465.  syntax;  adjectives — compari-'n 

Comparison  of  adjectives. 

§  4/34.  (l)  Comparative  decree,  (a)  The  comparative 
degree  it)  adjectives  is  made  by  using  "\12  (prae,in  tomparu 
son  of)  after  the  adjective,  and  before  the  noun  with 
which  the  comparison  is  made. 

E.g.  Judg.  14:  18,  Un^'a  p^nTj,  sweeter  than  honey  ;  Ps.  19:  11. 

Note.  In  the  same  manner  also  ]£  is  used,  to  make  a  comparison 
after  nouns  or  verbs  signifying  condition  or  quality.  E.  g.  Is.  52:  14, 
4  his  visage  UTtfE  n^u;73  was  marred  more  than  any  man's  ;  Gen.  41: 
40,  ^'373  b^N  ,  /  will  be  greater  than  thou. 

(A)  But  ]E  before  the  Inf.  mood,  implies  a  negative* 

In  this  case,  it  may  be  translated,  so  that  not,  or,  than  that,  accord- 
ing as  the  sentence  is  constructed ;  e.  g.  Gen.  4:  13,  RliBSB  ^9  H*W  , 
my  iniquity  is  great  so  that  it  cannot  be  pardoned,  or,  greater  than  that  it 
can  be  pardoned. 

(c)  Sometimes  the  adjective  necessary  to  make  out  the  comparison 
is  omitted  ;  as  Is.  10:  10,  '  their  gods  Dr'^ITE  ,  [were  more  powerful] 
than  those  of  Jerusalem.'* 

Note.  In  the  Rabbinic,  comparison  is  made  by  <m\xyi*  ,  more.  In 
the  N.  Test.,  the  positive  degree  of  adjectives  is  not  unfrequently  us- 
ed for  both  the  other  degrees  ;  in  imitation  of  the  Hebrew,  which  does 
not  vary  the  form  of  adjectives  for  the  sake  of  comparison. 

§  455.   (2)  Superlative  degree.      The    Hebrew    has   no 

appropriate  form  to  mark  this,  but  expresses  it  by  various 

circumlocutions. 

E.  g.  (a)  By  the  article  prefixed  to  an  adjective  of  the  positive 
degree  ;  as  1  Sam.  12  :  14,  '  David  was  "JEj^n  ,  the  smallest.  The  Ara- 
bian makes  his  superlative,  by  prefixing  the  article  to  the  comparative 
form.  (6)  By  a  Gen.  or  suffix  following  the  adjective  ;  as  2  Chr.  21  : 
17,  "P:2  'pBjD ,  the  smallest  of  his  sons  ;  Mic.  7:4,  —  2TD  ,  the  best  of 
them,  (c)  A  superlative  of  intensity  is  formed,  when  a  word  is  re- 
peated and  put  in  the  Gen.  plural ;  OS  O^'lB'ISfl  w"7.j? ,  holy  of  holies, 
i.  e.  the  most  holy  place  ;  Ecc.  1  :  1,  E^:"  "r^rt ,  vanity  of  vaiiities, 
i.  e.  exceedingly  vain.  So  1  K.  8  :  27,  heaven  of  heavens,  i.  e.  the  high- 
est heaven  ;  Gen.  9  :  25,  servajit  of  servants,  i.  e.  a  most  abject  servant ; 
Deut.  10:  17,  God  of  gods,  i.  e.  the  supreme  God  etc.  {d)  The  com- 
parative degree  sometimes  necessarily  expresses  the  sense  of  the  su- 
perlative ;  as  Gen.  3:1,'  now  the  serpent  was  n'TCSn  rnn  1:30  Din? , 
cunning  above  all  the  beasts  of  the  field,   i.  e.  the  most  cunning  of  all. 


§§  4">6 — 4"59.  syntax;  mmerals.  I'll 


(e)  Some  nouns  necessarily  imply  a  superlative  ;  viz.  (1)  tBtll  head, 
as  Ps.  137:  6,  "fihaig  -Xi ,  the  head  of  my  joy,  i.  e.  my  h ii^t  1 « - 1  joy. 
(2)  ^DZjirst  born,  ns  Is.  1  1:  30,  2,r-!  "■"TDS  ,  first  born  of  the  wretch- 
ed, i.e.  most  wretched;  Job  18:  13,  rPE  "lis:-; ,  the  Jirst  born  of  death, 
i.e.  the  most  terrible  death. 

§  456.  Besides  the  above  modes  of  expressing  a  super- 
lative, the  Hebrew  exhibits  a  variety  of  n:<  thbds  b\  which 
intensity  of  meaning  is  denoted. 

E.  g.  (a)  By  "tN'O  very,  or  "UN-:  14*53  very  very  ;  as  Gen.  7:  19,  '  the 
waters  increased  *Wa  1J*H  very  exceedingly,  etc.'  (b)  By  repeating  the 
same  word  ;  see  §  438.  (c)  By  two  synonymous  words,  see  §  438.  f/, 
Note,  {d)  By  repeating  the  same  word  and  putting  it  in  the  Gen. 
when  repeated ;  as  Hos.  10:  15,  D3n?l  flJPH  ,  the  evil  of  your  evil  i.  e. 
your  base  wickedness.  Sometimes  a  synonyme  is  used  in  the  Gen. 
instead  of  the  same  word  being  repeated,  §  438.  d,  Note,  (e)  The 
name  of  God  placed  after  a  noun  is  intensive ;  as  Jonah  3:  3,  j  a  great 
city  tZPrrrwYT;,  before  GodS  i.e.  really  or  truly  very  great;  Gen.  10: 
9,  '  Nimrod  was  a  mighty  hunter  fiirP  ?£Bb  ,  before  Jehovah,'1  i.  e. 
exceedingly  expert  in  hunting.  So  Acts  7:  20, '  Moses  was  uarfloj  u<> 
0to>,fair  to  God,"1  i.  e.  very  fair;  Luke  1:  6,  'righteous  tvomtOV  tov 
0iov,  before  God,"1  i.  e.  really  or  eminently  pious. 

NUMERALS. 

§  457.  The  cardinal  numbers  2 — 10,  are  commonly  joined  with 
plural  nouns,  and  follow  the  same  gender.  They  may  1)0  put,  (n)  In 
the  const,  state  with  nouns  to  which  they  relate  ;  e.g.  r:"":*  P  - :  '- 
three  days,  lit.  a  threeness  of  days.  (6)  In  apposition,  or  perhaps  ad- 
verbially,  with  the  nouns  to  which  they  relate,  and  cither  before  or  af- 
ter them ;  e.  g.  C,:3  niyViU  three  sons;  ujlVii  fiiSJja  three  daughters. 
The  position  of  the  cardinal  after  the  noun,  is  less  common,  and  be- 
longs rather  to  the  later  Hebrew. 

§458.  The  cardinal  numbers  11  — 19,  are  put  in  apposition,  or rath- 
er  adverbially,  with  nouns  plural  (sometimes  singular),  and  common- 
ly stand  before  the  noun,  but  sometimes  after  it.  The  gender  is  us- 
ually the  same  as  that  of  the.  noun.  E.  g.  Num.  1:  1 1,  r\\;  "\i05  S^V), 
twelve  men;  2  Sam.  9:  10,  tb^S  IfcJS  rVigan  fifteen  sons,  etc. 

§  459.  The  tens  (20—90),  are  of  common  gender  j  arc  put  in  ap- 
position with  nouns  either  sing,  or  plural  ;  and   may  -land   either  be- 
fore or  after  the  noun.     E.  g.  Judg.  11:  33,  T*  CS^tDJg  twenty  nisei 
Gen.  32:  15,  Ca^toJgl  Dvr\Nt,  twenty  rams. 

21 


109  §§400 — 466.   syntax;    NUMXRAL8, 


§  460.  Numbers  composed  of  tens  and  units,  (e.  g.  26,  34,  48,  etc.), 
when  standing  before  a  noun,  require  it  to  be  in  the  singular  :  but 
when  the  noun  precedes,  it  is  in  the  plural.  In  both  r,a-<-.  th<-  gender 
of  the  smaller  numeral  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  noun.  E.g.  Deut. 
2:  14,  r>2'U  ttjfa;^  tZ^rr-^  ,  thitty  and  eight  years ;  Jos.  19:30,  "Zl'^v 
tZPr'wT  O'HtoP ,  cities  twenty  and  two,  etc. 

§  401.  The  numerals  nNs0  a  hundred,  and  t)r.N  a  thousand,  may  be 
put  in  either  the  abs.  or  const,  state  with  nouns  either  sing  or  plural, 
and  may  stand  either  before  or  after  the  noun.  E.g.  Gen.  17:  17, 
!-?3'£-:-;NE  ,  a  hundred  years  ;  25:  7:  17,  ni'iJ  DN73  ,  a  hundred  of  years; 
2  Chr.  3:  1G,  n«J3  Q'aijsn  ,  100  pomegranates  ;  Is.  7:  23,  ]^3  q';.N  ,  a 
thousand  of  vines  ;  Ezra  8:  27,  fj^JJ  ^"^"ijN  ,  1000  Dorics. 

§  462.  Numbers  composed  of  thousands  and  smaller  numbers,  fol- 
low the  same  rule  as  composite  numerals  in  §  460. 

§  463.  In  many  cases,  the  numerals  are  used  alone  to  designate 
weights  and  measures  in  common  use,  the  noun  being  omitted ;  §  543. 
E.g.  Gen.  20:  16,  S)C3  P]Vn  ,  a  thousand  [shekels]  of  silver;  Ruth  3: 
15,  d',-]i',;4)  EC,  six  Lmeasures]  of  barley ;  1  Sam.  10:  4,  En':_,r;': , 
two  [loaves]  of  bread.  The  word  n^N  cubit,  commonly  takes  the 
preposition  a  after  the  numeral;  as  Ex.  27:  18,  J"P2N2  "NE  ,  one  hun- 
dred in  cubits,  i.e.  100  cubits. 

§  464.  The  cardinal  numbers  beyond  ten,  are  also  used 
as  ordinals ;  and  are  either  put  before  the  noun  and  in  ap- 
position with  it,  or  are  put  in  the  Gen.  after  the  noun. 

E.  g.  Gen.  7: 11,  tpV'  *y&  rtWTBS  ,  on  the  seventeenth  day  ;  1  K.  16: 
10,  JfS'ih  D"1-)"^?.  nr^a  ,  in  the  year  of  27,  i.  e.  the  27th  year. 

For  the  ordinal  numbers  below  10,  see  §396. 

§  465.  The  cardinal  numbers  below  ten,  are  also  used 
as  ordinals,  in  designating  years,  and  days  of  the  month. 

E.  g.  2  K.  18:  10,  CC  riZV?  ,  the  sixth  year,  lit.  the  year  of  six  j  Gen. 
8:  5,  tti^hS?  T^Na  on  the  first  Lday]  of  the  month;  Lev.  23:  32,  i-jy&na 
*i"tnb  ,  on  the  ninth  of  the  month,  etc.  as  in  English. 

§  466.    The   cardinal   numbers   are    used   distributivehj, 

when  repeated  without  a  copula. 

E.  g.  Gen.  7:  8,  tP3iO  ta^iTD,  two  and  two,  or,  two  by  two  ;  Gen. 
7:  3,  Way  !"!i"2w  ,  seven  aiid  seven,  or,  by  sevens. 


§§407 — 47(1.  syntax;    pronouns.  1 1 •: £ 

PRONOUNS. 

§  467.  Use  of  the  Primitive  Pronouns.  They  arc 
more  usually  omitted,  before  verbs;  but  when  employed, 
they  seem  to  give  more  energy  to  the  <  xpression;  and 
commonly  they  are  found  only  in  the  Nominative, 

§  468.  When  a  pronoun  of  any  form  is  to  be  repeated, 
for  the  sake  of  emphasis,  it  is  done  by  using  the  primitive 
form  ;  and  this  may  be  in  any  case  required  by  the  na- 
ture of  the  sentence.      E.  g. 

(a)  In  the  Nom. ;  as  Ps.  9:  7,  fTEiri  D"n5T  "3N ,  the  memory  of  them 
of  them  has  perished,  i.e.  the  very  memory  of  them,  etc.  (b)  In  the 
Gen. ;  as  1  K.  21:  19,  '  the  dogs  shall  lick  nr.tt  S£  ^:--ns  ,  the  blood 
of  thee  even  of  thee. ?  (c)  In  the  Dat.  ;  as  Hag.  1:  I,  tSFjM  — ~r  tVgT}  .  it 
it  a  time  for  you  yourselves  ?  (</)  In  the  Ace.  ;  as  Gen.  27:  34,  "^r."?3} 
"OwX  £3  ,  bless  me  even  me.  {e)  In  the  Ahl. ;  as  1  Sam.  25:  24,  "'IN  "'a 
'jiyri  ,  with  me  even  me  [he]  this  evil. 

Note  1.  The  primitive  pronoun  is  sometimes  placed  first ;  as  Gen. 
49:  8,  '  Judah  fftjt*  SJVW''  nPN  ,  thee  thee  shall  thy  brethren  praise? 

Note  2.  The  primitive  pronoun  appeals  sometimes  to  be  used  by 
way  of  emphasis,  instead  of  repealing  a  noun;  e.  g.  Gen:  1:  27,  rf^r* 
IT"1  N^n  S3  ,  and  to  Selh  even  to  him  was  born  a  son. 

§  469.  Primitive  Pronouns  used  for  the  verb  of  existence. 
When  a  personal  pronoun  is  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  it 
implies  the  verb  of  existence  (iT")  between  it  and  the 
predicate.      The  verb  itself  is  usually  omitted. 

E.  g.  Gen.  42  :  11,  ttrMN  BPSS  ,  righteous  I  are]  we  ;  Gen.  29  :  1. 
anN  V.XV,  whence  [are]  ye  ?  Gen.  3:  lO^SSM  Si"V3>,  naked  [am]  f. 

Note.  Personal  pronouns  of  the  third  person,  sometimes  Btand  riav 
ply  in  the  place  of  the  verb  of  existence;  e.g.  Gen.  9:  3,  'every  thing 
which  moves  *r\  enfl  IttiK,  which  is  alive  ;1  Ps.  16:  3,  '  the  saints  -rx 
Man  V"nN2  ,  who  are  in  the  land  ;'  Zech.  I:  9,  -?X  -:-  rTC  ,  what  arc 
these?  Plainer  still  is  this  principle  in  such  cases  as  follow  ;  flz.  Zeph. 
2:  12,  'ye  Cushites,  victims  of  mj  BWOfd  rtBtjj  C31$|  ,  are  ye?  2  Sam. 
7:  28,  trrrrbN.rj  JMn-'nnK  ,thou  art  Had  ,'  Ezra  6:  11,'  the  Benraots  ol 
God  nan  SMriaN,  are  we?  (Chaldaic),  answering  to  Heb.  tTBJTj  '3n2« 
In  Syriac  and  Arabic,  this  use  of  the  personal  pronoun  is  very  common. 

§470.    Suffix  Pronouns.    In  general,  tlio  pronouns  bu£ 


Kit  I7J — I*  I.  syntax;    BUIWtt-MONOUNS. 

Ii\    I    to    verbs    arc    in    the  Ace.    case  :     those  suffixed  to 
nouns,  are  in  (Ik:  Gen.  case. 

§  171.  Exceptions  as  to  verbal  suffixes.  Those  are  sometime,  {a)  In 
the  I  );it i vo  ;  as  Jos.  15:  10,  "'Tn:  ,  thou  hast  given  to  the;  /.<•<  h.  7:  ~>, 
*:N  TSFlDSJFl ,  have  ye  fasted  for  me  for  me,  i.  e.  on  my  account.  Job 
10:  14,  '  ifl  sin  Vr"^^  ,  then  thou  wafchest  it  for  me,  i.  e.  on  my  ac- 
count; Frov.  13:  20,  "10=173  INITIO  ,  he  seeks  for  him  correction  ;  Ps.  94: 
20,  ^afi'1 ,  is  it  bound  to  thee  ?  (6)  To  denote  relation-  which  are 
usually  expressed  by  particles;  as  \s.  65:  5,  "Trinp  ,  /  am  more  holy 
than  thou  ;  1  K.  21:  10,  ?ir!~>",'i  ,  and  caused  them  to  t estify  AGAIHST him ; 
Ps.  42:  5,  STiN,  /  moved  along  with  them,  etc.  This  usage  is  more 
frequent  in  Arabic. 

§  472.  Exceptions  as  to  the  suffixes  of  nouns.  These  are  sometimes, 
(a)  In  the  Dative  ;  as  Ps.  1 1 5:  7,  Dr,*~7 — Wf\  ::~\  ,  they  have  hands — they 
have  feet,  for  Qnb  ^■H1 ,  hands  are  to  them,  etc.  (6)  Instead  of  the 
preposition  ?v  ;  as  Ex.  15:  7,  "^"j  ,  those  ischo  rise  up  against  thee,  in- 
stead of  -<-:;  a"?»;5  .     So  Ps.  53:  6,  ^3n. 

Note.  The  suffixes  of  nouns  may  have  either  an  active  or  a  pas- 
sive sense;  e.  g.  (a)  Active  ;  as  "l053ri,  my  violence,  i.e.  that  which  I 
do ;  ^BO ,  my  book,  i.e.  that  which  1  possess.  This  sense  of  the  suf- 
fixes is  the  common  one.  {b)  Passive  ;  as  Jer.  51:  35,  "'St"  .  my  vio- 
lence, i.  e.  that  done  upon  me  ;  Ex.  20:  20,  ^nN"}*  ,  his  fear,  i.  e.  which 
he  inspires;  Is.  56:  7,  ^nVcn,  my  prayer,  i.e.  offered  to  me;  Ps.  56: 
13,  ^"H: )  thy  vows,  i.  e  made  to  thee  ;  Is.  21:  2,  nnrr:x  ,  her  sighing, 
i.  e.  the  sighing  over  her.     Comp.  §  424. 

Note.  For  the  pleonasm  and  ellipsis  of  personal  pronouns,  sec  §  543 
seq.  §  544  seq. 

§  473.  Position  of  pronouns  suffixed  to  nouns,  (a)  W  lien 
a  noun  in  the  Gen.  is  used  merely  to  qualify  a  preceding 
noun,  the  suffix  pronoun,  (which  as  to  the  sense  belongs 
to  the  first  noun),  is  usually  placed  after  the  second. 

E.g.  Dan.  9:  24,  *J*n|?  *P9 ,  thy  holy  city,  lit.  the  city  of  thy  holi- 
ness ;  Is.  2:  20,  T50O  ",V."1"^.  •>  *"  silver  idols,  lit.  the  idols  of  his  silver; 
Zeph.  3:  11,  ^183  T?i',  thy  proud  cxulters,  lit.  the  exultcrs  of  thy 
pride,  etc. 

(6)  In  a  very  few  cases,  the  suffix  is  attached  to  the  frst  noun  ;  as 
Ps.  71:  7,  "'?— '0^73  ,  my  strong  refuge,  lit.  my  refuge  of  strength.  Ezek. 
16:  27.  Lev.  6:  3.    But  this  construction  is  not  altogether  certain. 

§  471.  Position  of  pronouns  in  a  sentence.  Usually  they 
stand  etftcr  the  noun  to  which  they  relate. 


§§475,  470.  syntax;  substitutes  for  pfcoNOl  kb.  Mi 


But  sometimes  this  noun  is  not  mentioned  until  after  the  pronoun, 
either  immediately,  or  perhaps  at  the  distance  of  several  sentences; 
and  sometimes  it  is  to  be  supplied  only  from  the  general  sense  of  the 
passage,  e.g.  Ps.  87:  I.  ©nj?  "'Tin3  irVlID*,  Us  foundation  [is]  tn  the 
holy  mountain,  i.e.  Ziou's,  as  appears  from  v.  2;  Is.  8:  21,  P13  "13J .  he 
passes  through  it,  i.e.  the  land,  see  v.  22;  Ps.  9:  13.  k  when  he  taketh 
vengeance  for  blood  "OT  srrx,  he  remembereth  them,'  i  e.  the  afflict- 
ed, as  in  the  second  part  of  the  parallelism  ;  Ps.  G5:  10.  68:  15.  18: 
15.  comp.  v.  18.  Job  37:  4. 

Note.  Sometimes,  although  (he  pronoun  is  immediately  preceded 
by  a  noun,  it  does  not  refer  to  that  noun,  but  to  one  which  SBQSt  he 
supplied  from  the  sense ;  as  Ps.  44:  3,  t  by  thy  hand  thou  didst  drive 
out  the  nations,  QJJBFn  and  didst  plant  THEM,'  i.e.  the  Israelites,  as 
appears  from  v.  2.  So  Ps.  81:  1G,  comp.  v.  14.  Ps.  105:  37.  Gen.  10: 
12,  where  N1~  probably  refers  to  Nineveh  in  v.  11. 

§475.  Place  of  pronouns  supplied  by  nouns,  (l)  In  addressing  a 
superior,  the  Hebrews  commonly  employed  words  descriptive  of  the 
relation  which  the  speaker,  or  the  person  addressed,  sustained,  in- 
stead of  using  pronouns;  e.g.  Gen.  44:  16,  'what  shall  we  say  to  my 
lord?"1  i.e.  to  thee;  '  lo,  we  are  servants  to  my  lord,''  i.e.  to  thee. 
Verse  19,  '  my  lord  asked  his  servants,''  etc.  i.  c.  thou  didst  enquire  of  us. 

(2)  The  place  of  the  personal  pronouns  especially  in 
a  reflexive  sense,  is  often  supplied,  by  the  nmsl  distinguish- 
ed  and  essential  parts  of  either  the  external  or  internal  num. 

E.  g.  (a)  By  tfi^J  soul,  most  frequently  ;  as  Job  0:  2t,  ''SJDJ  f"N  N:'r, 
/  know  not  myself ;  Ps.  7:  3,  L  lest  like  a  lion  ^03  ^|~,w-;  .  he  rend  mr  .■, 
Ps.  3 :  3,  "•a;S5>. ,  to  me ;  Ps.  11:1.  1G:  10.  35:3:  Amos  1:8,  *  Jehovah 
hath  sworn  veers,  by  himself  {b)  By  O^B  person  .  as  ProV.  7:  15, 
"rfZB  -\TW"b  ,  to  seek  th.ee;  Ezck.  C:  9,  OrPJM  "<-'-'- 1  they  abhor  them- 
selves, etc.  (c)  By  33  heart;  as  Ex.  9  :  1  1,  "]zb  ,  thyself;  V<.  1G  :  9, 
^r  ,  /  myself  etc.  {d)  Occasionally  by  several  other  words  ;  Bfl  Pi.  7: 
6.  16:  9,  EP*»rj  life,  and  1133  heart  or  soul ;  Is.  26:  9,  "p-*  spirit ;  Ps. 
6.  8,  ]*%  eye  •  Ps.  16:  9,  "liUS  flesh  ;  Ps.  17:  11,  yc-_  belly  :  I  '- 
DlC.y  bone,  etc.  The  same  usage  prevails  very  extensh  elj  ha  Ara- 
maean and  Arabic. 

§  476.  Anomalies  of  Pronouns.  Depastures  from  concord,  in  re- 
spect to  gender,  number,  etc.  are  called  anomalies  here.  These  are 
somewhat  frequent,  and  may  be  ranked  under  Beveral  head-,  comp. 
§§484—496. 

E.  g.  (a)  In  regard  to  number  ;  for  a  pronoun  sing,  not  unlVeipient- 
ly  relates  to  a  noun  plural,  i.e.  it  is  osed   in  a  collective  tense,   l^1'  :I 


IflG         ^§477 —  !"'.•.    SYNTAX  OF  PROftOUlfM  J     LNOMAUE0,  ETC. 


noun  of  multitude  ;    as  Deut.  21:  10,  '  when  thou  goest  against  ~"-"N 
thine   enemies,  and  God  i:n:  gives  him  (sing.)    into   thine   band,'  etc 
Josh.  2:4,  'and  the  women  took  the  two  spies,  13BXni  and  hid  him 
So  Deut.  28:  48.   Ps.  5:  10.    Mai.  2:  2.  Jer.  31:  15.'  Ecc.  10:  15.    Is.  5 
23,  et  saepe. 

Note.  Pronouns  singular  are  very  often  employed  in  a  generic  or 
collective  sense,  in  the  same  way  as  nouns  of  multitude ;  and  they  ex- 
hibit the  like  appearances  in  regard  to  concord  with  verbs,  adjectives, 
etc. 

{b)  In  regard  to  gender,  (l)  The  masc.  is  used  for  the  fern.  ;  as 
arN  for  -jriwX  ,  Ezek.  13:  20.  nan  for  -:n  ,  Ruth  1:  22.  Cant.  6:  8. 
Zach.  5:  10.  So  the  suff.  E33  for  }=> ,  Ruth  1:  8,  1 1,  13.  Cnfor}-, 
Ruth  1:  19.  Ex.  1:  21.  Is.  3:  16.  Dan.  8:  9,  2.  Ezek.  1:  6,  7,  8  saepe. 
0_  for  ]_  ,  Judg.  19  :  24.  D_  for  }_  ,  2  K.  18  :  16.  2  Chron.  29  :  3. 
(2)  The  fern,  for  the  masc. ;  as  ftMl  instead  of  n"2~ ,  2  Sam.  4:  6.  Jer. 
50:  5.  DK  for  nniN  ,  Deut.  5:  24.  Ezek.  28:  14.  In  Arabic  and  Rab- 
binic such  anomalies  are  very  frequent. 

(c)  In  respect  both  to  number  and  gender ;  e.  g.  Job  14:  19,  WrTMDD  , 
where  the  antecedent  of  n_  is  c^Q  plur.  masc.  Is.  35:  7,  n£!2-}  [in]  the 
layer  of  her,  i.  e.  of  the  D^Fi,  plur.  masc. 

§  477.  Relative  Pronouns.  The  relative  1QX  (also 
m"  and  ^T  when  used  as  relatives  §  169)  is  used  in  respect 
to  antecedents  of  all  persons,  numbers,  and  genders,  §  168. 

§  478.  The  relative  TsIJN  is  often  used  with  other 
words,  merely  to  give  them  a  relative  sense;   e.g. 

(a)  With  nouns  and  pronouns ;  as  Gen.  13:  16,  ""ir^-ntt  ndN  ,  which 
dust ;  Vr  nuia:  ,  to  whom  ;  ink  T#Nf  ,  -whom  ;  Deut.  28:  49,  Svtik  "T^tf  , 
whose  language;  Ps.  1:  4,  rVT\  'liS'THi  n'£tf  ,  which  the  wind  scatters,  etc. 
(6)  With  adverbs  ;  as  C.IJ  "YBBt  ,  where  ;  S^  ittJN  ,  whence,  etc. 

Note.  The  word  n'^N  is  commonly,  but  not  always,  separated 
from  the  word  which  it  qualifies,  by  another  intervening  word.  The 
word  qualified,  moreover,  is  often  omitted;  as  Ezek.  21:  35,  'in  the 
place  [i2]  riNHlD  "Y£N  ,  where  thou  wast  created  ;  Ex.  32:  34,  *VBR~bM  . 
[Oipa],  to  what  [place];  Is.  43:  4,  [ns]  'I^JNJQ,  from  what  [time]. 
etc.     For  the  ellipsis  of  this  pronoun,  see  §  545. 

VERBS. 

§  479.  Usual  principles  of  concord.  In  general  a  verb 
agrees  with  its  Norn,  case  in  number,  gender,  and  person. 


§§480 485.    SYNTAX  OF  VERBS  ;    ANOMALIES.  Hu 


§  480.  Nouns  of  multitude  in  the  singular  often  take  a 
verb  in  the  plural. 

E.g.  Gen.  33:  13,  ]Ni:n-rD  IMgi,  then  all  the  Jiock  -will  die. 
Comp.  §  449.  b.  Sometimes  verbs  in  the  singular  only  are  employed 
after  nouns  of  multitude  ;  in  other  cases,  a  sentence  begins  with  a  verb 
sing.,  and  proceeds  with  plur.  verbs  ;  as  Ex.  1  :  20.  33:  4.  Is.  2:  20. 
Ps.  14  :  1,  etc.     See  further,  on  nouns  of  multitude  5  500. 

§  481.  Several  connected  Nominatives,  either  all  masc. 
or  of  different  genders,  usually  take  a  verb  in  the  plur. 
masculine. 

E.  g.  Ex.  17:  10,  '  and  Moses  and  Aaron  and  Hur  1?y  ascended;'' 
Ps.  85  :  1 1,  IttJaW  r)73{0~1Di! ;,  mercy  and  truth  are  met  together ;  Gen. 
8  :  22,  etc. 

Note.  Exceptions.  Cases  occur  rarely  where  a  verb  sing,  is  used, 
after  a  composite  Nom. ;  e.  g.  Ex.  21  :  4,  rrnn  !"P*lbM  "'f^n,  the 
■woman  and  her  children  shall  be,  (verb  sing.) 

§  482.  When  the  subject  and  predicate  of  a  sentence 
are  connected  by  the  verb  of  existence  (»Tn),  this  \<rl> 
often  agrees  with  the  latter. 

E.  g.  Gen.  27  :  39,  SjUjttftJB  iiyt]  Y"1Nn  "fciattJH ,  rich  countries  shall 
be  thine  abode  ;  Gen.  31  :  8.  Lev.  25 :  33.  Ezek.  35  :  15,  etc. 

§  483.     Dual  nouns  take  verbs  like  nouns  plural. 
Anomalies  in  the  concord  of  verbs. 

§  484.  I.  As  to  number.  The  pluralis  excellentiat  com- 
monly, but  not  always,  takes  a  verb  in  the  singular,  §  437.  b. 

E.  g.  Gen.  1:1,  DTpN  fins ,  God  created ;  Ex.  21  :  29,  r\m*  V*r:;2  . 
his  owner  shall  be  put  to  death.  But,  in  a  few  cases,  the  pluralis  ercel- 
lentiae  takes  a  verb  in  the  plural;  e.  g.  Gen.  20:  13.  31:53.  35:  7. 
Ex.  32 :  4,  8.  2  Sam.  7 :  23. 

§  485.  Plural  Nominatives  of  the  fern,  gender,  (which 
relate  to  beasts  or  things,  and  not  to  persons),  frequently 
take  a  verb  singular,  whether  it  precede  or  follow  them." 

E.  g.  Ezek.  26  :  2,  rrinbn  rr-jS'iJa ,  broken  is  [are]  the  gatfs ,  Joel 
1:  20,  :hyn  niaro  the  beasts  cry  [cries]  ;  Gen.  49  :  28.  Jer.  1:14.  48  : 
41.  51  ;  29,  56.  Ps.  1 19  :  98.  87  :  3.  Job  27  :  20,  etc. 

*  Note.  This  construction  of  tlio  feminiii"  [ >1  n r;i I  wit li  a  rarfa  lingular,  ii  t.i-linioilly  called 
tho  pluralis  inhumanis.     Compare,  in  Greek,  tlio  neulor  plural*  Joined  with  vrrbs  lingular. 


1G8     §§480 — 490.  syntax  of  veriis  ;  anovmii-  in  CONCORD 


8  486*  Vice  rcrsa,  the  plur.  fem.  of  refefa  h  some- 
times used,  where  the  usual  concord  would  demand  the 
singular. 

E.  g.  Ex.  1  :  10,  WfllrfljJB  fWK^pn"^  ,  when  there  shall  happen  war  ; 
Judg.  5:  26.  Job  17:  16.  Is.  28:  3L  Obad.   13. 

§  487.  When  a  Norn,  plural  is  used  in  a  distributive 
sense,  viz.  1o  denote  each  or  every  one  of  the  subjects  in 
question,  it  often  takes  a  verb  m  the  singular. 

E.  g.  Ex.  31  :  14,  ntt'P  n^brjJa  ,  they  who  profane  it,  i.  e.  evpry 
one  who  profanes  it  [the  Sabbath],  shall  be  put  to  death ;  Prov.  27:  16. 
3:18.  28  :  1.  Gen.  47  :  3.  Ex.  31  :  14. 

§  489.     When   the   verb  precedes  a  phir.   Nominative, 

it  is  not  unfrcqucntly  put  in  the  singular;  and  sometimes 
when  it  follows  one. 

E.  g.  1  Sam.  1  :  2,  C^V"!  •"^"r^  V7?2  i  and  there  was  to  Ptninnah 
children,  i.  e.  Peninnah  had  children  ;  Is.  13:  22,  C-'N  ~'.'J ,  the  jackals 
shall  howl;  Deut.  5:  7.  Judg.  13:  12.  2  Sam.  21:  6.  Ps.  124:  5.  In  all 
such  cases,  the  verb  is  used  in  a  kind  of  impersonal  way,  like  the 
French  il  vient  des  homines,  there  comes  some  men.  So  occasionally,  ev- 
en when  the  verb  follows  a  plur.  Nom. ;  as  Ecc.  2:  7,  vr  rvn  n"a  V2 , 
there  were  slaves  to  me,  i.  e.  I  had  slaves  ;  Gen.  46:  22,  '  these  were  the 
sons  of  Rachel  1.^  ""lltfN  which  were  [lit.  was]  born  to  Jacob  ;'  Gen.  35: 
26.    Dan.  9:  24.  Is.  64:  10. 

Note.  Sentences  not  unfrequently  begin  with  a  verb  singular,  and 
then  proceed  with  a  verb  plural;  as  Gen.  I:  14,  nWtfO.,  "TV,  Wei 
there  be  lights,  .. .  spffl  and  let  them  be  for  signs, etc-'  Num.9:  6.  Ezek. 
14:  1.  Esth.  9:  23. 

§  490.  II.  As  to  gender.  Fcm.  Nominatives,  either  sing. 
or  plural,  sometimes  take  a  verb  masc.  whether  it  pre- 
cedes or  follows  them. 

E.  g.  1  Sam.  25:  27,  ^ntlBUJ  JTaiTT ,  thine  handmaid  brought ;  1  Chr. 
2:  48,  1^  ttJi^i  the  concubine  bore ;  Judg.  21  :  21,  ni:n  INST  DN  , 
if  the  daughters  go  out;  Ruth  1:8,'  even  as  ye  [Ruth  and  Orpah] 
Orpi^'  have  done  to  the  dead  ;'  Is.  57  :  8,  5p~rVDni  and  thou  hast  made 
a  covenant  for  thyself,  where  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  fem.  So  Lev. 
2:8.  1 1  :  32.  1  K.  22 :  36.  Ecc.  7:7.  12:5.  Jer.  3  :  5.  Cant.  3  :  5. 
5:  8.  8:4.  2  K.  3 :  26.  Gen.  15:  17. 

Note.  In  a  very  few  cases,  a  masc.  Nominative  sing,  is  followed 
by  a  verb  fem. ;  e.  g.  Ecc.  7  :  27,  nVnp  nnaN  saith  the  Preacher, 


§§  491 494.    SYNTAX  OP  VERBS  ;    ANOMALIES.  1GI> 

where  the  verb  follows  the  grammatical  form  of  the  Nom.,  rather 
than  the  sense  of  it;  Judg.  1  I  :  39,  ^-^rT~i ,  and  it  became  a  custom, 
where  the  verb  is  employed  in  an  impersonal  mariner. 

§  401.  Nouns  of  common  gender  take  either  a  masc. 
or  fern,  verb;  and  sometimes  both,  in  the  same  coii-tnic- 
tion. 

E.  g.  Is.  33 :  9,  ynN  rtbbWS  bZH  ,  the  land  mourns  and  is  withered ; 
14:  9.  Job  20:  26.  Lev.  s\'i.  5:  l.etc. 

Nolo.  There  ire  more  noun?  of  the  common  gender  in  Hebrew,  than  has  been  generally  itip- 
posed,  (Ges.  Lehrgeb.  p.  472)  ;  which  accounts  for  many  supposed  anomalies  of  gender. 

§  402.  Nouns  of  multitude,  (among  which  the  names 
of  nations  may  be  ranked),  frequently  take  a  verb  femi- 
nine:  and  in  some  cases  they  admit  no  other.   Comp.  §480. 

E.  g.  Ex.  5:  16,  ^12V  riNan,  thy  people  have  sinned.  So  the  name 
of  a  nation,  as  Ps.  114:  2.  This  construction  resembles  that  of  the 
pluralis  fractus  in  Arabic,  which  often  takes  a  verb  feminine,  whatev- 
er the  sense  of  the  noun  may  be. 

Note.  The  names  of  nations,  countries,  and  towns  are  of  the  maac.  gender,  when  they  are  used 
to  denote  the  inhabitants  ;  but  they  are  f»m.,  when  they  only  denominate  place.  Comp.  $  IfcJO. 

§  493.   When  several   Nominatives  of  different  genders 

are  connected,  the  verb  sometimes  agrees  with  a  masc. 
noun  as  the  most  worthy ;  and  sometimes  it  conforms  to 
the  noun  which  stands  nearest  to  it ;   e.  g. 

(a)  With  a  masc.  noun  ;  as  Prov.  27:  9,  3:r  rt$TD^  rr^DJtt  V$  , 
ointment  and  perfume  make  [makes]  glad  the  heart  ;   Hos.  9  :  2,  etc. 

(6)  With  the  nearest  noun;  as  Num.  12:  1,  J'Hty!]  D^1*3  "Hinj, 
then  spake  Miriam  and  Aaron  ;  Num.  20 :  11,  D"YWM  ~"}"~  RtfW  ,  and 
the  assembly  and  their  cattle  drank;  Gen.  7'-  7.  1  K.  17:  15.  Esth.  9  :  29. 
2  Sam.  3:  22.  Comp.  §  481. 

For  the  'jrnrral  rule  respecting  composite  Nominatives,  seo  $  481. 

Note.  Where  there  are  several  Nominatives  connected,  and  the. 
sentence  begins  with  a  verb  singular,  it  commonly  proceeds  with  a 
verb  plural;  as  Gen.  21 :  32.  24  :  61.  31  :  14.  33:  7.  Comp.  SS  489. 
Note.  §  480. 

§  494.  III.  As  to  both  number  and  gender.     Feminine 

nouns  of  multitude  in  the  singular,  often  take  a  verb  in 
the  plur.  masculine. 

E.  g.  1  Sam.  2:  33,  l  all   iVanS  the  increase  of  thy  house  HMEP  . 
shall  die ;'  Jer.  44  i  12,  rVnNO   '  the  remainder  of  Judah  who  t&$  set 
22'" 


170       ,r/    195 — 198.    sv.VT.w  OF  WEBBS.;     \\o\r. —  IMPEE80NAL. 


lluir  faces  ;'    Zeph.  2:  9.   Geii.  48  :  6.     This    is  constructio  ad  sensum, 
§  149.  6.  Note*. 

^  495.  (a)  Plural  Nominatives  of  the  f<m.  gender 
sometimes  take  a  verb  in  the  Bmg.  mnsc.,  whether  they 
precede  or  follow  the  verb,  (b)  Vice  versa,  nouns  plur. 
masculine  (specially  a  pluralis  inhumanus),  sometimes  take 
a  verb  sing,  feminine. 

E.  g.  (a)  Job  42:  15,  ftlS^  tFUft  K£»:  Nb  ,  there  were  [was]  not 
found  women  so  beautiful ;  Jer.  48  :  15,  nb5  FT^S  fof  towns  ascended 
in  the  flames;  Ex.  13  :  7.  1  K.  11:  3.  Is.  17:  o!  Mic.  2:  6.  Hab.  3:  17. 
Ps.  57:2.  07:3.  Job  22:  0.  Comp.  §489.  §490.  (6)  V'ViHt  ivTZn  N;b, 
his  steps  totter  [totters]  not  ;  Job  14:  19,  r.",r:,,~C  E]&1UPj ,  its  floods  over- 
flow [overflows]  ;  also  when  the  verb  follows,  as  Jer.  49:  24,  t3"*!j3r* 
STfithN  distresses  take  [takes]  hold  on  her. 

§  496.  Peculiar  Anomaly.  "When  the  subject  of  a  verb 
is  a  noun  in  the  const,  state  followed  by  a  Genitive,  the 
verb  sometimes  agrees  in  number,  or  in  number  and  gen- 
der, with  the  noun  in  the    Genitive. 

E.  g.  2  Sam.  10:  9,  '  and  Joab  saw  that  fT£^:.ft  Vp  hn^i  the 
front  of  the  battle  was  against  him  ;'  where  the  verb  agrees  with 
Irra^ba  .  Is.  22:  7,  Ifitfra  ?J?j2&EP  "irjsa  ,  the  choice  part  of  thy  rallies, 
i.  e.  thy  choice  vallies,  shall  be  filed  ;  where   the  verb  agrees  with 

TSt^Jr     So  Job  29:  10-  38:  ai-  ls-  2:  n-  Jer-  1():  21'  etc- 

§  497.  Anomalies  as  to  the  Dual.  We  have  seen  that  the  dual 
takes  a  verb  in  the  same  manner  as  the  plural,  there  being  no  dual 
number  of  verbs,  §  483.  Like  the  plural  too  (§489),  it  can  take  a 
verb  in  the  singular,  whether  it  follows  or  precedes  the  verb;  e.g. 
Ex.  17:  12,  TV  Tnl ,  his  hands  [was]  were,  Josh.  8:  20.  Mic.  4: 11.  So 
1  Sam.  4:  15,  ~Tzpt  "WW  ,  ayid  his  eyes  [was]  were  dim  ;  Deut.  27:  7, 
Ktthibh. 

Note.  For  anomalies  in  regard  to  pronouns,  of  the  like  character 
with  these  in  §§  484 — 490,  see  §  476. 

J/upcrsonal  verbs. 

§  198.  These  are  made,  in  Hebrew,  by  the  3d  per-, 
mnsc.  or  fern.  sing,  of  either  the  Praet.  or  Fut.  tense ;  and 
sometimes  by  the  Inf.  mood. 

E.  g.  TTI .  and  it  happened  ;  ",r  *V2  .  it  is  bitter  to  vie ;  vr   ""*  ,  / 


§§499 — 508.  syntax:  verbs  impersonal.  17) 


am  quiet,  lit.  it  is  quiet  to  me  ;  ijj  nx  ,  or  SJj  ^t%*"\  ,  it  was  grievous  to 
him  ;  I  Sam.  30:  6,  "Tnb  "^X-Pn  ,  and  it  was  grievous  to  David  ;  Job  4: 
5,  '  but  now  -]v:.wV  K^3R  it  comes  upon  thee:'  IV  18:  7,  Inf.  vr  nS3, 
when  it  was  ill  with  me.     In  Gen.  4:  26,  ^7TH~  (pass.)  it  was  begun. 

§  499.  Impersonal  verbs  commonly  take  after  them  a 
Dative  case  with  the  preposition  T  . 

E.  g.  "|b  "12  it  is  grievous  to  me,  i.  e.  I  am  grieved  ;  'Jj  H£2  ,  ^/teu 
it  is  ill  to  me. 

§  500.  Verbs  with  indefinite  Nominatives.  These  are 
frequent ;   c.  g. 

(a)  The  third  pers.  sins*,  or  plur.  of  the  verb  is  used  in  this  way  ; 
as  Gen.  11:9,  NnjO  ,  [one]  called;  Gen.  48:  1,  infi*"]  ,  and  [one]  told ; 
1  Sam.  26:  20,  Jpr-T  [one]  pursues  ;  16:  23.  Is.  9:  5.  64:  3,  '  from  ev- 
erlasting sjJJata  tih ,  [they]  have  not  heard  ;'  47:  l^-lfinp*  Nr  [they] 
shall  not  call  thee,  etc.  Dan.  1:  12.  Hosea  2:  9.  This  construction  an 
swers  to  the  use  of  on,  tout  le  monde  etc.  in  French,  or  to  the  Greek 
kt'yovoc  etc.  and  is  quite  common  in  Hebrew. 

Note  1.  Sometimes  the  Nom.  is  expressed  ;  as  tt?«M  ,  anj< ,  etc.  ; 
and  sometimes  the  act.  Part,  of  the  verb  is  employed,  as  Is.  16:  10, 
T?."~~  "PI'S  tne  treader  shall  tread,  i.  e.  one  shall  tread;  Is.  28:  4, 
llNlfl  ~N"];,  the  seer  sees,  i.  e.  one  sees  ;  2  Sam.  17  :  9.  Dent.  22:  8. 
So  plur.,  Jer.  31:  5,  D^JOiin  *"E;,  the  planters  shall  plant,  i.  e.  one 
shall  plant  ;  Nah.  2:  3. 

Note  2.  The  3  pers.  plur.  is  often  to  be  rendered  passively  in 
such  cases  ;  as  Job  34:  20,  T2N!  IT'D1  ,  the  mighty  one  is  removed,  lit. 
they  remove  the  mighty  one;  Prov.  9:  11,  *  for  by  me  WV  are  in- 
creased [lit.  they  increase]  thy  days,  and  years  !,,D",q;P  arc  added  [lit. 
they  add]  to  thee;'  Job  4:  19.  7:  3.  17:  12.  19:  26.  32:  15.  Comp. 
Luke  12:  20,  ttjV  %pv%ijv  oov  ujiunoroi,  thy  soul  shall  they  require,  i.e. 
thy  soul  shall  be  required;  16:  9,  thai  when  ye  die,  di£wvtat,  ye  may 
be  received,  lit.  they  may  receive  you,  etc. 

(b)  Occasionally  the  second  person  of  the  verb  is  employed,  in  a 
similar  way;  e.g.  Is.  7:  25,  rr:^  tffan  x'r  .  one  shall  not  come  there, 
lit.  thou  shalt  not  come  ;  Job  18:  1.  Lev.  2:  4.  Also  in  the  common 
phrase  with  the  Inf..  *IN13  1*  ,  until  thou  contest,  i.  e.  till  one  comefl 

TENSES. 

§  501.  As  the  Hebrew  has  but  two  distinct /orm*  of  tense,  it  i-  ob- 
vious that  these  must  have  had  a  diverse,  various,  and  extended  me. 
§  502.   The  Praeter  and  Future  forms  can  be  used,  in  B  great  ma- 


172  §503.    SYNTAX  «T  V  KICKS  J     lit  \  I:  I  111  TKNbl 


ny  eases  indifferently  to  express  the  same  idea.  Both  of  them  may 
be  made  Jurists  by  prefixing  Vav,  §  208,  §  209,  and  by  sunn-  other  par- 
ticles placed  before  them;  but  the  predominant  use  of  the  I'raeter,  is 
to  expres9/;ay<  time  of  some  shade  or  other;  and  the  predominant  OM 
of  the  Future,  is  to  designate  some  shade  of 'future  time. 

§  50.').  The  P racier  tense  of  verbs,  is  used  to  designate 
the  meaning  of  various  tenses,  viz. 

(a)  For  the  Perfect  tense,  which  is  its  appropriate  use  ;  e.g.  Gen. 
3:  13,  '  what  is  this  which  rV^WJ ,  thou  hast  done  /"  3:  1 1,  '  who  Van  has 
told  thee  V  3:  14,17,22. 

(6)  For  the  Pluperfect  tense;  e.g.  Gen.  2:  2, 'God  finished  the 
work  which  nUJi" ,  he  had  made  ;  2:  5,  '  Jehovah  VOBfl  fift  ,  had  not 
caused  it  to  rain? 

(c)  For  the  past  tense  of  narration,  or  historic  tense  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  1: 
1,  'God  fin3  created;'  I:  2,  'the  earth  nr'n  ,  wu  ?  29:  17,  '  Rachel 
lNh"V)3*  StrPH,  was  beautiful  in  appearance? 

Note.  When  this  historic  tense  is  used,  the  Nom.  is  more  usually 
put  before  the  verb;  but  to  this  there  are  many  exceptions.  The  Fut. 
with  Vav  conversive  commonly  follows  the  Praeter,  in  the  same  sen- 
tence, or  in  a  succeeding  one,  in  order  to  avoid  repeating  the  Praeter. 
Comp.  Gen.  4:  2—5.  1  Sam.  7:  15,  16. 

(c/)  For  the  present  tense  ;  (l)  In  verbs  signifying  quality  or  con- 
dition; as  b'la  he  is  great,  S^n  he  is  wise,  etc.  (2)  When  the  ob- 
ject of  the  verb  is  to  express  a  state  of  acting ;  as  Ps.  119:  28,  '  my 
soul  ncb^r ,  weeps  for  trouble  ;'  119:  30,  '  the  way  of  truth  "•FHrta  ,  / 
choose  ;'  Is.  1:  15,  '  your  hands  ^fitVtt  are  full  of  blood.'  (3)  In  general 
propositions,  designating  action  at  any  time  ;  as  Ps.  1:  1,  '  blessed  is  the 
man  who  ^\T\  iib  walketh  not — -T^*l  N*r  treudelh  not — 3C^  Nr  sitleth 
not ;  and  so  often. 

(e)  For  the  Fut.  tense;  (l)  In  prophecies,  protestations,  and  assur- 
ances; as  Is.  9:  I, 'the  people  who  have  walked  in  darkness  W"! , 
shall  see  a  great  light ;'  Is.  2:  2,  fTTP  ,  and  it  shall  come  to  pass  ;  2:  3,  4, 
11, 17,  19,  et  saepe.  (2)  When  a  Fut.  form  (with  a  future  meaning) 
precedes  the  Praeter,  in  the  same  construction ;  as  Is.  1:  30,  31,  ^nn 
ye  shall  be  as  an  oak — "jbrrri  ttTTI  and  the  mighty  man  shall  be,  etc. ; 
3:25,  28,  'thy  men  Vrs?  shall  fall  by  the  sword — and  her  gates 
ifrSSO  32NT   shall  mourn  and  lament  ;"*   and  so  often. 

Note  1.  The  conjunction  Vav,  in  such  cases,  may  precede  the 
verb  itself,  as  in  e.  2. ;  or  precede  the  Nom.,  when  this  stands  before 
the  verb,  e.  g.  Job  19:  27, '  1  shall  see,  :»&n  T?],  and  my  ey^  shall  be- 
hold? where  }Jn  is  made  Fut.  by  the  Vav  before  its  Nom.      In  some 


§§  503,  504.  SYNTAX  OF  VERBS  ;  PRAET.  AND  FUT.  TENSE.    |79 


cases  Vav  is  omitted,  particularly  in  poetry,  and  the  Praeter  desig- 
nates the  sense  of  a  Future. 

Note  2.  Any  word,  expressive  of  Fut.  time  and  standing  at  the 
beginning  of  any  construction,  requires  the  Praet.  that  follows,  (with 
a  Vav  prefixed),  to  be  rendered  as  a  Future  ;  e.g.  1  Sam.  2:  31,'  be- 
hold the  days  D\N2  are  coming,  "T^na")  when  1  will  cut  off.  etc.  So 
with  an  Inf. ;  as  Deut.  4  :  30,  if;  -\S3  when  thou  shalt  be  troubled, 
^TNlkET  and  these  things  shall  overtake  thee ;  Gen.  2:  5.  So  also,  Ex.  17: 
4,  USE  *PS  yet  a  little  time,  ^jrPW  and  they  will  stone  me  ;  Ex.  10: 
1, '  at  evening  CP^'Vi  ye  shall  know.'' 

{f)  For  the  Imp.  mood;  (l)  When  an  Imp.  precedes,  and  the 
Praet.  is  connected  with  it  by  Vav;  as  Gen.  6:  21,  ~b  nji  take  for 
thyself,  PSDN"]  and  collect.  Comp.  above,  in  e.  2.  (2)  Sometimes 
when  Vav  is  prefixed,  without  a  preceding  Imp. ;  as  Gen.  33:  10,  'if 
I  have  found  favour  in  thine  eyes,  P-j^i:"]  then  take,  etc.  Ruth  3:  9. 
Gen.  47:  23.  Deut.  29:  7,  8. 

(g)  For  the  Subj.  mood  in  all  its  tenses;  especially  when  a  Fut., 
with  a  Subj  meaning,  precedes  in  the  same  construction,  §504.6; 
e.  g.  (l)  For  the  Present;  as  Gen.  3:  22,  rfr^— ;?.  lest  he  put  forth 
his  hand,  njpb*1  and  [lest  he]  take,  b^N"]  and  [lest  he]  eat,  etc.  (2)  For 
the  Imperf. ;  as  Is.  1:  9,  TS^ri  '  we  should  be  as  Sodom,  "I"*""  we  should 
be  like  Gomorrha ;'  Gen.  13:  13,  inftl — mpt",  should  one  hurry  them, 
—then  they  would  die.  ;  Ruth  1:12.  Judg.  8:  19.'  (3)  For  the  Plup.  ;  as 
Is.  1:9,'  unless  Jehovah  TTvitl  had  left  us  a  remnant,  etc. '  2  K.  13: 
19,'  then  rT3n  thou  woiddest  have  smitten  the  Syrians.1  Job  10:  19. 
Num.  22:  33.  (4)  For  the  Fuiurum  exactum  or  Fut.  perfect,  as  it  is 
named  ;  as  Ruth  2:  21,  :f£3~EJ*  "IS  ,  until  they  shall  hare  finished  ;  3:  18. 
Is.  4:  4.  Gen.  24:  19. 

§  504.  The  Future  tense  of  verbs  is  used  with  a  varie- 
ty of  meaning;   viz, 

(a)  To  indicate  Fut.  time ;  which  is  its  appropriate  use. 

(6)  For  the  Present  tense ;  e.g.  "n\  tib  ,  /  know  not  ;  rr"X  8ft  .  V 
cannot ;  ttinPi  'pNE! ,  whence  contest  thou  ?  UJ)~5n_n)2  ,  what  scekest  thou  f 
Also  in  general  propositions;  as  "  a  wise  son  nEur  makes  glad  h\<  fa- 
ther.' Such  a  use  of  the  Fut.  is  very  common,  and  agrees  with  the 
common  use  of  it  in  Arabic. 

(c)  To  designate  past  time ;  e.g.  (l)  Often,  wben  preceded  by 
particles  that  indicate  past  time,     (o)  By  TN  then  ;  as  Jos.  10:  U.  'N 
-I2V  ,  then  spake  he.     (b)  By  C~\tt  ,  not  yet ;  as  Gen.  J:  .r>,  rrrr  z~~ 
was  not  yet,  or  before  it  was.     But  sometimes  the  MOM  ifl  futun  ali'i 
these  particles;  as  Ex.  12:  48.  Job  10:  21.     (2)  Sometimes  (not  ?Cf] 


174  §504.    BTNTAI  OP  \  K  it  lis  ;    ri  ii  hi:  TBIfBS. 


frequently)  it  Indicates  the  past  time  of  narration,  it  the  historic  tense  \ 

as  Gen.' 2: 6,  'and  a  mi^t  ~:"'  went  "/>.  etc'  2:  10,  '  ami  tbence  "7^", 
it  was  divided,  etc.'  2:  25,  n&UJisrr  tkbl  ,  and  they  were,  not  ashamed. 
Is  not  this  occasioned  by  the  Vav  which  precedes?  Comp.  §  50.i.  e.  2. 
Note  1. 

{d)  With  Vav  conversive,  the  Fnt.  forms  a  common  historic  tense. 

(e)  Without  such  Vav,  it  is  sometimes  employed  to  denote  habitual 
or  continued  action  ;  as  1  K.  5:  25,  '  thus  much  Solomon  ]Pl\  gave  to 
Hiram  yearly  ;'  Job  1:  5,  '  thus  nvV^  did  Job  continually  ;  2  Sam.  12: 
31.  2Chr.  25:  14. 

(J")  For  the  Imp.;  viz.  (l)  Always  where  the  first  or  third  person 
of  the  Imp.  is  needed  ;  as  Gen.  1:  2G,  C^N  ~rot'Z  ,  let  us  make  man  ;  1: 
3,  ~nN~\-!'] ,  let  there  be  light,  etc.  Where  excitement,  urging,  entrea- 
ty, etc.  is  to  be  expressed,  the  parag.  Fut.  is  usually  employed  ;  as 
STlb^AM  ,  let  me  rejoice  now  ;  IlftTpN  ,  let  me  arise  now.  (2)  In  prohibi- 
tions ;  because  the  Hebrew  Imp.  is  not  used  with  negatives  ;  e.  g.  Ex. 
20:  15,  i33n  Nr,  steal  not,  lit.  thou  shalt  not  steal. 

{g)  For  the  Optative  ;  especially  when  the  particle  N:  is  subjoin- 
ed; e.  g.  Ps.  7:  10,  WITM*)  O  that  it  might  come  to  an  end!     Cant.  7: 

9,  N:-^rt":  °  may  they  be!  1  K.  17:  21.  Is.  19:  12.  47:  13.  For  the 
Optative  use  of  the  parag.  and  apoc.  Fut.,  see  §  203.  seq. 

{h)  For  the  Subjunctive  ;  especially  after  particles  signifying  that, 
so  that,  in  order  that,  etc.  E.g.  after  -)tt?N  that,  "14393  that,  1  that,  "3 
that,  b  that,  T«2?N  ]?»b  in  order  that,  ?ii  that  not,  i>3  that  not,  "j?  that 
not.  But  the  Fut.  often  follows  particles  such  as  the  above,  when 
a  Subj.  sense  is  not  required,  but  a  Fut.  one. 

(f)  The  Fut.  designates  all  those  shades  of  meaning,  which  we  ex- 
press in  English  by  the  auxiliaries,  may,  can,  must,  might,  could,  should, 
■would,  etc.  E.  g.  Gen.  3:  2,  b-K: ,  we  may  eat ;  30:  31,  iV—^MTTO  , 
■what  7mist  [shall]  /  give  thee  ?  Judg.  14:  16,  T'ijiJ  fbl  ,  and  should  I  tell 
thee?  Prov.  20:  9,  -|»&r-^3  ,  who  can  [will]  say  ?  So  Job  10:  18, 
9^iSt  ,  /  should  have  died  ;  Gen.  31:  37,  "~V^kNf.2  s  ^l(lt  '  mignt  ia^e  my 
leave  of  thee  ;  28:  8,  '  until  that  all  IBOK*  shall  have  been  gathered; 
eomp.  §  503.  g.  4. 

(j)  The  Fut.  with  Vav  conversive,  (which  commonly  indicates 
past  time),  is  sometimes  used  as  a  proper  Future  ;  the  Vav  being  ren- 
dered merely  as  a  conjunction  ;  e.  g.  Is.  9:5,'  to  us  a  son  shall  be 
given,  and  the  government  Vjrfl  shall  be  upon  his  shoulder,  etc.'  Is.  9: 

10,  13,  15,  17.  51:  12,  13. 

(k)  The  Fut.  with  Vav  is  sometimes  also  used,  (l)  For  the  Pres- 
ent Iodic;  as  2  Sam.  19:  2,  '  behold  the  king  weeps,  72Nn«2  and 
mourns;  Ps.  102:  5, 123*1 ,  and  is  dried  up.    (2)  For  the  present  Subj. ; 


§§  505 507.  SYNTAX  OF  VERHS  ;  IMI'KK.  MOOD  ETC.      ]',.', 


us  Jos.  9:  21,  '  let  them  live,  IVl*]  and  let  them  be,  or  may  they  6e,  etc.' 
Job  14:  10.  But  such  uses  of  the  Fut.  with  Vav  conversive,  are  not 
frequent. 

Note.  In  respect  to  the  forms  etc.  of  the  Fut.,  compare  §  203. 
seq. 

Imperative  mood. 

§  505.  The  Imp.  mood  and  the  Fut.  tense  are  nearly 
related  to  each  other  ;  and  often  they  are  used  almost  in- 
discriminately. Comp.  §  504.  f.  §201.  The  Imp.,  besides 
its  proper  sense,  is  employed  for  the  Future. 

(o)  When  two  Imperatives  immediately  succeed  each  other;  in 
which  case  the  latter  often  has  a  Fut.  sense,  and  the  former  a  conri- 
tional  one  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  42:  18,  nTii  liD* ,  do  this  and  live,  i.  e.  do  th.s, 
and  ye  shall  live  ;  Pro?.  3:  3,  4,  7.  4:  4.'  7:  2.  9:6.  Is.  8:9.  36:  16.  45: 
22.  55:  2. 

(6)  When  an  Imp.  is  connected  with  a  Fut.  in  the  same  construc- 
tion, it  often  has  a  Fut.  meaning;  e.  g.  (a)  Sometimes  when  it  stands 
before  the  Fut. ;  as  Is.  45:  11,  "^rNlli  will  ye  enquire  of  me — anc/  ^iCR 
will  ye  prescribe  to  me?  6:  9.  (2)  When  it  stands  after  the  Fut.  ;  as 
Gen.  45:  18,  ~:PN")  and  I  will  give  you  ....  1^34*1  and  ye  shall  eat,  lit. 
eat  ye.  Gen.  20:' 7."  Is.  54:  14.  Ruth  1:  9. 

f  '.<r  of  composite   I  i  rbs. 

§500.  The  Hebrew  does  not  form  composite  verbs, 
like  the  Greek  and  Latin,  by  prefixing  prepositions  to 
them:  but  it  inserts  a  preposition  between  tin  in  and  tile 
noun  which  follows  them. 

Diffi  mil  proposition!  are  used,  to  yarj  the  shadea  of  meaning;  ami  in  tliis  way  a  sr^nt  variety 
of  forms  of  verba  are  mado  in  Hebrew,  Aramaean,  and  Arabic,  which  maj  be  called  evmpotiu  ;  like 

our  English,  put,  put  iy,  put  up,  put  in,  put  ilotrn.  /i»/  asidl ,  put  inri 

E.g.  rC2  to  fall ;  ~v  -ZZ  to  fall  over  to,  to  fall  away  ;  y:  '~z~-  to 
leave,  to  depart  from  ;  "'per  ~CZ  to  fall  down  before  any  one.  N~j£  to 
call  :  3  N"lp  to  call  to,  to  invoke  ;  r  fifl^  to  name.  rN~  to  ask.  with  an 
Acc.  of  the  person  ;  rN^*  to  demand,  with  an  Ace.  of  the  thing  demand- 
ed ;  2  ?§tfj  to  consult  any  one. 

§  507.  No  definite  rules  can  he  made  out,  for  the  very  various  Qtage 
of  prepositions  in  these  cases.  The  Lexicons  and  practice  only  can 
give  the  requisite  information.  The  following  significations  DM}  aid 
the  learner,  in  a  few  cases;  viz. 


176   §§  507 — 511.  syntax  op  verbs  ;  casks  gov.  nv  verbs. 

(a)  The  preposition  3  is  often  put  after  verbs  signifying,  to  be  an- 
gry, to  trust,  to  hold,  to  sin  against,  to  reprove,  etc. ;  also  to  pray  to,  to 
invoke,  to  worship,  to  testify  against,  to  look  upon,  to  hear  or  listen  to,  to 
sinell,  to  touch,  etc. 

{b)  The  preposition  b  is  often  put  after  verbs  signifying,  to  make,  to 
attain  to,  to  become  any  thing :  as  2  bam.  7:  14,  '  1  will  be  to  him  ZNr  , 
for  a  father  [a  father],  and  he  shall  be  to  me  "jib  ,  for  a  son  [a  son]  ;' 
1  Sam.  4  :  9,  Sv£:Nb  Sn;"|"  ,  be  ye  for  men,  i.  e.  be  men,  act  coura- 
geously ;  Gen.  2:  22,  '  and  Jehovah  made  the  rib  STtZJtfb  ,for  a  woman,'' 
i.  e.  a  woman.  The  later  Hebrew  makes  more  frequent  use  of  b  in 
this  way,  than  the  early;  e.  g.  Jon.  4:  6,  comp.  Ex.  12:  27. 

(r)  The  prepositions  3 ,  "jE ,  b?  ,  "pa  ,  "W3 ,  ,nh«S ,  "^ob  ,  etc.  are 
often  put  after  verbs ;  and  they  modify,  in  various  ways,  the  simple 
meaning  of  them. 

Cases  governed  by  Verbs. 

§  508.   Active  transitive    verbs  govern   the  Accusative 

case. 

Note.  Many  verbs  have  both  a  trans,  and  intrans.  sense  ;  consequent- 
ly they  are  sometimes  with,  and  sometimes  without  an  Ace.  after  tbem  ; 
e.  g.  rs32  to  weep,  and  to  bemoan  ;  *:~  to  go,  and  to  pass  through,  Gen. 
2:  14  ;  3'*;'  to  dwell,  and  to  inhabit ;  Ps.  22:  4,  "172T  to  sing,  and  to  cele- 
brate with  praise  ;  so  ]S*i  ,  "TVp  ,  etc. 

§  509.  Many  verbs  govern  an  Ace.  directly,  without 
any  intervening  preposition,  which  we  can  translate  only 
by  inserting  a  preposition  before  the  noun. 

E.  g.  "V£2 ,  to  bring  good  tidings  to  any  one  ;  H*^?3  ,  to  be  refracto- 
ry against  any  one  ;  nn?  ,  to  give  a  pledge  for  any  one,  etc.  Among 
these  are,  verbs  of  putiing  off  and  on,  of  ornamenting ;  of  plenty  and 
want ;  of  dwelling  in  or  among  ;  of  going  out,  coming  in,  coming  upon, 
happening  to,  etc.  Verbs  of  overflowing,  overspreading,  etc.  take  the 
Ace.  of  the  thing  with  which  they  overflow,  etc. ;  as  Ex.  3:  8,  '  a  land 
which  ©5*11  nbn  naT  overflows  with  tnilk  and  honey  ;  Joel  4:  18.  Jer. 
9:  17.  Lam.  3:  48. 

§  510.  Neuter  verbs  sometimes  take  an  Ace.  case  ;  e.  g.  art  iirt, 
to  celebrate  a  feast  ;  n*Prt  IW  ,  to  propose  an  enigma,  etc.  Comp.  the 
English,  to  run  a  race,  to  fight  a  fight,  etc.  Gen.  27:  34.  Neh.  2:  10- 
Ps.  25:  19,  etc. 

§  511.  Verbs  governing  two  Accusatives.  All  verbs  which 
have  a  causative  meaning,  (of  course    the    conj.  Piel   and 


§§  512 — 514.  syntax  op  verbs;  passive — inf.  absolute.   177 

Hiphil  generally),  may  govern  two  Accusatives;  the  one 
usually  of  a  person,  and  the  other  of  a  thing. 

E.  g.  Ezek.  8:  17,  0?:n  y-}Nn-nN:  toba  ,  they  filled  [caused  to  be 
full]  the  earth  with  violence  ;  Gen.  41:  42,  •■IX—HJZ  lnM  1C^«]  .  and 
he  clothed  hi/n  with  [caused  him  to  put  on]  garments  ofjinc  linen,  etc. 

Note.  Many  verbs  in  Kal  have  a  kind  of  causative  meaning,  or  one 
kindred  to  it,  and  may  therefore  govern  two  Accusatives  ;  e.  g.  such 
as  signify,  to  anoint,  to  sow,  to  plant,  to  stone,  i.  e.  cover  with  stones,  to 
nourish,  to  furnish,  to  rob,  tn  do  good  or  evil  to  any  one,  to  call  or  name, 
to  command,  to  convert  one  thing  into  another,  as  Job.  28:  2,  p^Jf  KM 
tltitaria,  stone  he  fuses  into  brass  ;  Gen.  2:  7,  ;  God  made  man  nmJtri  ',': 
*1C>*  with  dust  Lout  of  dust]  from  the  earth,  where  ?VBS  is  the  Ace.  of 
the  material,  as  grammarians  speak. 

§  512.  But  the  insertion  of  appropriate  prepositions,  such  as  2 ,  r  , 
*}E ,  V? ,  etc.  before  the  latter  noun  in  cases  like  the  above,  is  not  un- 
frequent;  so  that  the  Hebrews  practised  both  methods  of  constructing 
a  sentence. 

Many  of  the  cases  above  may  bo  construed  as  having  a  preposition  implied,  before  the  second 
noun  in  the  Accusative. 

Passive  verbs. 

§  513.  The  passive  forms  of  verbs  which  govern  two 
Accusatives,  retain  but  one  of  them;  the  other  being  u>u- 
ally  made  a  Nominative. 

E.  g.  Ps.  80:  11,  fTri  Q^l-l  1B3,  the  mountains  were  centered  with 
the  shadow  of  it.     Ex.  25:  40.   *28:  1*1. 

Note.  Sometimes  verbs  of  a  passive  form  have  an  active  sense ; 
and  in  this  case  they  may  govern  an  Ace,  like  active  verba  ;  e.g. 
Job  7:  3,  iHVii  "'fr'V  "Vkllin  ,  /  have  inherited  months  of  vanity,  where 
the  verb  is'in  Hophal;Ex.20:  5.  Deut.  13=  3. 

Infinitive  absaluti . 

§  514.  This  is  usually  put  before  a  finite  tense  of  the 
same  verb,  and  serves  to  qualify  its  meaning  in  various 
ways  ;   viz. 

(a)  It  marks  intensity  of  various  degrees;  as  1  Sam.  2$  22,  dSv 
Mirr  D"]y?,  very  subtilely  will  he  deal ;  20:  6,  !>£«fa  bWa  ,  he  fias  ur- 
gently requested;  Amos  9:  8,  T*3M>K  T"?;pH  N-  >  '  •»H  not  utterly  de- 
stroy. Gen.  31:  30.  43:  3,  7,  3H:  snVH ,  could  wc  indeed  know  ?  37:  8, 
23 


ITS     §§  514 — 517.  syntax  of  VKRns  ;  wf.  ausoi.itk. 


ftajPI  iVlj!?'",  shall  thou  indeed  reign?  19:9,  UiD^  C2  b»^»],  and 
now  he  would  join  act  even  as  a  judge. 

(6)  It  denotes  assurance,  certainty  ;  as  Gen.  2:  17,  n"":r  r":,  thou 
shall  surely  (He  ;  3:  4.  37:  33,  5]"}U  Ep£3  ,  /<<•  ?'s  surely  torn  in  pieces  ; 
Judg    15:  2,  tpTl&tt  ~i73N  ,  surely  I  thought,  or  said. 

(c)  It  marks  continuance  of  action;  as  Is.  30:  19,  !T~3n  Nr  ;:z 
thou  shall  not  always  weep ;  Ex.  34:  7.  Jer.  23:  17.  Especially  i«  con- 
tinuance denoted,  where  two  Infinitives  abs.  are  used;  as  2  Sam-  15: 
30,  nb^T  fib?  they  went  up  continually  weeping ;  Gen.  8:  7,  ttS£1 
3iu;i  NTH"' ,  and  it  continued  going  and  returning  ;  Jer.  7:13.  11:7.  25: 
3.  26:  5.  In  such  cases,  a  participle  is  sometimes  used  for  the  second 
Inf.,  as  in  2  Sam.  16:  5  ;  or  a  noun,  as  Is.  29:  1  1. 

(r/)  In  general,  it  gives  intensity,  energy,  animation,  vivacity,  or 
some  coloring  of  this  nature,  to  the  expression;  although  it  is  difficult 
always  to  express  it  in  an  English  version. 

So  tho  intensive  particles  of  the  Groek,  German,  etc.  cannot  be  well  expressed  in  a  translation. 

Note  1.  The  Inf.  abs.  is  commonly  of  the  same  conjugation  as  the 
finite  verb  with  which  it  is  joined,  but  sometimes  of  a  different  one  ; 
as  Job  6:  1,  $$81  ^p®  -,  with  Inf.  abs.  in  Kal,  finite  verb  in  Niphal ; 
Ezek.  16:  4,  rfcnri  fi&  Jflrfn  ,  Inf.  in  Hophal,  and  finite  verb  in  Pual. 

Note  2.  The  Inf.  abs.  is  sometimes  taken  from  a  kindred  synony- 
mous verb  ;  as  Is.  28:  28,  qsaSlT  ffii*W  ,  he  will  thoroughly  thresh  him, 
roots  ■Jj'lfij  and  "STT,  both  signifying  to  thresh. 

Note  3.  The  Inf.  abs.  may  be  placed  before  or  after  the  finite  verb. 
Particles,  such  as  sTr,  D3  ,  etc.  sometimes  intervene. 

§515.    The  Inf.  abs.  is  sometimes  used  adverbially. 
E.g.  i^pTj!  benefaciendo,  for  bene ;   1  Sam.  3:  12,   n?D1   ~rrn  ,  in- 
cipiendo  et  Jiniendo,  i.  e.  utterly. 

§  516.  In  a  few  cases,  the  Inf.  const,  is  used  as  the  Inf. 
absolute. 

(a)  Adverbially;  as  Is.  60:  14,  hlrTJJ  incurvando,  for  fri  iT.L; ;  Hab. 
2:  10,  ni5Sj3  for  risp  .  (b)  With  a  finite  verb;  as  Num.  23:  25,  ip  , 
^2^n  Nb  thou  shall  not  curse  at  all,  for  aiajj  ;  Ruth  2:  16,  S>»Rr^B , 
for  i'ikti  ;  Ps.  50:  21,  n*"i<-ni\T,  for  rrn  ,  etc. 

§  517.  The  Inf.  abs.  is  sometimes  found  in  the  place 
of  a  finite  verb. 

E.  g.  Deut.  5:  12,  ^ifcRS  simply,  instead  of  'pnaian  TlEHJ  ,  as  it  is 
in  Deut.  6:  17;  Ex.  20:  8,  "nDTfor  -OTFi  -lb J ,  as  in  Deut.  7:  18;  Job 
40:  2,  n-ir;  an  conlendendo  ?  for  5*1  31"  ,  as  in  Judg.  1 1:  25.  So  Dan. 
9:  5,  -no")  =i:-"V:  ,  we  have  rebelled  and  apostatized ;  Est.  9:  6.  Jer.  11: 


>§§  517 — 520.  syntax  of  verbs;  inf.  construct.     170 


5.  Gen.  41:  43.  Judg.  7:  19.  Ecc.  8:  9.  9:  11.  Ezek.  1:  14,  '  the  living 
creatures  Sritfl  N"'^n  ran  and  returned ;'  Ecc.  4:  2.  Jer.  32:  44,  '  fields 
shall  they  buy,  SirDI  and  they  shall  write  bills  of  sale,  "Bjm — Dinm 
and  they  shall  seul  them — and  take  witnesses,"1  etc.  Num.  15:  35.  Deut. 
14:  21.  Is.  5:  5.  Ezek.  11:  7,  k  you  N\iin  will  J  bring  out,'  etc.  1  K. 
22:  30.  2  Chr.  18:  29. 

Eor  the  Irnper. ;  Deut.  5:  12,  liad  keep  ;  1:  16.  Jer.  2:  2,  fiVrr 
go  ;  13:  1,  etc.  Num.  25:  17.     See  the  first  examples  above. 

Note.  The  Inf.  abs.  is,  in  some  cases,  to  be  translated  in  a  passive 
sense  ;  as  Prov.  12:  7, '  the  wicked  *pcr7  )  are  *°  oe  destroyed.'1  This 
is  elliptical;  the  full  phrase  would  be  338^  *pBri .  So  "^on,  Prov. 
15:  22. 

§  518.  The  Inf.  abs.  is  also  employed  as  a  mere  namm 
actionis,  denoting  the  practice  of  doing  what  the  verb  de- 
signates. 

E.g.  12IH3  dill  nill  -^l??  riVM,  cursing,  and  dissembling,  and 
murdering,  and  stealing,  break  out,    Hos.  4:  2. 

Oen.  Remark.  The  Inf.  abs.  baa  generally  mi  intetuku  sense,  whether  employed  with  o  finite 
vsrh,  ur  standing  alone.     It  may  bi;  colled  the  cnergic  form  of  verbs. 

Infinitive  construct. 

§519.  The  Inf.  const,  being  a  sort  of  verbal  noun,  is 
used  like  one,  in  respect  to  construction,  position,  govern- 
ment, and  even  form;  the  plural  forms  excepted,  which 
it  has    not. 

§  520.  Like  nouns,  the  Inf.  const,  is  used  in  the  various 
cases  ;    viz. 

(«)  In  the  Norn,  case  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  2:  18,  C>N-J  ni-'n ;,  '  the  being  of 
(he  man  alone  is  not  good  ;'  29:  19,  ■'Pin  (Inf.  of  ]n:)  l  my  giving  N  good  ;? 
11:  (5.  30:  15.  (6)  In  the  Gen.  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  29:  7,  f|D6t?1  n". ,  <hr  time  of 
collecting;  2:4,  nlOT  C^S  ,  in  (he  day  of  making.  Num.'.':  15.  Ps. 
128:  2,  et  passim,  (c)  In  the  Dai  j  e.  g.  Num.  7:  5,  larr  rrn  ,  and 
let  them  be  for  serving,  i.e.  let  them  serve.  8:  1 1  ;  Ezek.  30:  16,  fT^HR, 
5|33n5  it  jhall  be  for  being  pierced  through,  i.  e.  it  shall  be  pierced 
through;  comp.  §  523.  d.  {d)  In  the  Ace;  e.g.  1  K.  3s  7.  '  I  knew 
not  NT31  rXi,  the  going  out  or  coming  in  ,'  Jer.  5.  3.  Gen.  21:  6.  The 
Ace.  here,  commonly  has  \  before  it;  as  Gen.  11:  8.  Ex.  2:  15.  Comp. 
§  522.  §  523.  (f)  In  the  Abl.  j  e.  g.  Ps.  39:  2,  v  I  will  guard  my  wa  j 
Nlttlrra  from  sinnirig? 


180  §$521 •">-:{.     SYNTAX   O]     \KKItS  J     INC.    CONBTBUCT. 


§  52i.  Like  nouns,  it  takes  prepositions  before  it,  and 
suffixes  after  it. 

In  translating  such  Infinitives  we  must  generally  give  them  a  finite 
sense  ;  e.  g.  (a)  With  a  ;  as  Gen.  2:  4,  0tpa~3  ,  when  'they  were  cre- 
ated, lit.  in  the  being  created  of  them;  Ex.  16-  7,  SynaJa  because  he 
heard  ;  Is.  1:  15.  (6)  With  3  ;  as  Gen.  44:  30,  \S;a3  ,  when  I  come  ;  39: 
18,  "•fii-jr©,  when  I  lifted  up.  (c)  With  b  ;  Gen.  2:  3,  PPtoyV  ,  when  he 
made  it ;  Is.  7:  15,  ipyYr,  until  he  know  ;  1  K.  16:  7,  '  to  provoke  him 
by  his  doings,  rPVtb  in  that  he  was,  or,  in  respect  to  his  being.  In  like 
manner,  with  ]»  ,  "W,  by ,  ]r»b  ,  nhn  ,  ihN ,  etc. 

Note.  The  preposition  'J73  has  often  a  negative  sense,  in  such  ca- 
ses;  e.g.  Gen.  27:  I,*  his  eyes  were  dim  ftfft^Q  ,  so  that  he  could  not 
see,  lit.  from  seeing  ;  16:  2.  Ex.  14:  5.  For  ]72  before  the  Inf.  in  com- 
parisons, see  §  454.  6. 

N.  B.   For  the  use  of  the  Inf.  const,  for  the  Inf.  abs.,  see  §  516. 

§  522.  The  Inf.  const,  with  7 ,  in  many  cases,  answers 
to  the  English  Inf.  preceded  by  the  particle  to. 

E.  g.  Gen.  2:  5,  '  and  there  was  no  man  "i'ayb  ,  to  till  the  ground ;' 
v.  10,  '  and  a  river  went  out  from  Eden  nipifcrrb  ,  to  water  the  ground  f 
11:  6,  'all  vvhich  they  may  purpose  nito£^  to  do,''  etc.  When  "Tib  2 
{nut)  comes  before  an  Inf.,  the  b  is  put  before  it ;  as  Gen.  3:  11,'  which 
I  commanded  thee  bbtt  "^bab  not  to  eat  ;'  i.  e.  the  Inf.  is  used  as  a 
noun  in  regimen  with  Tib  2 . 

§  523.  The  Inf.  const,  with  7 ,  and  with  the  verb  of  ex- 
istence (nTl)  expressed  or  implied,  constitutes  a  peri- 
phrasis, expressing  the  meaning  of  several  forms  of  the  fin- 
ite verb,  viz. 

(a)  Of  the  Praeter;  as  2  Chr.  26:  5,  CribN  S-n?  T£2,  and  he 
sought  God,  lit.  and  he  was  in  seeking  God;  Gen.  15:  12,  'the  sun 
Niar  Ti^  was  about  to  go  downf  lit.  was  in  going  down  ;  2  Chr.  1 1:  22. 
Ezra  3:  12. 

(6)  Of  the  Present;  as  Is.  44:  14,  ib""rn~ob  [.fiP,n]1  he  hews  down 
for  himself,  lit.  [he  is]  in  hewing  down.  Prov.  19:  8,  '  he  that  is  wise, 
aiU  NUEb  [~l~],findeth  prosperity,''  lit.  is  in  finding;  Is.  21:  1. 

(c)  Of  the  Future  ;  as  Is.  38:  20,  ''^'BJinr  [rtVT)]  rrifT,  Jehovah 
will  deliver  trie,  lit.  will  be  for  the  delivering  of  me  ;  Ps.  25:  14,  '  Jeho- 
vah Ci'-'-prrb  L~".n"!]  wl^  t€ac^  them,"1  lit.  will  be  for  the  teaching  of 
them;  49:  15.  62:  10.  Ecc.  3:  14.  So  Ps.  101:  8,  'soon  n*»2H|  will  I 
destroy  the  wicked  of  the  land,  rpnanb  /  will  cut  ojfr ;'  etc. 


§§524 — 52<i.    SYNTAX  OF  VEIti;-  J    IM.   <t  INSTRUCT.  1^1 


(d)  Of  the  Passive  ;  as  Jos.  2:  5,  '  and  it  came  to  pass  "SaOi  ""lyjil 
when  the  gate  was  to  be  shut,''  lit.  in  the  shutting  of  the  irate  ;  Deut.  31: 
17,  ^3J*b  riTP  ,  and  they  shall  be  devoured,  lit.  and  it  shall  be  for  de- 
vouring them  ;   Is.  G:  13. 

(e)  Of  the  Latin  participle  in  dus,  or  the  English  auxiliaries  $hall, 
can,  must,  etc.;  as  2  K.  4:  13,  nvsy'r  [~'T^]]  ~t:  ,  what  \i<]   to  be  done 

for  thee?  2  Chr.  19:  2,  -\T^;r  [rrri]  SOnbrt,  should  one  help  the  wick- 
ed? Judg.  1:19,  ,iL","}ir;r  [n^il]  Nb,  he  could  not  dispossess  them;  Hos. 
9:  13.  Amos  6:  10.  2  Chr.  20:  6. 

§  524.  The  Inf.  const,  (sometmics  also  the  Inf.  ah-.) 
governs  nouns  in  the  ohliquc  cases,  like  finite  verba 

The  Inf.  const,  sometimes  takes  verbal  suffixes,  i.  e.  it  governs 
pronouns  in  the  Ace.  The  Inf.  abs.  also,  in  a  very  few  cases,  takes 
an  Ace.  after  it ;  as  Is.  22:  13,  TJJ3  bb«1  ]etX  DriUJl  "lj?a  SlTI ,  cac- 
dendo  boves,  el  jugulando  oves,  et  edendo  carnem,  etc. 

§  525.  The  subject  of  the  Inf.  const,  (corresponding  to 
the  Norn,  of  finite  verbs),  is  usually  put  in  the  (Jen.  after 
the  verb. 

E.  g.  Judg.  13:  20,  3~"?^  fliV??,  in  the  mounting  up  of  the  flame. 
i.  e.  when  the  flame  mounted  up  ;  1  Sam.  23:  6,  "in  "2  J*  ~^22 ,  m  the 
flyi-ng  of  Abiathar,  i.  e.  when  Abiathar  tied;  Ps.  66:  10.  Here,  also, 
belong  those  cases  in  which  the  inf.  const,  takes  noun-sujfixes,  i.  e. 
suffixes  in  the  Genitive. 

§  526.  Besides  the  subject  in  the  Gen.  after  the  Int. 
const.,  it  also  takes  the  object,  i.  e.  an  Ace.  case,  and  even 
two  Accusatives. 

E.  g.  Gen.  2:  4,  D*na>1  yiNi  rrirp  nViDSJ  D^z  in  the  day  of  Jeho- 
vah's making  the  earth  and  heavens,  i.  e.  in  the  day  when  Jehovah 
made,  etc.  1  K.  13:  4,  ttJV*  -q--riw\  ~r;-  jkip^wAen  the  king 
heard  the  word  of  the  man,  etc.  Is.  58:  5,  '  a  day  ittJBS  C~N  m;r , 
when  a  man  will  afflict  his  soul?  etc.  So  with  the  subject  ami  two  Ac- 
cusatives; as  Gen.  41:  39,  nNT-r3-nN  "jniw\*  D"»nT?«  TnSn  "**^h*]  i 
since  God's  showing  you  all  this,    i.  e.  <dnce  God  bath  shewn  <'t<\ 

Note.  The  Gen.  or  subject  usually  Btands  next  to  the  verb;  hut  in  a 
very  few  cases  the  Ace.  is  put  first ;  as  Is.  bi  '2  I.  Stj  ]i;':  U)£  ::.n:  . 
as  the  flame  of  fire  devours  the  stubble;  20:  1.  (Jen.   1:  15. 


182  §§•">'-" — 531«    syntax :;    i» aim  n  ii-i.i.-. 


PARTICIPLES. 

vj  527.  Active  Participles  are  often  used  in  the  place  of 
finite  verbs;  viz. 

(a)  For  the  present  tense  ;  e.  g.  Ecc.  !'•  4,  l  one  generation  *|^fl 
passeth  away,  and  another  generation  N3  cometh  ;'  1:  7,  8.  Ps.  1:  6.  3-- 
2.  4:  7.  Is.  1:7.  In  this  manner,  participles  are  used  with  pronouns 
of  any  person  instead  of  verbs,  in  order  to  express  the  present  tense  ; 
as  ■'Dbfij  N"V  ,  I  fear  ;  nnN  N*V  ,  thou  fear  est ;  13rl5«  iPK'y  ,  we  fear  ; 
etc.     In  intrans.  verbs,  this  use  is  very  common. 

(6)  For  the  past  tense  in  all  its  gradations;  e.  g.  Gen.  2:  10,  '  and 
a  river  Njp  issued  from  Eden  ;'  Deut.  4:  3,  '  your  eyes  ntotTfl  have 
seen;'  Gen.  41:  17  18,  19. 

(c)  For  the  Fut.  in  all  its  varieties;  e.g.  Gen.  17:  19, 'Sarah 
rH.V.11  shall  bear  a  son,'  etc.  19:  13,  DTl^rTtJjg  'we  are  about  to  destroy 
the  city ;'  6:  17,  '  behold  I  fiOSXI  will  cause  to  come  a  flood  ;'  48:  4.  Ex. 
9:  18.   1  K.  11:  31.   14:  in. 

§  528.  Participles,  when  used  as  verbs,  are  subject  to 
all  the  anomalies  of  concord  which  are  found  in  verbs. 

E.  g.  Gen.  4:  10,  D^fJ^S  *pr]N  V2&  b^p,  the  voice  of  thy  brother's 
blood  cries,  [cry]. 

§  529.  The  two  Hebrew  participles,  active  and  pas- 
sive, often  have  the  sense  of  the  Latin  participles  in  -rus 
and  -dus. 

E.  g.  Gen.  19:  14,  TWl  fJirP  hfrTOB  ,  Jehovah  is  about  to  destroy 
the  city  ;  Ps.  7G:  8,  K~}i:,  metuendus ;  Ps.  18:  4,  *rV~^  ,  laudandus,  etc. 

§  530.  The  verb  of  existence  (fPFT)  added  to  the  par- 
ticiple, makes  an  Imperf.  tense,  descriptive  of  continued 
action  or  condition. 

E.  g.  Job  1:  14,  'the  cattle  rn©*lh  IVj ,  were  ploughing ;'  Neh.  1: 
4,  b^BrtQI  CiC  "flSTl  ,  /  was  fasting  and  praying  ;  2  :  1  ,  15.  2  Chr.  24: 
14.  36:  16.  Gen.  4:  17.  Deut.  9:  22,  24. 

Note.  In  like  manner  tti^  there  is,  and  "";Sf  there  is  not,  either  with 
or  without  suffixes,  are  often  connected  with  participles,  and  form  a 
periphrasis  for  the  Pres.  tense  of  the  finite  verb :  e.  g.  Judg.  6:  36,  '  if 
5T»fa  T^j;  thou  savest ,-'  Gen.  24:  49.  43:  5,  k  if  rifrti'B  t|S"W  ,  thou  dost 
not  send  away ;'  Lx.  5:  16,  c  straw  ]PC  ]M  is  not  given;"1  Lev.  26:  6. 

531.  Active  Participles   may  govern  the  same  cases  as 


§§532 — 534.  syntax;  participles — adverbs.  183 

their  verbs;   but  it  is  a  more    common  construction,  to  put 
them  in  regimen  with  the  noun  that  follow-. 

E.g.  Ps.  84:  5,  ^n^3  ^a^iV,  inhabiten  of  thy  house;  Ps.  28:  i, 
TlS  "H"):>'\  the  descenders  qf[\.  e.  those  who  go  down  into]  the  pit;  5- 
12,  *173w  ",3P?jK,  the  lovers  of  thy  name;  10:  8.  Prov.  2:  10.  Such  a  Gen. 
is  capable  of  all  the  varieties  of  rendering  which  belong  to  the  Gen. 
after  nouns,  §  424.  It  also  admits  intervening  prepositions,  like  nouns, 
§  432. 

§  .032.   Passive  participles   are    constructed  with   c 

in    various  ways ;   viz. 

{a)  With  an  Ace;  as  Ezek.  0:  2,  D",-2  SJtob,  c/o//ierf[with]  linen  gar- 
ments ;  1  Sam.  2.  18,  TlSiJ  Tlift,  girded  [with]  an  cphod.  So  in 
Greek  avatdeiqv  tintipivog,  \l.  u.  140.  {b)  With  the  Gen. ;  as  Ezek. 
0"-  11,  D*!j3n  ttilSb  ,  clothed  [of]  linen  garments  ;  Joel  1:  8,  p'3~n^;rT 
girded  [of]  sackcloth;  Ps.  32:  1,  yttJB^^feja  ,  pardoned  [of]  sin,  etc. 

Note.  When  there  is  but  one  form  of  the  participle,  as  r.7t_  (from 
nTO  to  die),  this  is  capable  of  all  the  meanings  and  constructions  of  both 
the  act.  and  pass,  participles. 

Verbs  used  as  adverbs. 

§533.  When  two  verbs  immediately  follow  each  other, 
either  with  or  without  the  copula  between  them,  1  lie  fust 
of  them  often  serves  merely  to  Qualify  the  second,  and 
must  be  rendered  adverbially. 

E.  g.  1  Sam.  2:  3,  I'TSTTj  ^S")3!1  rN  ,  do  not  make  much  [and]  speak 
i.e.  do  not  say  much:  Job  10-'  3,  ^If^SSrTB  ?  ':':n  N;b ,  ye  are  not 
ashamed  ye  stun  mc,  i.  e.  in  a  shameless  manner'  ye  stun  me  ;  Gen.  26 
18,  iEfri  ai25»5  ,  and  he  returned  and  dug,  i.  e.  he  again  dug  ;  I'.' 
27:  20.  30:  31.  31:  28.  Hos.  1:  6.  Ps.  51:  4.  71:  20.  So  SFU^Tj  is  us- 
ed for  well,  skilfully,  Ps.  33:  3.  FpOif!  for  again,  once  more.  Gen.  I  2. 
8:  12.  rtfcs)  for  ad  Jincm,  entirely,  Gen.  24:  15.  nrr?3  for  hastily, 
quickly,  Gen.  27-  20.  Ex.  2:  18.  naifl  for  much,  often,  2  K.  21  6  ft 
51:  4.  ai'ij  for  again,  1  K.  10:  6.  Job  7:  7.  The  same  i-  true  I  fttHDC 
other  verbs.  In  some  cases  the  second  verb  i>  the  Inf.  U  < ien,  J7  20k 
Ex.  2:  18,  etc. 

ADVERBS. 

§  f)'M.  Adverbs  in  Hebrew  are  often  used  m  the  [ :l.ir< 

of  nou i  is. 


184  §§  r>3.r> — 539.  syntax  ;    Anvr.Rns — prepositions. 


(a)  In  apposition  with  the  nouns  which  they  qualify.  a«  Gen.  18: 
4,  B?)3"t:5»  ,  a  little  water ;  Nch.  2:  12,  X3TO  O^rN  ,  few  persons  ;  Is. 
30:  33,  !T3pS3  B^S  •>  much  wood,  etc.  {b)  In  the  Gen.  after  nouns  ;  as 
1  K.  2:  31,  D2n  ■»»*! ,  innocent  blood;  Ezek.  30:  16,  oav  "^X  ,  daily 
■persecutors  ;  Deut.  26:  5,  CJ[E  *tYB  ,fcw  men,  etc. 

§  535.  Adverbs  standing  in  place  of  nouns,  sometimes 
take  prepositions  before  them. 

E.  g.  Ezek.  6:  10,  D3T1  bN,  gratis  ;  2  Chr.  29:  36,  DNflOa  ,  suddenly  ; 
1  K.  22:  20,  ITIP3,  so,  [lit.  in  the  so]  ;  Esth.  4=  16,  ]DZ ',  so  ;  Neh.  9: 
19,  D  531  -,3,  tfVn'/y. 

§  536.   The  repetition  of  adverbs  marks  intensity. 

E.  g.  Gen.  7:  19,  "IMS  "imj  ,  very  much ;  Deut.  28:  43,  ttbJHH  !"&*», 
higher  and  higher ;  HEE  J1B73,  deeper  and  deeper;  1  K.  20:  40,  run 
Sisni ,  hither  and  hither,  i.  e.  here  and  there,  all  around. 

§  537.  Two  negatives  in  Hebrew  strengthen  the  nega- 
tion. 

E.  g.  1  K.  10:  21,  sitjh:  Nb  5]D3  -pat,  sr'toer  was  not  at  all  regarded. 
In  the  parallel  verse,  2  Chr.  9:  20,  Nb  is  omitted.     Ex.  14:  11,  ^fiHfl 

ED^ip  pN  ,  because  there  were  no  graves  at  all.    Zeph.  2-  2.  etc. 

§  538.  A  negative  particle  is  often  joined  with  nouns 
and  adjectives,  to  qualify  the  sense  of  them. 

E.  g.  Deut.  32:6,  D^n  Nr,  not  wise,  i.  e.  foolish :  Ps.  43:  J,  -port  wxb, 
unmerciful;  Job.  30:  8,  DTji  "VrS,  disgraced;  Deut.  32:21,  rN"*Nb, 
not  God  ;  Qy~Nb ,  not  a  nation,  i.  e.  not  worthy  of  this  appellation  ; 
Is.  31:  8,  w\^~Nb  ,  not  a  mortal ;  10:  15,  fg-flfij ,  no  wood  at  all,  etc. 
This  mode  of  expression  is  called  liroryg. 

Note.  A  negative  is  frequently  implied  in  an  interrogative  sen- 
tence ;  e.  g.  2  Sam.  7:  5,  flRNH,  wilt  thou  build  me  an  house?  i.  e.  thou 
shalt  not;  as  in  the  parallel  verse,  1  Chr.  17:  4.  So  Is.  27:  7.  Prov. 
24:  28.  Ezek.  18:  23,  comp.  v.  32.  1  K.  8:  27.  Gen.  30:  20.  Job  16: 
6, '  if  I  keep  silence  !f»rp  "372TSE  ,  what  quits  me  ?  i.  e.  I  am  not  re- 
lieved ;  Cant.  8:  4.  Prov.  20:  21.  Dan.  1:  10. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

§  539.  Prepositions,  both  simple  and  composite,  govern 
the  oblique  cases  of  nouns,  pronouns,  etc. 

For  the  pleonasm  and  ellipsis  of  them,  see  §  547.  §  551. 


§§  540 — 544.  syntax  ;  conjunctions — intcrji:ctions.      185 
CONJUNCTIONS. 

§  540.  As  the  Hebrew  language  possesses  but  very 
few  conjunctions,  some  of  them  are  necessarily  employed 
in  a  great  variety  of  significations.  Tins  is  particularly  the 
case  with  the  copulative  1.  But  the  various  uses  of  this 
and  others,  are  best  learned  from  the  Lexicons  and  from 
practice. 

For  some  peculiar  uses  of  Vav,  see  §  558.  Note.  For  the  ellipsis 
of  conjunctions,  see  §  561. 

INTERJECTIONS. 

§  541.  Interjections  simply  expressive  of  calamity  or 
imprecation,  often  take  a  Dative  after  them. 

E.  g.  1  Sam.  4:  8,  n:b  "»}« ,  wo  tons !  Ezek.  30:  2,  tD)+\  nn  ,  wo 
for  the  day! 

§  542.  Interjections  which  have  the  forms  of  other 
parts  of  speech,  take  after  them  the  cases  required  by 
those  forms. 

E.  g.  Ps.  1:  I,  ^«J«  with  a  Gen.  after  it ;  29:  1,  2,  T3H ,  with  an 
Ace,  etc. 

PLEONASM. 

543.  I.  Of  personal  pronouns.  Verbal  suffixes  are  not 
(infrequently  pleonastic,  being  immediately  followed  by  the 
noun  to  which  they  have  relation. 

E.  g.  Ex.  2:  6,  'Vr'.n-njj  inqpFj]  i  sne  saty  ^'n  tne  cWM;  l  Sun. 

21:  14,  iayC-DN  'IS*?*]  he  changed  it  his  understanding  ;  Job  33:  20, 
Q^J?.  Sh'rj  1  Plant ,  his  soul  abhors  it  bread;  Ps.  83:  1 2.  Such  is  the 
predominant  construction  in  the  Chaldee  and  Syriac. 

§  544.   The  suffixes  of  nouns  are  sometimes  pleonastic. 

E.  g.  Is.  17:  G,  ny)t  rt^rDS,  in  the  twigs  of  it  the  fruit  tret  .    Pf  n 

14:  13,  nri"2y  nr^-jru*,  the  end  of  it  joy  ■  Cant  I:  6,  "'--  -  ,--^-  ,  »»y 
vineyard  which  [is]  to  me.  Such  also  is  the  general  usage  of  the  (,'ImI- 
dee  and  Syriac. 

1\ 


1^0  545—548.    syntax;    PLEONASM  —  BLLfFNS, 

§  545.   The  Dative  case  of  pronouns   alter    verb-;,  and 

especially  verbs  oi' motion,  is  often  pleonastic. 

E.  g.  Gen.  12:  1,  lb~T^.  i  8°  for  &V*elf\  '•  e-  &°  5  Cant-  2:  1 1,  SjHl 
^  ,  it  has  gone  for  itself,  i.  e.  has  gone  ;  Gen.  27:  43,  ^»"tl^>  ,flecf>r 
thyself^  i.  e.  flee  ;  Is.  31:  8,  ^i  0:  ,  he  has  Jied  for  himself,  i.  e.  he  has 
fled  ;  Joh  39:  4,  17:b  lattJ^Jtb  ,  they  turned  not  back  for  themselves,  i.  c. 
turned  not  back;  Cant.  2:  17,  ft£  HJB?,  compare  for  thyself  i.  e.  com- 
pare ;  Joh  12:  11,  '  the  palate  hbtiaStr  ,  relishes  for  itself  i.  e.  relish- 
es; 15  :  28,  '  houses  which  hlsb  ISU^-Kb,  they  do  not  inhabit  for  ihem- 
selvesf  i.e.  which  no  one  inhabits;  Frov.  13:  13,  it  blJrTJi  he  shall  per- 
ish for  himself  i.  e.  shall  perish  ;  Job  19:  29,  Q31:  ^"lW  ,  fear  for  your- 
selves, i.  e.  fear  ye.  The  Arabic  has  the  same  idiom  ;  and  it  is  also 
very  common  in  Syriac. 

§  546.  The  Dative  pleonastic  also  occurs  after  parti- 
ciples and  adjectives  ;    but  more  seldom  than  after  verbs. 

E.  g.  Hos.  8:  9,  'a  wild  ass  it  1"is ,  lonely  for  itself  i.  e.  alone,  or 
lonely;  Amos  2:  13,  nV  rrNba i,  full  for  itself  i.  e.  full;  Ps.  144:  2, 
,,b~',t3^Ba  ,  my  deliverer  for  me,  i.  e.  my  deliverer. 

§  547.  II.  Of  Propositions.  The  prepositions  2  and  "j/G 
are  sometimes  pleonastic. 

{a)  2  ;  as  Ex.  32:  22,  'thou  knowest  this  people  that  N^n  2^2 , 
they  are  evil,''  lit.  that  they  are  in  evil ;  Hos.  13:  9,  T"l??2  ,,2-",2  ,for 
my  help  is  in  thee,  lit.  in  respect  to  me  [1  am]  in  thy  help;  Ps.  29:  4. 
Prov.  3:  26.  is.  2G:  4.  45:  14,  tN  "J2  ^N  ,  only  thou  [art]  God,  or,  only  in 
thee  [is]  God ;  Job  18:  8.  Ezra  3:  3.  In  the  three  last  examples,  it 
stands  even  before  the  subject  of  a  sentence.  This  is  technically  call- 
ed Beth  essentiae. 

Note.  The  name  of  Beth  essentiae,  is  also  extended  to  2  used  in 
cases  like  the  following;  as  Ps.  118:  7,  ^Ti;2  ~^~"!  i  Jehovah  is  among 
my  helpers,  i.  e.  Jehovah  is  my  helper.  Ps.  54:  6.  99:  6.  Job  24:  13. 
Judg.  11:  35. 

(6)  \n  ;  as  Dent.  15:  7,  '  a  poor  man  5prj«  IrfNO  ,  one  of  thy  breth- 
ren," lit.  of  one  of  thy  brethren;  Lev.  4:  2.  5:  13.  Ezek.  18:  10.  This 
idiom  is  common  in  Arabic. 

ELLIPSIS. 

§  548.  I.  Of  nouns.  The  Norn,  case  is  sometimes  omit- 
ted before  verbs. 

(a)  Before  verbs  used  in  an  intrans.  way,  in  order  to  denote  condition 


<§§  549 — 552.  sxntax  ;  ellipsis  op  pronouns.  1-7 

or  state  of  feeling  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  31:  36,  ib  ~\~"Z  it  was  hot  to  him,  viz.  E|fig 
anger,  i.  e.  his  anger  burned;  Gen.  34:  7.  comp.  Gen.  30:  -'.  Kx.  1:  14, 
etc.,  where  S)N  is  expressed.  So  1  Sam.  21:  11,  "^'zv  DrTPl] .  and  it 
pitied  thee,  i.  e.  mine  eye  (,:,?>)  pitied;  comp.  Gen.  1~>.  20.  Iieut  7: 
16,  etc.  where  'ps  is  expressed.  (6)  Words  such  aa  the  mind  of  the 
reader  will  spontaneously  supply,  are  sometimes  omitted;  viz.  such 
as  nnrr1; ,  EaVrbfit  *  etc.  e.  g.  Prov.  10:  24,  the  desire  of  the  righteoui 
ffP  he  will  grant,  i.  e.  Jehovah  will  grant  ;  12:  12.  13:  21.  21:  \o.  Job 
3:  20.  Ecc.  9:  9.  Ps.  10:  4,  comp.  v.  13,  and  see  below  in  §  555. 

§  549.  The  Ace.  case,  after  several  verbs  which  arc  in 
frequent  use,  is  often  omitted,  as  being  unnecessary  to  n  n- 
der  the  language  intelligible. 

E.  g.  mb^  she  bore,  i.  e.  children;  n"J3  he  concluded,  i.  e.  rr""C  an 
agreement  ;  !~lto:  he  inclined  or  spread,  i.  e.  ]TN  the  ear,  or  b~S  the  tent  ; 
NTU3  he  lifted  up,  i.  e.  bip  the  voice;  *|"^"  he  arranged,  i.  e.  C:"  word) 
in  prayer,  etc.  These  omissions  are  sometimes  supplied  ;  but  more 
generally  the  noun  is  omitted. 

§  550.  When  the  subject  of  a  proposition  is  required, 
by  the  sense,  to  be  repeated  in  the  predicate  with  some 
addition,  the  actual  repetition  of  it  rarely  takes  place. 

E.  g.  Cant.  1:  15,  W2V  ^p?  thine  eyes  [are  the  eyes]  of  doves ; 
Ps.  18:  34.  48:  7.  55:  7.  Is.  52:  14. 

§  551.  In  the  designation  of  weights  and  measures,  the 
ordinary  words  which  express  the  standard  of  them,  are 
commonly  omitted. 

E.  g.  C]03  ClV.N,a  thousand  [shekels]  of  silver  ;  ITTl  -^v,  ten 
[shekels]  of  gold ;  V*~\TU  'CiJ  six  [ephahs]  of  barley  ;  C~~.  *tjW  fWO 
[loaves]  of  bread  ;  comp.  §  463. 

Note.  In  expressing  the  day  of  the  month,  the  word  BV  day  is 
commonly  omitted  ;  comp.  §  465. 

§552.  II.  Of  Pronouns.  The  personal  pronouns  are  of- 
ten omitted  ;   e.  g. 

(a)  In  the  Norn,  most  commonly,  as  in  Greek  and  Latin.  (/')  In 
the  Gen.  after  the  Inf.  nominascens,  or  after  a  DOUD  ;  <■.  ir    Gen.  I     1  '. 

rn"'ttnV,  to  preserve  [them]  alive,  etc.  instead  of  En^nn: ;:  l.\  Ifi  -'. 
1  Jehovah  is  my  strength,  rnJBTP  ,  and  [my]  long,''  for  ''^";":T■,  I  P*  '" 
10,  11.  66:  6,  etc.  (c)  In  the  Ace.  after  verbs;  as  Ex.  2:  26,  'and  God 
9*1*\  observed  them,1  for  B?"^]  ;  Ps.  137:  5,  Met  my  right  band 
hSaJni  forget   [me]  ;'   139:  1.17:  11.  Gen.  9:  22,  etc. 


188      §§559 — 556.  syntax;  itLiFtta or pkowoow — rzuu 


§  55:5.  Tlic  relative  pronoun  "TON  is  often  omitted  in 
various  constructions;    viz. 

{a)  In  the  Norn.;  as  Gen.  15:  13,  '  in  a  land  an:  Nr  ,  [which]  is 
not  theirs;'  Is.  40:  20.  51:  2.  54:  1.  55:  5.  61:  1U,  etc.  (6)  In  the  Gen. 
after  a  noun  in  the  const,  state  ;  as  Ex.  4:  13,  '  send  f^ttn  ["VjJJtJ  "T3. 
by  the  hand  [of  him  whom]  thou  will  send.''  See  §  433.  (c)  In  the  Ace.  ; 
Frov.  9:  5, 'as  wine  [which]  "TOD?:  I  have  mingled  ;'  Gen.  3:  13,  nNT~~E 
n^lpy  ,  what  is  this  [which]  thou  hast  done  ? 

{d)  When  used  to  qualify  pronouns,  adverbs,  etc.  (§  478);  as  Ex  18: 
20,  'the  way  P73  %&*  [in  which]  they  go ;'  Job  3:  3,  '  perish  the  day 
13  nb^  h"^],T  [in  which]  /  was  bom  ;'  Ps.  32:  2.  Is.  1:  30.  23:  7,  etc. 
Ecc.  1:  5,  ta*0  NTn  ~"VT  [*Y£fijt],  [whence]  he  arose,  (e)  Sometimes 
even  the  pronoun  which  itN  would  qualify,  is  also  omitted;  as  Is. 
29:  1,  *  the  city  [jla]  TH  H3>1  [t~n]  in  which  David  dwelt  .'  Ps.  4:  8, 
'more  than  in  the  time  [*3]  *aS  E3tt»T,ni  Em*!  [">¥»], [in  which] 
their   corn   and  new  wine   increase,''  etc.     Comp.  §  478.  Note. 

(f)  Htf-'J*  ,  in  the  sense  of  that  which,  he  who,  those  who,  etc.  is  often 
omitted  ;  e.  g.  Job  24:  19,  '  Sheol  takes  away  TNt2^  [those  who]  have 
sinned;"1  Ps.  12:  6,  'I  will  place  in  safety  ib  IJpS^  [him  whom]  one  puffs 
at,"1  i.  e.  who  is  contemned,  {g)  In  an  adverbial  sense;  as  1  Chr.  15: 
12,  V?  Vnaon  bN  to  [the  place  which]  /  have  prepared  for  it ;  comp. 
§  478.  Note. 

Note.  The  omission  of  ^«PN  's  much  more  common  in  poetry  than  in  prose.  In  prose,  it 
is  generally  inserted  after  a  definite  noun,  and  omitted  after  an  indefinite  one,  as  in  Arabic.  (De 
Sacy,  Gramm.  Arabe  II.  §  363.) 

§  554.  III.  Of  Verbs.  The  verb  of  existence  (5VH) 
is  commonly  omitted  between  a  subject  and  its  predicate, 
especially  when  the  predicate  stands  first ;   see  §  446. 

E.  g.  Gen.  3:  11,  \2:N  ai-p*-"'3,  for  naked  [am]  /;  4:  13,ri"U 
*315 ,  great  [is]  my  iniquity,  etc. 

§  555.  When  the  words  of  any  one  are  repeated,  the 
verb  H^X  (which  marks  quotation)  is  very  often  emit- 
ted, and  must  be  supplied  from  the  sense  of  the  passage. 

E.  g.  Ps.  8:  4,  '  when  I  behold  the  heavens,  [■»:»  -»£&  I  exclaim], 
Lord,  what  is  man  P  10:  4,  '  the  wicked  in  his  pride  [""i^N  has  said], 
W-lV-Sa  [Jehovah]  will  not  punish  *  comp.  v.  13,  where  the  ellipsis 
is  supplied;  Ps.  52:  8,  9.  59:  8.  Job  8:  18.  Ecc.  8:  2,  ■•:«*,  i.  e.  [*$£*) 

§  556.    When  a  finite  verb  would  be  preceded    by  an 


<§§  557 — 559.  svntax;  ellipsis  op  ADfttus-raBFMirioifs.   189 

Inf.  abs.  of  the  same  verb,  the  former  e  sometimes   oijut- 
ted  :  comp.  §  517. 

Note.  Besides  the  above  common  cases  of  ellipsis  in  respect  to 
the  verb,  there  are  many  others,  especially  in  poetry,  which  cannot 
be  made  the  subject  of  rules,  but  must  be  supplied  in  conformity  with 
the  context ;  e.  g.  in  Job  39:  24.  Is.  66:  6.  Ps.  3:  9.  4:  3.  6:  4.  7:  9. 
Jer.  11:  15.  2  Sam.  23:  17,  comp.  1  Chr.  11:  19.  1  K.  11:  25.  2  K.  6: 
33.   Hos.  8:  1.  Prov.  6:  26. 

§  5.57.  IV.  Of  Adverbs.  The  interrogative  Pi  is  often 
omitted. 

E.  g.  Gen.  27:  24,  ''32  flj  JlP.N ,  art  thou  my  very  son,  for  nPNrt  ; 
3:  1,  *2  t\» ,  is  it  so  then  that,  for  ^  E|gn  ;  1  Sam.  16:  4.30:  8.  2  Sam. 
9:  6.  18:  29.  Job  40:  25.  Such  ellipsis  often  takes  place  in  a  negative 
interrogation,  before  N^  ;  as  Jon.  4:  11,  DlttJJ  fit?  ^fttn  ,  and  should  not 
I  spare  Nineveh  ?  instead  of  «bn  ;  Lam.  1:  12.  3:  36.  Ex.  8:  22.  J  K 
5:  26.  Job  14:  16,  "iQTlin  Nil ,  arid  wilt  thou  not  keep  watch  over  my 
sins?     So  also  before  bN ,  1  Sam.  27:  10. 

§  558.  When  two  negative  propositions  follow  each 
other  in  the  same  construction,  especially  in  poetic  paral- 
lelism, the  negative  adverb  is  sometimes  omitted  in  the  sec- 
ond proposition,  and  must  be  supplied. 

E.  g.  1  Sam.  2:  3.  'speak  not  proudly,  pni>  NX."] ,  let  [not]  any  rash 
thing  proceed  from  your  mouth;"  Ps.  9:  19, 'for  he  will  not  always 
forget  the  poor,  the  expectation  of  the  afflicted  "i-Nr  ,  shall  [not]  al- 
ways perish  ;   Ps.  75:  6.  Job  28:  17.  30:  20.  Is.  23:  4".  38:  18. 

Note.  When  a  negative  is  expressed  in  the  first  member  of  a  par- 
allelism, and  the  second  has  a  Vav  prefixed  to  it,  that  Yav  should  be 
rendered  disjunctively,  viz.  nor,  but,  etc.  E.  g.  Ps.  44:  19,  'our  heart 
has  not  turned  back  from  thee,  IsSttJM  DP}] ,  nor  our  steps  declined ;  Is. 
41:  28,  !)2,,U^")  nor  did  any  answer,  or,  hit  none  gave  answer;  Job  3: 
10.  Is.  28:  27.'  Deut.  33:  6. 

§  559.  V.  Of  Prepositions.  The  prepositions  -.  ?  .  etc. 
are  not  upfrequentiy  omitted,  where  the  sense  requires 
them. 

(«)  The  prefix  2  ;  a*  Ps.  66:  17,  \-iN-jf_— 'E  VrN,  /  tried  to  km 
[with]  my  mouth,  for  ^M  ;  12:  3.  17:  10,  \.\  14.  00:7,  k  help  DM  -:*"-" 
[with]  thy  right  hand  ;  108:  7.  109:  2,  etc.  Note,  also,  thai  the  pniix 
5,  used  as  a  conjunction,  usually  excludes 3;  as  Am.  9:  11,  ttb**  "",-, 
as  [in]  the  days  of  old,  for  "•EpSS  .      (^)  The  prefix  b  ;  as  Prov.  87:  7, 


J'.M)     §§560 — SO'2.  syntax;   ellipsis  of  conjunctions,  i;t<  . 


rTSJH  ^"c.<i  tto]  tfu  hungry  soul,  for  "£D:b  ;  13:  18.  14:  22.  Jer.  9:  2. 
(c)  The  preposition  "jE  ;  Kcc.  2:  24,  4  nothing  is  better  for  a  man  r3N»;p 
[than]  that  he  should  eat^  for  iotO^TS  . 

§  560.  VI.  Of  Conjunctions.  Conjunctions  which  would 
express  some  particular  relation  of  the  latter  part  of  a 
sentence  to  the  former,  are  sometimes  omitted,  and  their 
place  is  supplied  by  the  copulative  Vav.* 

E.  g.  Prov.  11:  2,  l  does  pride  come,  N3*T  then  comelh  shame;  Gen. 
44:  4.  Ex.  3:  18.   1G:  21.   17:  6.  Pa.  148:  5.  * 

§  561.  Conjunctions  which  serve  to  connect  words  and 
phrases,  are  oi'tcn  omittcd.t 

(a)  The  copulative  Vav;  as  Gen.  31:  2,  triflfettj  J?1»fl  yesterday 
[and]  the  day  before;  Judg.  19:  2,  D^a'lft  n^3-)N  D"1^^  ,  a  year  [and] 
four  months  ;  Hab.  3:  11,  ft'V  IL'ttjp  ,  sun  [and]  moon;  Nah.  3:  1.  Is. 
63:  II.  Ex.  15:  9.  Judg.  5:  27.  Ps.  10:  3.  The  asyndic  construction 
occurs  principally  in  poetry ;  or  in  the  phraseology  of  common  life, 
(o)  The  disjunctives  ") ,  IN,  or  ;  as  2  K.  9:  32,  rt8>b»  D?3ffl  two  [or] 
three  eunuchs ;  1  Sam.  20:  12.  Is.  17.  6.  (c)  The  sign  of  comparison 
S ,  "»8?R5  ,  as  ;  Is.  21:  8,  rPnN  K"1j5*2  /ie  wiM  roar  [as]  a  Zion  ;  Ps.  11: 
1,  IISX  DD"1H  n"nr ^^2/  to  your  mountain  [as]  a  bird;  Is.  51:  12,  '  who 
shall  be  made  "Pim  [as]  grass ;  Job  24:  5.  Ps.  40:  8.  Nah.  3:  12,  13. 
Especially  when  the  second  member  of  a  sentence  has  ]3  so,  the  first 
member  often  omits  3 ;  as  Is.  55:  9,  '  for  !  as]  the  heavens  are  higher 
than  the  earth,  ^3  so  are  his  ways,'  etc.  Ps.  48:  6.  Job  7:  9.  Judg.  5:1 5.  {d) 
The  particles  "Vd  ,  "lUJN,  that;  as  Ps.  9:  21,  'the  nations  shall  know 
fran  £i:N  ,  [that]  they  are  mere  men;''  50:  21.  71:  8.  Job  19:  25.  Lam. 
1:21. 

§  562.  VII.  Ellipsis  in  poetic  parallelism.  In  poetry, 
a  noun,  pronoun,  verb,  adverb,  or  preposition,  expressed 
in  the  first  member  of  a  parallelism,  is  frequently  omitted 
in  the  second  member  ;   and  vice  versa. 

In  the  second  member,  (a)  A  noun;  as  Ps.  24:  1,  ilirp'r  ''Jehovah's 
is  the  earth  and  all  that  is  in  it,  [Jehovah's  is]  the  world  and  thej  who 
dwell  therein.'  (6)  A  pronoun ;  Ps.  22:  6,  "23N  '  I  am  a  worm  and 
no  man,  [/  am]  the  scorn  of  men  ;'  so  nr\X  ,  in  v.  10.     (c)  A  verb  ;  as 

*  In  technical  language,  that  part  of  the  senteuce,  which  in  cases  like  the  above  preceJes  Vav, 
is  called  protasis  ;  that  which  follows,  apodoais. 

t  This  is  called  the  coiustructio  asyndctica,  or  asundic  construction  i.  e.  without  the  OtvotO- 
fiQg  or  conjunction. 


§§  5G2 — 5Gj.  syntax;  chanor  or  construction.    19| 


Ps.  22:  3,'Oray  God,  injMJ  /  call  all  the  day, and  all  the  night 

[do  I  call] ;'  13:  3,  fl^lfaj  -'.it  *Vf  ,  l  /joa;  long  shall  I  have  anxiety  in  my 
soul,  [how  long  shall  I  have]  sorrow  in  my  heart?1  Is.  19:  7,  '  kings 
WV  shall  behold  and  rise  up,  princes  [shall  behold]  and  do  reverence, 
etc.  (d)  An  adverb;  as  Ps.  10:  5,  Fjtfb  ,  c  why,  Jehovah,  standest  thou 
afar  off,  [why]  hidest  thou  thyself;1  13:3.  22:  2,  etc.  For  the  omis- 
sion of  Nb  ,  see  §  558.  (c)  A  preposition;  as  Job  12:  12,  EF8nb'*a  , 
with  the  aged  is  wisdom,  IftK']  and  [with]  length  of  days  is  nndentand- 
ing;'  15:3.  Is.  28:  7.  44:  28,  '  saying  to  Jerusalem— rDVp  and  [to] 
the  temple,1  for  bs^nbl;  28:  6.  Job  34:  10.  Gen.  49:  25,  bija  'from 
the  God  of  thy  father — ^VO  nJO  and  [from]  the  Almighty,1  for  rx1:  ; 
Ps.  22:  2,  '  why  art  thou  distant  *~\1~  [from]  the  words  of  my  cry,1 
for  "nn-Ttt  ;  Job  30:  5.  Is.  48:  9.  49:  7.  61:7. 

In  the  first  member  ;  e.  g.  Is.  48:  11,  '  for  how  shall  [my  glory]  be 
profaned,  for  I  will  not  give  "H23  ,  my  glory  to  another?1  And  so  of- 
ten. 

Remark.  A  multitude  of  obscurities  in  the  English  translation  of 
the  Old  Testament,  might  be  removed  by  the  aid  of  these  principles, 
and  much  light  diffused  over  the  sacred  writings. 

CHANGE  OF  CONSTRUCTION. 

§  56.3.  When  a  sentence  begins  with  a  verb  in  the  Inf.. 
preceded  by  a  preposition  and  used  in  a  finite  sense,  it  of- 
ten   proceeds  with  a  finite  verb. 

E.g.  Ps.  60:  2,  a*jj»1 — irnxrj^tt'/ien  he  strove — and  returned  :  Gen. 
39:  18,  N-JpN")  "'b/ip  W^nS  ,  when  I  raised  my  voice  and  cried  .    Is.  18: 

5.  30:  12.  49:  5  Qeri.  Amos.  1:  11.  2:  4.  Gen.  27:  45.  Job  28:  25.  29: 

6.  38:  7. 

§  564.  Sentences  often  begin  with  a  participle,  and  pro- 
ceed with  a  finite  verb. 

E.  g.  Prov.  19:  26,  ESN  rY*Pl  ^N-nTl-2  ,  he  who  abuses  his  father, 
[and]  chases  away  his  mother;  2:  14.  Is.  5:  11.  48:  1.  57:  3.  Gen.  27: 
33.  Ps.  15:  2,  3,  etc. 

§  56.5.  Sentences  often  exhibit  a  change  of  person,  es- 
pecially in  poetry ;   viz. 

(a)  A  transition  from  the  third  person  to  the  second  ;  ami  MNMim 
E.  g.  Is.  1:  29,  '  for  they  shall  be  ashamed  of  the  groves,  whi< -h  n 
have  loved  ;'  Gen.  49:  4,  '  thou  wentest  up  to  thy  father's  bed — n 
went  up  to  my  couch;'  Mic.  7:  18.  Mai.  2:  15. 


IM      \\  .")(>(;_  "ids.  syntax;  construotio  prae»;nans— /.i.i  <m\. 

(/;)  A  transition  from  tho.Jirst  person  to  the  third.  E.  g  Is.  42:  24. 
44:  24,  25,  '/am  Jehovah  who  made  the  universe, — in;  frustr;it<«  the 
signs,  etc.  This  transition,  however,  is  not  very  frequent,  and  for  the 
most  part  it  is  altered    in  the  C^eri. 

Note.  The  same  chancres  of  person  occur  also  in  the  DM  of  suf- 
fix-pronouns, a  transition  being  often  made  from  the,/?™*  or  second  per- 
son to  the  third,  and  vice  versa  ;  as  Prov.  8:  17  (Kethib)  '  I  love  rT^nfc, 
HER  lovers,'  i.  e.  those  who  love  me;  Mic.  1:2,  '  hear  ye  people,  ZV2> 
all  of  them,  i.  e.  all  of  you  ;  Job  18:  4.  Is.  22:  16,  etc. 


CONSTRUCTIO  PRAEO'AXS. 

§  566.  The  name  of  constructio  praegnans  is  applied  to 
phrases,  which  imply  more  than  the  words  literally  ex- 
press although  there  is  no  direct  ellipsis. 

E.  g.  Ps.  22:  22,  "W^Xf  CO"!  ""IH^S  ,  hear  [and  deliver]  me  from 
the  horns  of  the  wild  bulls,  comp.  v.  13  ;  Ps.  74:  7,  ~7?«p  JSOaib^ri  Yy$> 
to  the  earth  have  they  [cast  down  and]  defied  thy  duelling  ;  1  Sam.  10: 
9,  "iftN  ab  DVfbN  ^-"l^rpi  ,  and  God  changed  [his  heart  and  gave]  to 
him  another  heart ;  1  Chr.  12:  17,  n^Sb  ^rjia^i: ,  but  if  to  deceive  [and 
betray]  me  to  my  enemies;  Ps.  118:5.  Is.  38:  17.  Jos.  4:  18.  2  Sam.  18: 
19.  Hos.  1:  2,  etc. 

•ZEUGMA. 

§  567.  The  name  Zeugma  is  applied  to  a  construction,  where  two 
subjects  have  a  verb  in  common,  but  this  verb  expresses  action,  etc. 
which  can  with  propriety  be  predicated  of  only  one  of  the  subjects ; 
e.  g.  Job  4:  10,  '  the  voice  of  the  lion,  and  the  teeth  of  the  young 
lions,  are  broken  out,"*  i.  e.  the  roaring  of  the  lion  [is  made  to  cease], 
and  the  teeth,  etc.  Gen.  47:  19,  '  wherefore  should  we  die,  we  and 
our  land?  i.  e.  we  die,  and  our  land  [become  desolate] ;  Is.  55:  3.  Hos. 
1:  2.  Jer.  15:  8.  Est.  4:  1. 

§  568.  The  figure  Zeugma  also  includes  those  cases  where  nouns 
are  grammatically  connected  with  preceding  nouns,  when  in  respect 
to  sense  such  connexion  cannot  be  admitted;  e.  g.  Ps.  65:  9,  '  thou 
makest  "'Nitia  ,  the  outgoings  of  the  morning  and  the  evening  to  re- 
joice,' where  outgoings  cannot  be  predicated  of  evening;  Gen.  2:  1, 
'  the  heavens,  and  the  earth,  and  all  CN3£  the  host  of  them,  i.  e.  the 
host  of  the  heavens,  viz.  the  stars.     Compare  Neb.  9:  6. 


§§569 — 571.  syntax;  henoiauys — paronomasia.  193 


HENDIADYS. 

§  569.  The  name  Ilcndiadys  is  applied  to  a  construc- 
tion, in  which  two  nouns  are  put  in  the  same  case,  and 
connected  by  a  copula,  while  in  respect  to  sense  one  of 
them  must  be  taken  as  a  Gen.  following  the  other,  or  as 
an  adjective  qualifying  the  other,   §  443. 

E.  g.  Gen.  1:  14,  'and  they  shall  be  for  signs,  D,"i3'v:'rn  and  for 
seasons,''  i.  e.  they  shall  be  for  signs  of  seasons,  etc.  3:  16,  /  will  multi- 
ply thy  sorrow  and  thy  conception,  i.  e.  1  will  multiply  the  pains  of  thy 
conception  ;  Job  10:  17,  misfortunes  and  a  host,  i.  e.  a  host  of  misfor- 
tunes ;  4:  16,  stillness  and  a  voice,  i.  e.  a  low  voice,  comp.  1  K.  19:  12. 
2  Chr.  16:  14.  Jer.  29:  11.     The  origin  of  the  word  is,  ep  did  dvoTv. 

PARONOMASIA. 

§  570.  The  name  Paronomasia  is  given  to  an  expres- 
sion, which  contains  two  or  more  words  selected  in  such 
a  manner,  that  they  may  resemble  each  other  in  sound, 
while  in  sense  they  may  differ. 

Paronomasia  is  a  very  fai-orite  figure  of  rhetoric  among  the  Hebrews,  and  is  common  in  all 
the  oriental  languages,  [t  differs  from  OUT  rhyme,  inasmuch  as,  the  words  which  constitute  it  do 
not  necessarily  stand  at  the  end  of  parallelisms  or  strophes,  but  may  be  placed  together  in  any 
part  of  a  sentence,  and  are  found  in  prose  as  well  as  port  n.' 

§  571.  There  are  various  modes  of  constructing  Paronomasia,  of 
which  the  following  are  the  principal. 

(a)  By  placing  together  like  sounding  words;  as  Gen.  1:  2,  ^rrn 
Iria",  desolate  and  empty  ;  4:  12,  1:t  3>: ,  a  fugitive  and  a  vagabond  ;  18: 
27,  n$M1  "icy,  dust  and  ashes  ;  Job  30:  19.  Is.  28:  10,  13,  IS  13B^  12 
^pT\  *>£  ^R^  1J2  '^  i  baw  nere  a»^  l(lw  there>  precept  here  void  precept 
there  ;  24:  17,  J1C1  nnci  1t]S  ,  terror  and  a  snare  and  a  sling  ,  Vs.  18: 
8.  Lam.  3:  47.  3er.  48:  43.  Is.  24:  3,  4. 

(6)  By  using  like  sounding  words  in  different  parts  of  a  sentence  , 
as  Hos.  8:  2,  nax  the  stalk  yields  no  n^|5  meal ;  Is.  5:  7,  '  and  In- 
looked  DDflSnb  for  equity,  and  lo  notoH  shedding  qf  blood,  for  llgTO 
righteousness,  and  lo  Mpttt  the  cry  of  the  oppressed  ;'  7:  9,  '  if  JO 
ITOMg  ye  will  not  believe,  then  laSMg  «b   ye  shall  not  be  a,tubli>hcd  ,■ 


*  Besides  the  name  n-aQovopaola,  the  (ire<  k  rhetorician!  also  called  tut*  flg* 
ure  TWjtjxifl1*  an^  nuQtmifila  ;  and  the  Latioi  ugnumtnatiu. 
'2.3 


(94  571.  syntax;  paronomasia. 

61:  3,  '  he  shall  appoint  "1E.N   nrjn  "\NC  ,  hcauty  instead  of  ashes  ?  Ps. 
'10:  4.  62:  8.  G8:  3.  Zech.  9:  5.  Gen.  42:  35.  Amos  5:  26. 

(c)  By  changing  sometimes  the  ordinary  forms  of  words,  in  order 
to  produce  similarity  of  sound;  as  Ezek.  43:  11,  TW^ni  TOSto, 
where  Bpsta  stands  for  8*^553;  Ps.  32:  1,  rWDh"**03  9lif  "*%|JJ , 
where  ^-liu:  stands  for  BMtoa  .     See  Mic.  1:8.  Ezek.  7:11.  Amos  5:  26. 

{(I)  By  employing,  in  some  cases,  a  word  sounding  in  some  degree 
like  another;  as  Joel  I:  15,  '  it  shall  come  *T212  T©3,  as  destruction 
from  the  Almighty  ,'  Jer.  61:  2,  '  I  will  send  against  Babylon  D^^J  6«r- 
barians,  fflin  cmd  //<ey  s/i«M  scatter  her  f  Is.  32:  7,  "Prs  "'Vs ,  '  the  ar- 
mour of  the  crafty  is  evil ;'  Ezek.  7:  6,  5fJ*?JI  y^5r1  y^>H  N2  N2  fg, 
/Ae  end  is  como  com-e  m  </te  end,  it  is  -waked  up  against  thee  ;  Is.  1:  23, 
D^^D  -t^to,  thy  princes  are  revolters,  comp.  Hos.  9:  15.  Is.  57:  6. 
Amos  8:  2. 

(e)  By  repeating  the  same  word  in  a  different  signification;  as  Ecc. 
7:  6,  'like  the  noise  [crackling]  D^-OOrl  of  thorns  under  "VSH  a  pot f 
Judg.  10:  4,  '  Jair  had  thirty  sons,  and  they  rode  upon  thirty  ta"1"^^? , 
asses'1  colts,  and  had  thirty  C3,,"yy  ,  cities  ,-'  15:  16,  '  with  the  jaw  bone 
"nslin  of  an  ass,  have  1  slain  O*n~0J3li  "OEtl  one  heap  two  heaps ? 
1  Sam.  1:  24,  '  and  1$3  T^rr  the  lad  was  yet  a  lad  ?  Jer.  1:  11,  12, 
'  what  seest  thou,  Jeremiah?  Ans.  A  rod  TJSUJ  of  the  almond  tree. 
Then  God  said,  Well,  for  *i£'& ,  /  watch  over,  etc.' 

(/)  Proper  names  are  frequently  made  the  occasion  of  Parono- 
masia ;  as  Mic.  1:10,  ISSn  Kx  132 ,  in  Acco  weep  not,  FHSji  D"1^  in 
Beth  Leaphra,  roll  thyself  1W  in  the  dust;  1:  14,  '  the  houses  3",72N 
of  Achzib  2T3Nb  are  liars  ?  Zeph.  2:  4,  FD^TS  J"iT3<  ,  Gaza  is  forsaken ; 
Gen.  9:  27,  'God  ns^s  nc?  wi«  en/arge  Japh'et ;'  49:  8,  nn^ri";  '  O  Ju- 
do/*, thy  brethren  Spiv'  sAa//  praise  thee?  49:  16,  lp*1^  T=7 ,  Z)an  s/ja/J 
jWge ;  49:  19,  WJIJ^  "Pli!  "13  ,  Gad,  a  /iosJ  s/ia//  />ress  w/wn  him ;  Ruth 
1:  20.  Neh.  9:  24.  Num.  18:  2.  Is.  21:  2.  Jer.  6:  1.  48:  2.  Ezek.  25: 
16.  Hos.  2:  25.  Amos  5:  5,  6. 

Note.  Paronomasia  is  very  common  in  the  New  Testament ;  as 
Matt.  8:  22,  uq?ig  xovg  vmgovg  ftuipui  zovg  iuvtiov  vexgovg  let  the 
dead  bury  their  own  dead ;  see  above  in  e.  In  Latin  are  found  capia- 
tur  Capua,  cremetur  Cremona ;  and  Cicero  exclaims  {in  Verrem  IV.  24) 
quod  nunquam  hujasmodi  everriculvm  in  provincia  ullafuit.  In  the  writ- 
ings of  the  monks  of  the  middle  ages,  and  of  the  older  English  divines. 
Paronomasia  abounds  to  excess. 


3M3BAM&2LS 


OF 


VERBS  AND  NOUNS. 


100      Par.  I.    Regular  Verb  transitive.   §§212 — 219. 


Kul. 

Kal. 

Niphal. 

IVI. 

Praet.  3  m. 

(sing.)          7Dp 

nsn 

Vop: 

bvji 

3i: 

nVop 

ms-i 

nVjp] 

rhpji 

2  m. 

nVbp 

nnbn 

r'-ap: 

nVap 

2£ 

nVop 

nnsi 

nVop] 

r^.p 

1  *. 

^nrop 

TDD1 

m^bpa 

^rb;jp 

3  c. 

(plnr.)       V^LDp 
:'it 

in:n 

^0j}3 

^jp 

2  m. 

cn^-Jp 

DTDS"! 

nnrjp] 

zrb;jp 

2f. 

K$3R 

jMiyi 

?f?>.PK 

i^E 

1 

^Vjj? 

nanibn 

^rjp] 

^y^p 

int: 


abs. 
const. 


^"jp 


b,-2)V"jpn 

A' 


^apri 


^p. 
htap 


Fut.     3  m. 

(sing.)       PtSp^ 

33T* 

^BK 

!*BK 

3f. 

Sofn 

nsin 

tei?! 

^8*1 

2  m. 

V'jpn 

nsin 

^ttjjri 

Vjp.n 

2f. 

^•jpn 

^znn 

hVJ.i;n. 

^.P-*! 

1 

^pa 

33i« 

^KS 

^?£K 

3  m. 

[ptarO     ^ap"1 

ttST 

•'It  • 

3f. 

naVapn 

rcnann 

MDrjpn 

n:r^r 

2  m. 

"irapn 

W3in 

$&£?] 

¥oj?sj 

2f. 

n:Vjpn 

naainm 

nA&jjn 

1 

V"jp: 

MH3 

b"OJ?3 

^£3. 

/uf.  apoc. 

Imp.    2  m. 

(sing.)        Vt^P 

35") 

ropn 

Vjp_ 

2f. 

^P.P. 

^Dl 

^•jp- 

*'|T 

T^p- 

2  m. 

(I'lur.)       ^I3P 

ran 

•'|T      • 

irjp 

2f. 

■rABp. 

n?-.^l 

nAbpn 

n&tbj? 

Parte,   act. 

yj.ip 

tti-i 

tew 

pass 

Mbg 

SMI 

T 

^?R? 

Par.  I.   Regular  Verb  transitive.   §§212—219.      107 


Pual. 

HiphiL 

Iloplial. 

Hitbpael. 

CnR)Vag 

^optn 

(:q(-n)Vjpn 

(^Rnn)^pr- 

etc.  rffVp 

n^^upn 

°,c-  n^pn 

'■••••  nrjpr - 

T)bb% 

rbbpn 

ntepn 

rVjprn 

r:VJP 

nb'jpn 

rrjpn 

rrjpnn 

^nrjp 

TiVapn 

^P&bpn 

^fepnn 

^Bfs 

Vr-jpn 

*tepn 

^epnn 

cfi.Vjp' 

cnVjpn 

crVjpn 

Drt>Bpnn 

■jn'rjp 

■jn^/jpn 

irtepn 

■jrr^pnn 

*ttV6)? 

lAajyi 

labopn 

iDVbpnn 

^bj? 

^?.?P- 

^oprt 

Vjp' 

^bpn 

irapn 

'—.r^H 

(bop.:)  5B£1 

^F2 

C^p;)^ 

C?«B«:)bE)gni 

wo.  paprj 

VfcRft 

etc.  ^Hj"  n 

•»•■  ptapnri 

^agn 

^*»qj?ri 

^?pP 

bts)jprirj 

^iqp'n 

^/bpn 

^qp.n 

^ORW 

Hp* 

^Dp* 

i>»pK 

v?£n* 

^Mag-i 

^'PR- 

^pi 

"T'jp^ 

raVfepfi 

nabbpit 

n?VJr.rT 

n:yjp_nn 

*tapfl 

i^bpn 

^■jpn 

^Bj?nn 

nabbpn 

n&bpn 

nabbptf 

hafcbpnn 

£&pj! 

^qpj 

,<:::r.: 

'--."H 

-".p! 

Vopn 

(Hir^i)  ^Bj?nn 

tybpft 

••c-rjpr- 

^*?n 

■-^-r- 

*?V-.~~ 

n&tbpnn 

^»Bpti  tepnn 


r,*s 


(bBPtt)^Bpa  Ci>BP»)VDPt] 


198       Par.  II.   Reg.  Verbs  intransitive.  §§  220—232. 


Kal.  Kal.  Kal.  Kal. 


Praet.  3  m. 

(Bing.)        pSZ) 

!?N12J 

*« 

■if 

3f. 

nhs® 

rfta© 

rn£ 

ma1' 

2  m. 

nVba 

tt&m 

(M 

w*n?! 

rriJ 

2f. 

ntetti 

nba© 

W 

?9*ri?! 

m3r» 

1 

"^BID 

vfpM  ( 

■WjS 

:W?! 

^n-i5^ 

3 

:piur.)     *i^BEJ 

^Nti 

in^ 

w 

2ra. 

crted 

cnbtftri 

wro* 

amy 

2f. 

I^Bffl 

v&*$ 

jmV* 

jrrjj* 

1 

l&Dtfl 

wHkd 

m^1" 

man 

Mi  Li,w»m  Li,v>1»i     (The  other  forms  in  these  two  word* 

aDS.  7"S(I3  7l"UJ        belong  to  the  irregular  verbs.) 

const.  ^B©  ^«ttj 

Fut.     3  m.  («ing.)    tetti/]  ^KtD1] 

3  f.  isizjn  ^wjri 

2  m.  ^Bfflfi  bwtBfi 

2  f.  ^Bttfl  ^PP. 

1  tefflM  *?tftttf 
3-m.cptaro  ^B«n  ^M?! 

3  f.  rq^.ltBjn  M^tata 

2  m.  ^BttF]  ^ftton 

2  f.  nAsmn  nab&iDn 

i  Vstia  i>«tD3 


Imp.     2  m.  ("ins-)     ^B©  ^*MD 

2  f.             ^BB  "VNO 

2m.(pi«'-)    I^Bti  ^Ntt) 

2  f.       na^ffl  rcftati 

PartT  act.              ^BO  fclfltj 

pass.  7  IN  tt) 


Par.  III.  Verbs  D  Gutt.,  smooth  enunciation.  §224.     199 

Kal.  Nlphal.         Hiphil.         Hophal. 

Praet.  Ifi*  ^3      Tayn        TO 

^imay  Tib?:   WBjn  Wnjn 

Piur.  may  to  wfcgn    wn 

way  ways  wa*n  wwn 


Inf.  abs.                lin? 

T|B*3 

Twn 

const.               "jay 

1B;n 

twn 

Tttpl 

Fut.          -jar       ptit 

"Tttg 

l^ar 

lay 

na?n      pTnn 

ittyn 

.twp 

wn 

TOWi       pTnn 

■ffiyn 

Tayn 

■na^n 

mayn      npmn 

mayn 

■^"•feypi 

ma*n 

TOW*       ptnaj 

WH 

TW* 

iny« 

Plur.            may        ipim 

may 

m^ay 

may 

nmayn  njptnFi  wioajn  rtjnwn  nnayn 

mayn  iptnn  mfc*n  m'wn    ir;r 

nj-i&n  nsjfmn  nmayn  nrtawi  nj^rj 

nay?  jpirg  law     iwa      iaja 

imp.          ia?  pin  tojsj     iwn 

may  ,»pm  mayn    m*ay- 

Plur.         may  ^ipm  mayn   m'wn 

nmSy  "?pm.  naijbyn  nnbyn 

Part.  act.     laiy  T£"  - 

pass.  Hay  TOM  TBJHJ 


200      Par.  IV.    Verbs  £  Gutt.,  rough  eouBC.  §§225. 


K;il. 

K:il. 

Niplial. 

Bopbal. 

HiphU. 

Praot. 

OiS-Vin 

-ian 

"-"?. 

■sjEnn 

totki 

3f. 
2  m. 

T    :  n 

rbhn 

rn:n 

*   :    It 

etc. 

elr. 

n5Bnn 

etc. 

nTonn 

etc. 

2f. 

riVin 

1. 

3  (p'«' 

■•>    nVrrj 

lawia 

to&nn 

i-rcnn 

2  m. 

tsn^n 

etc. 

2f. 

wj?.in 

1. 

wSftn 

Inf.  abs.       b'TiTl 

■vian 

T»cnn 

const.       p*in 

nan. 

ijsnn 

ITSi  n  I 

■venn 

Fut.  3  m.      ^nj 

n'arp 

1611 

■SpWP 

Ton; 

3  f.       ^nn 

-iann 

^ann 

TjE_nn 

Term 

2  m.     ^rrri 

nanri 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

2  f.      ^rpn 

■nann 

i         5>to« 

■Jian* 

3m. (pi)  ^Vyp 

nw 

3f.   naV-nm 

nanJnn 

2  m.    ^iVnn 

*nann 

2  f.    na'rtnn 

naiann 

i         Jqro 

nam 

Imp.  2  m.      ^*in 

■inn 

Tj&nn 

icnn 

2  f.      ^nn 

nan 

■osnn 

etc 

2  m.(pi-)    iVin 

*nan 

*iDBnn 

2  f.     njVin 

wn5n 

napfcnn 

Part.  act.       ^n         "lain  TOnM 

n  if  mi  .     .    - 

pass.  *TJ£i13     ^EHE 


Par.  V.    Verb  g  Guttural.    §§229—232.  201 


Kal. 

Niphal. 

Piel. 

Pual. 

HithpaeL 

pi 

p*w 

(aw)  '•pa 

tan)  TO 

■sjnann 

np^T 

't  ~;t 

TtfTO 

•*•  naia 

tic-  r.z^'z 

nzizrn 

V0\ 

*9™ 

nana 

nz^z 

naSann 

•  1   .    —  T 

vifm 

Wna 

rpn'a 

nziznn 

**&?! 

TtpJta 

"TOT* 

^nzpi 

^PDnann 

5jpyj 

lp_3?TD 

irja 

izn'z 

Wiann 

WiRSt 

enpyra 

cnz-D 

nnrp.i  i 

znz^znn 

•jnpn 

inpyn 

I1?.?!?. 

1&TO 

jnanann 

^-! 

njftro 

WIS 

MSnla 

Wnann 

pin 

P"I 

TO 

1"* 

^nzrn 

few      p££      F?.£(»e;)  ~nz?  (r*T:)  >rn-'!      TO1?! 

B?33J?i     pgTin      ppp]  *■   "izri  <*c.   '•pari     "spanR 

timn     pnn     pg-jn  Ipan  TOn.     tpann 

^n:n    ^n    ^Jpjn  wato  ^l-n.    ''TO11*! 

tina*     pgt«     pgiwv  spaa  TO?     "TOna 

tiftrs*     ipjt'i     ip;;r  tona*  wb"!     tonarv; 

ra&Twi  rtjphn  napiyn  fiji^an  n:zizn  naananri 

*iB_nan    «ipytpi    *p??a  nsnsri  lanin   ^"jann 

•Tjtinaf]  n:p>;»n  napijft  n:-nzn  njaitin  waiann 

tinai     wm      pm  *paa  TOa      *pana 

P^t            jtfja  (--.;)  jia  TOn# 

^P3?t          w*n  wia  *TOn.n 

napgT         napJtti  'naana  ^J-n??! 


pyit  (*2»)TO9  115°,^ 


P^»  P"t:  i 


TOB 


202         Par.  VI.    Verb  $  Guttural.    §§283—236. 


K»l. 

Niphal. 

Pie!. 

Prael 

1.  3  m.  (flins-) 

ynin 

n«D3 

(?::-)     >'~d 

3f. 

T      :  It 

rMtba 

ctc-  rtyao 

2m. 

njao 

nraoa 

rjwaiD 

2f. 

rnPM 

nyotba 

s&EB 

1 

wlatti 

wboa 

■w!hd 

3      tpi«o 

^tJUJ 

^Bffla 

17EO 

2  m. 

cn?£d 

okflaca 

DFISHDID 

2f. 

jphpot 

in^d: 

inajati 

1 

^vbm 

wlftja 

13J^&tD 

Inf. 

abs. 

T\121D 

const. 

ynm 

yaan 

*?.? 

Fut. 

3  m.  (sins-) 

?KW 

y^p^ 

(573^)    ysd'1 

3f. 

watin 

yafflpi 

^c     yattin 

2  m. 

j>a©Pi 

^wn 

aiart 

2f. 

wtbn 

^aisn 

•    ;  it     • 

■>jp$on 

1 

?131DX 

PBijja 

pass 

3  m.    (p'"'-) 

^ftttP 

12a  ah 

;  fT  • 

13HD0* 

3f: 

si»btDn 

fiwaapn 

n:^dn 

2  m. 

w»n 

lanafrj 

*i2PBJpP» 

2f. 

ration 

naajbttn 

naspfevto 

1 

*StD3 

paraa 

yaaia 

Ful.  apoc. 

Imp. 

2  m.    (singo 

pari 

/JUI  1 

feauj)    yao 

2f. 

OTtd 

won 

etc.         ^^?!2  i3 

2  m.   (p'uro 

*9&n 

ijpa»sn 

liWDtti 

2f. 

W2PBID 

inayaan 

nayaai 

Part. 

act.           (sn 

«0    ??.*> 

(r^ra)  732)3 

pass. 

naia 

~                     T 

.pads 

Par.  VI.   Verb  *>  Guttural.    §§  233—236.         203 


Pual. 

Hiphil. 

Hophal. 

Hithpael. 

?^P 

a^aton 

won  (5ig*n)  JPHRlDn 

nyauj 

t]TmpX\ 

np^Dn 

•*.  riorum 

n^ao 

rvhion 

njaion 

nyantbn 

nyati 

frjpaifti 

Twhm 

n?sndr; 

wad 

wattin 

watin 

wantrin 

VJ121D 

«iy*ba5n 

wnan 

i-rndn 

DftJHaffl 

DP!^!Dtt>n 

an^aon 

Dn*an«n 

ni?ao 

watin 

jnyanvin 
tta&ntEin 

?aip 

^fctin 

pasift 

?w«h 

*atth 

ynaEP 

ynDn 

(ssb* :)  JBIjjtifj 

ynwn 

mjpi 

yawn 

etc-     yan<En 

?amn 

rosin 

jnatin 

yantrin 

lyaon 

strain 

■OTtbn 

vanton 

ya»K 

rotoa 

ya©« 

yantoa 

watD*1 

^jrtjtth 

*i*atth 

OTFBP 

njjjfetdF! 

nayrjan 

na^attin 

na^ntrrn 

i3?^n 

Wilfe 

vain 

barren 

natfoinn 

FH3?BtDn 

najarin 

wanton 

pasa 

rotia 

JHMM 

*an©a 

*jobj"> 

yaan 

(Strain)  yantin 

wbttti 

etc  tattntDSi 

wanton 

v&nor; 

aymtDn 

iwanen 

9  ;       ""  !    • 

raca 


(S73nu;73)  yaniDa 


yasa 


3?aEa 


204 

1 

*i\i.  VII.    Verbs  wND. 

§§240.  241. 

Kal.             Kal. 

Niphal.         Hipliil.       Hnphal. 

Praet. 

3  m. 
3f. 

bis      -ftj»      b^:     ^s«n    teari 

(regular)  (regular)  (as D  Gutt.)  (asD  Gutt.)  as  d  Gutt. 

Inf. 

abs. 
const. 

biffin    b*5j*T±    fcawi 

Fut.     3  m.      i>5*5       na«i        >:>«£       ^Offi       $M£ 

sf.  tean  n^«n     ^an       ■*■       ««• 

2  m.  ^5«'n  -jttNPi  5>jwj 
2f.  (j»5jprfn  ^B«n  ^a»n 
i  £$«  -flak     bsf** 

Plur.    3  m.     n!?5^      *H£^      \b*N* 

3  f.  naVsan  ronasiFi  njbSjbjB 
2  m.  *te*fe  nfctfn  ^biawg 
2  f.  mijbete  runjban  rn^an 
i         5?Sfifcj     ^tiw      ^3452 

Fu<.  a/>oc.  -SNri 


imp.  2m.(^go^^      *a»     &wjn     ^3«n 
2f.       ^^j     n»« 

2  m.(plarO  ^3tf  VTQ* 

2  f.     naVBej    mD-ien 

Part.   act.         ^Oitf  ?^.-- 

pass.       btoa  few  te»fl 

The  derivative  conjugations  of  verbs  ND  are  declined  in  the  same 
manner  as  those  of  B  Guttural ;  N  being  treated  (out  of  Kal)  as  a 
Guttural,  and  not  as  a  Quiescent;  see  Niphal,  etc.  in  the  Paradigm. 
In  like  manner,  Piel  r2N ,  Pual  *2N ,  Hithp.  r2Nri!"7  ;  compare  verbs 
2  Guttural,  *\J22  and  pTti ,  for  the  mode  of  inflection. 


Par.  VIII.   Verbs  orig.  ID ;   I.  Class  ■*©.  §§  243—247.      205 


Kal. 

Kal. 

Niphal. 

Hiphil. 

Hophal. 

Praet. 

nth 

ST 

apia 

n^pin 

30to 

3f. 

(regular' 

I        (regular) 

napia 

n3ip*in 

nap^n 

2  m. 

rjnlfta 

wpin 

ropvi 

2f. 

rbpti 

napkin 

rqpin 

]. 

irpofa 

inrithn 

tropin 

Plur.  3. 

wpti 

nip^n 

mphn 

2  m. 

DfiMfta 

cnnpin  DMOin 

2f. 

l^/oia 

]napin 

IMp^n 

1. 

*l33ffh3 

rcaSftn 

*i33pin 

In£  abs. 

H\& 

BftT 

const 

.  rop 

(aj^inon 

ashn 

aipta 

achn 

Fut. 

SEJ1 

^T)fflT! 

3DY; 

31031 

3p1i 

3f. 

aoij 

BTn 

3p>n 

rjipiri 

anftn 

2  m. 

3p"n 

tfiTFI 

now 

3"»p*|FI 

sain 

2f. 

i3pri 

vj^n 

•»ao*iri 

•    :  it    • 

■qipto 

lapvi 

1 

a  pa 

BTa 

305» 

iip'i« 

301** 

3  m.  (p'uf-J 

bri; 

^B»Ti 

topjl 

wp^ 

130^ 

3£ 

n»to 

napTn 

siaapnjn 

TOO**! 

rwapin 

2  m. 

<iapn 

«iotpi 

totthn 

:  It     • 

Wip1!?) 

tato'in 

2f. 

nsaprj 

nstpTfi 

irwapjn 

naapin 

rrteann 

1. 

spa 

onia 

395a 

3ip*l3 

30*13 

Fut.  apoc. 

ayi"1 

Imp.  m.  < 

>inS.)  ^Q 

(\ci)  OT 

apnrj 

spin 

f. 

•OT 

ipT 

i3«hn 

•     ;  it      * 

■oipta 

m.( 

pi.)  WW 

TAT 

:  It     • 

i3ip*in 

£ 

rt»o 

njtfv; 

nftpjii 

n:zbi- 

Part,  act 

.  aoV» 

onV" 

ypta 

pass.  ZML1 

BIT 

T 

315*13 

3pnia 

206      Par.  IX.  Verbs  ^D.  II.  Class. 
~~'Kal.  Hiphil. 

Praet.  3  m.  (»>"g-)  3D1*  (aw)  S'Wl 

3   f.  (regular)  FO^Tl 

3  (pior.)  la^n 


Inf.      abs. 
const. 


n^n 


Fut.  3  m.^- 1  XJ^     (a*£)   X'J^ 


3f. 
2  m. 
2f. 
1 


atyn 


3  m. (pi)  *D"J^ 

3  f.   mab^sn 

2  m.      teBf»R 

2  f.    hjaenn 

1  DD^ 


F«(.  apoc. 


nir*i 


ntr 


Imp.  m.  (sing)      2"^ 


imp 


f.  ^ 

m.  (pi«r.)    ,^Dt2',, 

f.        nDnb-» 


inaabin 


Part.  act.  ITO/P 

pass         XiX 


XiTB 


Remarks.  Niphal,  in  verbs  of  this  spe- 
cies, does  not  occur.  The  Daghesh'd  con- 
jugations are  regular  throughout;  e.g. 
Piel  SEP  ,  Pual  !lfi£  ,  Hithpael  5g£lin  . 
Hophal  conforms  to  the  model  in  Par.VII ; 
e.  g.  nOT' ,  etc.  Only  Hiphil,  therefore, 
distinguishes  the  II.  class  of  verbs  "D,  from 
those  of  the  I.  class. 


Par.X.  fe.  III.  Class. 


Kal. 


PI* 


(regular.) 


ni:r 


rsn 
nsn 

nansn 

ronsn 
ns3 


Kal. 


p=e 


pis; 

ftp 


—  •- — 

pSFI 

ps» 
1p3£ 

ipsri 


P^1 
pis'1 


Remarks.  The  conj. 
Niphal,  Hiphil,  and  Ho- 
phal, are  declined  in  the 
same  manner  as  these 
conjugations  are  in  verbs 
Pe  Nun,  Par.  XI.  E.  g. 
Niph.  nx: ,  Hiph.  THEft , 
Hoph.  nsH ,  etc. 


Par.  XL   Verbs  ]D. 


207 


Kal. 

Kal. 

Niphal. 

Hiphil. 

Hophal. 

Praet.  3  m. 

,  feg 

033 

033 

chan 

oan 

3£ 

[regular] 

[regular] 

SIOM 

no^an 

noan 

2  m. 

npas 

frpari 

npan 

2f. 

np33 

noan 

npari 

1 

in  a  5_3 

nnoain 

vjpSn 

3  m. 

(ply.) 

neaa 

wan 

loan 

2  m. 

DF1033 

bptdah 

DFipan 

2f: 

prJBM 

^np.yi 

Iffpan 

i 

ijbBd 

*i3pan 

^3pan 

Inf. 

abs. 

^B3 

otoj 

oasn 

o^an 

consi 

t.  Vbs 

no  I 

o^an 

oah 

Fut. 

ft* 

oa* 

033? 

o^a^ 

D^ 

3  f. 

Vsn 

oari 

oasin 

i^an 

dan 

2  m. 

Ven 

dari 

daan 

wm 

oan 

2f. 

^sn 

"ifflajn 

ifejaam 

win 

*oan 

1 

£&M 

aaa 

0338 

chaa 

oa« 

3  m. 

(pUr.) 

*b& 

TtfrP 

loas* 

yew 

raa? 

3f. 

ro&sn 

naoan 

wosjri 

njoan 

rwpan 

2  m. 

j&ef] 

loan 

1033fl 

wan 

loan 

2f. 

riDVfn 

njoan 

fispasn 

njoan 

njoan 

1 

*W 

toy 

0333 

©•»33 

033 

Fut.  apoc. 

^ 

Imp. 

m. 

Ve3 

oa 

05351 

D-*.~ 

f. 

[regular] 

•<oa 

v»333n 

itrhan 

m.  (p1ui 

•) 

*I03 

^iibian 

ao^an 

i: 

rwoa 

nsoasn 

nsoan 

Part. 

act. 

Vd'13 

oati 

apaq 

pass. 

0133 

T 

tt333 

T    • 

03B 

208  Par.  Ml.    VevU  M-   §§256-266. 


Kill. 

Kal. 

Niphal. 

Hiphii. 

Praet.  3  in. 

S§ 

^  no 

(bn:)  3D3  (: 

ion)  2m 

3  1. 

nzq 

rqzo 

i ' —  - 

nabn 

2  m. 

niao 

HMO 

nhsoa 

hhson 

2f. 

nizq 

nzzq 

ninqq 

niztn 

1 

Tiizq 

tizzo 

inizqa 

irnzcn 

3  (p^m 

"DO 

1220 

32I&3 

-,ib~ 

2  m.       ! 

:nizq 

cnzzq 

&rn303 

cnizcn 

2f. 

ininq 

Bijrho 

■jnizqi 

ir-zcn 

1 

WHSfc 

BMD 

"Jizo: 

"izcn 

Inf.  abs. 

nhao 

const. 

M  no 

(b*3r»)  nqn 

-?.nT 

Fut.        no; 

20? 

^ 

(iw:)s&i 

tagatg 

3  f.        zcn 

o¥ft 

^ 

non 
—  < 

zcn 

2  m.          fon 

T 

non 

^E1?. 

SOT) 

zcn 

2f.       138ft 

inon 

^£? 

^zqn 

^zcn 

•     ••     T 

i           noa 

30$ 

^pa 

-ON 

ZOK 

3  m.  (pi«.)  IZDi 

*asH 

*& 

tt&l  ( 

^r-.)  lacj 

3 1    rtrSon 

ranon 

riffiggn 

nrzcn 

nrzcn 

2  m.      don 

inon 

iVpn 

in  on 

izcn 

2  f.    nrisn 

harjoft 

n;dqn 

nyioa 

i.           no: 

n"D3 

gi 

nq: 

ZC3 

FW.  conv.    SD*2 

at?*2 

Imp.  m.       ZO 

non 

zcn 

f.        T30 

^0" 

•zcn 

•  ••  v 

m.      db 

( 

iThs)  men 

"zcn 

f.  wae 

"r%D-n. 

Part.  act.  nniO 

3DS 

pass.  Z'ZO 

-?? 

Par.  XII.   Verbs  **   §§  256—266.  209 


ilophal. 

Poel. 

Poal. 

Pilpel. 

Polpal. 

(nan)  201H 

3210 

2210 

2020 

2020 

r:2pin 

"^1D 

naaio 

-2020 

naoao 

Pizo^in 

112210 

T2210 

112020 

pabao 

niacin 

naata 

H2210 

naoao 

naoao 

viiscin 

Tiaiio 

snaaio 

*naqao 

•7,2020 

laqnn 

12210 

12210 

12020 

12020 

cni20i- 

DnaajiO 

BR.aajio 

03712020 

0112020 

fniaqin 

jnaaio 

fnaaio 

■jnaoao 

jnaqao 

131201- 

132.210 

1D2210 

132020 

132020 

aq*in 

2210 

2210 

aoaq 

aoap 

(n?;)  ac&i 

-^ 

2210^ 

2020^ 

2020^ 

20m 

2210H 

2210H 

aoaon 

aoaon 

now 

baton 

anion 

aoaon 

aoaon 

*aq*in 

■oaten 

■>aaion 

^2020_n 

■oqaon 

aqik 

2210>* 

aaioa 

aoaoK 

2C20N 

Mby 

12210^ 

t        : 

laaio1; 

12020^ 

120201; 

nratnn 

njaaion 

naaaion 

njaqaqn 

naaqaon 

1201:1 

12210F1 

122'ion 

12020_n 

I202pn 

nrawn 

njaaion 

-322'icn 

naaqaon 

-320_20n 

2013 

22103 

aaioa 

20203 

20203 

2210 

2020 

^2210 

^2020 

12210 

12020 

"22210 

naabaq 

22102 


2020tt 


201ft 


22102 


20202 


27 


210 


Par.  XIII.   Verbal?.  §§207— 271. 


Kal. 

Kal. 

Niphal. 

If  .phi! 

Praet.  3  m.  (»ingo 

°P, 

nri 

trtja 

cpn 

8f. 

nbg 

nnb 

rrarb 

rrc/pn 

2  m. 

fibj? 

nnb 

rjib'^pa 

rmrpn 

if. 

nog. 

pfc 

rhfiipa 

nta^pn 

i 

wj 

h^_ 

T^aips 

viwpn. 

3           (plur.) 

rap. 

inb 

ittipa 

wpn 

2  m. 

&fl$R. 

BM 

Difiinpa 

Dnwpn 

2i: 

WJB 

ina 

■jni^ipq 

■jn'wpn 

i 

^t)p_ 

ttna 

^itJip: 

isisrpn 

Inf. 


abs. 
const. 


Dip 


ma 

m» 


mpn 


Fut. 


3  m. 

(sing.)  nnp*i 

3f. 

Dipn 

2  m. 

tnpn 

2f. 

^ipn 

1 

ffipit 

3  m. 

W«.)  I^ip^ 

3f. 

wwpn 

2  m. 

wpn 

2f. 

wfnpfl 

1 

a^pa 

nw 


nip1; 

Dipt] 

Diprj 

••tfipn 

Dipa 

<r-    *'        • 

ra'ipri 
DIM 


n^pn 

•       •    •      T 

'    •       T 

rwfcpn 


Fu<.  o/>oc. 


cp 


k; 


n»" 


Imp.    2  m.   (sing-)     D^p      (n^rfttl 


npn 


2£ 

nnp 

2  m. 

(plur.; 

i  iaip 

2  f. 

nrqp 

Part. 

act. 

aP, 

pass. 

Cip 

nD 


nan 


■»nipn       npfjii 

^ipn 
nation 

tnpa 


wpn 


Par.  XIII.   Verbs  fo.  §§267—271. 


Hophal. 

Polel. 

Polal. 

DjPin 

Lttip 

DB'lp 

napw 

naa'ip 

naa*ip 

nap-in 

naaip 

naahp 

rnqpin 

naaip 

RBB'lp 

*r»Bj?in 

''Fjttb'ip 

■toarnp 

sbrvi 

*lBBip 

toaip 

Dr^jpin 

an.^ip 

BBBB'lp 

ina^n 

JFlBBip 

■jnBBip 

wa^n 

laabhp 

ttaaip 

Opjlfi 

aahp 

BBip 

ay 

^^Pl 

BBJlp1] 

bj&w 

oaipn 

DB*»pn 

npjin 

BEftpB 

DBipn 

rapin 

^aaHpfca 

''BBipPI 

BJ31H 

BB/lpa 

BB'lp* 

tojjii 

SBB'lp* 

siBB'lp'; 

njBjpin 

Fijabipn 

naBBipn 

*iBpi5i 

laa'ipfl 

IBBlpPl 

njBjpto 

wajrtptn 

njaaipn 

d^a 

aaips 

DBlp3 

BBIp 

■■BBlp 

*iamp 

rwarhp 

P.  XIV.  vp.  211 
Kal. 

n:| 

r,:z 

■©33 

*33 

DPI.33 

*I33 


DB1PB 


DP^lB 


DB1PB 


112 


■pan 
■pa* 


_J5 

to 


212 

Par.  XV. 

Verbs  K*?. 

§J  276— 27!». 

Kal. 

Niphal. 

PieT 

Pratt 

.  3  rn.  (H'"s-) 

MXQ 

kxbj 

KXtJ 

3  1. 

rifttt) 

h'fcx&a 

tlKXtJ 

2  in. 

n&ia 

niis&a 

haxa 

2f. 

hitaa 

riftx&a 

h*xa 

1 

■tfittaj 

s5naxt» 

VJWStj 

3  (P>ur-J 

r  it 

1«XS3 

n*sn 

2  ni. 

prffRBRa 

$n$X&3 

Bnaxa 

2f. 

!pi«sa 

•pnfcxas 

fnaxa 

1 

tti&& 

ti&tu 

ttKXfi 

Inf. 

abs. 

ansa 

»xa 

const. 

K2££ 

«x;a?j 

KXE 

Fiit. 

3  m.  (ain?o 

«&*£ 

rxb; 

KSB1] 

3£ 

k'iaFi 

R2BR 

Ksan 

2  m. 

ftS&Pj 

Msari 

axon 

2f. 

■»*iwn 

•    ;  n    • 

■wxan 

1 

»2£« 

KXQtt 

»xaa 

3   m     Cplur.) 

^^*! 

J    IT   ■ 

^--' 

3f. 

wfciwi 

tt3«2BF) 

nsaxan 

2  m. 

ttitjn 

?    IT        • 

^stsn 

2£ 

hb«2:ari 

raksan 

naa&ari 

1 

8ti&3 

N2B3 

KXEj 

Fut.  apoc. 

Imp. 

2  m.    (sing.) 

«sa 

Ksan 

ttXQ 

2f. 

■wxta 

•   :  it    • 

■»aX£ 

2  m.  tph»0 

ixse 

ttMMKl 

laXtl 

2f. 

ii^sa 

ftj&xa 

Part. 

act. 

^jiB 

k?b? 

pass* 

RTS53 

«Xfi3 

Par.  XV.    Verbs  N2?.   §§  276—279. 


213 


Pual. 

Hiphil. 

Hophal. 

Hithpael. 

(*»»)  «aca 

tttctin 

(bwoi)  »oan 

fcsaann 

«■  n»sa 

•nfian 

•*•  rajxan 

ratsann 

naxa 

rjw&tTi 

haian 

nitsaiin 

nasa 

nMsan 

rattan 

nnsann 

Tl&XB 

viktori 

^nasan 

^jnakann 

*I»2STI 

^arifcan 

iBEsan 

laatann 

Dnaia 

anasan 

anetan 

ksnaaann 

T™¥5 

]n«tgDn 

jnietan 

jraaann 

^ka 

^actea 

*»iari 

^»sanri 

tctan 

K5B 

arcttm 

Msean 

Msann 

(n^)  «xa^ 

»w» 

(ksb*)  as-; 

asan? 

^.        KSOFJ 

tfian 

etc.   j^^r* 

Nsann 

«spri 

arsan 

Msan 

Ksara 

^ttOTl 

w&an 

■Sctapi 

raann 

M2&R 

tfia* 

ifctBM 

itsanii 

^kxjt; 

wisa* 

ftaaj* 

^atan1; 

njasan 

njKian 

naSian 

naakanri 

i&opn 

wTkan 

*iaxan 

toxanpi 

hjaian 

Mja&ftrt 

naaiari 

nbaiann 

KS&a 

N^iab 

atsaa 

Nsana 

n£*?2 

wxan 

Rsann 

wian 

■wxarin 

in'Stan 

**atann 

naiian 

rtjasarin 

Hixaa 

Ksana 

(Jw^a)  KXBa 

(«»aa)  fefc  aa 

214  Par.  XVI.   Verbs  ffe.  §§280-292. 


Kal. 

Niplial. 

Piel. 

I'l.al. 

Praet.  3  m.  (n'ra)  nb3 

rfo: 

nVa 

nVa 

3f.        nnVa 

nn^D 

nnVa 

rwfea 

2  m.         ry^a  (nv? 

2  f.        n*»Va  ctc- 

nrrro 

etc.  rrtjj 

ry»Va 
rvVa 

i          Tp5a 

irtffta 

vn?a 

la^a 

3  (pi-)(r^T)^a 

2  m.      on^a 

Drrt»J3 

DivVa 

Drrta 

2  f.       ]n^a 
i          w5a 

w5m 

jryVa 

Inf.       abs.             n^S 

nb] 

riVa 

riV* 

const.         rh1?!! 

rftari 

n*iVa 

riVa 

Fut.      3  m.           ftW 

r&a*1 

rfep 

nhy* 

3  f.        rfran 

r&an 

nV>»] 

nVan 

2  m.      rtean 
2  f.         ^an 

Aan 

nVan 
■■Van 

•'Van 

3in.(pi»'0    *??yi 

—  —  -  v» 

3  f.     w*?an 

rra^Suh 

rn^fan 

w?an 

2  m.          ^n 

*A:.n 

iVan 

fyjri 

2  f.     w^an 

n^fari 

na^an 

nVaa 

F«t.  OjOOC.                              is£ . 

ba: 

tf»3  ^1 

Imp.    2  m.  <««*•)     tlVd 

2 1          Aa 

2  m.  fpi*«o     Aa 
2  f.           W»$S 

Aan 

Aan 

njfan 

Cba)  rtVa 

■•ft 

^a_ 

Part.    act.             n^i5 
pass.            ^,?3 

fl^B 

n^AB 

nVaa 

Par.  XVI.   Verbs 

jflfr.   280—292. 

215 

Hiphil. 

Hophal. 

Hilhpacl. 

llitlipalel. 

r£an 

pfcan 

rfs>anfl 

mnrrcn 

hnVari 

rirtan 

nnVanri 

itfim)  iy»5»rt 

m?an 

rvVansi 

rrnnwaSn 

•*•     rriwi 

rrtan 

rrtann 

w5ari 

Ti^an 

ifci'fl&nn 

VPinndn 

«&#! 

«6an 

iVann 

ninntbn 

bn^an 

on^an 

DrhVann 

an^nr-cn 

jn^an 

■jn^arj 

]n;bnn 

safari 

w5an 

^r'fann 

nb5n 

rt>an 

riVanrj 

rfran 

rfran 

riVann 

hinrdn 

nb"1 

nba^ 

rteam 

mnnffl1' 

rftan 

rftan 

nVann 

r.inrbn 

rfcn 

r&an 

rfonfl 

mnncin 

■•ban 

^an 

^ann 

nbaa 

n^a« 

inban* 

mnntDH 

^ 

«a< 

i.Van} 

mnnirh 

m^an 

na^'an 

na^anfi 

6an 

^an 

ib?nn 

iwphdpi 

nD^an 

na^an 

na^ann 

n^a 

n^? 

nVana 

ninrnsa 

tft 

tan* 

-  .  ■ 

&&)  rf?.VI 

rftann 

^in 

■fyarin 

■nitron 

i^in 

Hariri 

•nnn-^n 

na^aq 

sia^ann 

n^ja 

rftarra 

mnnorj 

rftao 


210    Far.  XVII.  fo6-fft. 


Kal. 

Hiphil. 

Praet 

PIT 

min 

3  i: 

nnT 

T       •  IT 

nmin 

2  m. 

nn1 

nnin 

2 1: 

rT'T 

rvrfifi 

i 

M^T 

wiin 

3  (pi'"--) 

IT 

iTn 

2  m. 

DrT'T 

tofpTfa 

2f. 

Wll 

"jrvnin 

1 

•  T 

irnin 

Inf.  abs.        JIT 
const.    PIT 


Fut. 
3£ 

2  m. 
2£ 

1 

3  (p'ur-; 
3f. 
2ra. 
2f. 

1 


nrn 

it? 
iTn 
rrr»a 


/«*.  apoc. 


Imp. 
2£ 

2  m.  (plur-) 

2f. 


TJ 

IT 


rmn 


rrrtn 

rnim 
nin 
rn*i* 

rff 

nrn/in 

T1TPI 

na'nw 
mia 


Pat.  XVIII 

.  Verbs  ] 

z  &  fa. 

Kal. 

NiphaJ. 

II, -,,1 

WD] 

bttsa 

'  srz- 

rwfca 

•     •  It 

i    N  w. 

i   X   Bm 

(as  Nr) 

naifia 

nwy:cn 

natma 

nagrj 

■tmmm 

viaiBn 

WGj 

wwi 

Bnaisa 

ufx:" 

in*®? 

jriMOti 

"ox'c: 

"N'cn 

kVtds 

Mtesn 

won 

OfitfB 

»©"« 

»to!P 

irv11 

Nun 

▼    • 

(as  &) 

not 

•»jwpn 

1T1 


Part,  act    filY! 
pass.    ^IT1 


rntfi 
■nin 

1TH 

nan/in 
mia 


KfflK 

wfal 

nfiT'TD^ 

riDwXOT 

*Swin 

WTOf 

n:wVDn 

Ntea 

ris 

4tiD 

UtiD 

nattti 

rigs 
aftpa 

*  From  nu;:  (not 
Ktoa).   ' 

Par.  XIX.  IS  &  hi. 


Kal. 

Iliphil. 

Praet. 

HDD 

nan 

3f. 

nna: 

nnan 

2  m. 

(as  hb) 

nvjn 

2£ 

n^rj 

1 

wan 

3   (Plur.) 

ran 

2  m. 

an/ran 

2f. 

jrpian 

1 

iran 

Inf.  abs.       Him 
const.   n'K22 


Fut.  apoc. 


0"« 


man 


Fut. 

na1' 

na^ 

3f. 

nan 

nan 

2  m. 

nan 

nan 

2£ 

hen 

i&& 

1 

na« 

naa 

3  (Plur.j 

1t0"» 

ia^ 

3f. 

ns^an 

nybn 

2ra. 

nan 

nan 

2f. 

nran 

nran 

1 

naD 

na: 

Imp.  naq  (on)  nan 

2  f.  (as  h)        ^an 

2  m.  (pte.)  ^t^n 

2  f.  nran 


Part.  act.    nai3 

naa 

pass.  ^as 

28 

Par.  XX.  Verb  *03.      217 

Kal. 

Hiphil. 

ilophal. 

**2 

x^n 

amn 

naa 
n«a 
naa 

nit*an 

rain 

naan 
nnaan 

viaa 

Twcn 

(uta)  i«a 

won 

IwXZin 

onaa 

finnan 

UV3 

ttfran 

M13 

(N2)wNlS 

a^an 

K^ 

^J 

nw 

«izn 

K^an 

Khan 

rwi 

\vizn 

wVlZtf 

a^aa 

Wo; 

naaan 

*iaan 

T 

njwan 
wan 

ahaa 

tfM 

N3»1 

tfiz 

tfan 

■wia 

wan 

1^12 

wan 

Ma 

irqa 

T 

218 


Par.  XXI.   Participles.   §301. 


Mane. 

Kal. 

Fem. 

Faiti.  Bogb. 

Verbs  final  Pattahh  act. 

^P 

Ctivqjp)  nbqj? 

n^.^P 

pass. 

bvjpT 

n^bp# 

—       Tseri 

act. 

]W 

Wtb'' 

1^ 

—       H  hoi  err 

l  act. 

mi'' 

P  gutt. 

act. 

pH 

npj?t 

ngii 

b  gutt. 

act. 

^Bti 

?W«i 

n?s'u" 

act. 

OR 

rttijj 

nV 

act. 

fftS 

Qi«Yft)  nij! 

pass 

.   <&i 

pp*fta 

regular 

liphil. 

nVopD 

rfcbpa 

n 

D  gutt. 

15373 

man 

man 

ns: 

n^D3 

n 

Dhp3 

nxDipD 

regular 

Piel. 

ri$88S 

a 

-is 

Tja 

roiaa 

ro-ma 

V  V  ▼    z 

rb 

nViq 

a^ai 

POEL  Of  h 

nniD£ 

maiott 

narrtWQ 

regular 


Pual. 

baps         rtepa     rtbpn 


regular 
D  gutt. 

13? 


Hiphil. 

^ttfjB        nbvJp^ 
nog  haoti 


rnsya 


regular 


Hophal. 


regular 


Hithpael. 

Vtppnti       ^Bpntt    rifcfcra 


Par.  XXI.   Participles.  §  301. 


219 


Plur.  masc. 

Kal. 

Plur.  Fern. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

trtqp 

niVjp       Dec.  VII.  b. 

Dec.  X.  XIII. 

a^rjp 

nibrop 

III.  c. 

X. 

tnaj* 

hham1; 

V.  e. 

XI.  XIII. 

trni1; 

ni-iip 

III.  c. 

X. 

tpfgi 

nip^T 

VII. 

X.  XIII. 

d^m 

nitfaiD 

VII. 

X.  XIII. 

a^B 

ntej? 

I. 

X. 

(ti>i 

nfta 

IX.  a. 

X. 

D^ba 

rfinVa 

III.  c. 

X. 

D^>qj>a 

Niphal. 

n^tjp.3 

11. 

XI.  XIII. 

D*Tft« 

rh^jy. 

II. 

XI.  XIII. 

D^aoi 

ntaDa 

VIII. 

X. 

trftipi 

ni^ipD 

III.  c. 

X. 

Piel. 

D^BpjD 

n^apa 

VII.  c. 

X.  XIII. 

D^IM 

nha-ind 

VII. 

X.  XIII. 

B^Sj 

n'ftaB 

IX. 

X. 

cqaiori 

ninntoB 

VII.  b. 

X.  XIII. 

Pual. 

SrtBgfc 

ni^pa 

II. 

XI.  XIII. 

O^BpB 

iiiphii. 

I. 

X.   XIII. 

O^TEJB 

nvrojps 

I. 

X.  XIII- 

B^awa 

ntaoa 

VIII. 

X. 

mpjjb 

nha^pa 

III. 

X. 

D^ttpB 

Hophal. 
Pl^tDptS 

II. 

XI.  XIII. 

a^apna      ni^Bpnfc 


Hitlipael. 


VII.  c. 


X.   XIII 


220   Par.  XXII.    Verbs  with  suffix-pronouns.   §§303—312. 


Snlliv  -. 


Stag.   I. 


9  DUC. 


•j  fern. 


3  mane. 


Kal.     ) 

Pract.} 


^S"d? 


I   :  n  i : 


iPtSP 


3  r. 


m. 


2  f. 


^nV;j_p 
*3&5>ttp 

■oriVjp 


ari5op    im^DP 


3  Cplor.)  WDp 
2  m.  "•ttpfcop 
1  — 


inV'up1 

innrop, 

WiVtapf 

in'rjp1 

wnVopJ 

sj*VbR  T^Jffi   wftBfj 
rjV^-jp    ipbtsp  w5tfpx 

—         —    ^irnnr-R 
spj?jp.  "^Vop  wlftop. 


R» 


nnVfcap 


nnVup 


rprtop 


rrrrop 

rriVop 

rprfcoj; 


Ti'TJP  1 


Inf. 


Onnn) 


^0R 


Fut.        ^J&p.l 
3m.  with)  hi^nn^i 

epenth.  3   $    i'.     .)'. . 

3  (p'O      ^"JP1 


tf}py*    *$pjjfc  ^Pp!i 
Vop^   tfi5>Bpi  ^niVjp^ 


n>Dp'' 
naSop1; 


(%»VBR3 

OinAqp;;) 

Imp.          ^'f'jp 

wbtd 

— 

—       w5t38 

nrjp 

TV      ;  1  t 

Piel           ^?Bp 

sfrffi 

frqp      i^-jp 

-rjp 

Hiph. fut.^D^qp^    ^Dp;    ^tap.!  "^.r^F.!     f^BR 


Par.  XXII.   Verbs  with  suffix-pronouns.   §§303—312.     221 


Plur.  I. 


2  masc. 


2  fern. 


3  masc. 


3  fern. 


"urjp      PSpvp.       P-.^P.       nrjp#        ipt:p> 


.^«i 


n:rv?ap     DDroBp     pr.rjp      Enrjp       "jnrjp 


w£a?        — 


Wft>Bp. 


iDnrjpS 

—  oyntef;  i^nrjp 

W^Bp      D51$Bp  p^BP 

—  ffiM&DP  wAbp 


nrrjp 


cnrjp 

npnrjp 

n-Trjp 

n^nrjp 


WW 

■prirjp 

■pnrjp 
iijrjp 


(town)     Brfrtjp. 


WDg 


C^.PT] 
*?P- 

(Banat) 


:^-JP 


I^Bp*1     BAttp*»      tAw 


Batty;  j 


ftBp* 


ifiVop") 

t&btfy* 

1,?*«jp; 

cirop1] 

t^BR 

— 

— 

D:PJ5 

— 

13PDp 

1  /)ers.  Fut 

Br&JBJj 

$»R 

a^cqp 

i'r-p. 

W^Bp^     Dp.^Pp!      P.^BpJ       B^Bp^         iV^f- 


222        Par.  XXIIT.    Verbs  T\b  with  suffixes.   §  313. 


BuflxM. 

Hng.l. 

2  maic. 

3  mate. 

1*1  n r .  3  maic. 

Kal.    Praet. 

■tfB* 

*!'<?> 

^inipy 

C27 

3  f. 

wrv-to) 

^nti* 

in1-'©* ) 

— '    -r     T 

2  m. 

^rMD*) 

TOT-to) 

civw 

1 

— 

^rv-toj 

nnwtosp ) 

wpto 

3  (p1u'-) 

wSj* 

rp's? 

im&| 

mis? 

Inf. 


iniOJ 


jjntt* 


into* 
-into* 


nn'E? 


Fut.  3  m.     ^S^ 


3  m.  with  )         IJ-fWy-) 
epenth.  a  )  •  -.•-;- 


3m.(p'«o    '•3-foy'- 


Imp.  m. 


^33? 


Piel.    Praet.  3  m.  '■SVS 

Fut.  3  m.  ta^Sg 

3  m.  with  )  ^t^i, 

epenth.  3  S  ■  •'•  -• 


^37 


•urns 
■aw 


Hiph.  Praet. 


Fut.  with  ) 
epenth.  5  > 


■■330 


Slfc 


-insn 


dtojn 


C3P 


T        • 


D3n 


Par.  XXIV.   Nouns  with  suffixes.  §  334—340.  223 


Abs.    ("«n6 

No.  L    Noun  masc. 

•)     DID  a  horse. 

ending  with  a  consonant. 

(piur.)  0^010  horses. 

Sufi:  i 

''CIO  m?/  /tor^e, 

11 010  my  horses. 

2  m. 
2f. 

3  m. 

■36*10  %  — 

1010  his     — 

rppio  %    — 

^010  thy     — 
VD"0  his     — 

3f. 

MOID  /ier     — 

•"PCID  /ier     — 

1    (plur.) 

1301 0  o?<r    — 

U^DIO  our     — 

2  m. 

ODD  10  your  — 

DD'CID  your  — 

2f. 
3  m. 

]DD10  your  — 
0010  their  — 

■Jp^ClO  your  — 
Di-lWD  their  — 

3f. 

"jD^D  their  — 

"jrPCID  their  — 

No.  II.    Noun  masc. 

ending  with  a 

Quiescent. 

Abs.  (s'ng-: 
Suff.  1 

i        Dtf  father. 
"Oitt  my  father. 

Abs.  ( 
PI.  1 

sing-)     ON  father. 
.     ^M  our  father. 

2  m.             5p!l»  thy 

2  f.               ^3JK  thy     — 

3  m.  W  3fiJ,  1hnx  fo's 

2  m. 
2f. 

3  m. 

OOh-N  your  — 

1p;nx  your  — 

DiYOK  their  — 

3f. 

rP2tf  her     — 

3f. 

]TV*2X  their  — 

No.  III.     Noun  feminine 

Abs.  («ing.)  ril'in  a    law. 
Suff.  1 


Til  in  my  law. 

2  m.  ^rnin  thy   — 

2  f.  *?jrnin  %   — 

3  m.  'imin  Ms    — 
3  f.  nrnin  her   — 

1  (piur.)  .  IDni'm  our     — 

2  m.  DDrnin  your  — 

2  f.  p.rnlfi  your  — 

3  ra.  Orpin  their  — 

3  £  inn*™ thcir  — 


(piur.)    rrmn 

"rrnin 

rprvnin 

•^rvnin 

vninin 

rrninin 

irrrnin 

crrvnin 

pvrnin 

on;n/nin 

p;niiin 


laws, 
my  laws. 
thy  — 
Ihy  — 
his  — 
her  ■ — 
our  — 
your  — 
your  — 
their  — 
their  — 


224  Par.  XXV.   Dec.  of  Nouns  masc.     §§31.r>scq. 


Btiif  •  ahs. 

Const. 

Light  Suir 

lir.ivp  Huff. 

Dec, 

,  I.  Singular. 

§  843. 

GO 

Pl8 

DID 

^CID 

S3C1D 

(*) 

W6ii 

-1135 

niaa 

triiia 

GO 

tj«iBti 

BiSffii 

^Dirq 

DitsiBiD 

(rf) 

irfcaj 

niVa 

Tjfta 

Mnftii 

Dec, 

,  II.  Singular. 

§347. 

GO 

DS 

&1 

nw 

(once)     CpBS 

(*) 

Mis 

3D1S 

^D13 

D?njiB 

(0 

ynis 

ynis 

^3i3 

u2>;3i3 

(rf) 

"rtl 

Ttf 

*"$ 

&?# 

Dec. 

III.  Singular 

.  §  350. 

GO 

i'^ 

■hs 

■»fj?B 

D?TW 

(*) 

r^ 

"T^ 

ir»^ 

fiiartn 

(•) 

5?ropT 

^dj> 

^°fe 

MVtoj; 

(<0 

■jl-lST 

V1"^.! 

WDt 

D^rtiai 

(0 

■jr-jn 

&ta5»)  I'^tn 

tfy»m 

cp.^Tn 

(/) 

dub 

o*i«a 

trt» 

KrtMats 

Of) 

wsq 

&VD» 

^s* 

fipDina 

(h) 

9n 

"^ 

Dec. 

IV.  Singular. 

§  353. 

GO 

■oN 

W 

"T?! 

oygi 

(*) 

*$ 

M 

•cdV 

dsmV 

(•) 

ton 

wn 

niaq 

MR3J 

(rf) 

nyto 

")?to 

^nsip 

&?")$? 

(•) 

P?? 

pay 

••pas 

£-?"_?. 

(/) 

US 

t|33 

^33 

&?fi33 

Or) 

tfZS 

Par.  XXV.   Nouns  Masculine.     §§  345  seq. 


225 


Plural  aba. 

Light  null". 

Const. 

Grave  »utl'. 

Dec 

;.  I.     Plural. 

nntno 

WD 

•»DiD 

B^&to 

D*niaa 

•nhaa 

■nhaa 

23:1133 

tPEnBtD 

WBO 

■»tt*ifao 

oyenra 

a^riVx 

■»pf^ 

■»*£>« 

Da^rft* 

Dec 

.  II.     Plural 

c^- 

■OT 

w 

Dyw 

D^aaia 

^33/13 

^3313 

pyaaia 

0^313 

■wato 

wa 

D37313 

a*no 

•Wo 

no 

oyirti 

Dec 

.  III.    Plurai 

PTffi 

Vpffc 

n^B 

Dyrrt 

DwVti 

>x*fyq 

1£^E 

a^r^ti 

D^Vdj? 

^VOj? 

^p" 

D3;bVJp# 

nwat 

■tfnai 

wat 

Dyjrnaj 

^niainujh)  nij'TTn 

(as 

i  Dec.  X.) 

tMKbB 

W3B 

W3B 

oyoiati 

DW3&* 

-: 

^2S 

wa* 

03;0/13K 

Dec 

■.  IV.    Plural. 

0^15^ 

■nyi 

■na'n 

D3n3'l 

D"»aa$ 

*i23*i 

*sS 

oyaaij 

n^3n 

naaft 

iriari 

oytiari 

wyfa 

■»13j0 

t-ipc 

ar-^'p 

Dfl^ 

igw 

Da"»poj 

D"»B33 

■*J? 

■»ws 

aywa 

riiaax 

n%X3S 

(oniwaat) 

29 


226 


Par.  XXV.   Nouns  Masculine.    §§  :V>6  seq. 


Hing.  (lbs. 

<  'llllHl  . 

Light  iufr. 

Grave  nufT. 

(A) 

)W 

(]u5y)  Jti* 

(0 

^?. 

tefy  sp%jk 

^2 

Dec.  V.    Singular.    §  356. 

(«) 

IS.! 

n 

"■3JJT 

D53fcl 

(*) 

Tsft 

■nxft 

D?T?H 

(0 

wg 

tifi§ 

w 

opens 

(d) 

1?9 

{•tfito  ins 

T$| 

DDinD 

Dec 

.  VI.    Singular. 

4  class.    §  359. 

(«)  (iv 

» ii% 

i?b 

"B^ft 

o*j!jg 

(6)         etc 

■    T?3 

tfi 

h1?.3 

C?">?3 

(0 

2!J. 

to!)  *!$ 

£  class 

i. 

wni 

GO 

-1DD 

1BD 

•nig 

tansD 

(0 

"*& 

na| 

■nag 

Drag 

(/) 

pVh 

j£n 

^MJ 

tfcf&sj 

(g) 

1& 

tWj 

wjfej 

D?WJ 

(h) 

ns5 

0  class 

■TOH 

Ddiixj 

(»•) 

TgS 

"$» 

■npa 

■  f  •  -r 

D^p-2 

0) 

Y*P 

y»>' 

■CB&P 

KpS23p 

«o 

^iD 

V?s 

O^s)  ^ajp 

Data 

(0 

onjp 

»$ 

VR 

D21231P 

v    ;  ;'t 

Par.  XXV.   Nouns  Masculine.   §§  356  seq.  227 


Plur.  abs. 

Light  fluff. 

Count. 

Grave  lufT. 

&*jMBf 

"J-JB^ 

*3W 

fia^B? 

bvSx 

*j&3 

*2P&> 

cr-pVs 

Dec.  V.    Plural. 

Mft 

•♦apt 

it* 

B3-»3pt 

a-nxrj 

■nsn 

nsn 

aa-nxn 

niDris 

(as  Dec.  XI.) 

fl-HM 

^l?.3. 

*P& 

Ba-naa 

Dec.  VI.    Plural.    A  class. 

B^B 

■Ob-fl 

^B 

BMfc-q 

D"»1M 

■»V3 

•n?: 

aa*1"^ 

avnt 

£  class. 

TO! 

Dr.7.1I 

B-nDB 

vjw> 

•nBB 

aa-nra 

anag 

•nap 

■nap 

aa-najj 

n^p>Vn 

^n    fnR*) 

ca^n 

c-nbn  i 

tc-      ^l^n. 

■nVn 

as^bn 

B-*nx3 

t  j 

•TOD 

O  class. 

■»rpu 

aa^rcu 

a-njtt 

"TW 

■npa 

B^lpS 

B'ttBJJ 

■•wp. 

■»XBJ} 

aa-^xap 

B^B 

ty* 

•^JSWD 

Ba^3?S 

a^unp 

•       f'ri 

41  "DIP 

aa^tti-Tg 

228  Par.  XXV.   Nouns  Masculine.      §§371  scq. 

Segholatcs  of  roots  13>  and  "*9.  (</)  ~l~~,  const,  IT",  pi.  Pin 

(»n)  nvj  ,  const.  ni»  (r)  *faj  -ira    -  fi^lfll 

00    "p-^     "Pn  Srirfiolates  nf  roots  Tib  . 

(o)    b"]h    r^n  (O^c^-is)  const.  *»-js,  suff.  v~id  tp-ic 


Dec.  VII.  Singular. 

§371. 

Sing.  al)«. 

Const. 

Light  Suff. 

Grave  Suff. 

(«) 

ad 

(tf$)  Dffl 

*nw 

naBtp 

(4) 

a^ai 

a^* 

IM* 

Daa^n 

(«) 

!*>£* 

Nlffl 

^JSj 

KfcBgD 

(<*) 

riattj 

natti 

w?n 

oanatB 

(0 

5>l!fi 

fcpi 

"ty* 

oa^a 

(/) 

TOBia 

ronsg 

— 

— 

Or) 

V? 

T? 

15* 

Dec.  VIII.  Singular 

.  §374. 

(«) 

nT 

(»:)  tr 

■»b; 

=-r" 

(A) 

*§ 

R» 

'BR 

DajSM 

(0 

to 

t& 

TO 

ttrw 

(<*) 

ab 

(-n?)  ab 

^ 

(0 

pn 

C-W>pn 

^n 

(/) 

fa 

(-?*)  fj> 

ft*)  TO 

na?? 

Or) 

^52 

(ft) 

Iffi 

■»3M3 

•    ■      T 

oaaitj 

(0 

"■n 

13 

(i) 

nto 

■Nfl 

i-iiB 

Da-fo 

(*) 

nb 

nfe 

"* 

Dec  IX.  Singular. 

§377. 

(«) 

riTpj 

n»r» 

nn 

u2"m 

(») 

■    »        - 

-T'u 

—  —  —  •■  ■ 

Par.  XXV.   Nouns  Masculine.  §§  371  scq.  229 

Seglwlates  of  Tib  continued.  Inf.  Segholatcs. 

(«)  ^h  (vrn),  const.  *h,  suff.  Vrn  (x)  tnv  ,  const,  Bin ,  suff.  ^:* 
0>)v12.  >  plnr.  B"»tj3|  [pLff^brt  (y)  ess  —  spip  —  S«wJ 
(w)  *nx ,  —  fi^^  (^)  ->N2    —  ^N2  ,  pi.  n^.\2 

(yy)  5pp. ,  i':Upr .    (zz)  &VB  ,  ^J3» 


Dec.  VII. 

Plural. 

Plural  abs. 

Light  bu(T. 

Const. 

Grave  guff". 

nia? 

•^ni^u 

rhaq 

nyiViB© 

B^K 

W« 

"¥!** 

Dyyhij 

B^tejpa 

^W 

^'A?-12. 

tD^agD 

tfinarn 

irvinara 

ninaTB 

Dyn/inattj 

ntepjq 

(as  Dec.  XIII.) 

aww 

d*>£? 

h*?. 

■*? 

Kf»» 

Dec.  VIII. 

Plural. 

CB! 

^ 

■*c 

By*E 

d^bk 

•»B* 

*D» 

&??* 

D*«pa 

■HjQ 

•TO 

d^to 

rrta^ 

into*? 

neb 

DyrnaS> 

n^n 

v_n 

*n 

arj>n 

t^Vm 

■•tei 

^oa 

d^b-j 

D^Jtt 

■»3tti 

—    *      T 

^b 

np^iti 

D^n 

^n 

•\*n 

£-:'n- 

nn'ui 

•ntg 

ntn 

d?;nto 

ovfc 

Dec.  IX. 

Plural. 

nn'n 

nn 

•Ci 

Dyjn 

d*itb 

vfts 

•"b 

c-:7P 

230        Par.  XXVI.    Nouns  Feminine.   §§  3fi0—  .392. 


Sing.  al>H. 

OOUti 

I.l^lll  nufT. 

Crave  nuff. 

Dec.  X.    Singular. 

§  380. 

(«) 

rnin 

rnin 

Ti-nn 

CDnii  n 

(A) 

hVifia 

riwia 

TiVina 

carina 

Dec.  XI.  Singular. 

§383. 

(a) 

njtf 

n3ffl 

wis 

Danatt 

(t>) 

51 1'4 

naja 

■»nao 

cpnari 

(«) 

r\jfl% 

nps 

■^nx 

Daqpx 

(rf) 

oaari 

naan 

to 

canaan 

(0 

rhw 

rfeg 

*ftw 

Dprta* 

(/) 

nabaa 

na?aa 

voVaa 

(as  Dec.  XIII.) 

Or) 

nnstoa 

nnEiDt; 

TinEiba 

(as  Dec.  XIII.) 

Dec.  XII.    Singular. 

§387. 

(«) 

nsij? 

naVa 

"na^a 

MP.?!?! 

(A) 

r&ato 

nVato 

VjiaiD 

bannab 

(«) 

wirj 

r»©nn 

TjE-in 

aanenn 

(d) 

nsnn 

nann 

"nann 

aana-in 

(•) 

"!?.3_ 

^1^3 

^■va 

Darnn 

Dec.  XIII.  Singular 

.    §390. 

(«) 

rnSpa 

o"iSoa 

*rnaoa 

aarnaoa 

(A) 

maa 

nnaa 

•»n-iaa 

spnaa 

(•) 

nsft 

nirjx 

•WDM  c 

^ton)  ^rjo» 

00 

nana 

nana 

inana 

r|n:np 

M 

nana 

nana 

■tttbna 

qmrira 

(/) 

n?? 

n?? 

TO^* 

sjnaii 

to 

nao 

rolp 

•»natD 

sjnao 

Par.  XXVI.   Nouns  Feminine.  §§380—392.         231 

Buff,  plut. 


Const. 


Suffix  sing. 


Dec.  X.  Plural. 

ninin  rn-nn         "rn-nn         nrrn-hn 

nibina        ni^na       ■n'ftvia       wn*6ina 


Dec.  XI. 

Plural. 

ni3123 

rftwi 

••nhatD 

trr;rq 

rnatp 

rhara 

nVlMD 

trria© 

rrtpns 

nipns 

inipTS 

byrrtpix 

ntaDn 

niasn 

•^niEsn 

wntaan 

rn^y 

nto* 

vnirt? 

nmni^? 

Dec.  XII. 

Plural. 

rnsbft 

rtote 

*rtch$ 

eynteMj 

nii?M 

pftfilD 

iJl&sto 

DShrifctfn 

niDin 

Tie-in 

cmrns-in 

nhmn 

nimn 

•      T 

Tiimn 

rh"va 

nViya 

**vn?3 

DOTIiTA 

Dec.  XIII. 

Plural. 

:  :  • 

rrna&jq 

toVwa 

ayninatfe 

mans 


mana 


■mans 


cmmanD 


232 


Par.  XXVII.      NoiltM  Dual.   §  S93. 


Bing.  nlm.  Duul  at* 


•  'on.  i. 


Hing.  aim.         Dual  alia. 


Const 


i. 

irvi 

•    —   r;    t 

uv 

n^bv 

1* 

n?l7. 

••  •■ 

n'isn  btoiish 

ii. 

VII. 

V 

Dft 

rj 

D?3Wta 

'WKB 

D^np^t). 

VIII. 

in. 

51? 

d^a 

^£3 

~                T 

DWtD 
IV. 

39 

X. 

'9B 

m 

0^33 

■■sin 

ttB* 

XL 

V. 

rate 

DTtSta 

TSID 

VI. 

■op? 

XII. 

IJM® 

A 

•$ 

E^.l 

1^1 

Pt3T 

tPnST 

^1- 

E 

Ti! 

D?zna 

w 

h&p/i  Q^p.i 

O 

'    V  V 

oranE 

ijnfi 

XIII. 

tei 

D^3>3 

•£ya 

nana  D^tona 

Par.  XXVIII.   Numerals,  etc.  §§.395—398.       233 


(A) 

Cardinals  etc.  from  I  to  10. 

No. 

Signs. 

Masc.  abs. 

Const. 

Fern.  ul>s. 

Const. 

Ordinals. 

1 

X 

(iw)  in» 

m« 

rna 

nn» 

2 

3 

tr;q 

•oq 

trnm 

iffe 

*m 

3 

3 

npVttj 

ntp?m 

aba 

aftm 

tj^o 

4 

1 

<TJ3^» 

n?sn» 

»nfc| 

ysna 

ra 

5 

n 

n®qn 

rarin 

dtin 

oanC"1 

«?**}*)  MDBn 

6 

i 

rt©a 

nab 

aa 

tip 

^'C-J 

7 

T 

wan 

nynirj 

*M 

*ati 

*9*Btt 

8 

n 

nana 

nab© 

nabri 

ianw{ 

9 

•j 

n?dn 

rwon 

5W 

*©F) 

■qPMNn 

10 

^ 

•nto 

nn\py 

*fe* 

*>'?9 

•     •  -: 

(B)     Cardinals  from  11  to  15. 


if 

Masculine. 

11 

tf 

-fey  inBJp 

12 

■fey  d.^ti 
■fe*  lain 

13 

^ 
V 

-fey  rrafrffl 

14 
15 

T 
IB 

■fey  nya-M* 
■fey  raan 

16 

V 

■fey  naa 

17 

P 

■fey  nyso 

18 

II 

rr 

■fey  natoo 

19 

•fey  Hytrin 

Feminine. 

n*$jy  nryt 

nnto  B^nti 

trio*  T.ti 

Hntoy  albffl 

H-itoy  yap* 

rrfey  ©tin 

rrfey  eo 

rrjto  yavj 

rrfey  natotD 

nito?  ran 


30 


234 


Par.  XXVFII.   Numerals.  SS395-^398. 


(C)     Cardinals  from    -Ml  to  90. 

20          D            Z^Xl'J                   60          0  tPtBTD 

30           ^            D^ttJbffl                      70           7  E™d 

40        52       fi^3"i«               80        b  d^aatD 

50        3        c^nn               90        x  awn 


(D)    Hundreds. 


ioo  p                rw? 

200  n              tnnafc 

300  to        nto  oVo 

400  n       nWn  ?2p8 

500  pn  (*■{)  into  »5jn 


6oo   nn  (c)  ntefc  dd 

700     Or  (  ")  rTlMB  JP3ID 

boo   rin  (cj)rviaB  n:nd 
ooo  prin  (y)  niafc  yon 


(E)    Thousands. 


1,000  & 

2,000  n 

3,000  5 

4,000  i' 

5,000  fi 

6,000  i' 

7.000  V 


t\hh 


10,000  nan"),  ten,*nsn 
20,000  nn2"i  into 

30,000  nia-j  dbd 

40,000         aisn  ww 
,120,000  Ssn  rnto  dw 

or  12  times  10,000 

600,000      fcfei  dine  do 


CORRECTIONS  AXD  ADDITIONS 


(a)  p.  11.  Table  of  (he  vowels  No.  IV.,  by  mistake,  'Qibbatfl 
medial''  is  printed  in  the  third  class  of  vowels,  instead  of  '  (^ilihuts 
long?  In  §  33.  and  §  35,  the  student  will  see  that  Qjbbuts  is  treated 
agreeably  to  this  corrected  view.  The  proper  division  of  Qjbbut-  ifl 
into,  (l)  Qibbuts  vicarious  ;  §  41.  (2)  Daghesh'd  long  Qibbuts;  §  33. 
(3)  Short  Qibbuts;  §  31. 

(6)  p.  24.  §  49.  The  statement  respecting  the  use  of  the  compo- 
site Shevas  is  not  strictly  correct  and  intelligible.  It  is  true  that  when 
Gutturals  end  a  mixed  syllable,  and  therefore  take  a  Sheva,  that  She- 
va  must  be  a  simple  one  ;  as  is  stated  in  §  50.  But  in  such  cases  a9 
i>"in* ,  this  form  may  be  exchanged  for  b~^.  ;  so  "tttl*  >s  equivalent 
to  "liltv  ;  and  in  such  cases,  the  Guttural  may  be  said  to  come  in  the 
room  of  a  silent  Sheva  simple,  for  such  the  analogical  pointing  would 
be.  The  most  that  can  be  said  then,  is,  (l)  That  the  Gutturals,  much 
more  frequently  than  any  other  letters,  take  a  composite  Sheva,  instead 
of  admitting  a  simple  one  either  vocal  or  silent.  I  2)  That  whenever 
they,  or  any  other  letters  do  so,  they  are  placed  of  course  at  the  be- 
ginning of  a  syllable,  §  50. 

(c)  p.  34.  §  80.  Instead  of  after  a  simple  syllable,1  read,  '  after  a 
vowel'. 

(d)  p.  50.  §  101.  e.  After  e.  add,'  {/)  Pause  accents  frequently  oc- 
casion the  tone  to  be  shifted;  see  §  100.  Z.1  The  repetition  here  of 
this  principle,  is  needed  only  for  the  completeness  of  the  view. 

(e)  p.  52.  §  108.  b.  At  the  close,  a  reference  should  be  added  to 
§  118.,  where  is  a  fuller  developement  of  the  rationale  of  the  princi- 
ple stated  in  §  108. 

(/)  P-  55-  §  118.  After  the  word  ntiant,  add,  in  another  sentence, 
'  in  also  is  subject  to  the  same  peculiarity,  when  it  stands  for  the 
article,  §  1G2,  or  is  employed  as  a  prolix  characteristic  of  CODJagB* 
tion,  etc.  §  174.'  Then,  after  etc.  under  E.  g.,  Bubjoin,  *  In  respect 
to  M,  rf$%\  for  "fb?? inr  ,  D?3  for  Dy-3  ,  b^qpb  for  b^DjSrji  Hipb. 
Inf.,  Vtgj^.  for  tuprr  Put.  Niphal,  etc.V  199.  comp.  K>8.  6,  also  §§  1 19 
— 121.'  ' 


INDEX. 


PART  I. 


ORTHOGIIAI'HV   AND  ORTHOKPV. 


ALPHABETS 

Ancient  number  of  letters 

Arrangement  of  letters 

Age  ot  their  names 

Significance  of  the  same 

Pronunciation  of  the  same 

Later  Hebrew  alphabet 

Final  forms  of  letters 

Sounds  of  letters 

Dilated  letters        .         . 

Unusual  letters 

Similar  letters         .         . 

Classification  of  the  letters 

Aspirates,  tumescents,  Gutturals,  Liquids 


VOWELS     .... 

Not  original 

Vowel-letters 

Ground  of  classification 

Quality  and  quantity  of  Vowels 

Pure  and  impure  vowels 

Long,  short,  and  medial 

Long  by  nature,  and  by  position 

Pure  long  vowels 

Protracted  impure  vowels 

Doubtful  appearances  of  them 

Daghesh'd  impure  long  vowels 

Vowels  long  by  position 

Proper  short  vowels 

Medial  vowels 

Kind  of  syllables  in  which  the  VI 

els  may  stand 
Qibhuts  vicarious 


SHEVA  .... 

Design  of  it  ... 

Whon  employed     . 

Shcva  vocal 

Sheva  silent 

Composite  Shevos 

When  employed 

Used  out  of  the  common  course 

General  principle  in  regard  l"  BheVU 

Not  employed  under  Ouicscents 


COALESCENCE  OF  VOWELS  ANDQI'I 
ESCENTS 

Table  exhibiting  i  bra 

Bound  of  coalescing  QoieaoeBts  not  lost 

The  Bhevi,  when  they  retain  a  consonant 
power 

Otium  of  the  Bhevi       .... 


COALESCENCEof  vowels  and  Dagh.  letters   57 
Vowels  affected  by  omitted  Gutturals  and 
Resh  .....  .27 

Vowel  affected  by  tho  omission  of  oilier  Dag- 
hesh'd letters 28 

ORTHOGRAPHY  OF  THE  VOWELS  .  28 
Proper  place  of  i  he  Vowels  .       .       .28 

Diacritical  point  over  Shin  and  Sin  .  .  29 
Vav  with  Hholem  over  it  .         .         .29 

Orthography  of  the  vowels  as  connected  with 

tin-  Uuieso.ents 29 

Words  written  ;;/cn<  and  (/V/cctire         .  29 

No  certain  rule  for  them  .  ...  30 
ORTHOGB  iPYOFOAMBTS  BHATEPB  30 
In  a  mixed  syllable  ....  30 
In    i  simple  syllable 31 

PATTAHH  FURTIVE      ....    31 

DAGHESH  32 

Daghesh  forte 32 

Orthograpin  of  it 39 

Omission  ot    it  .        .         .         .         ■     39 

Division  of  Daghesh  forte  .  .  .  .33 
Euphonic  Daghesh  and  its  kinds  .         .     ;t3 

DAGBESB  LENE       .....  33 

General  rule  for  the  insertion  of  it       .       .  34 

Ear  the  rejection  of  it  .       .  34 

Exceptions  to  the  rules         .        .        .        .  35 

Peculiar  exceptions  to  the  same     .        .         .  :0 

RAPIIK 36 

MAIM'IU 88 

METBEGB  37 

Distinguished  from  Sillmi      .         .         .        .37 
Cases  in  which  it  ia either  uniformly  or  usu- 
ally employed  .         .  ...     37 

Casee  in  which  uaafo  is  varioni    . 
Ifethegh  before  ttaqqeph      .       •       •       •    :|s 
Ute  "I  -im ml  Metbegna  on  the  same  ■rare' 
I  sc  ofConjunctivea  instead  ef  Uethafh 

MAOaEPH 39 

Effects  of  it  on  the  vowel  and  t ■  89 

End  answered  by  it       ...       . 

i;i  i.r.s  i  hi:   READING  HEBREW        .    40 

Exemplification  41 

\<  IT. NTS.  till. I "tliem       .  .  .  19 

\  .i s  alleged  uses  of  than  .  .44 

Proper  place  of  writing  them       .  .  .46 

TONE-SYLLABLE             .  M 

General  rale  for  il  ;  and  sxeeptiaas  "■ 

Shifting  ofthe  tone  ivllable         .  .  19 

Critical  murks,  and  Maaoretic  notes  •  •    M 


238 


INDKX. 


PART  M. 


I    II  \M.l    -    AM'    I'F.(  UI.IAIU  HIS    (.1      <  DNSONANTS    AND    VOWI.I.-. 


Letters  of  t  lie  same  organ  easily  commuted 
Assimilation  of  Consonant! 

Consonants  rust  away  or  dropped 

<  'nnsonants  added  .... 

Transposition  of  Consonants 

PECI  LIABITIE8   OF   THE   GUTTUR 

AI.S  AND  RUSH 
Daghesh  forte  omitted  in  them,  and  com|>cn 

satiou  for  it 

Gutturals  prono  to  the  A  sound 
Commonly  take  a  composite  Sheva 

PECULIARITIES  OF  QUIESCENTS 

General  principles  regulating  it     . 

Other  ways  in  which  quiescence  is  effected, 
besides  those  involved  in  the  general  prin- 
ciple   

Peculiar  usago  of  Aleph,  Vav,  Yodh,  when 
they  would  have  a  vowel,  and  be  preced- 
ed by  a  Sheva 

Peculiarites  of  Aleph  , 

Peculiarities  of  Vav  and  Yodh      .         .      "  . 

Peculiarities  of  He 

Commutation  of  the  Quiescents  foreach  other 

Quiescents  used  as  PARAGOGIC  letters 

CHANGES  OF  THE  VOWELS 

Vowels  mutable  and  immutable 

Composite  Shevas  commuted 

Proper  mutable  vowels  .... 

Changes  of  vowels   limited  to  their  respec- 
tive classes       ...... 

Corresponding  long  and  short  vowels 


lluli:s  of  exchanging  long  vowels  for  -hurt 
When  abort  vowels  beeome  long  .        .    60 

I'm-.    ,n  T<  -hi.  Iiii-i  Ii.ii  short  vowels  'J 

Falling  away  of  Vowels       .        .        .        .01 

when  the  tone  is  moved  forward  one 

syllable i  I 

moved  forward  (WO  syllables      .         .     61 

Changes  in  rowels  by  reason  of  const,  stall        I  I 

by  reason  of  accession  at  the  end         .     62 

Rise  of  new  vowels        .         .         .         .         .62 
Uli.it  i  Insc  usually  are         ...         .63 
What  they  aro  before  composite  Shevas      .     63 
New  vowels  when  two  Shevas  come  togeth- 
er, of  which  the  first  is  composite  .     63 

Rise  of  furtive  vowels  .  .  .  .  63 
Euphonic  changes  of  the  vowels  .  .  64 
Vowels  changed  by  Accents  .  .  .65 
Accents  sometimes  lengthen  short  vowels  .  65 
They  shorten  long  ones  .  .  .  .  65 
They  restore  vowels  that  had  been  dropr» 
They  turn  simple  Sheva  into  Seghol  .  .  66 
composite  Sheva  into  the  correspond- 
ing long  vowel 66 

Effect  of  pause  accents  not  uniform      .         .     66 
Vowels  changed  by  accession  and  transpo- 
sition       . 66 

Vowels  changed  by  the  position  of  certain 

letters  and  words      .         .         .         .         .66 
Changes  in  the  vowel-points  of  the  article    .     66 

of  the  particles  .         .         .        .67 

of  the  conjunc.  Vav  .         .         .67 

of  the  interrog.  5.      .        .        .        .67 


PART   III. 


GRAMMATICAL  STRUCTURE  OF  WORDS. 


Radical  words        .... 
Conformity  to  their  principles 
Hilneral  roots         .... 
Q.uadriliteral  and  Quinqueliteral  roots 
Parts  of  speech      .... 
Grammatical  structure  of  words 
Various  ways  of  expressing  case,  number 

gender,  person,  etc. 
Composite  words 
Mode  of  writing  particles  and  oblique 

nouns        


ARTICLE     . 
Assimilation  of  it 


PRONOUNS 

Pronouns  personal  (Nom.) 
Oblique  cases  of  them 
Pronouns  demonstrative 

relative 

interrogative 


VERBS 
Classification 
Inflection 
Conjugation 
Usual  conjugations 
Peculiar  conjugations 


TO 


Unusual  conjugations  .         .         .         .73 

Conjugations  of  pluri literal  verbs  .         .     74 

All  conjugations  do  not  belong  to  any  one 

verb  .  74 

Names  of  the  conjugations  .         .         .74 

Root  of  verbs 74 

Forms  of  the  root 74 

Niphal  and  its  significations  .  .     75 

Piel 75 

Pual,  Hiphil,  Hophal,  Hilhpael  .  .  .  76 
Transposition  of  the  letters  prefixed  to  1 1  it  li- 

pael  .....  .76 

Significations  of  this  conjugation  .         .     77 

Unusual  conjugations  .         .         .         .77 

Mood,  tense,  number,  person  and  gender  of 

verbs 77 

Ground-forms  of  verbs  .         .         .         .77 

Formation  of  the  Praeterite  tense  .  .  78 
Inf.  const,  and  absolute  .  .  .  .78 
Formation  of  the  Fut.  tense  .        .         .78 

The  praeformative  letters  of  the  Fut.  tense, 

expel  the  praeformatives  of  the  derived 

conjugations  79 

Final  vowels  of  the  Future  .         .         .79 

Imper.  mood 80 

Participles  of  transitive  verbs       .         .        .80 

of  intransitive  verbs     .        .        .80 

Subj.  and  Opt.  moods  .        .        •        .80 


INDEX. 


239 


Paragogic  and  apoc.  Futures  .  .  .81 
1  in [.<-r.  parag.  and  npoc.  .  .  .  .8] 
Future  with  Vav  conversive  .         .         .    83 

Praeter  with  Vnv  .....     82 

General  remarks  on  paradigms  of  verbs  .  83 
Paragogic  letter*  suffixed  to  verbs  .  .  S3 
Verbs  with  Uuiescents  defectively  written        83 

REGULAR  TRANSITIVE  VERBS;  notes 
and  explanations 83 

REGULAR    VERBS    INTRANSITIVE; 

notes 86 

VERBS  WITH  GUTTURALS  .  -. 

Verbs  Pe  Guttural ;  characteristics  etc.        .  HT 

Notes  on  Paradigm 38 

Verbs  Ayin  Guttural ;  characteristics  etc.  .  89 
Notes  on  the  Paradigm  .  .  .  .89 
Verbs   Lamedh  Guttural;    characteristic, 

etc 90 

IRREGULAR  VERBS;  definition  .  .  90 
First  Class  ,■  HE  ALEPH,  characteristics  .  91 
Notes  on  the  Paradigm  .  .  .  .91 
PE  VODH  ;  characteristics  ...  91 
First  Class  of  verbs  Pe  Yodb  ;  characteris- 
tics   92 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm           .         .         .         .92 
Second  Class  of  verbs  Pe  Vodh;  characteris- 
tics   93 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm  .         .         .         .93 

Third  Class  of  verbs  Pe  Yodh  ;  characteris- 
tics .     94 
VERBS  PE  NUN,  characteristics     .        .    94 
Notes  on  the  Paradigm          .         .         .         .95 

Second  Class 95 

VERBS  AYIN  DOUBLED;  characteristics 

etc .     96 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm  .         .         .         .98 

Peculiar  anomaly  of  these  verbs  .         .     99 

VERBS  AYIN  VAV;  characteristics,  etc.  100 
Notes  on  the  Paradigm  ....  101 

VERBS  AYIN  YODH         .        .        .        .103 

Third  Class 104 

VERBS  LAMEDH  ALEPH  ;    characteris- 
tics, etc. 104 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm  ....  105 

Interchange  of  forms  between  these  Verbs, 

and  Verbs  Lamedh  Ho.  .         .         .  105 

VERBS    LAMEDH    HE;    characteristics, 

etc 106 

Notes  on  the  Paradigm  ....  107 

Apocopate  Future  ofKal       ....  107 

oflliphil  .         .        .109 

Peculiar  Anomalies 109 

Imitations  of  Verbs  Lamedh  Aleph  .  .  109 
General  Remarks  on  these  ....  109 
VERBS  LAMEDH  TAV  .  .110 


VERBS  DOUBLY    \  NOMA  LOUS 
Relation  of  irreg.  verb*  to  each  other 

I'lurilitenil  Verba 


110 
HI 
119 


PARTICIPLES  112 

\  ERRS  with  SI  ill  K-PRONl  II  KB  .  113 
Table  of  the  Forms  ol  such  suffixes  .  .  114 
Notes  on  the  Table  of  them  .        .        .  114 

Nol i  the  Par.  of  them  aa  attached  to  the 

vi'rli  .  .  .  .  .  .  .116 

Verbs  Lamedh  He  with  suffixes    .         .         .  117 

V  ii  \s  :  derivation  ami  declension    .        .  117 
Nouns  primitive,    derivative,  and  denomina- 
tive          118 

<  Sompoeite  and  propel  .        .        .        .119 

Gender  of  Noons 119 

of  the  plural 190 

Formation  of  Fom.  nouns,  with  Table,  .    190 

Formation  of  the  plural,  masr.  and  fern.        .    ISO 

Heteroclites  198 

Formation  and  uso  of  the  Dual  .        .   lit 

DECLENSION  OF  Nol  \S ;  const,  state    .   124 

Su  Hi  v -State 195 

Table  of  suffix  pronouns  ....   198 

Bales  for  suffixes 187 

Vowel^cbanges  in  nouns  on  account  of  de- 
clension     127 

Laws  of  such  Vowel-change*.  .  .  .  128 
Suffixes  attached  to  the  plural       .         .         .  129 

JVowu  masc.  Dec.  I.  II 198 

Dec.  Ill i:H» 

Dec.  IV.  V 1  :<  I 

Dec.  VI 132 

Notes  on  the  A.  E.  O  class       .        .  133 

Segholates  of  verbs  Ayin  Vav,  etc.  134 

Segholates  of  Verbs  Lamed  li  He  134 

Infinitive  Segholates                      .  .    194 

Anomalous  Plurals  of  Segholates  135 

Dec.  Vll |35 

Dec.  VIII i;(6 

Dec   IX. 1H7 

JVoimu  /em.  Dee.  X Kt7 

Dec.  \l.  Ml 198 

Dec.  XIII 189 

Dual  Number  of  nouns  ....  139 

Hoteruclites  or  anomalous  nouns  .        .  139 

NUMBERS;  cardinal  and  ordinal  .  .140 
Notes  on  the  Paradigm  ....  141 
Met  hod  of  notation 141 

ADJECTIVES 141 

PARTICLES        ..:...  142 

Adverbs 142 

Prepositions  143 

Table  oft  hem  with  pronouns,  etc.  .  .  Ill 

Conjunctions  and  Interject  ions       .         .        .  145 


PART  IV. 


ARTICLE 

Insertion  of  it 

Omission 

Article  before  Adjectives 

NOUNS  ;  case  absolute 

Cases  relative  ;  Nom.  Gen. 


1 16 
i  16 

1 1; 
1 i; 

1 1- 
149 


Gen,  expressed  by  a  relative  pronoun  .  150 

stands  «  here  apposition  would  natu- 
rally stand 150 

sometimes  follows  adj  ,  150 

various  meanings  of  il  .       .  151 

I  ...        .  i.'l 

Vurious  uses  of  tho  Accusative 


5540 


INDBX. 


Aooni.  pal  after  Participial  and  Verbal!       .  189 

\  01     md  iVL  on  km      .....  i.vj 

CoDStrUCl  Slam I...' 

Porn  "in  not  confined  to  position  before  a 

Qenitive           198 

Refers  solely  to  the  relation  of  two  nouns  to 

each  oilier 193 

Apposition           ......  i.m 

Gender  and  Number  of  nouns        .       .       .  169 

Pluratia  Excellentioe 155 

Use  of  tin'  plural  in  poetry    ....  195 

Repetition  of  nouns 196 

with  tin;  copula       ....  156 

Nouns  employed  us  adjectives      .         .         .  l.r>7 

Whon  employed  as  adjectives        .         .         .  157 
Circumlocutory  phrases  used  in  the  room  of 

adjectives 157 

ADJECTIVES;  often  used  as  DOOM 

used  as  predicates  of  a  sentence 

article  before  them  in  this  case 

Adjectives  qualifying  nouns 
Plur.  adjectives  with  Dual  Nouns 
Adj.  with  nouns  of  common  gender 
Comparative  degree  of  adjectives 
Superlative  .... 

Various  methods  of  making  a  superlative 


NUMERALS        

Cardinal  numbers  used  for  Ordinals 

PRONOUNS;  use  of  the  primitive  ones 

used  for  the  verb  of  existence 

Case  of  suffix-pronouns 
Exceptions              .... 
Position  of  noun-suffixes 
Position  of  pronouns  in  a  sentence 
Place  of  reflexive  pronouns  supplied  by  vari- 
ous nouns        ....                  . 
Anomalies  of  pronouns           . 
Relative  pronouns 

VERBS;  general  principle  of  concord 
Concord  with  nouns  of  multitude 


158 
159 
l> 
159 
199 
159 
160 
ltiO 
161 

161 
162 

163 
163 
163 
164 
164 
165 

165 
165 
166 

166 
167 


Verbs  with  leveral  oooneeted  Nominatives     Id 
( loneord  of  nouns  « ■  t  *•  i  in  ■. 


Anomalies   in  concord  of  rerba;    nniabei 

u  io  render 

ns  to  both  iiicniIht  tad  [imrlei 

Peculiar  Anomaly  .... 

Impersonal  Verba        .... 
Verbs  with  indefinite  Nominatives 

TENSES;  various  meaning  of  the  Praeter 
of  the  Future 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD 
I  Ige  of  J  lomposite  Verb* 
governed  by  Verbs 
Verbs  governing  two  Accusatives 
Passive  Verba       .       .       .       . 


INF.  ABSOLUTE,  and  its  various  uses 
Inf.  const,  and  its  various  uses     . 


PARTICLES;  adverbs 
Prepositions 

Conjunctions  and  Interjections 

PLEONASM 


ELLIPSIS    .... 

of  nouns 

of  pronouns 

of  the  verb  of  existence 

of  adverbs 

of  prepositions  . 

of  conjunctions  . 

in  poetic  parallelism 

Change  of  construction 
Const  ructio  praegnans 
Zeugma  » 

HendiadyB  - 

Paronomasia  « 

Paradigms  of  verbs,  nouns,  etc. 


167 
166 
169 
176 
170 

I VI 
172 

r,3 

175 
176 

176 

17ii 
177 

177 
179 


PARTICIPLES 182 

Verbs  used  as  adverbs  .         .         .         .   1-J 


1-:: 
184 
185 

185 


.  186 
.  186 
.  Ic7 
.  188 
.  LSI 
.  189 
.  190 

-  190 

-  191 

-  192 

-  192 

-  193 

-  193 
196  seq. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA   LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 

I  liis  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  <!;«(<•  slumped  below. 


< 


m 


FEB     7  1971]        * 

SEP  1 1  i3M 

J)\SC  ^  ^  RBCB  LD-UK 

!'"  OCT  2g  198^1 


-- 


■ 


SEP2^98r 

JL  2  3i 

lac. 

^EUNIVEW 

ere: 


Ml 


t®sl 


UIFO 


lV£>l 


•Vr 


PJ4563   .S932g    1828 
vr 


L   009   604   357  5 


r&jt 


mm 
MM 


fflm 


